Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
SECTION 00 01 01 – TITLE
Kroger, GA 463
Woodstock, GA
2295 Towne Lake Parkway
Woodstock, GA 30188
Prepared for:
by:
END OF SECTION 00 01 01
TITLE 00 01 01 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
00 65 36 WARRANTY FORMS
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 31 00 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
03 31 05 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SLABS
03 35 19 POLISHED DYED CONCRETE FINISHING
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MASONRY
04 21 13 CLAY BRICK UNIT MASONRY
04 22 00 STANDARD CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
04 72 00 CAST STONE UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 31 00 STEEL DECKING
05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
05 51 00 METAL STAIRS
05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 33 36 SIDE SLIDING GRILLES
08 38 00 TRAFFIC DOORS
08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08 42 29 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
08 56 59 PHARMACY SERVICE WINDOW UNITS
08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
08 80 00 GLAZING
08 90 00 LOUVERS AND VENTS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
09 31 00 THIN/THICK-SET TILING
09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09 67 23 RESINOUS FLOORING
09 68 00 CARPETING
09 72 16 VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERINGS
09 91 00 PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 26 00 WALL, DOOR, AND FIXTURE PROTECTION
10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11 41 23 PREFABRICATED INSULATED WALL PANELS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 48 13 ENTRANCE FLOORING SYSTEM
12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 05 33 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION
22 11 00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
22 13 00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 42 00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL
26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
SEE TELECOMMUNICATIONS UPGRADE (BY KROGER) AND DRAWINGS
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 10 00 SITE CLEARING
31 20 00 EARTH MOVING
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
NA
END OF SECTION 00 01 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
C. Contact Documents: The Contract Documents describe the proposed construction and consist
of the Procurement Requirements, Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, General
Conditions, Jobsite Safety Rules, Drawings, Specifications, and all Addenda to the Contract
Documents issued prior to execution of the Contract and any Change Orders that may be
entered into.
A. The anticipated date of commencement of the awarded contractor’s Work is <Insert Date>.
The anticipated date of completion of the contractor’s Work is <Insert Date>. The anticipated
duration of the contractor’s Work is <Insert Duration> calendar days. If a Notice to Proceed is
issued, at the Owner’s sole discretion, actual dates may vary dependent on date issued.
B. Liquidated Damages: The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner $<Insert amount> as
stipulated in the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for each day that the Completion
Date is exceeded in the completion of the Project. The sum is fixed and agreed as liquidated
damages and not as a penalty; it being understood that the damages which the Owner will suffer
in such an event are not subject to accurate calculation. The Owner shall be entitled to deduct
any liquidated damages due from the Contract Sum. Should the liquidated damages exceed that
portion of the Contract Sum owed to the Contractor, the Contractor shall promptly pay the
Owner the difference.
1. The Bidder has read and understands the Contract Documents, to the extent that such
documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions
of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction.
2. The Bid is made in compliance with the Contract Documents.
3. The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the
Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder’s personal observations with the
requirements of the proposed Contract Documents.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13 - 1
463463002113_InstructionsToBidders_07-08-10-08-04-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
4. The Bid is based on the items and brands of materials, equipment and systems required
by the Contract Documents including all Addenda without exception.
A. Copies
1. Invited Bidders are responsible for obtaining copies of all documents for bidding utilizing
the electronic files on Kroger’s Sitefolio website. All copies of drawings and
specifications shall not be used on any other work.
2. The Contractor is solely responsible to verify he has printed/ordered the most current
drawings and specifications.
1. During the progress of bidding, Bidders may be furnished Addenda covering additions,
deductions, or alterations to the Contract Documents. Such Addenda shall be included in
the Work covered by the proposal and shall become a part of the Contract Documents.
C. Electronic Forms
1. Certain forms required for Bidding shall be completed in electronic format. Those forms
and other forms required after award of contract may be found at the Owner’s Project
Website. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval"
for procedures to download the forms from the Owner’s Project Website.
A. All Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the e-mail invitation for the on-line negotiation
process hosted by the Agentrics/ezMarket (GNX) Global Net Xchange on their Internet web site
located at www.agentrics.com. All prices must be submitted through the Agentrics(GNX) on-
line negotiations process. Any additional questions or comments regarding the use of
Agentrics(GNX) may be addressed with those individuals identified in the invitation to bid
issued to each invited Bidder.
1. Upon completion of the Agentrics (GNX) on-line negotiations process, all Bidders shall
e-mail to the Owner at <Insert e-mail address>, attention <Insert Name>, by the end of
the next business day, the completed electronic copy of the Trade Proposal matching their
final project dollar amount on GNX. Bidder’s pricing must remain consistent with that
submitted during the on-line GNX negotiation process.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13 - 2
463463002113_InstructionsToBidders_07-08-10-08-04-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
B. All columns of the Trade Proposal must be completely filled in including the dollar amount
rounded to the nearest whole dollar, subcontractors names and percent total contract of
MBE/WBE participation. All blanks shall be filled in or the Bid may not be accepted, at
Owner’s sole discretion
C. The Base Bid must include all items and scope of work indicted in the Contract Documents.
The Owner may disqualify any Base Bid that contains exclusions, substitutions, alternates not
directed by the Owner, or other qualifications to the Bidding Documents. Voluntary
substitutions or value engineering suggestions may be submitted separately from the base bid
amount for the Owner's consideration. Bidders shall submit questions regarding the bidding
documents to the Architect during the specified bidding period, prior to the release of the last
addenda, and prior to submission of their bid.
D. The Bidder’s proposal shall include permit fees except for the general building permit as
described in Division 00 Section “General Conditions” and the cost of all state or local sales or
use taxes and charges or duties of any nature applicable to the Work incorporated under the
Contract.
1. The successful electrical bid shall be determined by the combination of the lowest
electrical bid and lowest cost for electrical wire supplied by the Owner.
2. Invited Bidders shall have all their proposed electrical subcontractors complete the
Electrical Wire Bid Takeoff Form and submit with their bids.
a. A hard copy sample of the Wire Bid Takeoff Form is included in Division 00
Section “Direct Buy Wire Bidding.” The Owner will email the electronic form to
each of the Invited Bidders.
3. Invited Bidders shall submit along with the Trade Proposal the names of their two lowest
proposed electrical subcontractors and proposed associated bid amounts (excluding wire)
to the Owner.
4. Invited Bidders shall have their two lowest proposed electrical subcontractors complete
the Electrical Wire Bid Takeoff Form and email (be sure to note Electrical Wire Bid
Takeoff and the store number in the email subject line) to the Direct Buy Wire Supplier:
Graybar Electric
CIOHKroger@gbe.com
5. The Direct Buy Wire Supplier will apply pricing to the submitted Electrical Wire Bid
Takeoff Forms and calculate the total wire price and email the completed forms back to
the Owner. The Owner will determine the apparent successful electrical subcontractor
based on the lowest dollar amount of both factors and advise the invited Bidder without
disclosing the cost associated with the electrical wire.
6. The successful Bidder will complete the Electrical Wire (Cuts) Order Form and submit to
the Direct Buy Wire Supplier as specified in Division 26 Sections "Low Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" and "Grounding And Bonding For Electrical
Systems."
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13 - 3
463463002113_InstructionsToBidders_07-08-10-08-04-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
F. Direct Buy Refrigeration Copper Pipes Bidding Procedure (If Bid is through a Contractor)
1. The successful refrigeration copper piping bid shall be determined by the combination of
the lowest refrigeration bid and lowest cost for refrigeration copper piping supplied by
the Owner.
2. Invited Bidders shall have their proposed refrigeration subcontractors complete the
Copper Pipe Takeoff Form and submit with their bids.
a. A hard copy sample of the Copper Pipe Takeoff Form is included in Division 00
Section “Direct Buy Refrigeration Copper Pipes Bidding.” The Owner will email
the electronic form to each of the Invited Bidders.
3. Invited Bidders shall submit along with the Trade Proposal the names of their two lowest
proposed refrigeration subcontractors and proposed associated bid amounts (excluding
copper pipes) to the Owner.
4. Invited Bidders shall have their two lowest proposed refrigeration subcontractors
complete the Copper Pipe Takeoff Form and email (be sure to note “Copper Pipe
Takeoff” and the store number in the email subject line) to the Direct Buy Copper Pipe
Supplier:
United Refrigeration
info@uri.com
Attention: Ken Ford
5. The Direct Buy Copper Pipe Supplier will apply pricing to the submitted Copper Pipe
Bid Takeoff Forms and calculate the total copper pipe price and email completed forms
back to the Owner. The Owner will determine the apparent successful refrigeration
subcontractor based on the lowest dollar amount of both factors and advise the invited
Bidder without disclosing the cost associated with the copper pipe.
G. Direct Buy Refrigeration Copper Pipes Bidding Procedure (If bid is direct with installation
contractor)
1. The sucessful refrigeration copper piping bid shall be determined by the combination of
the lowest refrigeration bid and lowest cost for refrigeration copper piping supplied by
the Owner.
2. Invited Bidders shall complete the Copper Pipe Takeoff Form and submit with their bids.
a. A hard copy sample of the Copper Pipe Takeoff Form is included in Division 00
Section “Direct Buy Refrigeration Copper Pipes Bidding.” The Owner will email
the electronic form to each of the Invited Bidders.
3. Invited Bidders shall complete the Copper Pipe Takeoff Form and email (be sure to note
“Copper Pipe Takeoff” and the store number in the email subject line) to the Owner.
4. The Direct Buy Copper Pipe Supplier will apply pricing to the submitted Copper Pipe
Bid Takeoff Forms and calculate the total copper pipe price and email completed forms
back to the Owner. The Owner will determine the apparent successful refrigeration
contractor based on the lowest dollar amount of both factors and advise the invited
Bidder without disclosing the cost associated with the copper pipe.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13 - 4
463463002113_InstructionsToBidders_07-08-10-08-04-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. The Owner reserves the unrestricted privilege to reject any, part of any, or all of the bids
received and to waive any informality in the bidding. Contracts will be awarded on the
basis of the best value as determined solely by the Owner.
1. It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder. Early
completion of the Work is of utmost importance, and the Owner will base its decision not
only on the lowest Bid dollar value but also on the duration of the project and may award
the Contract to the Bidder whose Bid, in dollar amount and number of construction days,
is to the Owner’s overall advantage at the Owner’s sole discretion. The Bidder shall
thoroughly investigate all possible methods of scheduling (working the necessary
weekends and/or evenings) and employing work forces to achieve the earliest completion
date.
A. To cover the faithful performance of their Work and the payment of all legitimate claims arising
thereunder, the Bidder may select the following options to guarantee payment to subcontractors
and material suppliers:
1. Contractor Financing – Within ten (10) calendar days after notice to award the successful
Bidder shall submit to the Owner financial information to verify successful Bidder is
solvent and can meet the obligations of conducting business during project construction.
Owner reserves the right to require the successful Bidder to obtain a Letter of Credit or
Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond by accepting the alternate any
time prior to the start of physical start of construction. Successful Bidder is responsible
for submitting unconditional waiver and release forms along with request for payment to
the Owner. Refer to General Conditions, Article 9 “Payments and Completion” for table
outlining conditional and unconditional waiver and release schedule requirements for this
option.
2. Letter of Credit –If Bidder selects this option when submitting the Trade Proposal, the
successful Bidder has within ten (10) calendar days after notification of award to submit a
Letter of Credit equal to the highest scheduled request for payment of the Project. At the
Owners sole discretion, the value of the Letter of Credit may be amended based on the
progress of the Work. The Letter of Credit shall be submitted to the Owner on the form
entitled “Letter of Credit” which will be supplied by the Owner, a sample of which is
herein included. Successful Bidder may submit a request for payment to the Owner prior
to securing unconditional waiver and release forms. Refer to General Conditions, Article
9 “Payments and Completion” for table outlining conditional and unconditional waiver
and release schedule requirements for this option.
3. Performance Bond and Labor & Material Payment Bond - If Bidder selects this option
when submitting the Trade Proposal, the successful Bidder has within ten (10) calendar
days after notification of award to submit a Performance Bond and a Labor & Material
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13 - 5
463463002113_InstructionsToBidders_07-08-10-08-04-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
Payment Bond each equal to 100 percent of the contract sum. Successful Bidder may
submit a request for payment to the Owner prior to securing unconditional waiver and
release forms. Refer to General Conditions, Article 9 “Payments and Completion” for
table outlining conditional and unconditional waiver and release schedule requirements
for this option.
B. The surety company providing the Performance Bond and Labor & Material Payment Bond
must be rated A VII or better by AM Best and must be listed in the current U.S. Treasury
Department’s Listing of Approved Sureties (Department Circular 570) with an underwriting
limitation at least equal to the amount of the bond. The Listing of Approved Sureties
(Department Circular 570) can be found at www.fms.treas.gov/c570.
C. All Bidders shall provide in the Trade Proposal, the cost associated with providing either a
Contractor Financing, Letter of Credit or a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment
Bond.
A. The Owner encourages the full participation of qualified Minority-Owned Business Enterprises
(MBEs) and Women-Owned Business Enterprises (WBEs) in all aspects of its business. MBEs
and WBEs must meet the same standards as other contractors, sub-contractors, and suppliers of
materials and services. The Owner encourages all business partners to identify, screen and
include qualified MBEs and WBEs in all projects.
END OF SECTION 00 21 13
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13 - 6
463463002113_InstructionsToBidders_07-08-10-08-04-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1.2 INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Bidders shall download the Working Forms by accessing the Owner’s Project Management
Website, site|folio. Download the file and follow the instructions to complete.
END OF SECTION 00 22 19
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General: The attached schedule is not intended to be a complete detailed construction schedule.
It is an overview of how the Owner anticipates the construction should proceed. The Contractor
is required to submit a detailed Construction Schedule as specified in Division 00 Section
“General Conditions” and the Owner will consider alternative schedule that the Contractor may
recommend. Also, the Preliminary Construction Schedule is not intended to outline all
construction activities. It addresses only the major activities associated with timely completion
and/or schedule sensitive materials. The Contractor shall take all activities into account on his
schedule including delivery dates of Kroger supplied equipment, fixtures, and finishes.
END OF SECTION 00 31 13
PROJECT SEQUENCING 00 31 13 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Contractor shall obtain Asbestos Reports and any additional information regarding asbestos
from Kroger.
B. State and/or local AHJ Rules and Regulations shall be followed by General Contractor
regarding asbestos.
A. The following pages contain the geotechnical data titled <Insert title of geotechnical report>
dated <Insert date>, prepared by <Insert name of geotechnical firm> for <Insert name of
Owner>. The Owner and Architect do not guarantee that materials other than those disclosed
by the test borings will not be encountered or that proportions of the various materials will not
vary from those indicated.
B. It is required that Bidders read and familiarize themselves with the <Insert title of geotechnical
report>, <Insert geotechnical report project number> and visit the site.
END OF DOCUMENT 00 31 32
GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00 31 32 - 1
463003132_GeotechnicalData_02-04-08.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Trade Proposal is located on the Owner’s Project Management Website in Microsoft®
Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_42_13_Trade_Proposal.xls
1. ALTERNATES
Alternate No. 1 Contractor shall provide alternate price to remove all existing VCT and
mastic to the complete satisfaction of Kroger
ADD $_______________
2. UNIT PRICES
b. Contractor shall provide unit pricing for additional removal of quarry tile or epoxy
floor and concrete floor and reinstall same to match existing or as indicated on the
drawings.. This is above and beyond what is indicated on the documents. This
price is applicable to additional work or work omitted from the base bid.
$________ / sq. ft. quarry tile $________ / sq. ft. epoxy flooring
TRADE PROPOSAL 00 42 13 - 1
463463004213_TradeProposal_12-23-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
c. Contractor shall provide unit pricing for additional removal of colored concrete
floor and reinstall same to match existing. This is above and beyond what is indi-
cated on the documents. This price is applicable to additional work or work omit-
ted from the base bid.
d. Provide unit cost for relocated hub drain within less than 2’ of existing hub drain.
$ each
3. HOURLY RATES
Provide unit pricing hourly rates for extra work of the following trades:
TRADE PROPOSAL 00 42 13 - 2
463463004213_TradeProposal_12-23-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
a. Provide unit price per linear foot to omit trenching detail ASD-69.
Deduct /LF
b. Provide unit price per linear foot to add trenching detail ASD-69.
Add /LF
c. Provide unit price to omit Refrigeration Pit per details ASD 159.
Deduct /pit
Add /pit
END OF SECTION 00 42 13
TRADE PROPOSAL 00 42 13 - 3
463463004213_TradeProposal_12-23-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Direct Buy Wire Bidding forms are located on the Owner’s Project Management Website
in Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Forms and follow the instructions to complete:
Electrical_Wire_Bid_Takeof_Form.xls
Electrical_Wire_Cuts_Forms.xls
END OF SECTION 00 43 26
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Copper Pipe and Fittings Takeoff Form is located on the Owner’s Project Management
Website in Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
END OF SECTION 00 43 27
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Agreement between Owner and Contractor is located on the Owner’s Project Management
Website in Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_52_13_Agreement_Between_Owner_And_Contractor.xls
END OF SECTION 00 52 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Notice to Proceed is located on the Owner’s Project Management Website in Microsoft®
Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_55_00_Notice_To_Proceed.xls
END OF SECTION 00 55 00
NOTICE TO PROCEED 00 55 00 - 1
463463005500_NoticeToProceed_12-23-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
[Bank’s Letterhead]
[Date]
BENEFICIARY
Attn:
Gentlemen:
For account of <Contractor’s Legal Name> we hereby establish our Clean, Unconditional, Standby Ir-
revocable Credit (“Letter of Credit”) in your favor for drawings up to the aggregate amount of <Insert
dollar amount> effective immediately and expiring at <Insert Bank Address> with our close of busi-
ness on <Insert Date>.
The term “Beneficiary” includes any successor by operation of law of the named Beneficiary including,
without limitation, any liquidator, rehabilitator, receiver or conservator.
We hereby undertake to promptly honor each of your sight draft(s) drawn on us in substantially the form
of Exhibit “A” attached hereto, indicating our Credit No. <Insert Number>, for all or any part of this
credit if presented at <Insert Bank Address> on or before the expiry date or any automatically extended
expiry date. If you so choose, you will be able to draw on this Letter of Credit more than once, without
amendment, provided that the sum of the amounts that you have drawn does not exceed the full amount of
this Letter of Credit.
Except as stated herein, this undertaking is not subject to any condition or qualification. Our obligation
under this Letter of Credit shall be our individual obligation, in no way contingent upon reimbursement
with respect thereto.
This Letter of Credit shall be automatically extended without amendment for one year from the expiry
date thereof, or any future expiration date, unless at least forty-five days prior to any expiration date we
shall notify you by registered mail or courier service that we elect not to consider this Letter of Credit re-
newed for any such additional period.
The following documents must be presented at our office in person or by mail on or before the expiry date
in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Letter of Credit:
LETTER OF CREDIT 00 61 15 - 1
463463006115_LetterOfCredit_04-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
We will accept such statement as binding and correct without having to investigate or having to be re-
sponsible for the accuracy, truthfulness, conclusory correctness or validity thereof or any part thereof and
notwithstanding the claim of any person to the contrary.
Should you have occasion to communicate with us regarding this Credit, kindly direct your communica-
tion to the attention of our Letter of Credit Department, making specific reference to our Irrevocable
Credit. No. <Insert Number>.
This Letter of Credit is subject to and governed by the laws of the state or commonwealth in which the
Project is located, <Insert site location, address and state where Project is located>, and the <Insert
current revision> Revision of the Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credits of the Inter-
national Chamber of Commerce and Practice for Documentary Credits of the International Chamber of
Commerce (Publication <Insert publication number>) and, in the event of any conflict, the laws of the
state or commonwealth in which the Project is located will control. If this Credit expires during an inter-
ruption of business as described in Article <Insert Article number> of said Publication <Insert publica-
tion number>, we hereby specifically agree to effect payment if this Credit is drawn against within 30
days after the resumption of business.
(Issuing Bank)
LETTER OF CREDIT 00 61 15 - 2
463463006115_LetterOfCredit_04-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
EXHIBIT “A”
SIGHT DRAFT
________________, _____________(DATE)
Letter of Credit #
(ISSUING BANK)
AT SIGHT
PAY TO THE ORDER OF THE KROGER CO. (ITS SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATES) THE SUM
BY: ______________________________________
NAME: ______________________________________
TITLE: ______________________________________
LETTER OF CREDIT 00 61 15 - 3
463463006115_LetterOfCredit_04-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
EXHIBIT “B”
________________________, ________________(DATE)
(ISSUING BANK)
Attention:
Gentleman:
You are further directed to wire to The Kroger Co. the full sum of
Dollars (US$ ) on this date as follows:
ABA No.
Attention:
The sight draft payable to The Kroger Co. is attached hereto as the following page.
Original Standby Irrevocable Letter of Credit No. [with amendments, if any] is enclosed.
Sincerely,
BY:
Name:
Its:
END OF SECTION 00 61 15
LETTER OF CREDIT 00 61 15 - 4
463463006115_LetterOfCredit_04-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Request for Payment form is located on the Owner’s Project Management Website in
Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_62_75_Request_For_Payment.xls
END OF SECTION 00 62 75
LOCATION
WEEK OF NO.
Total Count
Report to be filled in daily and uploaded to the Owner’s Project Website (site|folio). Keep accurate re-
cords and indicate on reverse side work accomplished each day.
Superintendent
END OF SECTION 00 62 88
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Subcontractor’s Change Order Proposal form is located on the Owner’s Project
Management Website in Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_63_58_Subcontractors_Change_Order_Proposal.xls
END OF SECTION 00 63 58
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The General Contractor’s Progress Affidavit is located on the Owner’s Project Management
Website in Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_65_19_General_Contractors_Progress_Affidavit.xls
END OF SECTION 00 65 19
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Subontractor’s Progress Affidavit is located on the Owner’s Project Management Website
in Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_65_20_Subontractors_Progress_Affidavit.xls
END OF SECTION 00 65 20
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Conditional Waiver and Release Upon Progress Payment is located on the Owner’s Project
Management Website in Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_65_21_Conditional_Waiver_And_Release_Upon_Progress_Payment.xls
END OF SECTION 00 65 21
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Unconditional Waiver and Release upon Progress Payment is located on the Owner’s
Project Management Website in Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_65_22_Unconditional_Waiver_And_Release_Upon_Progress_Payment.
xls
END OF SECTION 00 65 22
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The General Contractor’s Final Affidavit is located on the Owner’s Project Management
Website in Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_65_25_General_Contractors_Final_Affidavit.xls
END OF SECTION 00 65 25
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Subcontractor’s Final Affidavit is located on the Owner’s Project Management Website in
Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_65_26_Subcontractors_Finals_Affidavit.xls
END OF SECTION 00 65 26
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Conditional Waiver and Release upon Final Payment is located on the Owner’s Project
Management Website in Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_65_27_Conditional_Waiver_And_Release_Upon_Final_Payment.xls
END OF SECTION 00 65 27
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Unconditional Waiver and Release upon Final Payment is located on the Owner’s Project
Management Website in Microsoft® Excel® format.
1. See Division 00 Section "Bidders Instructions for Electronic Form Retrieval" for
downloading instructions.
2. Download the following Working Form and follow the instructions to complete:
00_65_28_Unconditional_Waiver_And_Release_Upon_Final_Payment.xls
END OF SECTION 00 65 28
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. Building Warranty
b. Kroger Asphalt Paving Warranty
c. Roofing Warranties
WARRANTY FORMS 00 65 36 - 1
463463006536_WarrantyForms_07-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
KROGER BUILDING WARRANTY
Date: ________________________ 20 _____
TO: THE KROGER CO., ITS SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATES
The undersigned, ___________________________________________________________________________
having heretofore entered into a contract with The Kroger Co., its subsidiaries and affiliates, dated
________________20 _____ for the construction of a _____________________________________________
located at ________________________________________________________________________________
according to certain plans and specifications prepared by ____________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
and in accordance with the terms of said contract do hereby guarantee that all the labor and material furnished
and work performed by us under said contract is in conformity with such plans and specifications and authorized
alterations thereto and that such building and equipment installed pursuant to said contract is free from imperfect
workmanship and materials, and we agree to repair at our own cost and expense all of the work covered under
said contract and change orders which may prove to be defective for a period of one year from the date hereof.
Furthermore, we agree to repair at our sole cost any work, which we may affect or disturb in making the repairs
herein contemplated.
________________________________________
By: ________________________________________
Title: ________________________________________
Warranty period begins at Contract completion date.
Page 1 of 1
WARRANTY FORMS 00 65 36 - 2
463463006536_WarrantyForms_07-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
KROGER ASPHALT PAVING WARRANTY
Date: ________________________ 20 _____
TO: THE KROGER CO., ITS SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATES
The undersigned, ___________________________________________________________________________
having heretofore entered into a contract with The Kroger Co., its subsidiaries and affiliates dated
______________________ 20 _____ for the construction on __________________________________________
and exterior improvements including a parking area, located at _______________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
according to certain plans and specifications prepared by ____________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
and in accordance with the terms of said contract do hereby guarantee that all the labor and material furnished
and work performed by the construction of the asphalt paving, base and sub‐grade under said contract is in
conformity with such plans and specifications and authorized alterations thereto and that such asphalt paving,
base and sub‐grade constructed pursuant to said contract is free from imperfect workmanship and materials, and
we agree to repair at our own cost and expense all of the work covered under said contract and change orders
which may prove to be defective for a period of eighteen months from the date hereof. Furthermore, we agree to
repair at our sole cost any work which we may affect or disturb in making the repairs herein contemplated.
Furthermore, we assume responsibility for the failure of the paving and base course due to failure of the sub‐
grade.
________________________________________
By: ________________________________________
Title: ________________________________________
Warranty period begins at Contract completion date.
Page 1 of 1
WARRANTY FORMS 00 65 36 - 3
463463006536_WarrantyForms_07-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
KROGER ROOF SYSTEM LIMITED WARRANTY
Firestone Roofing Systems Group
Warranty No: {ins#0} ______________FBPCO #{ins#1} ________Square Footage: {ins#2} s. f.________
Building Owner: {ins#3}_________________________________________________________________
Building Identification: {ins#4}____________________________________________________________
Building Address: {ins#5}________________________________________________________________
Warranty Period Of: {ins#8} _________Years Beginning on: {ins#6}______________________________
Roofing Contractor: {ins#7} ______________________________________________________________
For the Guarantee period indicated above, Firestone Roofing Systems Group ("Firestone"), guarantees to the Build‐
ing Owner ("Owner") above that Firestone will, subject to the Terms, Conditions, Limitations, and Definitions set
forth below, repair any leak in Firestone Roofing System ("System").
TERMS, CONDITIONS, LIMITATIONS, AND DEFINITIONS
1. The System is limited to mean the Firestone Brand membranes, Firestone Brand Insulations, and other Fire‐
stone Brand accessories when installed in accordance with Firestone technical specifications. Firestone certi‐
fies that a representative of Firestone’s Guarantee Services Group has inspected the System, and as of the
completion date indicated above, the System has been found to be acceptable for issuance of this Kroger
Roofing System Limited Guarantee ("Limited Guarantee"). The following items are excluded from this inspec‐
tion and hence are specifically excluded from the Guarantee.
1. Roofing Sheet Metal, including copings, counter flashings, gravel stops, scuppers, overflows, leaders, gut‐
ters, downspouts, and associated caulks and sealants not supplied by Firestone.
2. The underlying roof substrate, roof deck, existing roof materials, non‐ Firestone insulation products and
fasteners.
3. Non‐ Firestone roof accessories, including skylights, hatches, curbs, mechanical equipment, and equip‐
ment mounts, ventilators, hoods, expansion joints, cables and the like.
4. Building walls and parapets.
2. In the event any leak should occur in the System: (a) The Owner must give Written notice to Firestone within
(30) days of any occurrence of a leak. By so notifying Firestone, the Owner authorizes Firestone or its designee
to investigate the cause of the leak. (b) If upon investigation, Firestone determines that the leak is not ex‐
cluded under the Term, Conditions, Limitations, and Definitions set forth below, the Owner's sole and exclu‐
sive remedy and Firestone‘s liability shall be limited to the repair of the leak. (c) Should the investigation re‐
veal that the leak is excluded under the Terms, Conditions, Limitations, and Definitions set forth below, inves‐
tigation costs shall be paid by the Owner. Failure by the Owner to pay for these costs shall render this Limited
Guarantee null and void. If the cause of the cause of the leak is determined by Firestone to be outside the
scope of this Limited Guarantee, Firestone shall advise the Owner of the type and/or extent of repairs re‐
quired to be made at the Owner's expense which, if the Owner properly makes, will permit this Limited Guar‐
antee to remain in effect for the unexpired portion of its term.
Page 1 of 2
WARRANTY FORMS 00 65 36 - 4
463463006536_WarrantyForms_07-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
Failure by the owner to make these repairs in a reasonable manner and within a reasonable time shall render
this Limited Guarantee null and void; (d) Any dispute, controversy, or claim between the Owner and Firestone
concerning this Limited Guarantee shall be settled by final and binding arbitration in accordance with the
American Arbitration Association's rules for the construction industry. Included in this Limited Guarantee is
the guarantee that warrants and guarantees Owner with a water tight condition of roof system and all com‐
ponents thereof for a period of (15) years from the date of owner’s final acceptance. Warranty and Guarantee
shall cover all workmanship and materials required to maintain water tight condition and a roof system free of
defects.
3. Firestone shall have no obligation under this Limited Guarantee, or any other liability, now or in the future if a
leak or damage is caused by: (a) Natural forces, disasters, or acts of God including, but not limited to winds in
excess of 70 mph, hurricanes, tornadoes, hail, lightning, earthquakes, atomic radiation, insects, or animals; (b)
Any act(s), conduct or omission(s) by any person, or act(s) of war, which damages the System or which impairs
the membrane's ability to resist leaks; (c) Failure by the owner to use reasonable care in maintaining the Sys‐
tem; (d) Deterioration or failure of building components, including, but not limited to, the roof substrate,
walls, mortar, HVAC units, etc.; (e) Condensation or infiltration of moisture in, through, or around the walls,
copings, rooftop hardware or equipment, building structure or underlying or surrounding materials; (f) Animal
or vegetable fats and grease or any asphalt or petroleumbased product including lubricating oils; plastic roof
cement, and the like; (g) Alterations or repairs to the System not approved in writing by Firestone; (h) The ar‐
chitecture, engineering, construction, or design of the roof, roofing system, or building. Firestone does not
undertake any analysis of the architecture or engineering require to evaluate what type of roof system is ap‐
propriate; (i) A change in building use or purpose; (j) Failure to give proper notice as set forth in paragraph 1(a)
above.
4. This Limited Warranty shall be transferable subject to Firestone inspection, written approval, and payment of
the current transfer fee.
5. During the term of this Limited Guarantee, Firestone, its designated representative or employees, shall have
free access to the roof during regular business hours. In the event that the roof access is limited due to secu‐
rity or other restrictions, Owner shall reimburse Firestone for all the reasonable costs incurred during inspec‐
tion and/or repair of the System which are due to delays associated with said restrictions. Owner shall be re‐
sponsible for removal and replacement of any overburdens, superstrata or overlays, either permanent or
temporary, excluding accepted stone ballast or pavers, as necessary to expose the System for inspection
and/or repair.
6. Firestone’s failure to enforce any of the terms or conditions stated herein shall not be construed as a waiver of
such provision or any other terms and conditions of this Limited Guarantee.
FIRESTONE BUILDING PRODUCTS COMPANY, LLC
By: John R. Geary
Authorized Signature: _____________________________________________
Title: VP of Quality, Technology & Product Development
Page 2 of 2
Signature
WARRANTY FORMS 00 65 36 - 5
463463006536_WarrantyForms_07-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
KROGER ROOF SYSTEM LIMITED WARRANTY
Johns Manville Roofing Systems Group
Guarantee No: ____________________________ Square Footage: _________________________
Building Owner: ___________________________ Building Identification ____________________
Building Address: __________________________ Guarantee Period: _______________________
Roofing System: ___________________________ Issue Date: _____________________________
For the Guarantee period indicated above, Johns Manville Roofing Systems Group ("JM"), guarantees to the Build‐
ing Owner ("Owner") above that JM will, subject to the Terms, Conditions, Limitations, and Definitions set forth
below, repair any leak in JM Roofing System ("System").
TERMS, CONDITIONS, LIMITATIONS, AND DEFINITIONS
1. The System is limited to mean the JM Brand membranes, JM Brand Insulations, and other JM Brand accesso‐
ries when installed in accordance with JM technical specifications. JM certifies that a representative of JM's
Guarantee Services Group has inspected the System, and as of the completion date indicated above, the Sys‐
tem has been found to be acceptable for issuance of this Kroger Roofing System Limited Guarantee ("Limited
Guarantee"). The following items are excluded from this inspection and hence are specifically excluded from
the Guarantee.
1. Roofing Sheet Metal, including copings, counter flashings, gravel stops, scuppers, overflows, leaders, gut‐
ters, downspouts, and associated caulks and sealants not supplied by JM.
2. The underlying roof substrate, roof deck, existing roof materials, non‐JM insulation products and fasten‐
ers.
3. Non‐JM roof accessories, including skylights, hatches, curbs, mechanical equipment, and equipment
mounts, ventilators, hoods, expansion joints, cables and the like.
4. Building walls and parapets.
2. In the event any leak should occur in the System: (a) The Owner must give Written notice to JM within (30)
days of any occurrence of a leak. By so notifying JM, the Owner authorizes JM or its designee to investigate
the cause of the leak. (b) If upon investigation, JM determines that the leak is not excluded under the Term,
Conditions, Limitations, and Definitions set forth below, the Owner's sole and exclusive remedy and JM's liabil‐
ity shall be limited to the repair of the leak. (c) Should the investigation reveal that the leak is excluded under
the Terms, Conditions, Limitations, and Definitions set forth below, investigation costs shall be paid by the
Owner. Failure by the Owner to pay for these costs shall render this Limited Guarantee null and void. If the
cause of the cause of the leak is determined by JM to be outside the scope of this Limited Guarantee, JM shall
advise the Owner of the type and/or extent of repairs required to be made at the Owner's expense which, if
the Owner properly makes, will permit this Limited Guarantee to remain in effect for the unexpired portion of
its term. Failure by the owner to make these repairs in a reasonable manner and within a reasonable time
shall render this Limited Guarantee null and void; (d) Any dispute, controversy, or claim between the Owner
and JM concerning this Limited Guarantee shall be settled by final and binding arbitration in accordance with
the American Arbitration Association's rules for the construction industry.
Page 1 of 2
WARRANTY FORMS 00 65 36 - 6
463463006536_WarrantyForms_07-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
Included in this Limited Guarantee is the guarantee that warrants and guarantees Owner with a water and
vapor tight condition of roof system and all components thereof for a period of (15) years from the date of
owner’s final acceptance. Warranty and Guarantee shall cover all workmanship and materials required to
maintain water and vapor tight condition and a roof system free of defects.
3. JM shall have no obligation under this Limited Guarantee, or any other liability, now or in the future if a leak or
damage is caused by: (a) Natural forces, disasters, or acts of God including, but not limited to winds in excess
of 70 mph, hurricanes, tornadoes, hail, lightning, earthquakes, atomic radiation, insects, or animals; (b) Any
act(s), conduct or omission(s) by any person, or act(s) of war, which damages the System or which impairs the
membrane's ability to resist leaks; (c) Failure by the owner to use reasonable care in maintaining the System;
(d) Deterioration or failure of building components, including, but not limited to, the roof substrate, walls,
mortar, HVAC units, etc.; (e) Condensation or infiltration of moisture in, through, or around the walls, copings,
rooftop hardware or equipment, building structure or underlying or surrounding materials; (f) Animal or vege‐
table fats and grease or any asphalt or petroleum‐based product including lubricating oils; plastic roof cement,
and the like; (g) Alterations or repairs to the System not approved in writing by JM; (h) The architecture, engi‐
neering, construction, or design of the roof, roofing system, or building. JM does not undertake any analysis of
the architecture or engineering require to evaluate what type of roof system is appropriate; (i) A change in
building use or purpose; (j) Failure to give proper notice as set forth in paragraph 1(a) above.
4. This Limited Guarantee shall be transferable provided all obligations by the Owner have been met and a Guar‐
antee transfer fee of $ 500 is paid. In return for payment of this guarantee transfer fee, JM will inspect the
roof and provide a written report to the Owner regarding the condition of the System at the time of the in‐
spection. This transfer fee and inspection may be waived if the System has been under guarantee for a period
of one (1) year or less and if no leaks have been reported or observed.
5. During the term of this Limited Guarantee, JM, its designated representative or employees, shall have free
access to the roof during regular business hours. In the event that the roof access is limited due to security or
other restrictions, Owner shall reimburse JM for all the reasonable costs incurred during inspection and/or re‐
pair of the System which are due to delays associated with said restrictions. Owner shall be responsible for
removal and replacement of any overburdens, superstrata or overlays, either permanent or temporary, ex‐
cluding accepted stone ballast or pavers, as necessary to expose the System for inspection and/or repair.
6. JM's failure to enforce any of the terms or conditions stated herein shall not be construed as a waiver of such
provision or any other terms and conditions of this Limited Guarantee.
JOHNS MANVILLE ROOFING SYSTEMS GROUP
By: _____________________________________________
Authorized Signature: _____________________________________________
Title: _____________________________________________
Page 2 0f 2
END OF SECTION 00 65 36
WARRANTY FORMS 00 65 36 - 7
463463006536_WarrantyForms_07-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1.1.1 Certain terms and words used throughout these Contract Documents shall be defined as
follows:
1.1.1.2 Agreement: A legal instrument executed by the Owner and the Contractor
binding the parties to the terms of the Contract. The Agreement defines the
relationships and obligations between the Owner and Contractor. It
incorporates all other Contract Documents by reference.
1.1.1.4 Contract: The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The
Contract for Construction or Contract represents the entire and integrated
agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,
representations or agreements, either written or oral.
1.1.1.5 Work: The construction and services required by the Contract Documents,
whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor,
materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor
to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a
part of the Project.
1.1.1.6 Project: The total construction of which the Work performed under the
Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include
construction by the Owner or by separate contractors.
1.1.1.7 Drawings: The graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents
showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including
plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams.
1.1.1.9 Project Manual: The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work
which may include the Procurement Requirements, sample forms, Conditions
of the Contract and Specifications.
1.1.1.10 Owner: The person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred
to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term
"Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's Project Manager.
1.1.1.11 Contractor: The person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is
referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The
term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized
representative.
1.1.1.12 Major Material Supplier: Material supplier who is to furnish materials for the
Project, the total cost of which is $5,000.00 or more.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1 Reference to the printed codes, guides, or standard specifications of any Institute, Society
or other organization or to any manufacturer’s installation directions, shall be the latest
edition thereof, unless laws, ordinances, rules or regulations require compliance with a
specific edition, in which case the reference shall be to such edition.
1.3.1 Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for by one shall be as
binding as if called for by both. Should the drawings, specifications and/or other
instructions be contradictory in any particular, or should there be apparent errors in
either, or should there be any doubt as to the meaning of either, the Contractor shall
provide for the most expensive method to do the work.
1.3.2 Figures shall have precedence over scaled measurements and details over general
drawings. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner will furnish
to the Contractor, free of charge, three sets of drawings and specifications. All copies of
drawings and specifications furnished by the Owner are the property of the Owner and
shall not be used on any other work. Upon request they shall be returned to the Owner on
completion of the Project.
1.3.3 For convenience of reference, the specifications are separated in sections each bearing a
title. Other sections and titles may appear throughout the Contract Documents. Such
facts shall not be deemed to be nor shall they be the basis for any request that the Owner
make a designation as to the limits of any phase of the Project, or as to what trade shall
perform any part thereof. The Contractor shall keep one copy of all drawings and
specifications at the site, in good order, available to the Owner.
1.4.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to provide a complete functioning structure or
installation as indicated.
1.4.2 The transportation, unloading, storing, erection or installation, testing as indicated, and
making operable of all parts of the Project shall be included under this Contract, at times
appropriate thereto.
1.5.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form,
prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are instruments of service
through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor
may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any subcontractor, sub-
subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the
Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the
Architect's consultants. All copies of instruments of service, except the Contractor's
record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Owner, on request, upon
completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by
the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the
Contractor, are for use solely by the Owner. They are not to be used by the Contractor or
any subcontractor, sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects
or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written
consent of the Owner. The Owner authorizes the Contractor, subcontractors, sub-
subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers to use and reproduce applicable
portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect
and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work
under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the
statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other
documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or
distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection
with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of copyrights or other
reserved rights.
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
2.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to store materials or install fixtures or equipment in any or
all Project buildings before acceptance of the Project and without implying thereby any
acceptance of the Project.
2.2 WAIVERS
2.2.1 The Owner shall be entitled to waive, in writing, any obligation of the Contractor
provided herein; however, any such waiver shall not constitute a future waiver of same or
any other obligation.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
3.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
3.1.1 No substitutions or variations from the Specifications and Drawings, other than those
which are approved in writing by the Owner from the official substitution sheet and
incorporated into the Agreement, will be permitted after the Agreement is signed. The
Contractor shall have the right, after entering into the Agreement, to request the Owner’s
approval of a substitute material generally considered to be equal to that named in the
Contract Documents. Requests for approval of any substitute must be submitted in
writing to the Owner, together with all necessary supporting data, within 15 days after the
signing of the Agreement. The Owner shall be the sole judge of the suitability,
acceptability and equality of the substitute material and may accept or reject the same.
No material, not accepted by the Owner in writing, may be substituted for a specified
material. If the substitution of any material or equipment increases costs in any way,
these costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.1.2 If the individual specification sections state that no substitutions are allowed, the
Contractor shall not propose any substitutions for that product on the Official Substitution
Sheet.
3.2.2.1 The Contractor shall schedule a preconstruction meeting before earth disturbing
activities commence. The meeting shall be held at the Project site. The
Contractor shall conduct and document the meeting per the Contract
Documents and the Owner’s Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan.
3.2.3.1 The Contractor shall conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals and shall
coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
3.2.3.2 Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or
involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be
represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar
with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3.2.4.1 The Contractor shall conduct a preinstallation meeting at Project site before
each construction activity specified to have a preinstallation meeting.
3.2.4.2 Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators
involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration
with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall
attend the meeting. The Contractor shall advise the Owner of scheduled
meeting dates.
3.2.4.3 The Contractor shall conduct a preinstallation meeting for the following
construction activities:
3.2.5.1 The Contractor shall conduct a post construction meeting at Project site two
weeks after fixturing begins to discuss any activities remaining and to evaluate
success of the Project.
3.2.5.2 The Contractor shall submit red-lined as-built drawings to Owner.
3.2.5.3 Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, the Architect, and their
consultants; the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All
participants at the meeting shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
3.2.6.1 The Contractor shall conduct a warranty meeting at the Project site one year
after completion of the Work including a walk-through to identify and discuss
any issues and problems that arose during the one-year warranty period.
3.2.6.2 The Contractor shall provide a detailed report of the meeting identifying items
to be corrected.
3.2.6.3 Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, the Contractor, and other
concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference
shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to
the Work.
3.2.7.1.1 Only the Contractor may submit an RFI. Architect or Owner will
return RFIs submitted by other entities.
3.2.7.1.2 The need for an RFI does not necessarily constitute grounds for a
Change Order.
3.2.7.2 Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow
72 hours for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect
after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
3.2.7.2.1 The following types of RFIs are considered unnecessary and will be
returned without action:
3.2.7.2.2 Architect and Owner may claim compensation for the cost of their
time and materials as a result of unnecessary RFIs. Compensation
will be assessed from the Contractor in accordance with the
General Conditions.
3.2.7.3 Upon receipt of Architect’s and/or Owner's action, immediately distribute the
RFI response to affected parties.
3.3.1 Construction Progress Schedule: Two days after award of the Contract, the Contractor
shall furnish the Owner with a "Construction Progress Schedule" that indicates the
proposed progress with the total number of days agreeing with the "Time for
Completion" days listed in the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor.
3.3.1.1 The Construction Progress Schedule shall include delivery and installation
dates for all Owner Direct Buy items.
3.3.1.2 All dates in the Construction Progress Schedule must be accepted in writing by
both the Owner and the Contractor.
3.3.1.3 The Contractor shall begin Work within one week after award of the Contract
and progress substantially with the "Construction Progress Schedule" and
complete all Work within the time shown thereon, unless delayed by
jurisdictional or general strikes beyond the control of the Contractor, Act of
God, or national emergency.
3.3.2 Submittals Schedule: The Contractor shall provide a submittals schedule with the
Construction Progress Schedule arranged in chronological order by dates including time
required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery.
3.4.1 Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment items shall be new. When
required by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide certificates of conformance for
materials specified.
3.4.2 The Contractor’s employees, subcontractors and other persons carrying out the work shall
be properly attired and shall not wear any attire that is deemed inappropriate or offensive
to the public or Owner.
3.4.3 Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling: The Contractor shall deliver, store, and handle
products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss,
including but not limited to theft, and shall comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. The Contractor shall provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site
for storage of materials and equipment by the Owner's construction forces and shall
coordinate location with the Owner.
3.4.4 Product Warranties: Warranties specified in the Contract Documents shall not deprive
Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required
by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product
warranties do not relieve Contractor of any obligations of the Contract Documents.
3.4.5.2 Product: Where Specifications name a single product, the Contractor shall
provide the named product. No substitutions are allowed.
3.4.5.4 Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, the Contractor shall provide one of the products listed that
complies with requirements or a substitution approved by the Owner that
complies with requirements.
3.4.5.5 Basis-of-Design Product: There are certain "Basis of Design" products listed in
the specifications that the Owner has investigated as an appropriate product for
the Project. Where Specifications name a product as "Basis-of-Design," provide
one of the following:
3.4.5.6 Comply with provisions in Article 3.1 for consideration of an unnamed product
by the other named manufacturers or a product by another manufacturer.
3.5.1 The Contractor shall provide, at the Contractor’s expense, all temporary facilities and
utilities (adequate for the Contractor, all subcontractors, and the Owner’s other
contractors) from the commencement of the Project until acceptance by the Owner. The
Owner shall be the sole judge of the adequacy thereof. Specifically, the Contractor shall
provide not less than the following:
3.5.1.1 A temporary building (jobsite trailer), adequately lighted, air conditioned, and
heated, for use as a field office, of sufficient size to hold weekly jobsite
meetings. The jobsite trailer must be equipped with a single meeting room of
reasonable size for seating 15 individuals at table(s) suitable in size to handle
3.5.1.2 A telephone in the field office. Long distance calls shall be at the expense of
those making same. All other telephone expenses shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor.
3.5.1.4 Temporary waterproof sheds with raised floors for storing materials.
3.5.1.5 Temporary water service with a minimum 1-inch water line available within 50
feet of the building.
3.5.1.6 Temporary power with a minimum 400 amp, 120/208 volt single phase service
with duplex outlets and ground fault interrupters shall be located throughout the
building to allow complete access with a 100 ft. extension cord. Temporary
lighting throughout the entire building shall be provided and maintained to
perform high quality workmanship of all trades throughout the Project and
ensure the safety of all persons at the Project site. Night lighting for security
purposes of the building and Project site shall be provided.
3.5.1.7 Toilet facilities for all workers at the Project, located where approved by the
Owner and complying with local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations.
3.5.1.8 Minimum temporary heating, cooling, and ventilation and humidity control
required by construction activities and material manufacturers’ instructions for
curing or drying of completed installations, protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of low temperatures, providing protection and comfort for
installers, and delivering high quality workmanship of all trades throughout the
Project. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed
installations or elements being installed. The Contractor may elect to use
owners heating and cooling equipment for temporary use if approved in writing
by the Owner prior to operating.
3.5.1.9 Runways, ladders, guards, etc. leading from lower level to all upper levels and
the roof, conveniently serving each level and complying with local laws,
ordinances, rules and regulations.
3.5.1.11.1 Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and
security locks.
3.5.1.13 Temporary roadways, staging areas, and construction parking with positive
drainage carrying water away from these areas, when the Contractor is
responsible for the sitework. All temporary roadways shall be suitable to
support all construction vehicles, tractor-trailers, and construction equipment
from the public road access to the building, staging area, and construction
personnel parking. The combined area of the building staging area and
personnel parking shall be a minimum of 22,500 square feet.
3.5.2 Construction Sign: The Owner may elect to install a construction sign on the Project Site
at the Owner’s option. If the Owner does not elect to install a construction sign on the
Project Site, the Contractor may install a construction sign on the Project Site at the
Contractor’s option meeting the following criteria:
3.5.3 The Contractor shall pay for all water, power, fuel, etc. used during the execution of the
Project, whether from temporary or permanent facilities. Before acceptance of the
Project by the Owner, the Contractor shall remove all temporary utilities and restore to
pre-existing conditions any area disturbed by the same.
3.5.4 All damage to the building, streets, sidewalks, lawns or other features of the site resulting
from any operation connected with any of the Work shall be repaired by Contractor at its
expense and to the satisfaction of the Owner.
3.5.5 Temporary Elevator Usage: The Contractor shall not use the elevator (if any) for
construction operations unless approved in writing by the Owner.
3.5.6 Environmental Protection: The Contractor shall provide protection, operate temporary
facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with
environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil
contamination or pollution, or other undesirable effects. The Contractor shall avoid using
tools and equipment that produce harmful noise and shall restrict use of noisemaking
tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near
the Project site.
3.5.7 Storm Water Control: The Contractor shall operate temporary construction facilities in
compliance with all federal, state, and local authorities having jurisdiction over the
Project. The Contractor shall comply with the Contract Documents and the Owner’s
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).
3.5.7.1 The Contractor shall provide positive flowing temporary drainage conducting
storm water away from the building and all temporary and permanent
roadways, parking lots, and storage areas.
3.5.8 Security Enclosure and Lockup: The Contractor shall install substantial temporary
enclosures around partially completed areas of construction as indicated on the Drawings
or as required by local authorities having jurisdiction, including securing all openings in
the building. The Contractor shall provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized
entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
3.5.9 Building Security: For projects not currently under operation by the Owner, the
Contractor shall be responsible to lock up and secure the building or building addition at
the end of each workday until the building is substantially complete as described in
Article 8.2. Upon Substantial Completion, the Contractor may submit a written request to
transfer the responsibility of the building security to the Owner or Owner’s appointed
contractor.
3.5.10 Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: The Contractor shall comply with standards and
code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades.
3.5.11 Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent
facilities, the Contractor shall install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of
types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. The
Contractor shall comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and
NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition
Operations," as well as all OSHA requirements.
3.5.12 Termination and Removal: The Contractor shall remove each temporary facility when
need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a
permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion, and restore to pre-existing
conditions any area disturbed by the same.
3.6.1 Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, the Contractor shall verify layout
information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing
benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, the Owner shall be notified promptly. The
Contractor shall engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work
using accepted surveying practices.
3.6.2 Field Measurements: The Contractor shall take field measurements as required to fit the
Work properly and shall verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings. Contractor shall pull all dimensions from two directions.
3.6.3 The Contractor shall lay out the exact location of all partitions.
3.6.4 The Contractor shall provide and maintain well-built, adequate batter boards at all
corners.
3.7.1.1 The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work,
the Contractor shall investigate and verify the existence and location of
mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.
Before construction, the Contractor shall verify the location and points of
connection of utility services.
3.7.1.2 The Contractor shall not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the
Owner (if any) or adjacent owners unless approved by the Owner and then only
after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements
indicated. The Contractor shall notify the Owner not less than two days in
advance of proposed utility interruptions.
3.7.2 Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of
the Work, the Contractor shall examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer or
applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. The Contractor shall record
observations and immediately report any condition detrimental to performance of the
Work. The Contractor shall proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and
conditions.
3.7.3 Installation: The Contractor shall locate the Work and components of the Work
accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.
3.7.3.1 The Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.
3.7.4 Anchors and Fasteners: The Contractor shall provide anchors and fasteners as required to
anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other
portions of the Work.
3.7.5 Starting And Adjusting: The Contractor shall start equipment and operating components
to confirm proper operation. Malfunctioning units shall be removed, replaced with new
units, and retested. The Contractor shall adjust operating components for proper
operation without binding and shall adjust equipment for proper operation. Each piece of
equipment shall be tested by the Contractor to verify proper operation including controls
and safeties. The Contractor shall replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.7.6 Correction Of The Work: The Contractor shall repair or remove and replace defective
construction and restore damaged substrates and finishes.
3.8 WARRANTY
3.8.1 No payments made to the Contractor, nor partial or entire use of the Project by the
Owner, shall be an acceptance of any work not done or made in accordance with the
Agreement. The Contractor shall furnish a written warranty of all work done under the
Agreement for a period of one year or as otherwise provided for longer periods of time.
Such warranty shall be in the form prescribed by the Owner. The Contractor shall also
furnish to the Owner all manufacturers’ warranties for all equipment, appliances and
fixtures specified or required and installed as a part of the Project. The Contractor, at its
sole cost, shall remedy any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and pay for
any damage to other work resulting from such defects and/or the remedying thereof,
which shall appear within the warranty period. Neither the foregoing nor any other
provision in the Contract Documents, nor the time limit of any special warranty shall
limit the Contractor’s liability for defects or installations resulting from deliberate or
other deviations from the Contract Documents to less than the legal limit of liability
under the law of the place of building. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects
with reasonable promptness. All warranties and bonds shall be delivered to the Owner
before final payment is made.
3.9.1 The Owner shall secure and pay for the Building Permit and any other fees including but
not limited to tap fees, impact fees, or special development fees. The Owner may elect to
have the Contractor secure and pay for these permits and fees, on the Owners behalf, the
cost of which will be passed on to the Owner without Contractor’s mark-up.
3.9.2 The Owner shall secure and pay for permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by
government agencies for work performed by the Owner.
3.9.3 The Contractor shall secure and pay for all other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections
by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work
performed by the Contractor or the Contractor’s subcontractors. The Contractor shall also
secure and pay for all certificates of inspection and occupancy in connection with the
Work. The Contractor shall post all bonds, secure and pay for all permits, and pay all fees
for work on or in connection with public property.
3.9.4 The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on
the Project. If the Contractor observes that the Contract Documents are at variance
therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner in writing. If the Contractor
furnishes any work that is not in conformance with such laws, ordinances, rules and
regulations, and without written notice to the Owner, the Contractor shall bear all costs
arising from the correction thereof.
3.9.5 The Contractor shall maintain physical conditions and employee performance on the
jobsite during the course of construction to conform with all local, state, and federal laws,
rules and regulations including those covered by the Occupational Safety and Health Act
of 1970.
3.9.6 Storm Water Discharge/Pollution Control: The Contractor shall apply for and obtain all
permits and certifications required by federal, state, or local authorities having
jurisdiction over the Project. All required inspections, reports, sampling, and
documentation are the Contractor's responsibility under the laws and regulations of the
governing authorities and in coordination with the Contract Documents and the Owner’s
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). The Contractor acknowledges that
government regulations, at a minimum, will apply to any land disturbance greater than
one acre or part of a larger overall development. Even if the Contractor is not performing
the sitework, the Contractor must comply with all responsibilities under the law and the
Agreement.
3.10 ALTERNATES
3.10.1 Prices submitted by the Contractor shall include all alternates specified in the Contract
Documents, as well as expenses, overhead and profit. The Owner may select any or all
of the alternatives shown therein in writing. Upon selection thereof the Contract Sum
shall be adjusted accordingly. The Contractor shall purchase the materials covered by
such alternates from such suppliers, and shall have the work done by such subcontractors
according to the agreed upon schedule.
3.11.1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification
Sections and as indicated in Article 15, Submittals List.
3.11.2 The Contractor shall thoroughly check and approve all shop drawings to ascertain that
they conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.11.4 The Owner and/or the Architect will review and approve or take other action upon the
Contractor’s submittals, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance
with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.
Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy
and completeness of other details such as dimensions and qualities, or for substantiating
instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain
the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.
3.12.1 The Contractor shall confine equipment and tools, materials, and the operations of the
workmen to limits by law, ordinances, rules, regulations, or directions of the Owner and
shall not unreasonably occupy the jobsite with equipment, tools or materials. The
Contractor shall abide by and enforce the Owner’s instructions regarding signs,
advertisements, fires and smoking at the jobsite.
3.12.2 The Contractor shall limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. The Contractor
shall not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated and shall
keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to emergency
vehicles at all times.
3.12.3 Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to place and install equipment
in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion is achieved. Partial
occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. The Contractor shall obtain
a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy.
3.13.1 Unless otherwise expressly stipulated in the Contract, the Contractor shall pay all
royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall be notified of, and defend with counsel
acceptable to the Owner, any suit or proceeding brought against the Owner based on the
claim that any thing, or part thereof, or any process or method involved in the Project,
constitutes an infringement on any patent or an unauthorized use of any copyrighted
material. The Contractor shall be given full information and assistance for the defense of
such suit or proceeding. The Contractor shall bear all costs thereof. In case it is held in
such suit or proceeding that an infringement occurred or if an injunction is issued, the
Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s own expense, either:
3.13.1.1 Procure for the Owner the right to continue using said thing, part thereof,
process or method, or
3.14 SUPERINTENDENT
3.14.1 The Contractor shall provide effective supervision of the Project through a full-time
resident superintendent and any necessary assistants. The superintendent shall not be
changed during performance of this Agreement without the Owner’s written consent,
unless such superintendent ceases to be in Contractor’s employ. The superintendent shall
represent the Contractor in the Contractor’s absence and all directions given to the
superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. No instructions in
conflict with the Contract Documents shall be binding unless confirmed in writing by the
Owner.
3.14.2 The Contractor shall submit daily, a complete Daily Work Report signed by the
superintendent.
3.15.1 The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting and/or patching necessary for the complete
installation of the Work. The Contractor shall not endanger any Work by the
Contractor’s operations. The Contractor shall not cut or alter the Work of any other
contractor without the Owner’s consent.
3.15.2 The Contractor shall not cut and patch any item in a manner that would change its load-
carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio, capacity to perform as intended or that results
in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety, or reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities.
3.15.3 The Contractor shall protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent
damage and shall provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of
Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
3.16 CLEANING UP
3.16.1 The Contractor shall at all times maintain the Project in an orderly, workmanlike
condition, reasonably clean and free of accumulations of dirt and debris. If the
Contractor fails so to maintain the Project, the Owner shall have the right to engage
others to do so at the Contractor’s expense. The Project shall, in general, be turned over
to the Owner in a thoroughly clean and workmanlike condition ready for the Owner’s use
in every respect.
3.16.2 Progress Cleaning: The Contractor shall clean the Project site and work areas daily,
including common areas. The Contractor shall dispose of materials lawfully. During
handling and installation, the Contractor shall clean and protect construction in progress
and adjoining materials already in place. Protective covering shall be applied by the
Contractor where required and as specified in the Contract Documents to ensure
protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
3.16.3 Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site shall not be permitted.
Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways shall not be permitted.
Compliance with the Contract Documents and the Owner’s Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan shall be strictly enforced by the Owner.
4.1.1 Claims by either the Contractor or the Owner for damages caused by any wrongful act or
neglect of the other, shall be made in writing within a reasonable time after the first
knowledge of such damage.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1.1 The Owner, in the Owner’s sole judgment, shall be entitled to reject any subcontractor
and major material supplier proposed to perform labor or furnish materials in conjunction
with the Project listed in the Trade Proposal. In such an event, the Bid amount may be
adjusted by the difference in cost caused by substitution of a new subcontractor or major
material supplier for the one removed.
5.1.1.1 The names of subcontractors and major material suppliers proposed to perform
labor or furnish materials in conjunction with the Project are submitted on the
Trade Proposal within the time outlined in the Agentrics (GNX) Invitation To
Bid.
5.1.2 The Contractor may substitute a different subcontractor or major material supplier from
any listed in the Trade Proposal and may adjust the Contract Sum, only if approved, in
writing, by the Owner.
5.2.1 The Contractor shall be as fully responsible for the acts and omissions of the Contractor’s
subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as the
Contractor is for the acts and omissions of persons employed directly by the Contractor.
Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any direct contractual relation
between any subcontractor and the Owner. Every subcontract shall include provisions
whereby the subcontractor agrees to be bound by the terms of the Contract Documents as
far as applicable to the subcontractor’s portion of the Project.
6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this Project. The
Contractor shall properly coordinate the Contractor’s work with that of the Owner’s other
contractors. If any part of the Work under this Contract depends, for proper results, upon
the work under any other contracts, the failure of the Contractor to report defects shall
constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for coordination with the
Work, except as to defects which may develop in such other work after the execution of
the Work under the Contract.
6.1.2 Owner’s Direct Buy Program: Certain material and equipment items are regularly and
usually furnished and/or furnished and installed by the Owner.
6.1.2.2.1 Coordinate delivery dates for all Owner Direct Buy items with the
Construction Progress Schedule.
6.1.2.2.2 Coordinate any changes in delivery date with the Direct Buy item
supplier and notify the Owner in writing.
6.1.2.2.3 Review and approval of Owner provided Shop Drawings. Return
within two weeks to the Owner.
6.1.2.2.4 Receive Owner-furnished products, provide inspection, and notify
the Direct Buy item supplier and Owner of missing and/or damaged
materials within 48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed
damage)
6.1.2.2.5 Provide safe harboring, installation, and removal of any salvage
materials.
6.1.2.2.6 Provide equipment as necessary for placement of Owner furnished
products.
6.1.2.2.7 Resolve warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly with the
Direct Buy item supplier.
6.1.2.2.8 Provide first year of labor warranty.
6.1.2.3.1 Coordinate delivery dates for all Owner Direct Buy items with the
Construction Progress Schedule.
6.1.2.3.2 Coordinate any changes in delivery date with the Direct Buy item
supplier and notify the Owner in writing.
6.1.2.3.3 Review and approval of Owner provided Shop Drawings. Return
within two weeks to the Owner.
6.2.1 If any of the Owner’s other contractors and/or any subcontractor shall make any claim
against the Owner for any damage alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the
Contractor agrees to settle such dispute promptly after notice thereof. If such other
contractor and/or subcontractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to
have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such
proceedings at the Contractor’s own expense with counsel reasonably acceptable to the
Owner and, if any judgment against the Owner arises there from, the Contractor shall pay
or satisfy it and pay all costs and expenses incurred by the Owner.
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Minor Changes In The Work: The Owner will issue supplemental instructions
authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or
the Contract time.
7.1.2 Change Order Proposal Requests: The Owner may, at any time before completion of the
Project, order additions to, deletions from, or alterations in the Work. All terms and
conditions of the original contract shall become a part of each Change Order.
7.1.2.1 Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Before any change is made or work done,
the Owner will issue a detailed written description of proposed changes in the
Work. Proposal requests issued by the Owner are for information only. The
Contractor shall not consider them instructions either to stop Work in progress
or to execute the proposed change. Promptly after receipt of such instructions,
the Contractor shall submit to the Owner within 10 days a proposal with a
detailed estimate showing the cost of the proposed change in the Work,
including a detailed breakdown of costs for the additional work as well as the
credit for the original Work, and a revised schedule showing the extension of
time, if any. The revised schedule showing any time extension shall be
submitted in writing under separate cover and approved by Owner. The Owner
shall promptly notify the Contractor in writing whether the estimate is
acceptable and, if it is, in writing authorize the change to be made or Work to
be done. The Owner reserves the right to reject any such proposal and to have
the work done by others.
7.1.2.3 On Owner's approval of a change order proposal, Owner will issue a Purchase
Order for the Work to be performed.
7.1.3 Construction Change Directive: The Contractor shall proceed with the change in the
Work when indicated in writing by Owner, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
The Contractor shall maintain detailed records on a time and material basis. Upon
completion of the change, the Contractor shall submit within 30 days an itemized invoice
and supporting documentation necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the
Contract. If the change has not been invoiced within 30 days of its completion, the owner
will not be obligated to pay for the charge.
7.2.1 The cost or credit shall be determined by one of the following methods:
7.2.1.1.1 For Added Work: The agreed cost noted in the change order
proposal to the subcontractor of such added Work, plus 15 percent
representing the subcontractor’s overhead, plus five 5 percent for
the Contractor’s overhead and profit.
7.2.1.1.2 For Deleted Work: The agreed cost of such omitted Work.
7.2.1.2.1 For Added Work: The agreed cost to the Contractor of such added
Work, plus 15 percent thereof representing the Contractor’s
overhead and profit.
7.2.1.2.2 For Deleted Work: The agreed cost of such omitted Work.
7.2.1.3.1 For those items where unit prices have been established in the Trade
Proposal Form or otherwise agreed upon, these unit prices shall be
used.
7.2.2 As used herein "Agreed Cost" shall mean the cost of direct labor, materials, equipment,
incremental bonds, insurance, and taxes required under the General Conditions, as
disclosed by Contractor’s records, which shall be in form satisfactory to the Owner.
Superintendence shall be deemed to be included in "Overhead."
7.3.1 The Contractor shall submit, in such form as the Owner may prescribe, an itemized
accounting together with appropriate supporting data of all costs associated with the
change.
ARTICLE 8 TIME
8.1 DELAYS
8.1.1 In the event the Contractor is delayed in the commencement, progress, or completion of
the Work by reasons of: (i) an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee
or consultant of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; (ii) changes
ordered in the Work; (iii) casualty without the fault or negligence of Contractor, its
agents, subcontractors or major material suppliers, such as labor disputes, fire, or unusual
delay in deliveries; (iv) natural disaster, such as earthquake, tornado, or flood, not
reasonably foreseeable or; (v) civil riot or strike on the Project, the time period provided
in Paragraph 3 of the Agreement shall be extended by the Owner’s approval of the
Contractor’s written request for such a reasonable time as the Owner may determine.
9.1.1 Substantial Completion shall mean completion of any condition set forth by the Owner,
and all work required to obtain a temporary Certificate of Occupancy to allow for the
installation of fixtures, and stocking of inventory. The date of Substantial Completion of
the Work or designated portion thereof is the date certified by the Owner when
construction is substantially complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents and
when all required occupancy permits, if any have been issued. Substantial completion of
the Work shall include, without limitation, the following:
9.1.1.3 Completion of electrical and lighting systems both interior and exterior.
9.1.1.8 Completion of building construction with the exception of punch list items.
Completion of contract work is not considered to be punch list items.
9.2.1 The Project must be completed in accordance with the Project Phasing Plan and/or
Project Completion Schedule incorporating the Owner’s milestones. It is essential that the
Contractor have all Work substantially complete and all mechanical systems fully
operational with full accessibility. All site improvements must be fully accessible and
substantially complete. The completion of minor punchlist items must be scheduled to be
performed in such a manner as not to hinder deliveries or installation process.
9.2.2 The "Store Fixture Date" is a critical milestone of a new store project and is defined as
the time when the Owner will begin the installation of fixtures and refrigerated
equipment within the building. It is essential that the Contractor have all Work
substantially complete and all mechanical systems fully operational in the sales, dock and
preparation areas with full accessibility as not to hinder the fixturing operation. All site
improvements such as access roadways, dock well, and parking areas must be fully
accessible and substantially complete. The completion of minor punchlist items must be
scheduled to be performed in such a manner as not to hinder the fixturing deliveries or
fixture installation process. The prefabricated mechanical center, refrigeration
compressor units, evaporator and condenser coils and other miscellaneous items shall be
delivered and installed prior to the Store Fixture Date.
9.2.3 Liquidated Damages: The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for Liquidated
Damages for the sum stipulated in the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for
each day that the Completion Date is exceeded in the completion of the Project.
9.3.1.1 Contractor Requirement: the Contractor shall submit with their progress
payment request, on the forms included in the Contract Documents, the
following:
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
Subcontractor's Progress Affidavit X X
9.3.2.1 Contractor Requirement: The Contractor shall submit with the request for final
payment, on the forms included in the Contract Documents, the following:
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
General Contractor's Final Affidavit. X
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
Subcontractor’s Final Affidavit X
9.4.1.1 Contractor Requirement: The Contractor shall submit with their progress
payment request, on the forms included in the Contract Documents, the
following:
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
General Contractor's Progress Affidavit. X X
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
Subcontractor's Progress Affidavit X X
9.4.2.1 Contractor Requirement: The Contractor shall submit with the request for final
payment, on the forms included in the Contract Documents, the following:
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
General Contractor's Final Affidavit. X
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
9.5 OPTION THREE - PERFORMANCE BOND & LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
9.5.1.1 Contractor Requirement: The Contractor shall submit with their progress
payment request, on the forms included in the Contract Documents, the
following:
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
General Contractor's Progress Affidavit. X X
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
Subcontractor's Progress Affidavit X X
9.5.2.1 Contractor Requirement: The Contractor shall submit with the request for final
payment, on the forms included in the Contract Documents, the following:
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
General Contractor's Final Affidavit. X
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
Subcontractor’s Final Affidavit X
9.6.1 The Owner may withhold the whole or any part of any payment to protect against loss on
account of:
9.6.1.4 A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance then
unpaid.
9.6.1.6 Other Contract requirements unfulfilled, including but not limited to those
requirements listed in Article “FINAL COMPLETION.”
9.6.2 Before making any Progress Payments, the Owner may require an updated schedule,
Change Order log, and copies of current SWPPP site inspections and logs.
9.7.1 The Contractor shall submit with the request for final payment the following:
9.7.1.2 Releases permitting the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and
similar releases.
9.7.1.3 Final changeover of permanent locks and delivery of keys to the Owner.
Advise the Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
9.7.1.6 Evidence of termination and removal of temporary facilities from Project site,
along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
9.7.1.7 Changeover information related to the Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
9.7.1.9 Project Record Documents including all applicable "As-Builts" and SWPPP
documents including but not limited to: inspections reports, site logs, and
noted erosion and sediment control plans.
9.7.2 If any subcontractor or major material supplier refuses to furnish the Contractor with an
Unconditional Waiver and Release Upon Final Payment, the Contractor, upon Owner’s
request, shall furnish the Owner a Discharge of Mechanics Lien Bond, satisfactory to the
Owner, indemnifying the Owner against the claim or any lien, or the Owner, at its option,
may withhold from the progress or final payment a sum equal to 1-1/2 times the amount
of the claim. The Contractor shall purchase the bond without being compensated for the
cost of the bond from the Owner. If a lien is filed against the Project at any time and, if
within fifteen (15) days after notice of the filing has been given by the Owner to the
Contractor, the lien remains unsatisfied or it is not bonded satisfactory to the Owner, the
Owner shall thereafter be entitled, regardless of whether the claim is disputed, to pay the
full amount of the claim secured by the lien and deduct the cost thereof from the Contract
Sum; or if final payment has been made, the Contractor shall promptly reimburse the
Owner for the amount so expended. The Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold
the Owner harmless from all losses, damages and expense, including attorney fees,
related to or arising out of the payment claims or liens for work performed or material
supplied to the Project.
9.7.3 The Contractor agrees to furnish the Owner any reasonable documentation, including,
without limitation, payroll records, invoices or canceled checks, which the Owner may
request to confirm payment of all indebtedness related to the Project as a condition
precedent to any progress payment or final payment. In the event that a subcontractor or
material supplier has not been paid for labor performed or materials furnished in
connection with the Project, the Owner, in addition to all remedies available at law or in
equity, may pay the Contract Sum due the Contractor by a check made payable to the
Contractor and such subcontractor or materialman and in an amount for which
subcontractor or major material supplier is due based upon the reasonable judgment of
the Owner. Payment by such a joint check shall constitute payment on the Contract Sum.
9.7.4 Record of the Contractor’s incurred expenses based on self-performed work, and those of
their subcontractors and material vendors, including all fees and direct expenses
pertaining to the Project, shall be maintained on the basis of Generally Accepted
Accounting Principles (GAAP) and shall be available for inspection by the Owner at all
reasonable times and upon reasonable prior notice for a period commencing as of the date
of this Agreement and continuing through one year after completion of the Project.
9.7.5.1 Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection the Contractor shall
complete the following:
9.7.5.2 Transfer of Utilities: The Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of all
utilities during construction, and for providing adequate services as described in
the General Conditions. Regardless of the extent of the Owner’s equipment and
fixture installation process, the transfer of the responsibility for payment of all
utilities shall not occur until the construction of the sales and preparation areas
are substantially complete and fully operational with only minor punchlist items
remaining. At the appropriate time, the Contractor shall submit a request in
writing to the Owner requesting the Owner begin the process of transferring all
of the utilities into the Owner’s name.
9.7.5.3 Project Record Documents (As-Builts): The Contractor shall submit to the
Owner one set of red-lined prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.
The Contractor shall submit copies of all SWPPP documents including but not
limited to inspections reports, site logs, and noted erosion and sediment control
plans. The Contractor shall also provide a plan box for the storage of drawings
on-site.
9.7.5.4 The Contractor shall assemble operation and maintenance data indicating the
operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system. The Contractor shall include operation and maintenance
data required in individual specification sections.
9.7.5.4.1 Provide three copies to the Owner in a compact disk (CD) format.
Provide one printed hard copy bound and tabbed.
9.7.5.5 Warranties: The Contractor shall submit written warranties for designated
portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of
Substantial Completion is indicated.
9.7.5.6 Demonstration And Training: The Contractor shall instruct the Owner's
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment
not part of a system. The Contractor shall schedule training with the Owner at
least seven days in advance.
9.7.5.7 Final Cleaning: The Contractor shall conduct final cleaning and waste removal
operations just prior to the Owner's Fixture Date indicated in the Contract
documents to comply with local laws and ordinances, and federal, state, and
9.7.5.7.1 Cleaning Agents: The Contractor shall use cleaning materials and
agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to
be cleaned. The Contractor shall not use cleaning agents that are
potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage
finished surfaces.
10.1.1 The Contractor shall protect the Work, auxiliary building, structures, materials, supplies,
and adjacent property from any damage. The Contractor shall provide safeguards,
including but not limited to fire extinguishers and lights, barriers and enclosures around
all pits, excavations, and other places of danger.
10.1.1.1 If damage results, the Contractor shall repair the damage. If the damage was
caused by the Owner, the Owner’s other contractors or the Owner’s operation,
the Owner will pay the Contractor as outlined for additional work in Article 7
of the General Conditions, but if such damage was caused by other persons, the
Contractor shall pay for repair of such damage or cause the correction thereof to
the Owner’s satisfaction.
10.1.2 The Contractor shall not trespass upon or in any way disturb adjacent property without
first obtaining written permission to do so from the owner of such adjacent property. The
Contractor shall restore all disturbed adjacent property to its original condition or such
other condition as may be agreed in writing between Contractor and such adjacent owner.
10.1.2.1 The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless from and against any
and all claims, costs losses, causes of action, liabilities, damages, suits,
judgments, and expenses, including without limitation, reasonable attorneys’
fees, resulting from the Contractor’s entry upon and/or work within an adjacent
property.
10.1.3 The Contractor shall maintain and pay for Builder’s Risk Insurance in accordance with
Article 11.
10.2.1 The Owner shall at all times have access to the Work wherever it is in preparation or
progress, and the Contractor shall provide facilities for observation thereof. If the laws,
ordinances, rules or regulations of any public authority, the Contract Documents, or the
Owner’s instructions require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Contractor
shall give the Owner notice of its readiness in time to permit the Owner to observe such
test or to inspect the same prior to the time for giving such approval.
11.1.1 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner for all Contractor required insurance
shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These certificates and
the insurance policies required by Article 11 shall contain a provision that coverages
afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'
prior written notice has been given to the Owner.
11.1.2 The Owner may require higher insurance coverage limits and/or different coverages for
certain product and service providers.
11.1.3 Insurance shall be underwritten by insurance companies rated A- or higher by A.M. Best
11.1.5.1 “The Kroger Co. and Kroger’s Affiliates and Subsidiaries are Additional
Insureds.”
11.1.6 Certificate Holder Address: The Kroger Co. and Kroger’s affiliates and subsidiaries’
mailing address as shown in Division 00 Section "Agreement Between Owner and
Contractor.
Note: Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the Owner must be shown on the Certificate.
11.1.12 Contacts
Contact Contact Title / Company: Contact Phone: Contact e-Mail:
Name:
Per Appropriate Kroger
Contract Engineering / See Work Order
Construction Department
Jim VP Corporate Insurance – 1-503-797-5300 jim.aalberg@kroger.com
Aalberg Kroger
Ed Bird Insurance Analyst – 1-503-797-3318 edward.bird@kroger.com
Kroger
11.1.13.1 The Contractor shall maintain for a period of at least five days subsequent to
the written acceptance by the Owner of the project and pay for Builder’s Risk
Insurance in a company or companies with AM Best ratings of A- or better
satisfactory to the Owner. The Contractor shall file a certificate of insurance
naming the Owner as additional insured that must be received and retained in
file by the certification of such with Owner. All responsibility for deductibles
and other uninsured loss should be the responsibility of the Contractor at full
replacement value. The provisions of this Paragraph shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of liability for any loss for which the Contractor would otherwise be
liable.
11.1.13.2 All risk of loss, damage or theft of Contractor’s equipment and tools and any
subcontractor’s equipment and tools and any property of either’s employees
that will not become part of the Project will be at the risk of the Contractor or
subcontractor owning said property. The Builder’s Risk policy will not cover
Owner’s Direct Buy equipment or fixtures.
11.1.13.3 The Contractor shall bear risk of glass breakage resulting from vandalism and
malicious mischief risks.
11.1.13.6 Owner will be responsible for the payment of the values above the amounts
indicated in the Builder’s Risk Insurance table above.
12.1 WORKMANSHIP
12.1.1 The workmanship called for by the Contract Documents shall be of the highest quality in
every respect, as usually recognized in the building construction industry. All surfaces,
members, frames, and units shall be true, even and in alignment. No warped, bent,
dented, or otherwise damaged members or units shall be built into the Project.
Connectors shall be true, tight and neat. Finishes shall be free from chips, dents and
other imperfections. All factory assemblies shall conform to the highest quality standards
of the trades concerned.
12.2.1 Defective materials and/or workmanship will not be acceptable and if installed shall be
removed and replaced with sound materials and highest quality workmanship or
otherwise corrected to the Owner’s satisfaction. The Contractor shall bear all expense of
replacement or remedial work and repairs to and alterations in the work of other
contractors necessitated by the Contractor’s replacement or remedial work. Should the
Contractor be unable to replace or remedy the defective work, the Contractor shall
promptly remove the entire Work and reimburse the Owner for all money paid therefore.
12.3.1 If the Owner deems it inexpedient to correct Work damaged or not done in accordance
with the Agreement, or incomplete Work not accomplished by the Contractor (such as
incomplete punch list items), an equitable deduction from the Contract Sum shall be
made, sufficient to pay the cost of later correction thereof.
13.1.1 The Contractor shall not assign the Contractor’s right, title or interest in or to the Contract
without the prior written consent of the Owner, which may be given or withheld at
Owner’s sole discretion; nor shall the Contractor assign any monies due or to become due
the Contractor hereunder without the prior written consent of the Owner, which may be
given or withheld at Owner’s sole discretion.
13.2.1 The Owner encourages the full participation of qualified Minority-Owned Business
Enterprises (MBEs) and Women-Owned Business Enterprises (WBEs) in all aspects of
its business. MBEs and WBEs must meet the same standards as other contractors, sub-
contractors, and suppliers of materials and services. The Owner encourages all business
partners to identify, screen, and include qualified MBEs and WBEs in all Projects.
13.2.2 The Request for Payment form includes a column for reporting dollars of participation of
M/WBEs in the Project. At the completion of the Project, the Contractor must provide a
list to include M/WBE company names, trade or service provided, identification of
gender/ethnicity of owner of company, amounts paid.
13.3.1 Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions including reports.
Quality-control services are further specified in other portions of the Contract Documents
and shall be performed by independent testing agencies provided by the Owner, as
specified.
13.3.2 The Contractor is responsible for coordinating and scheduling inspections and tests with
authorities having jurisdiction and the Owner’s testing agencies.
13.3.2.1 Retesting: The Contractor shall pay for all retesting where results of inspections
and tests prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements.
13.3.2.2 Auxiliary Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing
inspections and tests. The Contractor shall provide auxiliary services as
requested. The Contractor shall notify agency in advance of operations
requiring tests or inspections, to permit assignment of personnel.
13.3.2.3 On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, the
Contractor shall repair damaged construction and restore substrates and
finishes.
14.1.1 If the Work should be stopped under an order of any court or other public authority, for a
period of three months, through no act or fault of the Contractor or of anyone employed
by the Contractor, then the Contractor may, upon three days written notice to the Owner,
stop the Work without liability for such delay; or the Contractor may terminate the
Contract and recover from the Owner payment including a reasonable profit for all Work
executed to the time of termination.
14.2.1 The Contractor’s performance of work under this Agreement shall be terminable for
cause upon twenty-four (24) hours’ written notice by Owner to Contractor. For purpose
of this paragraph, “cause” shall be defined as, and shall include but not limited to, the
Contractor: (i) being adjudged a bankrupt, (ii) making a general assignment for the
benefit of the Contractor’s creditors, (iii) having a receiver appointed on account of the
Contractor’s insolvency, (iv) persistently or repeatedly refusing or failing, except in cases
for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or
proper materials to keep the Project on schedule, (v) failing to make prompt payment to
subcontractors or for materials or labor, (vi) persistently disregarding laws, ordinances,
rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or the instructions
of the Owner, (vii) otherwise violating a provision of this Agreement, or (viii) failing to
provide or maintain the insurance required herein. If Owner terminates the employment
of the Contractor, as aforesaid, Owner shall be entitled to take possession of the premises
and all materials, tools and appliances thereon and finish the Project by whatever method
the Owner may deem expedient. In such case, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive
any further payment. If the expense of finishing the Project, including compensation for
the Owner’s additional services, shall exceed such unpaid balance of the contract sum,
then the Contractor shall promptly pay such excess to the Owner. Owner reserves the
right to use the Contract sum to make such payment directly to subcontractors and/or
workmen or other persons who have provided work or materials to the Project, on the
Contractor’s behalf.
15.1 GENERAL
15.1.1 Submittals required for this Project are indicated by a checked box under the “Required
Submittals” column in the Submittals List below. Submittals not indicated with a checked
box are not part of this Project.
15.1.2 Number of Copies: The Contractor shall submit copies of each submittal as indicated
below, unless otherwise indicated in the specification. Where an insufficient number of
copies are submitted, no action will be taken until proper number of copies are submitted.
Additional copies beyond number required will be discarded.
15.2.1 Submittal Administrative Requirements: The Contractor shall coordinate preparation and
processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.
15.2.1.1 Coordination: The Contractor shall coordinate each submittal with fabrication,
purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require
sequential activity. The Contractor shall submit all submittal items required for
each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of
the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. The Contractor shall
15.2.1.2 Processing Time: The Contractor shall allow 10 business days for review of
each submittal or each resubmittal by the Owner and/or Architect beginning at
the time of receipt by the Owner and/or Architect. The Contractor shall allow
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Owner
and/or Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must
be delayed for coordination. No extension of the Contract Time will be
authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the
Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
15.2.1.3 Identification and Information (Electronic): The Contractor shall identify and
incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:
15.2.1.4 Identification and Information (Paper): The Contractor shall place a permanent
label or title block on each paper copy submittal item for identification and to
record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Owner
and/or Architect.
15.2.1.4.1.1
15.2.2 Direct Buy Submittals: The Owner will provide submittals for Direct Buy Owner
purchased items for the Contractor’s information as indicated in individual specification
sections. Contractor shall retrieve shop drawings from Sitefolio.
15.2.3 Submittal Procedure Requirements: The Contractor shall receive and/or prepare and
submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections marked "For Approval."
Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
15.2.3.1 Electronic Submittals: The Contractor shall post electronic submittals as PDF
electronic files directly to Owner’s Project Web site (Site|folio) and notify
Architect via email that submittal is posted for review.
15.2.3.1.1 Owner and/or Architect will return annotated file. The Contractor
shall annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project
record document file.
15.2.3.2 Paper Submittals: The Contractor shall distribute copies to the Owner and the
Architect as indicated in Submittals List below and as follows:
15.2.4 Contractor's Review: The Contractor shall review each submittal and check for
compliance with the Contract Documents, note corrections and field dimensions, and
mark with approval status before submitting to the Owner and/or Architect.
15.2.5.1 General: The Owner and/or Architect will not review submittals that do not
bear Contractor's approval status and will return them without action.
15.2.5.2 The Owner and/or Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
corrections or modifications required, and return it.
15.2.5.4 Submittals not required by the Contract Documents or not identified with
review responsibility in the Submittals List may not be reviewed and may be
discarded.
15.2.5.5 Where items deviating from the Specifications and/or Drawings have been
approved by the Owner, submittals for these substituted items shall be
submitted to the Owner and/or the Architect for approval before fabrication.
15.3 LEGEND
Review
Submittal Item
Responsibility
Civil/Testing Agency
Required Submittals
Section
Specification Item
Shop Drawings
Number
Qualifications
O & M Manual
Product Data
Contractor
Owner PM
Architect
Samples
Reports
Other
Guarantee
Construction
00 72 14 General Conditions X X X
Schedule
CONCRETE
MASONRY
Material
04 21 13 Clay Brick Unit Masonry X X X X X
Certificates, Test
Mat. Certificates,
04 22 00 Standard Concrete Unit Masonry X X X
Test Reports
Material
04 22 23 Decorative Concrete Brick Masonry X X X X X
Certificates, Test
Material
04 22 24 Decorative Concrete Block Masonry X X X X X
Certificates, Test
Mat. Certificates,
04 22 25 Precast Concrete Unit Masonry X X X
Test Reports
Material
04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry X X X X X X
Certificates, Test
METALS
05 31 00 Steel Decking O X X X
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications X X X
05 51 00 Metal Stairs X X X
Review
Submittal Item
Responsibility
Civil/Testing Agency
Required Submittals
Section
Specification Item
Shop Drawings
Number
Qualifications
O & M Manual
Product Data
Contractor
Owner PM
Architect
Samples
Reports
Other
05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings X X X
CARPENTRY
06 10 53 Miscellaneous Carpentry X X X X
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation X X X X
Warranty
07 40 00 Metal Roof and Wall Panels X X X X X X
Information
07 46 33 Plastic Soffit X X X X X
Warranty
07 51 13 Built-Up Asphalt Roofing X X X X X X X
Information
Warranty
07 53 23 EPDM Membrane Roofing X X X X X X X
Information
Warranty
07 54 19 PVC Membrane Roofing X X X X X X X
Information
07 72 13 Manufactured Curbs O O X X X
07 72 33 Roof Hatches X X X X
07 92 00 Joint Sealants X X X X
OPENINGS
O O
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames X X X
ORX OR X
Review
Submittal Item
Responsibility
Civil/Testing Agency
Required Submittals
Section
Specification Item
Shop Drawings
Number
Qualifications
O & M Manual
Product Data
Contractor
Owner PM
Architect
Samples
Reports
Other
08 36 13 Sectional Doors O O X X X
08 38 00 Traffic Doors O O X X
08 42 29 Automatic Entrances O O X X
Certificate of
08 56 53 Bullet Resistant Security Window X X X X X
Compliance
08 62 00 Unit Skylights O O X X
O O Door Hardware
08 71 00 Door Hardware X X X
ORX OR X Sets Keying
08 80 00 Glazing X X X X X X
FINISHES
09 31 00 Thin-Set Tiling X X X X X
Coordination
09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings X X X X
Drawings
09 67 23 Resinous Flooring X X X X X X
09 68 00 Carpeting O X X X
09 91 00 Painting X X X X X
SPECIALTIES
10 21 13 Toilet Compartments O O X X X
10 28 13 Toilet Accessories O X X X
Review
Submittal Item
Responsibility
Civil/Testing Agency
Required Submittals
Section
Specification Item
Shop Drawings
Number
Qualifications
O & M Manual
Product Data
Contractor
Owner PM
Architect
Samples
Reports
Other
10 73 13 Awnings X X X X X X
EQUIPMENT
FURNISHINGS
PLUMBING
22 11 00 All Products X X X X X X
22 13 00 All Products X X X X X
22 14 00 All Products X X X X
22 30 00 Circ Pumps X X X X X
22 42 00 All Products O O O X X X
23 05 93 Reports X X X X
23 33 00 X X X
23 34 23 Exhaust Fans O X X X
23 34 23 Exhaust Fans X X X X
Review
Submittal Item
Responsibility
Civil/Testing Agency
Required Submittals
Section
Specification Item
Shop Drawings
Number
Qualifications
O & M Manual
Product Data
Contractor
Owner PM
Architect
Samples
Reports
Other
Fuel Fired Duct Heaters / Electric Duct
23 55 13 O X X X
Heaters
23 74 13 RTU/AHU O O X X X
ELECTRICAL
26 05 33 Floor Boxes X X X
O
26 24 13 Each Switchboard Type X X X
OR X
O
26 24 16 Each Panelboard Type X X X
OR X
O
26 28 16 Enclosed Switch or Disconnect X X X
OR X
EARTHWORK
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 12 16 Asphalt Paving X X X X X
32 13 13 Concrete Paving X X X X X
Review
Submittal Item
Responsibility
Civil/Testing Agency
Required Submittals
Section
Specification Item
Shop Drawings
Number
Qualifications
O & M Manual
Product Data
Contractor
Owner PM
Architect
Samples
Reports
Other
32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants X X X X X
32 14 00 Unit Paving X X X X X
32 17 00 Paving Specialties X X X X
32 84 00 Planting Irrigation X X X X X X
32 93 00 Plants X X X X X
UTILITIES
END OF SECTION 00 72 14
1.1.1 Certain terms and words used throughout these Contract Documents shall be defined as
follows:
1.1.1.2 Agreement: A legal instrument executed by the Owner and the Contractor
binding the parties to the terms of the Contract. The Agreement defines the
relationships and obligations between the Owner and Contractor. It
incorporates all other Contract Documents by reference.
1.1.1.4 Contract: The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The
Contract for Construction or Contract represents the entire and integrated
agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,
representations or agreements, either written or oral.
1.1.1.5 Work: The construction and services required by the Contract Documents,
whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor,
materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor
to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a
part of the Project.
1.1.1.6 Project: The total construction of which the Work performed under the
Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include
construction by the Owner or by separate contractors.
1.1.1.7 Drawings: The graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents
showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including
plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams.
1.1.1.9 Project Manual: The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work
which may include the Procurement Requirements, sample forms, Conditions
of the Contract and Specifications.
1.1.1.10 Owner: The person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred
to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term
"Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's Project Manager.
1.1.1.11 Contractor: The person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is
referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The
term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized
representative.
1.1.1.12 Major Material Supplier: Material supplier who is to furnish materials for the
Project, the total cost of which is $5,000.00 or more.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1 Reference to the printed codes, guides, or standard specifications of any Institute, Society
or other organization or to any manufacturer’s installation directions, shall be the latest
edition thereof, unless laws, ordinances, rules or regulations require compliance with a
specific edition, in which case the reference shall be to such edition.
1.3.1 Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for by one shall be as
binding as if called for by both. Should the drawings, specifications and/or other
instructions be contradictory in any particular, or should there be apparent errors in
either, or should there be any doubt as to the meaning of either, the Contractor shall refer
the matter to the Owner whose decision thereon shall be conclusive.
1.3.2 Figures shall have precedence over scaled measurements and details over general
drawings. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner will furnish
to the Contractor, free of charge, three sets of drawings and specifications. All copies of
drawings and specifications furnished by the Owner are the property of the Owner and
shall not be used on any other work. Upon request they shall be returned to the Owner on
completion of the Project.
1.3.3 For convenience of reference, the specifications are separated in sections each bearing a
title. Other sections and titles may appear throughout the Contract Documents. Such
facts shall not be deemed to be nor shall they be the basis for any request that the Owner
make a designation as to the limits of any phase of the Project, or as to what trade shall
perform any part thereof. The Contractor shall keep one copy of all drawings and
specifications at the site, in good order, available to the Owner.
1.4.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to provide a complete functioning structure or
installation as indicated.
1.4.2 The transportation, unloading, storing, erection or installation, testing as indicated, and
making operable of all parts of the Project shall be included under this Contract, at times
appropriate thereto.
1.5.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form,
prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are instruments of service
through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor
may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any subcontractor, sub-
subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the
Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the
Architect's consultants. All copies of instruments of service, except the Contractor's
record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Owner, on request, upon
completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by
the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the
Contractor, are for use solely by the Owner. They are not to be used by the Contractor or
any subcontractor, sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects
or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written
consent of the Owner. The Owner authorizes the Contractor, subcontractors, sub-
subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers to use and reproduce applicable
portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect
and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work
under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the
statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other
documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or
distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
2.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to store materials or install fixtures or equipment in any or
all Project buildings before acceptance of the Project and without implying thereby any
acceptance of the Project.
2.2 WAIVERS
2.2.1 The Owner shall be entitled to waive, in writing, any obligation of the Contractor
provided herein; however, any such waiver shall not constitute a future waiver of same or
any other obligation.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
3.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
3.1.1 No substitutions or variations from the Specifications and Drawings, other than those
which are approved in writing by the Owner from the official substitution sheet and
incorporated into the Agreement, will be permitted after the Agreement is signed. The
Contractor shall have the right, after entering into the Agreement, to request the Owner’s
approval of a substitute material generally considered to be equal to that named in the
Contract Documents. Requests for approval of any substitute must be submitted in
writing to the Owner, together with all necessary supporting data, within 15 days after the
signing of the Agreement. The Owner shall be the sole judge of the suitability,
acceptability and equality of the substitute material and may accept or reject the same.
No material, not accepted by the Owner in writing, may be substituted for a specified
material. If the substitution of any material or equipment increases costs in any way,
these costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.1.2 If the individual specification sections state that no substitutions are allowed, the
Contractor shall not propose any substitutions for that product on the Official Substitution
Sheet.
participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3.2.2.1 The Contractor shall schedule a preconstruction meeting before earth disturbing
activities commence. The meeting shall be held at the Project site. The
Contractor shall conduct and document the meeting per the Contract
Documents and the Owner’s Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan.
3.2.3.1 The Contractor shall conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals and shall
coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
3.2.3.2 Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or
involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be
represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar
with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3.2.4.1 The Contractor shall conduct a preinstallation meeting at Project site before
each construction activity specified to have a preinstallation meeting.
3.2.4.2 Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators
involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration
with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall
attend the meeting. The Contractor shall advise the Owner of scheduled
meeting dates.
3.2.4.3 The Contractor shall conduct a preinstallation meeting for the following
construction activities:
3.2.5.1 The Contractor shall conduct a post construction meeting at Project site prior to
submitting a final request for payment to discuss any activities remaining and to
evaluate success of the Project.
3.2.5.2 The Contractor shall submit red-lined as-built drawings to Owner.
3.2.5.3 Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, the Architect, and their
consultants; the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All
participants at the meeting shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
3.2.6.1 The Contractor shall conduct a warranty meeting at the Project site one year
after completion of the Work including a walk-through to identify and discuss
any issues and problems that arose during the one-year warranty period.
3.2.6.2 The Contractor shall provide a detailed report of the meeting identifying items
to be corrected.
3.2.6.3 Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, the Contractor, and other
concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference
shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to
the Work.
3.3.1 Construction Progress Schedule: Two days after award of the Contract, the Contractor
shall furnish the Owner with a "Construction Progress Schedule" that indicates the
proposed progress with the total number of days agreeing with the "Time for
Completion" days listed in the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor.
3.3.1.1 The Construction Progress Schedule shall include delivery and installation
dates for all Owner Direct Buy items.
3.3.1.2 All dates in the Construction Progress Schedule must be accepted in writing by
both the Owner and the Contractor.
3.3.1.3 The Contractor shall begin Work within one week after award of the Contract
and progress substantially with the "Construction Progress Schedule" and
complete all Work within the time shown thereon, unless delayed by
jurisdictional or general strikes beyond the control of the Contractor, Act of
God, or national emergency.
3.3.2 Submittals Schedule: The Contractor shall provide a submittals schedule with the
Construction Progress Schedule arranged in chronological order by dates including time
required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery.
3.4.1 Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment items shall be new. When
required by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide certificates of conformance for
materials specified.
3.4.2 The Contractor’s employees, subcontractors and other persons carrying out the work shall
be properly attired and shall not wear any attire that is deemed inappropriate or offensive
to the public or Owner.
3.4.3 Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling: The Contractor shall deliver, store, and handle
products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss,
including but no limited to theft, and shall comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. The Contractor shall provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site
for storage of materials and equipment by the Owner's construction forces and shall
coordinate location with the Owner.
3.4.4 Product Warranties: Warranties specified in the Contract Documents shall not deprive
Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required
3.4.5.2 Product: Where Specifications name a single product, the Contractor shall
provide the named product. No substitutions are allowed.
3.4.5.4 Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, the Contractor shall provide one of the products listed that
complies with requirements or a substitution approved by the Owner’s
Representative that complies with requirements.
3.4.5.5 Basis-of-Design Product: There are certain "Basis of Design" products listed in
the specifications that the Owner has investigated as an appropriate product for
the Project. Where Specifications name a product as "Basis-of-Design," provide
one of the following:
3.5.1 The Contractor shall provide, at the Contractor’s expense, all temporary facilities and
utilities (adequate for the Contractor, all subcontractors, and the Owner’s other
contractors) from the commencement of the Project until acceptance by the Owner. The
Owner shall be the sole judge of the adequacy thereof. Specifically, the Contractor shall
provide not less than the following:
3.5.1.1 A temporary building (jobsite trailer), adequately lighted, air conditioned, and
heated, for use as a field office, of sufficient size to hold weekly jobsite
meetings. The jobsite trailer must be equipped with a single meeting room of
reasonable size for seating 15 individuals at table(s) suitable in size to handle
building plans and facilitate group discussion in a constructive manner. The
temporary building shall be complete with tables, chairs, counters and racks for
drawings. Maximum temporary building size shall be 530-sq.ft. (49-sq.m).
3.5.1.2 A telephone in the field office. Long distance calls shall be at the expense of
those making same. All other telephone expenses shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor.
3.5.1.4 Temporary waterproof sheds with raised floors for storing materials.
3.5.1.5 Toilet facilities for all workers at the Project, located where approved by the
Owner and complying with local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations.
3.5.1.6 Temporary roadways, staging areas, and construction parking with positive
drainage carrying water away from these areas, when the Contractor is
responsible for the sitework. All temporary roadways shall be suitable to
support all construction vehicles, tractor-trailers, and construction equipment
from the public road access to the building, staging area, and construction
personnel parking.
3.5.2 Construction Sign: The Owner may elect to install a construction sign on the Project Site
at the Owner’s option. If the Owner does not elect to install a construction sign on the
Project Site, the Contractor may install a construction sign on the Project Site at the
Contractor’s option meeting the following criteria:
3.5.3 The Contractor shall pay for all water, power, fuel, etc. used during the execution of the
Project, whether from temporary or permanent facilities. Before acceptance of the
Project by the Owner, the Contractor shall remove all temporary utilities and restore to
pre-existing conditions any area disturbed by the same.
3.5.4 All damage to the building, streets, sidewalks, lawns or other features of the site resulting
from any operation connected with any of the Work shall be repaired by Contractor at its
expense and to the satisfaction of the Owner.
3.5.5 Environmental Protection: The Contractor shall provide protection, operate temporary
facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with
environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil
contamination or pollution, or other undesirable effects. The Contractor shall avoid using
tools and equipment that produce harmful noise and shall restrict use of noisemaking
tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near
the Project site.
3.5.6 Storm Water Control: The Contractor shall operate temporary construction facilities in
compliance with all federal, state, and local authorities having jurisdiction over the
Project. The Contractor shall comply with the Contract Documents and the Owner’s
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).
3.5.6.1 The Contractor shall provide positive flowing temporary drainage conducting
storm water away from the building and all temporary and permanent
roadways, parking lots, and storage areas.
3.5.7 Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: The Contractor shall comply with standards and
code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades.
3.5.8 Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent
facilities, the Contractor shall install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of
types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. The
Contractor shall comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and
NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition
Operations," as well as all OSHA requirements.
3.5.9 Termination and Removal: The Contractor shall remove each temporary facility when
need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a
permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion, and restore to pre-existing
conditions any area disturbed by the same.
3.6.1 Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, the Contractor shall verify layout
information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing
benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, the Owner shall be notified promptly. The
Contractor shall engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work
using accepted surveying practices.
3.6.2 Field Measurements: The Contractor shall take field measurements as required to fit the
Work properly and shall verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
3.7.1.1 The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work,
the Contractor shall investigate and verify the existence and location of
mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.
Before construction, the Contractor shall verify the location and points of
connection of utility services.
3.7.1.2 The Contractor shall not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the
Owner (if any) or adjacent owners unless approved by the Owner and then only
after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements
indicated. The Contractor shall notify Owner not less than two days in advance
of proposed utility interruptions.
3.7.2 Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of
the Work, the Contractor shall examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer or
applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. The Contractor shall record
observations and immediately report any condition detrimental to performance of the
Work. The Contractor shall proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and
conditions.
3.7.3 Installation: The Contractor shall locate the Work and components of the Work
accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.
3.7.3.1 The Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.
3.7.4 Anchors and Fasteners: The Contractor shall provide anchors and fasteners as required to
anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other
portions of the Work.
3.7.5 Starting And Adjusting: The Contractor shall start equipment and operating components
to confirm proper operation. Malfunctioning units shall be removed, replaced with new
units, and retested. The Contractor shall adjust operating components for proper
operation without binding and shall adjust equipment for proper operation. Each piece of
equipment shall be tested by the Contractor to verify proper operation including controls
and safeties. The Contractor shall replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.7.6 Correction Of The Work: The Contractor shall repair or remove and replace defective
construction and restore damaged substrates and finishes.
3.8 WARRANTY
3.8.1 No payments made to the Contractor, nor partial or entire use of the Project by the
Owner, shall be an acceptance of any work not done or made in accordance with the
Agreement. The Contractor shall furnish a written warranty of all work done under the
Agreement for a period of one year or as otherwise provided for longer periods of time.
Such warranty shall be in the form prescribed by the Owner. The Contractor shall also
furnish to the Owner all manufacturers’ warranties for all equipment, appliances and
fixtures specified or required and installed as a part of the Project. The Contractor, at its
sole cost, shall remedy any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and pay for
any damage to other work resulting from such defects and/or the remedying thereof,
which shall appear within the warranty period. Neither the foregoing nor any other
provision in the Contract Documents, nor the time limit of any special warranty shall
limit the Contractor’s liability for defects or installations resulting from deliberate or
other deviations from the Contract Documents to less than the legal limit of liability
under the law of the place of building. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects
with reasonable promptness. All warranties and bonds shall be delivered to the Owner
before final payment is made.
3.9.1 The Owner shall secure and pay for the Building Permit and any other fees including but
not limited to tap fees, impact fees, or special development fees. The Owner may elect to
have the Contractor secure and pay for these permits and fees, on the Owners behalf, the
cost of which will be passed on to the Owner without Contractor’s mark-up.
3.9.2 The Owner shall secure and pay for permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by
government agencies for work performed by the Owner.
3.9.3 The Contractor shall secure and pay for all other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections
by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work
performed by the Contractor or the Contractor’s subcontractors. The Contractor shall also
secure and pay for all certificates of inspection and occupancy in connection with the
Work. The Contractor shall post all bonds, secure and pay for all permits, and pay all fees
for work on or in connection with public property.
3.9.4 The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on
the Project. If the Contractor observes that the Contract Documents are at variance
therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner in writing. If the Contractor
furnishes any work that is not in conformance with such laws, ordinances, rules and
regulations, and without written notice to the Owner, the Contractor shall bear all costs
arising from the correction thereof.
3.9.5 The Contractor shall maintain physical conditions and employee performance on the
jobsite during the course of construction to conform with all local, state, and federal laws,
rules and regulations including those covered by the Occupational Safety and Health Act
of 1970.
3.9.6 Storm Water Discharge/Pollution Control: The Contractor shall apply for and obtain all
permits and certifications required by federal, state, or local authorities having
jurisdiction over the Project. All required inspections, reports, sampling, and
documentation are the Contractor's responsibility under the laws and regulations of the
governing authorities and in coordination with the Contract Documents and the Owner’s
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). The Contractor acknowledges that
government regulations, at a minimum, will apply to any land disturbance greater than
one acre or part of a larger overall development. Even if the Contractor is not performing
the sitework, the Contractor must comply with all responsibilities under the law and the
Agreement.
3.10 ALTERNATES
3.10.1 Prices submitted by the Contractor shall include all alternates specified in the Contract
Documents, as well as expenses, overhead and profit. The Owner may select any or all
of the alternatives shown therein in writing. Upon selection thereof the Contract Sum
shall be adjusted accordingly. The Contractor shall purchase the materials covered by
such alternates from such suppliers, and shall have the work done by such subcontractors
according to the agreed upon schedule.
3.11.1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification
Sections and as indicated in Article 15, Submittals List.
3.11.2 The Contractor shall thoroughly check and approve all shop drawings to ascertain that
they conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.11.4 The Owner and/or the Architect will review and approve or take other action upon the
Contractor’s submittals, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance
with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.
Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy
and completeness of other details such as dimensions and qualities, or for substantiating
instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain
the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.
3.12.1 The Contractor shall confine equipment and tools, materials, and the operations of the
workmen to limits by law, ordinances, rules, regulations, or directions of the Owner and
shall not unreasonably occupy the jobsite with equipment, tools or materials. The
Contractor shall abide by and enforce the Owner’s instructions regarding signs,
advertisements, fires and smoking at the jobsite.
3.12.2 The Contractor shall limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. The Contractor
shall not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated and shall
keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to emergency
vehicles at all times.
3.12.3 Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to place and install equipment
in completed areas of the site before Final Completion. Partial occupancy shall not
constitute acceptance of the total Work. The Contractor shall assist in inspections to
obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction for any building in
the development.
3.13.1 Unless otherwise expressly stipulated in the Contract, the Contractor shall pay all
royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall be notified of, and defend with counsel
acceptable to the Owner, any suit or proceeding brought against the Owner based on the
claim that any thing, or part thereof, or any process or method involved in the Project,
constitutes an infringement on any patent or an unauthorized use of any copyrighted
material. The Contractor shall be given full information and assistance for the defense of
such suit or proceeding. The Contractor shall bear all costs thereof. In case it is held in
such suit or proceeding that an infringement occurred or if an injunction is issued, the
Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s own expense, either:
3.13.1.1 Procure for the Owner the right to continue using said thing, part thereof,
process or method, or
3.14 SUPERINTENDENT
3.14.1 The Contractor shall provide effective supervision of the Project through a full-time
resident superintendent and any necessary assistants. The superintendent shall not be
changed during performance of this Agreement without the Owner’s written consent,
unless such superintendent ceases to be in Contractor’s employ. The superintendent shall
represent the Contractor in the Contractor’s absence and all directions given to the
superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. No instructions in
conflict with the Contract Documents shall be binding unless confirmed in writing by the
Owner.
3.14.2 The Contractor shall submit daily, a complete Daily Work Report signed by the
superintendent.
3.15.1 The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting and/or patching necessary for the complete
installation of the Work. The Contractor shall not endanger any Work by the
Contractor’s operations. The Contractor shall not cut or alter the Work of any other
contractor without the Owner’s consent.
3.15.2 The Contractor shall not cut and patch any item in a manner that would change its load-
carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio, capacity to perform as intended or that results
in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety, or reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities.
3.15.3 The Contractor shall protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent
damage and shall provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of
Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
3.16 CLEANING UP
3.16.1 The Contractor shall at all times maintain the Project in an orderly, workmanlike
condition, reasonably clean and free of accumulations of dirt and debris. If the
Contractor fails so to maintain the Project, the Owner shall have the right to engage
others to do so at the Contractor’s expense. The Project shall, in general, be turned over
to the Owner in a thoroughly clean and workmanlike condition ready for the Owner’s use
in every respect.
3.16.2 Progress Cleaning: The Contractor shall clean the Project site and work areas daily,
including common areas. The Contractor shall dispose of materials lawfully. During
handling and installation, the Contractor shall clean and protect construction in progress
and adjoining materials already in place. Protective covering shall be applied by the
Contractor where required and as specified in the Contract Documents to ensure
protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
3.16.3 Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site shall not be permitted.
Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways shall not be permitted.
Compliance with the Contract Documents and the Owner’s Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan shall be strictly enforced by the Owner.
4.1.1 Claims by either the Contractor or the Owner for damages caused by any wrongful act or
neglect of the other, shall be made in writing within a reasonable time after the first
knowledge of such damage.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1.1 The Owner, in the Owner’s sole judgment, shall be entitled to reject any subcontractor
and major material supplier proposed to perform labor or furnish materials in conjunction
with the Project listed in the Trade Proposal. In such an event, the Bid amount may be
adjusted by the difference in cost caused by substitution of a new subcontractor or major
material supplier for the one removed.
5.1.1.1 The names of subcontractors and major material suppliers proposed to perform
labor or furnish materials in conjunction with the Project are submitted on the
Trade Proposal within the time outlined in the Agentrics (GNX) Invitation to
Bid.
5.1.2 The Contractor may substitute a different subcontractor or major material supplier from
any listed in the Trade Proposal and may adjust the Contract Sum, only if approved, in
writing, by the Owner.
5.2.1 The Contractor shall be as fully responsible for the acts and omissions of the Contractor’s
subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as the
Contractor is for the acts and omissions of persons employed directly by the Contractor.
Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any direct contractual relation
between any subcontractor and the Owner. Every subcontract shall include provisions
whereby the subcontractor agrees to be bound by the terms of the Contract Documents as
far as applicable to the subcontractor’s portion of the Project.
6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this Project. The
Contractor shall properly coordinate the Contractor’s work with that of the Owner’s other
contractors. If any part of the Work under this Contract depends, for proper results, upon
the work under any other contracts, the failure of the Contractor to report defects shall
constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for coordination with the
Work, except as to defects which may develop in such other work after the execution of
the Work under the Contract.
6.1.2 Owner Direct Buy Program: Certain material and equipment items are regularly and
usually furnished and/or furnished and installed by the Owner.
6.1.2.2.1 Coordinate delivery dates for all Owner Direct Buy items with the
Construction Progress Schedule.
6.1.2.2.2 Coordinate any changes in delivery date with the Direct Buy item
supplier and notify the Owner in writing.
6.1.2.2.3 Review and approval of Owner provided Shop Drawings. Return
within two weeks to the Owner.
6.1.2.2.4 Receive Owner-furnished products, provide inspection, and notify
the Direct Buy item supplier and Owner of missing and/or damaged
materials within 48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed
damage)
6.1.2.2.5 Provide safe harboring, installation, and removal of any salvage
materials.
6.1.2.2.6 Provide equipment as necessary for placement of Owner furnished
products.
6.1.2.2.7 Resolve warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly with the
Direct Buy item supplier.
6.1.2.2.8 Provide first year of labor warranty.
6.1.2.3.1 Coordinate delivery dates for all Owner Direct Buy items with the
Construction Progress Schedule.
6.1.2.3.2 Coordinate any changes in delivery date with the Direct Buy item
supplier and notify the Owner in writing.
6.1.2.3.3 Review and approval of Owner provided Shop Drawings. Return
within two weeks to the Owner.
6.1.2.3.4 Receive Owner-furnished products, provide inspection, and notify
the Direct Buy item supplier and Owner of missing and damaged
materials within 48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed
damage).
6.1.2.3.5 Provide safe harboring, installation, and removal of any salvage
materials.
6.1.2.3.6 Before 30 days from the install date, confirm a final date with the
installer. Ensure that the Owner supplied and installed items are not
damaged during the construction process.
6.1.2.3.7 Resolve warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly with the
Direct Buy item supplier.
6.2.1 If any of the Owner’s other contractors and/or any subcontractor shall make any claim
against the Owner for any damage alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the
Contractor agrees to settle such dispute promptly after notice thereof. If such other
contractor and/or subcontractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to
have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such
proceedings at the Contractor’s own expense with counsel reasonably acceptable to the
Owner and, if any judgment against the Owner arises there from, the Contractor shall pay
or satisfy it and pay all costs and expenses incurred by the Owner.
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Minor Changes In The Work: The Owner will issue supplemental instructions
authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or
the Contract time.
7.1.2 Change Order Proposal Requests: The Owner may, at any time before completion of the
Project, order additions to, deletions from, or alterations in the Work. All terms and
conditions of the original contract shall become a part of each Change Order.
7.1.2.1 Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Before any change is made or work done,
the Owner will issue a detailed written description of proposed changes in the
Work. Proposal requests issued by Owner are for information only. The
Contractor shall not consider them instructions either to stop Work in progress
or to execute the proposed change. Promptly after receipt of such instructions,
the Contractor shall submit to the Owner within 10 days a proposal with a
detailed estimate showing the cost of the proposed change in the Work,
including a detailed breakdown of costs for the additional work as well as the
credit for the original Work, and a revised schedule showing the extension of
time, if any. The revised schedule showing any time extension shall be
submitted in writing under separate cover and approved by Owner. The Owner
shall promptly notify the Contractor in writing whether the estimate is
acceptable and, if it is, in writing authorize the change to be made or Work to
be done. The Owner reserves the right to reject any such proposal and to have
the work done by others.
7.1.2.2 Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require
modifications to the Contract, the Contractor shall propose changes by
submitting a request for a change to the Owner. The Contractor shall include a
statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work, the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum including a
detailed breakdown of costs for the additional work as well as the credit for the
original Work, list of quantities of products required or eliminated and
applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts. The revised schedule showing any time extension must be submitted
in writing under separate cover and approved by Owner. The proposal shall be
submitted to the Owner within 10 days of the discovery for review and
approval.
7.1.2.3 On Owner's approval of a change order proposal, Owner will issue a Purchase
Order for the Work to be performed.
7.1.3 Construction Change Directive: The Contractor shall proceed with the change in the
Work when indicated in writing by Owner, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
The Contractor shall maintain detailed records on a time and material basis. Upon
completion of the change, the Contractor shall submit within 30 days an itemized invoice
and supporting documentation necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the
Contract. If the change has not been invoiced within 30 days of it’s completion, the
owner will not be obligated to pay for the charge.
7.2.1 The cost or credit shall be determined by one of the following methods:
7.2.1.1.1 For Added Work: The agreed cost noted in the change order
proposal to the subcontractor of such added Work, plus 15 percent
representing the subcontractor’s overhead, plus five 5 percent for
the Contractor’s overhead and profit.
7.2.1.1.2 For Deleted Work: The agreed cost of such omitted Work.
7.2.1.2.1 For Added Work: The agreed cost to the Contractor of such added
Work, plus 15 percent thereof representing the Contractor’s
overhead and profit.
7.2.1.2.2 For Deleted Work: The agreed cost of such omitted Work.
7.2.1.3.1 For those items where unit prices have been established in the Trade
Proposal Form or otherwise agreed upon, these unit prices shall be
used.
7.2.2 As used herein "Agreed Cost" shall mean the cost of direct labor, materials, equipment,
incremental bonds, insurance, and taxes required under the General Conditions, as
disclosed by Contractor’s records, which shall be in form satisfactory to the Owner.
Superintendence shall be deemed to be included in "Overhead."
7.3.1 The Contractor shall submit, in such form as the Owner may prescribe, an itemized
accounting together with appropriate supporting data of all costs associated with the
change.
applicable fees, and that credits processed by the Contractor that reduce subcontractor
costs or material vendor coasts based on deleted work have been processed as deductive
change orders with the Owner.
ARTICLE 8 TIME
8.1 DELAYS
8.1.1 In the event the Contractor is delayed in the commencement, progress, or completion of
the Work by reasons of: (i) an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee
or consultant of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; (ii) changes
ordered in the Work; (iii) casualty without the fault or negligence of Contractor, its
agents, subcontractors or major material supplier, such as labor disputes, fire, or unusual
delay in deliveries; (iv) natural disaster, such as earthquake, tornado, or flood, not
reasonably foreseeable or; (v) civil riot or strike on the Project, the time period provided
in Paragraph 3 of the Agreement shall be extended by the Owner’s approval of the
Contractor’s written request for such a reasonable time as the Owner may determine.
9.1.1 The Project must be completed in accordance with the Project Phasing Plan and/or
Project Completion Schedule incorporating the Owner’s milestones. It is essential that the
Contractor coordinate site improvements with other prime contractors’ work including
but not limited to adjacent or contingent buildings/structures, utilities, adjacent
site/infrastructure improvements, or fixture installations. The completion of minor
punchlist items must be scheduled to be performed in such a manner as not to hinder
deliveries or the installation process.
9.1.2 The "Store Fixture Date" is a critical milestone of a new store project and is defined as
the time when the Owner will begin the installation of fixtures and refrigerated
equipment within the building. It is essential that the Contractor have all Work
substantially complete. All site improvements such as access roadways and parking areas
must be fully accessible and substantially complete. The completion of minor punchlist
items must be scheduled to be performed in such a manner as not to hinder the fixturing
deliveries or fixture installation process. The prefabricated mechanical center,
refrigeration compressor units, evaporator and condenser coils and other miscellaneous
items shall be delivered and installed prior to the Store Fixture Date.
9.1.3 Liquidated Damages: The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for Liquidated
Damages for the sum stipulated in the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for
each day that the Completion Date is exceeded in the completion of the Project.
9.2.1.1 Contractor Requirement: the Contractor shall submit with their progress
payment request, on the forms included in the Contract Documents, the
following:
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
General Contractor's Progress Affidavit. X X
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
Subcontractor's Progress Affidavit X X
9.2.2.1 Contractor Requirement: The Contractor shall submit with the request for final
payment, on the forms included in the Contract Documents, the following:
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
General Contractor's Final Affidavit. X
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
Subcontractor’s Final Affidavit X
9.3.1.1 Contractor Requirement: The Contractor shall submit with their progress
payment request, on the forms included in the Contract Documents, the
following:
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
General Contractor's Progress Affidavit. X X
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
Subcontractor's Progress Affidavit X X
9.3.2.1 Contractor Requirement: The Contractor shall submit with the request for final
payment, on the forms included in the Contract Documents, the following:
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
General Contractor's Final Affidavit. X
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
Subcontractor’s Final Affidavit X
9.4 OPTION THREE - PERFORMANCE BOND & LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
9.4.1.1 Contractor Requirement: The Contractor shall submit with their progress
payment request, on the forms included in the Contract Documents, the
following:
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
General Contractor's Progress Affidavit. X X
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
Subcontractor's Progress Affidavit X X
9.4.2.1 Contractor Requirement: The Contractor shall submit with the request for final
payment, on the forms included in the Contract Documents, the following:
Monthly Draw
Draw 1 Ongoing Final
Progress Draw
Draws
General Contractor's Final Affidavit. X
Monthly Draw
Ongoing
Final
Draw 1 Progress
Draw
Draws
Subcontractor’s Final Affidavit X
9.5.1 The Owner may withhold the whole or any part of any payment to protect against loss on
account of:
9.5.1.4 A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance then
unpaid.
9.5.1.6 Other Contract requirements unfulfilled, including but not limited to those
requirements listed in Article “FINAL COMPLETION.”
9.5.2 Before making any Progress Payments, the Owner may require an updated schedule,
Change Order log, and copies of current SWPPP site inspections and logs.
9.6.1 The Contractor shall submit with the request for final payment the following:
9.6.1.2 Releases permitting the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and
similar releases.
9.6.1.3 Final changeover of permanent locks and delivery of keys to the Owner.
Advise the Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
9.6.1.6 Evidence of termination and removal of temporary facilities from Project site,
along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
9.6.1.7 Changeover information related to the Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
9.6.1.9 Project Record Documents including all applicable "As-Builts" and SWPPP
documents including but not limited to: inspections reports, site logs, and
noted erosion and sediment control plans.
9.6.2 If any subcontractor or major material supplier refuses to furnish the Contractor with an
Unconditional Waiver and Release Upon Final Payment, the Contractor, upon Owner’s
request, shall furnish the Owner a Discharge of Mechanics Lien Bond, satisfactory to the
Owner, indemnifying the Owner against the claim or any lien, or the Owner, at its option,
may withhold from the progress or final payment a sum equal to 1-1/2 times the amount
of the claim. The Contractor shall purchase the bond without being compensated for the
cost of the bond from the Owner. If a lien is filed against the Project at any time and, if
within fifteen (15) days after notice of the filing has been given by the Owner to the
Contractor, the lien remains unsatisfied or it is not bonded satisfactory to the Owner, the
Owner shall thereafter be entitled, regardless of whether the claim is disputed, to pay the
full amount of the claim secured by the lien and deduct the cost thereof from the Contract
Sum; or if final payment has been made, the Contractor shall promptly reimburse the
Owner for the amount so expended. The Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold
the Owner harmless from all losses, damages and expense, including attorney fees,
related to or arising out of the payment claims or liens for work performed or material
supplied to the Project.
9.6.3 The Contractor agrees to furnish the Owner any reasonable documentation, including,
without limitation, payroll records, invoices or canceled checks, which the Owner may
request to confirm payment of all indebtedness related to the Project as a condition
precedent to any progress payment or final payment. In the event that a subcontractor or
material supplier has not been paid for labor performed or materials furnished in
connection with the Project, the Owner, in addition to all remedies available at law or in
equity, may pay the Contract Sum due the Contractor by a check made payable to the
Contractor and such subcontractor or materialman and in an amount for which
subcontractor or major material supplier is due based upon the reasonable judgment of
the Owner. Payment by such a joint check shall constitute payment on the Contract Sum.
9.6.4 Record of the Contractor’s incurred expenses based on self-performed work, and those of
their subcontractors and material vendors, including all fees and direct expenses
pertaining to the Project, shall be maintained on the basis of Generally Accepted
Accounting Principles (GAAP) and shall be available for inspection by the Owner at all
reasonable times and upon reasonable prior notice for a period from the date of this
Agreement and continuing through one year after completion of the Project.
9.6.5.1 Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection the Contractor shall
complete the following:
9.6.5.2 Transfer of Utilities: The Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of all
utilities during construction, and for providing adequate services as described in
the General Conditions. Regardless of the extent of the Owner’s equipment and
fixture installation process, the transfer of the responsibility for payment of all
utilities shall not occur until the construction of the sales and preparation areas
are substantially complete and fully operational with only minor punchlist items
remaining. At the appropriate time, the Contractor shall submit a request in
writing to the Owner requesting the Owner begin the process of transferring all
of the utilities into the Owner’s name.
9.6.5.3 Project Record Documents (As-Builts): The Contractor shall submit to the
Owner one set of red-lined prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.
The Contractor shall submit copies of all SWPPP documents including but not
limited to inspections reports, site logs, and noted erosion and sediment control
plans. The Contractor shall also provide a plan box for the storage of drawings
on-site.
9.6.5.4 The Contractor shall assemble operation and maintenance data indicating the
operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system. The Contractor shall include operation and maintenance
data required in individual specification sections.
9.6.5.4.1 Provide three copies to the Owner in a compact disk (CD) format.
Provide one printed hard copy bound and tabbed.
9.6.5.5 Warranties: The Contractor shall submit written warranties for designated
portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of
Substantial Completion is indicated.
9.6.5.6 Demonstration and Training: The Contractor shall instruct the Owner's
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment
not part of a system. The Contractor shall schedule training with the Owner at
least seven days in advance.
9.6.5.7 Final Cleaning: The Contractor shall conduct final cleaning and waste removal
operations just prior to the Owner's Fixture Date indicated in the Contract
documents to comply with local laws and ordinances, and federal, state, and
local environmental and antipollution regulations. The Contractor shall clean
each surface or unit to remove loose particles, dirt and dust.
9.6.5.7.1 Cleaning Agents: The Contractor shall use cleaning materials and
agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to
be cleaned. The Contractor shall not use cleaning agents that are
potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage
finished surfaces.
10.1.1 The Contractor shall protect the Work, auxiliary building, structures, materials, supplies,
and adjacent property from any damage. The Contractor shall provide safeguards,
including but not limited to fire extinguishers and lights, barriers and enclosures around
all pits, excavations, and other places of danger.
10.1.1.1 If damage results, the Contractor shall repair the damage. If the damage was
caused by the Owner, the Owner’s other contractors or the Owner’s operation,
the Owner will pay the Contractor as outlined for additional work in Article 7
of the General Conditions, but if such damage was caused by other persons, the
Contractor shall pay for repair of such damage or cause the correction thereof to
the Owner’s satisfaction.
10.1.2 The Contractor shall not trespass upon or in any way disturb adjacent property without
first obtaining written permission to do so from the owner of such adjacent property. The
Contractor shall restore all disturbed adjacent property to its original condition or such
other condition as may be agreed in writing between Contractor and such adjacent owner.
10.1.2.1 The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless from and against any
and all claims, costs losses, causes of action, liabilities, damages, suits,
judgments, and expenses, including without limitation, reasonable attorneys’
fees, resulting from the Contractor’s entry upon and/or work within an adjacent
property.
10.1.3 The Contractor shall maintain and pay for Builder’s Risk Insurance in accordance with
Article 11.
10.2.1 The Owner shall at all times have access to the Work wherever it is in preparation or
progress, and the Contractor shall provide facilities for observation thereof. If the laws,
ordinances, rules or regulations of any public authority, the Contract Documents, or the
Owner’s instructions require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Contractor
shall give the Owner notice of its readiness in time to permit the Owner to observe such
test or to inspect the same prior to the time for giving such approval.
11.1.1 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner for all Contractor required insurance
shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These certificates and
the insurance policies required by Article 11 shall contain a provision that coverages
afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'
prior written notice has been given to the Owner.
11.1.2 The Owner may require higher insurance coverage limits and/or different coverages for
certain product and service providers.
11.1.3 Insurance shall be underwritten by insurance companies rated A- or higher by A.M. Best
11.1.5.1 “The Kroger Co. and Kroger’s Affiliates and Subsidiaries are Additional
Insureds.”
11.1.6 Certificate Holder Address: The Kroger Co. and Kroger’s affiliates and subsidiaries’
mailing address as shown in Division 00 Section "Agreement Between Owner and
Contractor."
11.1.12 Contacts:
Contact Contact Title / Company: Contact Phone: Contact e-Mail:
Name:
Per Appropriate Kroger
Contract Engineering / See Work Order
Construction Department
Jim VP Corporate Insurance – 1-503-797-5300 jim.aalberg@kroger.com
Aalberg Kroger
Ed Bird Insurance Analyst – 1-503-797-3318 edward.bird@kroger.com
Kroger
11.1.13.1 The Contractor shall maintain for a period of at least five days subsequent to
the written acceptance by the Owner of the project and pay for Builder’s Risk
Insurance in a company or companies with AM Best ratings of A- or better
satisfactory to the Owner. The Contractor shall file a certificate of insurance
naming the Owner as additional insured that must be received and retained in
file by the certification of such with Owner. All responsibility for deductibles
and other uninsured loss should be the responsibility of the Contractor at full
replacement value. The provisions of this Paragraph shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of liability for any loss for which the Contractor would otherwise be
liable.
11.1.13.2 All risk of loss, damage or theft of Contractor’s equipment and tools and any
subcontractor’s equipment and tools and any property of either’s employees
that will not become part of the Project will be at the risk of the Contractor or
subcontractor owning said property. The Builder’s Risk policy will not cover
Owner’s Direct Buy equipment or fixtures.
11.1.13.3 The Contractor shall bear risk of glass breakage resulting from vandalism and
malicious mischief risks.
11.1.13.6 Owner will be responsible for the payment of values above the amounts
indicated in the Builder’s Risk Insurance table above.
12.1 WORKMANSHIP
12.1.1 The workmanship called for by the Contract Documents shall be of the highest quality in
every respect, as usually recognized in the building construction industry. All surfaces,
members, frames, and units shall be true, even and in alignment. No warped, bent,
dented, or otherwise damaged members or units shall be built into the Project.
Connectors shall be true, tight and neat. Finishes shall be free from chips, dents and
other imperfections. All factory assemblies shall conform to the highest quality standards
of the trades concerned.
12.2.1 Defective materials and/or workmanship will not be acceptable and if installed shall be
removed and replaced with sound materials and highest quality workmanship or
otherwise corrected to the Owner’s satisfaction. The Contractor shall bear all expense of
replacement or remedial work and repairs to and alterations in the work of other
contractors necessitated by the Contractor’s replacement or remedial work. Should the
Contractor be unable to replace or remedy the defective work, the Contractor shall
promptly remove the entire Work and reimburse the Owner for all money paid therefore.
12.3.1 If the Owner deems it inexpedient to correct Work damaged or not done in accordance
with the Agreement, or incomplete Work not accomplished by the Contractor (such as
incomplete punch list items), an equitable deduction from the Contract Sum shall be
made, sufficient to pay the cost of later correction thereof.
13.1.1 The Contractor shall not assign the Contractor’s right, title or interest in or to the Contract
without the prior written consent of the Owner, which may be given or withheld at
Owner’s sole discretion; nor shall the Contractor assign any monies due or to become due
the Contractor hereunder without the prior written consent of the Owner, which may be
given or withheld at Owner’s sole discretion.
13.2.1 The Owner encourages the full participation of qualified Minority-Owned Business
Enterprises (MBEs) and Women-Owned Business Enterprises (WBEs) in all aspects of
its business. MBEs and WBEs must meet the same standards as other contractors, sub-
contractors, and suppliers of materials and services. The Owner encourages all business
partners to identify, screen, and include qualified MBEs and WBEs in all Projects.
13.2.2 The Request for Payment form includes a column for reporting dollars of participation of
M/WBEs in the Project. At the completion of the Project, the Contractor must provide a
list to include M/WBE company names, trade or service provided, identification of
gender/ethnicity of owner of company, amounts paid.
13.3.1 Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions including reports.
Quality-control services are further specified in other portions of the Contract Documents
and shall be performed by independent testing agencies provided by the Owner, as
specified.
13.3.2 The Contractor is responsible for coordinating and scheduling inspections and tests with
authorities having jurisdiction and the Owner’s testing agencies.
13.3.2.1 Retesting: The Contractor shall pay for all retesting where results of inspections
and tests prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements.
13.3.2.2 Auxiliary Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing
inspections and tests. The Contractor shall provide auxiliary services as
requested. The Contractor shall notify agency in advance of operations
requiring tests or inspections, to permit assignment of personnel.
13.3.2.3 On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, the
Contractor shall repair damaged construction and restore substrates and
finishes.
14.1.1 If the Work should be stopped under an order of any court or other public authority, for a
period of three months, through no act or fault of the Contractor or of anyone employed
by the Contractor, then the Contractor may, upon three days written notice to the Owner,
stop the Work without liability for such delay; or the Contractor may terminate the
Contract and recover from the Owner payment including a reasonable profit for all Work
executed to the time of termination.
14.2.1 The Contractor’s performance of work under this Agreement shall be terminable for
cause upon twenty-four (24) hours’ written notice by Owner to Contractor. For purpose
of this paragraph, “cause” shall be defined as, and shall include but not limited to, the
Contractor: (i) being adjudged a bankrupt, (ii) making a general assignment for the
benefit of the Contractor’s creditors, (iii) having a receiver appointed on account of the
Contractor’s insolvency, (iv) persistently or repeatedly refusing or failing, except in cases
for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or
proper materials to keep the Project on schedule, (v) failing to make prompt payment to
subcontractors or for materials or labor, (vi) persistently disregarding laws, ordinances,
rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or the instructions
of the Owner, or (vii) otherwise violating a provision of this Agreement, or (viii) failing
to provide or maintain the insurance required herein. If Owner terminates the
employment of the Contractor, as aforesaid, Owner shall be entitled to take possession of
the premises and all materials, tools and appliances thereon and finish the Project by
whatever method the Owner may deem expedient. In such case, Contractor shall not be
entitled to receive any further payment. If the expense of finishing the Project, including
compensation for the Owner’s additional services, shall exceed such unpaid balance of
the contract sum, then the Contractor shall promptly pay such excess to the Owner.
Owner reserves the right to use this Contract sum to make such payment directly to
subcontractors and/or workmen or other persons who have provided work or materials to
the Project, on the Contractor’s behalf.
15.1 GENERAL
15.1.1 Submittals required for this Project are indicated by a checked box under the “Required
Submittals” column in the Submittals List below. Submittals not indicated with a checked
box are not part of this Project.
15.1.2 Number of Copies: The Contractor shall submit copies of each submittal as indicated
below, unless otherwise indicated in the specification. Where an insufficient number of
copies are submitted, no action will be taken until proper number of copies are submitted.
Additional copies beyond number required will be discarded.
15.2.1 Contractor's Review: The Contractor shall review each submittal and check for
compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall note corrections and
field dimensions. The Contractor shall mark with approval stamp before submitting to
the Owner and the Architect.
15.2.2 The Contractor shall distribute copies to the Owner and the Architect as indicated in
Submittals List below and as follows:
15.2.3 Where submittals are specifically requested, the specified number of submittals, marked
"For Approval," shall be submitted to the Owner and/or the Architect for review.
15.2.4 Submittals not identified with review responsibility in the submittals list will not be
reviewed.
15.2.5 Upon receipt of final submittals, the Contractor shall distribute the specified number of
submittals marked "Final" to the Owner and the Architect for their files.
15.2.6 Where items deviating from the Specifications and/or Drawings have been approved by
the Owner, submittals for these substituted items shall be submitted to the Owner and/or
the Architect for approval before fabrication.
15.2.7 The Owner will provide submittals for Direct Buy Owner purchased items for the
Contractor’s information as indicated in individual specification sections.
15.3 LEGEND
Review
Submittal Item
Responsibility
Civil/Testing Agency
Required Submittals
Section
Specification Item
Shop Drawings
Number
Qualifications
O & M Manual
Product Data
Contractor
Owner PM
Architect
Samples
Reports
Other
Guarantee
Construction
00 72 14 General Conditions X X
Schedule
CONCRETE
MASONRY
Material
04 21 13 Brick Masonry X X X X
Certificates, Test
Mat. Certificates,
04 22 00 Standard Concrete Unit Masonry X X
Test Reports
Material
04 22 23 Decorative Concrete Brick Masonry X X X X
Certificates, Test
Material
04 22 24 Decorative Concrete Block Masonry X X X X
Certificates, Test
Mat. Certificates,
04 22 25 Precast Concrete Unit Masonry X
Test Reports
Material
04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry X X X X X X
Certificates, Test
METALS
05 31 00 Steel Decking O X
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications X X
05 51 00 Metal Stairs X X
Review
Submittal Item
Responsibility
Civil/Testing Agency
Required Submittals
Section
Specification Item
Shop Drawings
Number
Qualifications
O & M Manual
Product Data
Contractor
Owner PM
Architect
Samples
Reports
Other
05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings X X
CARPENTRY
06 10 53 Miscellaneous Carpentry X X X
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation X X X X
Warranty
07 40 00 Metal Roof and Wall Panels X X X X X
Information
07 46 33 Plastic Soffit X X X X X
Warranty
07 51 13 Built-Up Asphalt Roofing X X X X X X X
Information
Warranty
07 53 23 EPDM Membrane Roofing X X X X X X X
Information
Warranty
07 54 19 PVC Membrane Roofing X X X X X X X
Information
07 72 13 Manufactured Curbs O O X X
07 72 33 Roof Hatches X X X X
07 92 00 Joint Sealants X X X X
OPENINGS
Review
Submittal Item
Responsibility
Civil/Testing Agency
Required Submittals
Section
Specification Item
Shop Drawings
Number
Qualifications
O & M Manual
Product Data
Contractor
Owner PM
Architect
Samples
Reports
Other
08 36 13 Sectional Doors O O X
08 38 00 Traffic Doors O O X
08 42 29 Automatic Entrances O O X X
Certificate of
08 56 53 Bullet Resistant Security Window X X X X X
Compliance
08 62 00 Unit Skylights O O X
Door Hardware
08 71 00 Door Hardware O O X
Sets Keying
08 80 00 Glazing X X X
FINISHES
09 31 00 Thin-Set Tiling X X X X
Coordination
09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings X X X
Drawings
09 67 23 Resinous Flooring X X X X X
09 68 00 Carpeting O X X
09 91 00 Painting X X X X
SPECIALTIES
10 21 13 Toilet Compartments O O X X
10 28 13 Toilet Accessories O X X
Review
Submittal Item
Responsibility
Civil/Testing Agency
Required Submittals
Section
Specification Item
Shop Drawings
Number
Qualifications
O & M Manual
Product Data
Contractor
Owner PM
Architect
Samples
Reports
Other
10 73 13 Awnings X X X X X X
EQUIPMENT
FURNISHINGS
PLUMBING
22 11 00 All Products X X X X X
22 13 00 All Products X X X X
22 14 00 All Products X X X
22 30 00 Circ Pumps X X X X
22 42 00 All Products O O O X
23 05 93 Reports X X X X
23 33 00 X X X
23 34 23 Exhaust Fans O X X
23 34 23 Exhaust Fans X X X
Review
Submittal Item
Responsibility
Civil/Testing Agency
Required Submittals
Section
Specification Item
Shop Drawings
Number
Qualifications
O & M Manual
Product Data
Contractor
Owner PM
Architect
Samples
Reports
Other
Fuel Fired Duct Heaters / Electric Duct
23 55 13 O X X
Heaters
23 74 13 RTU/AHU O O X X
ELECTRICAL
26 05 33 Floor Boxes X X X
EARTHWORK
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 12 16 Asphalt Paving X X X X
32 13 13 Concrete Paving X X X X
Review
Submittal Item
Responsibility
Civil/Testing Agency
Required Submittals
Section
Specification Item
Shop Drawings
Number
Qualifications
O & M Manual
Product Data
Contractor
Owner PM
Architect
Samples
Reports
Other
32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants X X X X
32 14 00 Unit Paving X X X X
32 84 00 Planting Irrigation X X X X X X
32 93 00 Plants X X X X X
UTILITIES
END OF SECTION 00 72 14
The intent of these Specifications are to provide for a complete installation of equipment and fixtures of a
Kroger store and form a part of the agreement between The Kroger Co. and the Contractor. The General
Conditions, any addenda, plans, manufacturer’s installation instructions, schedules, requests for bids and
the contract/purchase order will contain any special information about this job. Work as used herein shall
mean a complete installation of equipment or devices as described by the contract, specifications,
fixturing schedule, addenda, plans, special detail drawings and request for bids.
1. Scope of Work
1.1. The Contractor shall provide the necessary labor and equipment to unload, uncrate, and
assemble any and all (non-refrigerated) equipment, material, and supplies as shown on the
fixture plan and/or listed on the attached store equipment listing. All equipment is to be placed
in proper location (department) in the store per fixture plan, fixture legend, and purchase order.
All store equipment and fixtures will be furnished by Kroger, unless otherwise noted.
1.2. For the other requirements of this contract, refer to the fixture plan, schedule, floor plan, legend
sheets, refrigeration plan, certain standard specification drawings, manufacturer's instructions,
addenda, and any applicable building, safety and sanitary codes or ordinances.
1.3. The General Contractor shall furnish the necessary supervision to coordinate the activities of
all crafts to insure a smooth installation. It will be the General Contractor's responsibility to
insure that all crafts follow and maintain a work schedule that will insure completion on or
before the required date as indicated in the proposal letter and Kroger schedule.
1.4. Materials and fixtures supplied by Kroger:
1.5. All equipment listed on the Fixture Plan, including the equipment listed below.
1.6. All shelving
1.7. Produce/floral preparation equipment
1.8. Meat/seafood preparation equipment
1.9. Deli/bakery/cheese preparation equipment
1.10. Display cases and other display devices
1.11. Signs and decor plaques including aisle markers and dept signs
1.12. Checkouts and merchandisers
1.13. Computer terminals, cash registers, and related electronic equipment.
1.14. All non-refrigerated equipment.
1.15. All Mobile Equipment
2. Receiving and Unloading Equipment
2.1. The Contractor shall provide the necessary labor and equipment to unload, uncrate, and
assemble all equipment, material, and supplies as may be required. The project will be
manned during normal business hours (example - 8:00 to 5:00 Monday through Friday) to
receive equipment. Two contractor people will be designated as the only ones to sign for
deliveries of Kroger ordered equipment. This Contractor will pay any redelivery charges due to
attempted deliveries during normal business hours.
2.2. Protection
GENERAL INSTALLATION 1 00 72 15 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
2.2.1. Equipment shall remain crated until ready for use. Contractor shall provide protection
from theft, damage, and the elements for any equipment stored. Protection of equipment
shall also include providing the installation of padlocks on all coolers. All items of
equipment and supplies not to be uncrated, including scales, ladders, deli supplies, but
not limited to the above, remain in the locked cooler until such time as the stocking of the
store is started and the floor has received its initial cleaning. As directed by the Kroger
engineer, the Contractor shall distribute all of these items to the cooler in their respective
departments. (Note: This will occur after the Contractor has completed his fixturing).
2.2.2. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all equipment received on the job until
this installation is complete.
2.2.3. Contractor shall cover the tops of cases with finished surfaces with plastic and/or
cardboard (i.e. service cases, low profile cases, etc.) to protect from damage. Contractor
shall completely cover all service cases with plastic to prevent dust, debris and damage
to glass surfaces. 6/6/02.
2.2.4. Do NOT store cases or equipment outside under any circumstances.
2.3. Receiving
2.3.1. Refrigeration Installation Contractor shall receive, unload, store, uncrate, protect on site,
dispose of all packaging material, and assemble/installation of all refrigerated cases.
General Contractor is responsible for all non-refrigerated equipment (except for walk-in
coolers and freezers).
2.3.2. Inspect product upon receipt for shortages, damages or defects and notify supplier within
48 hours.
2.3.3. Notify supplier within 20 days of receipt of any hidden damages for products received. If
the Contractor receives damaged equipment without documentation or the equipment
becomes damaged or lost on the sales floor, the Contractor will be responsible for
financially for replacement or repair.
2.3.4. As equipment is received during the course of the project, this Contractor shall be
responsible for verifying Kroger equipment deliveries. Contractor shall also be
responsible for collecting all equipment manuals (excluding refrigerated equipment) and
placing the manuals in a three ring binder and delivering to the store manager and Kroger
Engineer upon completion of the project.
2.3.5. Kroger shall supply the Contractor with project receipt list of all equipment and fixture
purchase orders.
2.3.6. The Contractor shall verify each freight bill at the time of equipment delivery and shall
attach said freight bill to the corresponding Kroger project receipt list and turn over to the
Kroger engineer on a biweekly basis. The actual quantity of each item received must be
written on the Kroger receipt list.
2.3.7. When only some of the equipment on a purchase order is received, the receivers are to
be retained on the job until everything on the purchase order has been delivered. In the
case of a partial shipment, the Contractor shall write the purchase order number, the
vendor's name, and the description of the equipment on the freight bill. In the case of no
freight bill, such as items delivered by U.P.S., the Contractor shall write the same
information on a piece of paper and turn it over to the Kroger representative on a weekly
basis.
2.3.8. The Contractor shall notify Kroger's representative in writing of all equipment received
from a carrier in damaged condition. The following information shall be obtained by the
Contractor for all such deliveries:
GENERAL INSTALLATION 2 00 72 15 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
GENERAL INSTALLATION 3 00 72 15 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
4.1.9. Contractor shall be responsible for palletizing, shrink wrap and load un-used shelving on
Kroger truck. 10/19/98.
4.2. Coolers/Freezers
4.2.1. Install galvanized metal shelving on all perimeter walls of freezers, coolers, and
retarders. Galvanized metal uprights are to be lagged to wood framing in wall panels.
Use 8'-0" standards in ALL coolers, use five (5) lag bolts per standard - (SIZE - four (4")
inch galvanized lag bolts). See cooler manufacturer cut sheet for location of interior
panel framing. For single level shelving, 18" sections of wall standards can be used with
only two (2) bolts required for lagging to wall, verify proper blocking prior to installation.
4.2.2. Install Rearload cooler doors and shelving/carts behind doors.
4.3. Other Shelving
4.3.1. Install metal shelving in all meat, produce, and deli preparation areas per fixture plan.
Contractor to follow procedure as outlined above.
4.3.2. Install 4' metal shelving in cleaning center.
4.3.3. Install metal shelving in grocery backroom and/or dock per fixture plan.
4.3.4. Note: If partition walls are constructed with metal studs, special provisions for through
bolts and/or back-up blocking shall be required.
4.3.5. Install all free standing chrome wire shelving.
4.3.6. Include installation of 40’ extra feet of shelving to be determine by Kroger Engineer.
4.3.7. Install 4' section of galvanized metal shelving adjacent to or near DSD desk. 10/27/00.
4.4. General Merchandise (G.M.) Security Area Storage Shelving.
4.4.1. Assemble lock span shelving and supply four (4) shelves 3/4" thick made of particle
board or ½” plywood per section of upright support framing.
5. Sales Area - Front End
5.1. Checkout Lanes
5.1.1. Assemble, set in place, level, and anchor to floor all checkout counters and cash register
stands. Rear edge of register stands should align with rear edge of conveyor belt
counter. Express lanes should have rear edge of register stands recessed 4" from rear
edge of conveyor belt counter. Use clear silicon sealant and apply around base at floor
level on the INTERIOR of the check lane. Check operation of conveyor belts, adjust as
required. Operate a minimum of four (4) hours. See manufacturer's instructions for all
adjustments. Set temporary check lanes as required. Install check writing stands,
monitor stands, EFT stands, customer comment card holders, bag rack stands as
directed on console – do not obstruct or reduce size of bascart aisle with these fixtures.
5.1.2. Contractor to install Check Lane Light poles/brackets, provided by Kroger.
5.1.3. Contractor to install tv’s and brackets in Starbuck’s, Seating areas. Final location to be
determined by Kroger Engineer.
5.2. Sales Area Office
5.2.1. Install prefabricated, modular store office and counters at location shown on fixture layout
plan (office furnished by Kroger). Furnish and install 4" vinyl cove base on outside of
office, match building cove base color.
GENERAL INSTALLATION 4 00 72 15 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
5.2.2. Trim around top of office where it butts up against walls or storefront so that nothing can
fall down between office and walls. Trim around accounting room walls and safe so that
nothing can fall down between office and walls. Paint or stain trim to match office.
5.2.3. Uncrate and set safe (approximately 5,600 lbs.) and file cabinets in office. Shim safe as
required, to sit level.
5.2.4. Uncrate and install drop safe and chute thru accounting room wall. As required, trim and
provide door for chute opening with oak.
5.2.5. Furnish and install coat rack in cleaning closet adjacent to store office.
5.2.6. Install shelves in cleaning closet adjacent to store office.
5.2.7. Install yellow A-frame wet floor safety brackets.
5.2.8. Set AD Flyer cabinets at front entrance area and front office.
6. Sales Area - Produce Department
6.1. Unload, uncrate, assemble (if required), and set in place all equipment, material and
supplies as outlined in Section 1.1 and as detailed in the following instructions:
6.2. Install U-Bag-It dispensers on produce wall and island cases (Approximately 6). See Store
Manager for exact location.
6.3. Receive, relocate, and store all electronic scales and printers and install as indicated on the
drawings.
6.4. Install sign kit and slatwall on produce cases as directed by Produce Manager.
6.5. Install supports and necessary hardware for hanging produce scales as shown on Fixture plan.
6.6. Uncrate and install scale cabinet per fixture plan.
6.7. Salad Bar/Soup Bar/Olive Bar: When installing the glass in the sneeze guard run a bead of
silicone in the track that the glass sits in to prevent movement of glass. Seal all penetrations in
the bottom base of the salad bar.
7. Sales Area - General
7.1. Unload, uncrate, assemble (if required), and set in place all equipment, material and
supplies as outlined in Section 1.1 and as detailed in the following instructions:
7.2. Provide and install stainless steel filler panels where indicated by the Kroger Engineer on the
Fixture Plan.
7.3. Receive and set all fiberglass food furniture and displays. Set after sales floor is striped and
waxed where applicable.
7.4. Provide two (2) beer base boards, 4' x 4' x 4” with ½” fire-treated plywood top, painted flat
black, verify size with Engineer and grocery M.R. Utilize 2x4 FT/PT lumber for framing
members.
7.5. Install all Kroger supplied millwork as per Fixture Plan.
7.6. Install yellow A-frame wet floor safety brackets.
7.7. Uncrate and install seafood condiment millwork fixture.
7.8. Anchor/bolt vendor supplied and installed slimline card fixtures to floor as per manufacturer’s
instructions when applicable. 12/29/05.
7.9. Install/anchor bed and rug displays.
GENERAL INSTALLATION 5 00 72 15 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
7.10. Install power panel displays that mount on side of TOEM Shelving. 4/13/06.
8. Hanging Units and Signs (signs provided by Kroger)
8.1. Use fasteners and miscellaneous hardware to attach and/or hang signs at various locations.
8.2. Hang Cosmetic, All About You, General Merchandise, school, office, and OTC fixtures, trellis,
canopies and signs.
8.3. Mount frozen variety signs on top of glass door frozen food cases, on top of beer cases,
pharmacy OTC and Nature’s Market signage.
8.4. Install hanging departmental signs.
8.5. Provide all the necessary, labor, materials, tools and work required to install all hanging decor
signs such as aisle markers, 2x10 sign panels, 2 X 5 sign panels, restrooms, check lanes,
office services, etc. On suspended ceilings reinforce ceiling grid.
8.6. Contractor is required to assemble three sided aisle markers. Aisle Markers to be hung 8 feet
from the end of the b-lines, centered in the aisle with bottom of marker at 9’ above finished
floor. Point of the triangle aisle marker to placed to the front. End of aisle b-line signage to be
installed by Kroger. Contractor is required to schedule a meeting with Kroger Advertising
Department to confirm layout and locations of aisle markers and signage. 1/15/08.
8.7. Building contractor is responsible for ALL wall-mounted signage shown on Building Décor
Plans.
8.8. Install/Hang 1-hr photo shop and miscellaneous wall signage where applicable.
8.9. When shown on Fixture Plan, install hanging trellis and décor for “Kitchen Place” department.
4/13/06.
9. Meat Preparation Equipment
9.1. Unload, uncrate, assemble (if required), and set in place all equipment, material and supplies
as outlined in Section 1.1 and detailed in the following instructions:
9.2. M-5 table with plastic tops and pan shelf -- attach four legs. Mount removable knife rack on
each M-5 table. See GISD-100.
9.3. If shown on Fixture Plan, mount meat tray rack on back half of M-5 table by suspending it from
roof joists with all thread rod, or lag to wall over meat conveyor. See GISD-100.
9.4. Assemble and set all tables, wrap stands, rotary bin as per fixture plan.
9.5. Assemble and install all dept desks.
9.6. Assemble rotary bin, 3' diameter aluminum tub by bolting stand to bottom of tub.
9.7. GE-10, wall mounted desk -- attach Kroger furniture angle brackets to metal desk and lag to
wall. Must be through bolted metal stud walls.
9.8. Conveyor (if shown on fixture plan) -- attach to floor mounting brackets at each end and at
each joint with bolts provided by manufacturer. See fixture plan for conveyor elevations.
Furnish and install 3/4" aluminum angle, 3/4" x 2" angle platter stop for width of conveyor at low
end of each conveyor. Also run aluminum angle the full length of each conveyor attached to
the wall supports to prevent trays from hanging up on the wall supports or trim. See GISD-101
9.9. All scales shall be uncrated and installed by manufacturer's representative. Receive, store and
provide protection.
9.10. Install knife racks.
GENERAL INSTALLATION 6 00 72 15 - 6
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
GENERAL INSTALLATION 7 00 72 15 - 7
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
GENERAL INSTALLATION 8 00 72 15 - 8
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
GENERAL INSTALLATION 9 00 72 15 - 9
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
14.2. Install the following (see Kroger engineer for exact location):
14.2.1. Receive and store electronic scale and printer until needed.
14.2.2. Install Soap and Paper towel dispensers.
14.2.3. Install all prep equipment including tables and wrappers.
15. Pharmacy
15.1. Unload, uncrate, assemble (if required), and set in place all equipment, material and supplies
as outlined in Section 1.1 and as detailed in the following instructions:
15.2. Install the following (see Kroger engineer for exact location):
15.3. Install Soap and Paper towel dispenser
15.4. Install drive thru/walk up window blinds if applicable.
15.5. TV, bracket, and furniture and display rack(s). Provide wood blocking for TV bracket.
15.6. All necessary plumbing and electrical connections are to be done by the respective plumber
and electrical contractors on this job.
15.7. Provide cut outs in tops for printers and all necessary cables.
15.8. Hang ad/community boards in pharmacy seating area.
15.9. When shown on Fixture Plan, provide and install glass shelves in 45degree angle in O.T.C.
shelving that backs up against pharmacy.
15.10. Provide and install horizontal “mini-blind” for Rx drive-up window. Color to similar to Rx drive-
up window frame. 3/18/04.
15.11. Pharmacy signs
17. Cosmetics/Photo
17.1. Unload, uncrate, assemble (if required), and set in place all Millwork, equipment, material and
supplies as outlined in Section 1.1 and as detailed in the following instructions:
17.2. All necessary plumbing and electrical connections are to be done by the respective trade
contractor on this job.
17.3. Provide and install cove base around perimeter of all fixtures if applicable.
17.4. Provide and Install fillers at adjoining cases as required.
18. Nutrition Center/ Natures Market
18.1. Unload, uncrate, assemble (if required), and set in place all equipment, material and supplies
as outlined in Section 1.1 and as detailed in the following instructions:
GENERAL INSTALLATION 10 00 72 15 - 10
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
18.2. Nutrition/Natures Market décor, signage and shelving package, etc. (Some cutting and
carpentry work will be required).
18.3. All necessary refrigeration, plumbing, and electrical connections are to be done by the
respective trade contractors on this job.
19. Floral
19.1. Unload, uncrate, assemble (if required), and set in place all equipment, millwork, material and
supplies as outlined in Section 1.1 and as detailed in the following instructions:
19.2. Install slatwall.
19.3. Install Soap and towel dispensers.
19.4. Install department signs and canopies including related décor elements.
19.5. All necessary refrigeration, plumbing, and electrical connections are to be done by the
respective refrigeration and electrical contractors on this job.
19.6. Provide and Install chain around Helium tank in floral closet. Provide opening in cabinets and
or wall for helium discharge unit when remote discharge unit is installed.
19.7. Provide and Install fillers as required.
19.8. Install exterior floral unistrut, hooks and bedding plant displays.
19.9. Install balloon rack per décor plan. 1/26/05
20. Wine and Beer
20.1. Unload, uncrate, assemble and set in place all equipment, material and supplies as shown on
Fixture Plan and as detailed in the following instructions:
20.2. Promo display units and shelving display ends as per Fixture Plan.
20.3. Glass Door BEER CASES - Provide 1/4" or 3/16" aircraft grade plastic coated cable for the
beer cases. Cable should be long enough to route through all door handles. Make provisions
to padlock either end of cable to prevent removal- if applicable.
21. Miscellaneous Fixtures
21.1. Unload, uncrate, assemble (if required), and set in place all equipment, material and
supplies as outlined in Section 1.1 and as detailed in the following instructions:
21.2. VESTIBULE - KIDDY RIDES (if applicable) - Install leveling legs (packed in coin changer box)
and level units. Plug in and check operation. Check volume control and adjust per Store
Manager's preference. Insure volume does not interfere with phone conversations at pay
phones. Volume control is located on a sound box under unit and mounted to frame. Volume
is controlled by a small micro switch. 5/2/96
21.3. Install shelf and/or mount battery chargers in backroom or DSD area near cleaning center
and/or eye wash station as directed.
21.4. Prefabricated metal lockers. Lockers to be bolted to each other and anchored to wall.
21.5. Pallet racks -- assemble frames and cross beam sections of pallet racks per plan and
manufacturer instructions. Racks will be set out from wall and each section bolted securely to
wall with brackets furnished by Kroger. Front legs should be bolted to floor. (Set first pallet
rack support at 10" above floor, second level of supports at 72" above floor.
GENERAL INSTALLATION 11 00 72 15 - 11
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
21.6. Hang fire extinguishers in all locations as may be required. Top of extinguishers to be no
higher than 5'-0" above floor. Fire extinguishers must be hung as soon as they arrive at job
site.
21.7. Salvage Baler installation by Salvage Baler Supplier (if applicable).
21.8. Install towel dispensers, toilet tissue holders and air freshener dispensers in restrooms and
prep areas. Mount on wall at following locations: (1) at each sink in men's and women's
restrooms, delicatessen, bakery, pharmacy, cheese shop, meat prep, seafood, service meat,
produce prep, floral and cleaning center.
21.9. Furnish and install restraining chain for stepladders. Fasten two eyes in wall at location
determined by Kroger engineer at time of installation. Restrain to consist of a 36" piece of 1/8"
chain with an "S" hook on one end and a harness snap on the other end.
21.10. Cleaning center -- Install cleaning center complete as per details. Furnish necessary materials
as required. See GISD-130A or 130B (or paint as indicated).
21.11. Provide and Install 4' x 6' bulletin boards, two (2) in employees' lunchroom (one for SOS and
one for Risk Mgmt), one (1) in the upstairs manager's office, (1) license board in Customer
Service, and one (1) in vestibule area. Use a high quality board with oak trim or metal trim to
match decor. Verify exact location and size with Store Manager. 3/4/98
21.12. Bascart Corrals - assemble and set in parking lot per manager's direction (if applicable).
21.13. Checklanes - Install chrome pipe railing next to end checkout counter as shown on Fixture
Plan. Post and railings supplied by Kroger.
21.14. Sales Area – Install chrome case protective posts as shown on Fixture Plan. Posts supplied by
Kroger.
21.15. Install outdoor seating package as shown on Fixture Plan (if applicable).
21.16. Install broom/mop holders.
21.17. Starbuck kiosk installed by others. Starbucks accessories- furniture, tables, pictures, TV
w/bracket, fireplace, sneeze guard, if applicable, lights, final electrical and plumbing
connections shall be part of the general contractor’s responsibility.
21.18. Sales Area – Install refrigerated case corner guards on corners of glass door frozen food/IC
end cases, meat/seafood islands, dairy islands, and frozen food/IC islands. The guards are
required for all stores, whether or not they are shown on Fixture Plan. Reference ASD-160.
Corner guards supplied by Kroger. 8/10/06.
21.19. Vestibules/Bascart stops – Install chrome pipe railing as shown on Fixture Plan. Furnish and
install 6” x 6” aluminum angle to prevent bascarts from hitting chrome railing. Post and railings
supplied by Kroger.
21.20. 5-deck meat cases - provide and install (24) 11 5/8" x 1/4" Plexiglas dividers in peg lunchmeat
section-if applicable. Verify exact size and quantity with the meat dept. merchandising
representative.
21.21. Provide and install mailbag hooks on dock at the direction of store manager.
21.22. Install mail slots in managers and co-managers area. Mail slots provided by Kroger.
21.23. Contractor shall be responsible for palletizing, shrink wrapping and loading of any un-used
shelving, cases or fixtures on Kroger truck. This shall be done at direction of Kroger Engineer.
10/19/98.
22. Carpentry, Interior Decor and Painting
GENERAL INSTALLATION 12 00 72 15 - 12
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
22.1. Fabricate and install case end closures of stainless steel (20 or 22 gauge) or 5/8" plywood
covered with plastic laminate to match case color, install where all cases and walls meet.
Closures at cases less than 12” to be Stainless steel unless utilized for display of product.
22.2. Fill in at the end of shelving backed up to the glass door frozen food cases and adjacent to the
wraparound frozen food cases or other end fixture. Fill the space between these units by
boxing in neatly with 5/8" finished grade plywood covered with plastic laminate to match
adjacent case color.
22.3. Install two 10' long pieces, 6" diameter, PVC pipe for storage of salvage baler wire and anchor
securely to wall 4' - 0" above floor adjacent to baler. Fasten to wall every 4' with 1" wide
perforated galvanized metal strap and masonry anchor (if applicable).
22.4. Cover gap between case and shelving ends that back up against walls with adjacent wall
materials and the appropriate edge and corner trim.
22.5. Install decorative end panels above low profile end bunker cases as indicated on the fixture
plan- if applicable. Kroger supplied Local Catalog item. Verify with Kroger Engineer.
22.6. Install DSD Cabinet, if wall mounted, location per Fixture Plan at 40" above finish floor.
12/21/98.
22.7. PHOTO MURALS - VERBAGE - Install on wall as directed. (Check with Kroger Engineer to
determine if applicable for this store). 6/10/99. Provide all fasteners and anchors and
adhesive. (Typically, adhesive tape, special construction adhesive and brad nails).
22.8. Provide and install vertical blinds on windows in manager office, conference rooms and new
hire rooms (if applicable).
22.9. Fabricate and Install light bulb bin storage rack as per ASD-621. Verify location with Kroger
Engineer. 4/13/06.
22.10. Core drill countertops using minimum bore diameter required to pass electrical plugs to
receptacles below, as required. Gourmets around holes are required.
23. Contractor Supplied Materials
23.1. Materials to be supplied by contractor:
23.2. All plywood, lumber, metals, PVC pipe, Stainless Steel and paneling for a complete installation
23.3. All paint, stain and varnish for a complete installation
23.4. All necessary nails, bolts, nuts, screws, hangers, chains, washer, threaded rods, and other
materials and devices to give a complete installation
23.5. All other materials and devices necessary to complete the installation.
23.6. All adhesive and silicone caulking compound in addition to that supplied with refrigerated cases
necessary for complete installation.
24. Clean Up
24.1. It shall be the responsibility and duty of the contractor to remove and coordinate with all
fixturing contractors daily from the building all his rubbish, boxes, shipping crates and/or debris
caused by his work. All boxes, shipping crates, scrapped equipment and supplies shall be
removed from the property not less than twice a week on a regularly scheduled basis. This
contractor shall notify Kroger for assistance with other contractors not conforming to this
request.
24.2. Contractor shall provide dumpster/s to maintain total clean-up of all construction debris and
non-refrigerated fixture demolition and disposal of all shipping packaging and crating materials.
GENERAL INSTALLATION 13 00 72 15 - 13
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
24.3. During the course of the work, the areas in which the contractor is working shall be kept in an
orderly, clean condition daily. All prep rooms shall be “operation ready” at the start of each
work period.
24.4. All installed equipment and completed work shall be left in a clean and workmanlike condition
ready for Kroger's use.
24.5. Occupational Safety and Health Act shall be followed.
24.6. It shall be the general contractor's duty to ascertain that all subcontractors comply with
provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act. Subcontractors will be responsible to
the general contractor who must enforce all provisions.
24.7. Contractor shall be responsible for correcting any and all floor surfaces and finishes damaged
during installation of fixtures. Repair work shall be complete prior to final floor treatment before
opening.
25. Guarantee
25.1. A contract retainage of 5% will be held for the 90-day guarantee period. Ninety day period
shall start on opening date provided installation is accepted and approved as completed in
compliance with the above specifications by the authorized Kroger representative. The
guarantee shall cover all material and workmanship provided by Contractor.
25.2. The general contractor shall make appropriate arrangements to have a serviceman present at
store on opening day. This serviceman shall work a minimum of four (4) hours, commencing
two (2) hours before store opening. He shall be available to correct problems or make
adjustments designated by the Kroger engineer.
25.3. Store Work Order - During the 90-day full service guarantee period, regardless if the service
call is due to failure of equipment or failure of the installation, the Contractor's serviceman shall
obtain a Store Work Order from the store office. All service reports shall be turned over to the
Kroger engineer at the time of the 90-day warranty inspection.
GENERAL INSTALLATION 14 00 72 15 - 14
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1.2 Sitefolio
A. The Contractor shall be responsible to access and fully utilize Kroger’s project
document management system, Sitefolio, via the internet. Kroger Project Manager
will provide access.
END OF SECTION 00 72 16
b. Reinforcing steel-resisting
flexural and axial forces in
intermediate and special moment
Continuous
frames, and boundary elements of
special concrete shear walls, and
shear reinforcement
N
c. Shear reinforcement N Continuous
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. A copy of The Statement of Special Inspections document is included in this section for
this particular project.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Architect has submitted a partially signed original document to the Authority
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) during the plan review process; however, the Contractor is
responsible to obtain the fully signed and authorized Statement of Special Inspections
from the AHJ.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
END OF SECTION 00 72 17
1.1 The Contractor shall provide a complete functioning facility including but not limited to
Refrigeration Design and Installation, fixtures installation, equipment, checklanes, gondola runs,
shelving, non-refrigerated and refrigerated equipment, décor, electrical, plumbing, fire protection,
and all general trades for a complete operational facility.. The Contractor will provide
refrigeration design and installation of all refrigerated equipment, electrical, and power and
connections.
1.2 The transportation, unloading, storing, erection or installation, testing, and making operable of all
parts of the Project shall be included under this Contract, at times appropriate thereto.
1.3 Certain material and equipment items (shown on the drawings and/or enumerated in the
specifications, see table below) are regularly and usually furnished by the Owner. All such
indicated items will be delivered to the site of the Project by the Owner and shall be installed by
the Contractor. Contractor shall receive, protect, unload, store, handle on the jobsite, and be
responsible for all such materials and equipment and warranty as indicated.
1.4 Certain material and equipment items (shown on the drawings and/or enumerated in the
specifications, see table below) are regularly and usually furnished and installed by the Owner.
For Kroger supplied and/or installed items the contractor must, within two weeks from the start of
construction, advise the Kroger Project Engineer as to the install date. Before 30 days from the
install date, the contractor must confirm a final date with the Kroger PM. The contractor is
responsible for ensuring that the Kroger supplied and installed items are not damaged during the
construction process.
1.5 Listed in sections 01 64 00 and 01 64 01 are the items for the Kroger Direct Buy Program
(Kroger supply/contractor install and Kroger supply and install).
1.6.1 This work consists of the repair, renovation, and expansion of portions of an existing
facility. The Contractor shall install all work described in the contract documents but not
limited to demolition, new structures, new ceiling tile and grid, paint, floor tile, vinyl wall
covering, gypsum wall board systems, concrete, concrete masonry units, special coatings,
display cases, lighting, wiring, panel boards and other electrical devices HVAC,
plumbing, fire protection and all other items required to provide a complete and
functioning job.
1.6.2 A complete gondola and shelving reset is scheduled. Remove and reinstall new or
existing gondolas, checklanes and shelving as required/indicated for installation of work.
Gondolas shall be moved in accordance with all Owner and Manufacturer’s requirements.
Contractor shall view all video training as required by Owner and manufacturer prior to
moving gondolas. Contractor shall level and plumb all relocated and new gondolas and
reinstall shelving and gondolas to meet manufacturer’s requirements.
1.6.3 Contractor shall include in Base Bid the installation of all new shelving and relocation of
all existing shelving to be relocated or replaced as indicated on the plans including
General, Wine, OTC, COB, etc. Base Bid shall include for the removal and disposal of
all shelving, fixturing, and refrigerated cases as indicated. Contractor shall provide
gondola movers to move 178 LF of back to back shelving at one time.
1.6.3.1 Contractor shall provide labor and materials to relocate and set-up all gondola
runs four (4) separate times to allow for VCT removal and polishing and
staining of concrete floor slab.
1.6.4 Contractor shall include price in base bid for disconnect of all cases to be disposed of
and/or new or relocated. The Contractor shall provide all utilities for all temporary
equipment hook-ups as indicated on the plans or as indicated in the schedule or as
directed otherwise.
1.6.5 Typical night work shall include but not be limited to:
1.6.5.1 Painting
1.6.5.6 Reset
1.6.6 The Electrical Contractor shall be well versed and established in the renovation and
expansion of open supermarkets and Kroger Stores. Kroger reserves the right to reject
any subcontractor Kroger believes not to be qualified to perform the work. If Kroger
rejects any subcontractor, the Contractor shall have the option to provide an acceptable
subcontractor at no extra cost to the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to reject any
and all bids.
1.6.7 Kroger will provide all wiring of new phones and new speakers. Contractor shall provide
conduit and receptacle outlets and pull wires. Contractor shall cut hole in ACT and
reinstall speakers in all ceiling tiles. Where existing ACT is being replaced the contractor
shall remove and reinstall existing speaker and reinstall new ACT. Contractor shall paint
speaker cover to match color of new ACT. Where new speakers are being installed,
Contractor shall provide ACT for installation by Kroger’s phone/speaker contractor.
1.6.8 In all areas of the store that are having ceiling tiles replaced and/or new or relocated
lighting installed, the Contractor shall prepare speakers for this renovation. This shall
include time for the Contractor to remove the speaker from the existing ceiling tiles and
coil/strap the speaker into the structure to protect it during the renovation. The
Contractor shall also provide labor to take the speakers back down from the structure and
reinstall the speakers into the new ceiling tiles reusing trim rings and speakers and
existing speaker cabling if possible. Contractor shall provide and install new speaker
wiring as needed to reinstall the speakers; if new cabling (speaker wiring) is installed, it
shall match the existing cabling.
1.6.9 This contract is for the complete building and fixture modifications as shown on the
drawings and as dictated in the project manual (specifications) including, but not limited
to shelving, checklanes, equipment (all non-refrigerated and refrigerated equipment), and
electrical and data, communications to all refrigerated equipment. Telecommunications
infrastructure upgrade by Kroger.
1.6.10 In addition to the relocation of shelving and the installation of new as shown on the
fixture plan, additional labor must be provided to assist in the relocation of upper shelves,
cutting of shelving around columns, and temporary placement of shelving during the
grocery reset. Contractor should allow for two persons for a total of 80 hours. An
additional 40 hours (for a total of 120 hours) shall be provided for the miscellaneous
temporary relocation of fixtures not otherwise indicated on the drawings or project
manual. Contractor shall notify Kroger engineer in writing when hours are being
expended.
1.6.11 The Contractor shall include the removal of any fixture shown on the existing plan that is
not specifically shown as existing to remain. If the new fixture plan indicates a new
fixture (non-refrigerated) where there is currently an existing fixture, it will be the
Contractor's responsibility to remove and/or relocate the existing fixture. If new finishes
are called for where existing fixture is to remain, then contractor shall move the fixture,
install finishes and reinstall fixture.
1.6.12 Kroger is aware of certain discrepancies in the actual existing store conditions vs. those
shown on sheet "EXISTING FIXTURE PLAN" and the Contractor is hereby notified of
the same. The Contractor is responsible for familiarizing himself with the actual existing
store conditions. Additional charges will not be allowed if the Contractor fails to review
and validate exiting conditions prior to bid. It is imperative that the Contractor shall
establish benchmarks and validate all dimensions from two directions prior to the
installation of any construction or equipment and notify the Owner and/or Architect prior
to installation if a discrepancy exists.
1.6.13 Kroger Company will be directly responsible for the refrigeration design and installation
including receiving, setting, and piping the cases. All electrical and monitoring
connections and plumbing are the responsibility of the Contractor of this contract. The
Contractor shall provide adequate manpower to meet the schedule dates for the
refrigeration installation and other work that is scheduled concurrently by Kroger.
1.6.14 Contractor will provide all labor and material to box in electrical, plumbing, and
refrigeration drops, both in the sales area and the back room. Provide (4) 18” x 18”
(verify the size prior to installation) false columns where needed (i.e. floral, frozen food,
and nutrition cases). This amount is above and beyond what is called for on the
drawings. The Contractor shall also allow for boxing in refrigerated lines dropped to
frozen food and cases. These box chases shall be constructed GWB metal framing, with
a fan at the base of each box to allow for air circulation within the box. Additional fans
are required atop the length of the glass door cases. Refer to electrical drawings.
1.6.15 The Contractor will coordinate and obtain written approval from the Kroger engineer first
before proceeding with any work not shown on the plans. If a conflict occurs anywhere
on the documents, the Contractor shall provide for the most expensive and most stringent
solution in base bid and notify the Architect in writing. The Architect will provide
written clarification to the Contractor.
1.6.16 Safety and dust control precautions will be strictly enforced. Barricades shall be utilized.
Contractor shall take the necessary precautions and actions required to keep the facility
fully operational and in code compliance during the entire construction process.
1.6.17 The Contractor will be responsible for continuous clean up of all construction trash, dust,
and debris. Piling up of trash material from demolition behind the store will not be
allowed. Contractor shall cover all equipment subject to construction dust or debris with
plastic coverings and shall provide for the detailed cleaning of any FF&E throughout the
duration of the project.
1.6.18 All cost considerations must be included to complete the project as per the enclosed
project schedule. This would include, but not limited to, any overtime or night or
weekend hours necessary to complete all the described herein. Please note overtime will
not be paid. It is expected the Contractor to have all cost associated with all required
overtime in their Base Bid. The Contractor shall include in his Base Bid all costs
associated with any and all temporary utility hook-ups indicated on the schedule or
elsewhere within the documents.
1.6.19 PRE-BID MEETING: All Contractors, to be considered for the project, must attend the
pre-bid meeting at the project site. In addition, all Contractors must have made at least
one site visit to the store prior to the pre-bid meeting. The intention of this meeting is to
clarify any questions and review the schedule and Project Scope. No exclusions to the
bid documents will be allowed. E-mail all questions to the Architect’s office. All
questions will be answered in writing to all bidders.
1.6.20 Prior to the end of the normal business workday, the Contractor shall inspect the store,
inside and outside, and clean up any construction-related material or debris. No trash
receptacles will be permitted to remain on the sales floor overnight, unless it is work
which is being performed that night. Aisles shall not be permitted to be blocked without
written consent from either the store manager or the Kroger engineer. If the Contractor
receives written consent, he shall provide employees to guide and assist customers and to
assure the customers and employees are not injured in any way. The Contractor is
responsible for their subcontractors' materials and debris and all safety concerns.
1.6.21 The Contractor will provide, at a minimum, (unless called for elsewhere including
addendum) hang and maintain layer of fire-retardant 10-mil white or clear poly material
to hide areas of construction from customers in the store and adjacent prep areas. This
material will be secured to the floor using a 2x4 piece of wood nailed into the floor or as
indicated on the drawings. Barricades and tunnels shall be erected and maintained in
order to prevent injuries to customers by preventing entrance to construction areas.
Barricades shall be so installed to be acceptable to the Health Department and Building
and Fire Officials. Typical barricades shall be erected from gypsum wallboard plywood
or other approved materials. Refer to plans for special temporary wall types. Where
temporary prep areas are required, Contractor to provide dust barriers and construction
barriers. Dust barrier shall prevent construction debris and dust from migrating into prep
area and into the HVAC systems. Refer to Temporary Plans and wall details.
1.6.22 The Contractor shall be responsible for all site, pavement, floor, wall, and ceiling cutting.
Contractor shall provide a ground-penetrating radar or other utility locating devices or
instruments and survey as necessary to locate any electrical or plumbing lines or other
utility. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to report any damage to the Kroger
engineer and to immediately repair all damage to the satisfaction of Kroger at no extra
cost to Kroger. All repairs shall be made per all code requirements. The Contractor shall
notify the Kroger engineer at least seven (7) days in advance of any cutting. The
Contractor shall provide for locating device prior to cutting or any demolition.
1.6.23 The Contractor shall provide a forklift and qualified operator to unload non-food trucks at
front door for the duration of the project. All operators of all equipment shall be certified
operators of the specific piece of equipment being operated.
1.6.24 The Contractor shall store only the materials needed for each day’s work. Contractor
shall remove all unused materials at the end of each typical workday unless approved by
Kroger Engineer and store management.
1.6.26 Contractor shall provide a night supervisor when night work occurs. Unsupervised work
shall not occur at any time.
1.6.27 All work with scissor lift, scaffolding or high lift blocking shopping patterns must be
performed during night hours, 10 pm to 6 am.
1.6.28 Work to be performed utilizing ladders which will be on sales floor for an entire day or
several hours shall be performed during approved night hours only.
1.6.29 Contractor shall utilize roofing contractor that will not void roof bond. Kroger Engineer
to provide name. (if applicable)
1.6.30 Contractor shall provide UL listed fire-rated sealant in all existing or new penetrations or
openings of fire-rated partitions.
1.7 Project Scope Overview: This “Project Scope” shall not be construed to be all inclusive nor shall
the Contractor be required to provide any refrigerated equipment. However, the Contractor shall
provide in their base bid all plumbing, electrical, and monitoring controls for all equipment and
refrigerated equipment (temporary and final connections). The Kroger Company shall provide all
refrigerant piping and setting of all refrigerant cases. This Scope of Work is intended to provide
an overview of the project to the Contractor and shall not be considered to be all inclusive. The
Contractor has the responsibility to thoroughly review and understand all of the documents and
inspect the existing facility to gain complete understanding of all project requirements including
means, methods, sequencing and techniques, as well as what Kroger is providing.
Scope Clarification:
• Lighting
− Existing 2x4, 6-tube adjusted and supplemented and modified. Switching will
need to be adjusted.
− Accent lighting
• Major Electrical
− No new Fire Alarm
− New Communications, new Bosch Security panel, new paging system.
− Existing generator to remain as is.
− All power and communications to checklanes to be fed overhead via power poles
supplied
by Kroger and installed by Contractor.
− All power to gondolas to be fed from overhead via power poles. Power poles
supplied and installed by Contractor.
− Please note this store has had the telecom upgrade; however, this renovation will
require additional work. Beacon drawings are required and Kroger will bid
out the telecom separately.
− Convert all track lights to night set-back.
− Remove existing electrical chase at checklane and reroute power to checklanes
from overhead.
.
• Décor/Floor, etc.
− All new Bountiful throughout facility.
− All electrostatic painting by Kroger.
• HVAC
− New Seafood exhaust.
− New Restroom exhaust.
− Provide HVAC to:
− Main Sales Area – modify as necessary for remodel.
− Relocate existing RTU at old pharmacy for use in ECR room
− Pharmacy – New unit
− Customer Service/Accounting – new split-system in accounting.
− Vestibules – Two (2) new RTUs (one for each vestibule)
− Remove/demo and reconstruct return air duct atop Meat cases and Dairy
cases.
− HVAC ductwork in Produce, Meat, and Power Alley to remain at present location.
• Requested Alternates:
− Contractor shall provide alternate price to remove all existing VCT and mastic to
the complete satisfaction of Kroger.
General
1. This is an “exposed structure” facility with 2x4, 6-tube lighting fixtures at the
perimeter.
2. This is a complete paint and fix-up. All previously painted surfaces shall be prepped
and repainted including, but not limited to columns, door and doorframes, steel tubes,
exposed structural steel and roof decking to the Sales Area, CMU walls, GWB walls,
soffits, bollards, guardrails, handrails, steel stair stringers and risers, etc.
3. Upgrade telephone system to new system provided by Kroger, installed by Contractor.
Contractor shall provide conduits, pull strings, JB, etc.
4. Remove all existing Market Center décor including wall covering, decorative pilasters,
aisle markers, Deli murals, Produce murals, Seafood murals, and Dairy murals and all
metal corrugated panels and all lighted signs.
5. Install new vinyl base throughout.
6. Kroger will provide vinyl wall covering; Contractor shall install and provide quantities.
7. Install new column wraps throughout Sales area and prep areas. Provide ASD-157 and
paint.
8. Paint all exposed structural steel beams, joist, metal deck, cross bracing, duct work,
diffusers, conduit, plumbing, insulated refrigerant piping, etc. on perishable side . See
A1.6
9. Remove all existing equipment as indicated on plans including shelving, sanitizing
units, etc. Install new equipment and finishes and reinstall wall-mounted equipment
after completion. Provide blocking as required for secure support.
10. Provide signs at “Emergency Exit only” to read, “ Push panic bar and alarm will sound
for 15 seconds and door will open.”
11. Contractor shall be responsible for providing his own gondola movers to move 176 LF
of gondolas at one time.
12. Contractor shall readjust and relevel all existing ACT and grid to remain. Contractor
shall provide additional wire ties, clips, splices and repairs to provide flat, level and
secure ceiling tiles and grid system.
13. Lower all clean outs, hose bibb floor boxes, electrical boxes, and cover plates that are
going to be exposed to the new stained concrete.
14. Left side storage area: Contractor shall straighten out all existing 6”, 20 ga steel studs
from finish floor to metal deck and reattach drywall to newly positioned steel studs and
Contractor shall install 5/8” fire-treated, pressure-treated plywood from finish floor to
10’ AFF.
Exterior
15. Exterior – currently Market Center. To be painted (existing) by landlord. Color shall
be Turkish Coffee scheme.
16. Fuel center existing at this location.
17. Fill in nes-cart stop full width of building against wall and at curb.
18. Landlord responsibility to do repairs on Parking Lot and Parking Lot lighting.
19. Landlord responsibility to do repairs on roof and exterior painting and repairs.
Contractor shall provide all new roof openings.
20. Exterior painting of all exposed structural steel and canopy by landlord. Existing
21. Exterior painting of all exposed new structural steel and canopy by Contractor.
Turkish Coffee design.
22. New auto entrance doors by Kroger; installed by Kroger. Power disconnect and
reconnect by Contractor. Glazing by Contractor.
23. Install walk-up window and additional lighting at walk-up window.
24. Contractor painting shall include canopy trusses, canopy fascia, steel structural angle
for the canopy, downspouts, gutter boxes, medallions, trusses, exposed structural steel
tubes, fence posts and pickets.
25. Remove existing bird netting at approximately 10’ AFF and reinstall at approximately
17’ AFF. Match height of steel tube beam.
Entrance Vestibule(s)
26. Note: all storefront is clear anodized. All existing structural tubes shall be painted new
color. (interior) Do not paint corrugated metal panels.
27. Remove Sensormatic and reinstall conduits under slab and inside wall and reinstall
Sensormatic anti-theft system.
28. Paint all structural steel new Bountiful color on the interior vestibule (except roof
structure).
29. Provide and install glass and glazing in new doors provided and installed by Kroger.
30. Provide four (4) duplex receptacles for battery charger wheel chair carts.
31. Remove and replace all auto doors by Kroger. Glazing and power disconnect and
reconnect by Contractor.
32. Left-hand vestibule: install new sliding auto doors. Provide new structural steel frame
and tube system typically being utilized. Remove and reinstall concrete slab as
necessary for providing a level concrete floor at the doors.
48. Remove QT cove base at Deli Cooler/Freezer and install stainless steel base. Provided
by Kroger installed by GC.
Produce Department
49. Return air ducts to remain as is. Paint only.
50. Install décor.
51. Provide water for new misting system. Misting system provided and installed by
Kroger. Provide valved water line and power by Contractor.
52. Relocate existing suspended light fixture and install focus on freshness/accent lighting.
Provide removed/relocated light fixtures as supplemental lighting.
53. Remove abandoned bollard floor inserts and patch concrete floor with epoxy grout.
54. Install GWB atop furring atop CMU to bottom of barjoist.
Produce Prep
55. Ceiling tile and grid in good condition.
56. Provide ten (10) washable ceiling tiles. Install per Kroger Engineer’s direction.
57. Paint existing CMU walls and curb. Epoxy paint.
58. Paint door and doorframes.
59. Electrostatic paint (by Kroger) east side of Seafood cooler exposed to Produce Prep
Room.
60. Install new double-acting doors provided by Kroger.
61. Modify/provide water supply lines and electrical for Glacier water display.
62. Paint Exit striping on floor to Exit door. (Back of House)
63. Provide new Marlite wainscot and paint above surrounds at the entrance from Sales to
Produce Prep and install new doors.
64. Remove existing prep equipment and install new as indicated.
Meat/Seafood Area
65. Soffit line-up to remain. Provide GWB.
66. Demo wall, 3-compartment sink and low wall at Seafood Prep area. Install new or
relocate as indicated on fixture plan.
67. Provide new CT décor.
68. Remove existing trench grates at existing entrance from Sales Area to Prep area and
add new as indicated.
69. Ceiling grid and tile in fair condition. Supplement per new design.
70. Modify HVAC per new layout.
71. Modify new Seafood Exhaust system to accommodate new design.
Dairy Area
98. Install new Bountiful décor on major drop.
99. Paint door and frame.
100. Modify return air atop existing wall cases.
New Pharmacy
102. Install new HVAC. RTU is Kroger provided; installed by Contractor.
103. Install walk-up window provided by Kroger. Provide exterior lighting at walk-up
window to match existing exterior wall-mounted fixtures.
Existing Pharmacy
104. Existing Pharmacy to be demolished in its entirety including electrical, casework,
soffits, ceiling, lights, counters, doors, grilles, etc.
Existing/New Floral
111. Provide or rework sprinkler heads.
112. Install new suspended (TR) lighting.
Accounting Room
116. Paint door and doorframes.
117. Install additional HVAC. (
Mezzanine
118. Remove all existing carpet, vinyl base and vinyl wall covering. Install new vinyl wall
covering throughout. Vinyl wall covering provided by Kroger.
119. Provide vinyl base.
120. Install new carpet; provided by Kroger; installed by Contractor.
121. Paint storage room area at mezzanine.
122. Paint door(s) and doorframes.
123. Paint structural steel metal deck and structural steel bar joists and utilities.
124. Paint stair stringers and risers and provide new rubber treads with code approved striping
at nosing.
ECR Room
125. Provide 12”x24” louver in existing door for return air.
126. Remove existing wall covering and prep wall and install new vinyl wall covering
provided by Kroger.
127. Install new 2x4 ACT and grid.
128. Reinstall two (2) existing 2x4 light fixtures.
END OF SECTION 00 73 01
A. The Contractor shall provide the following testing and inspections including, but not limited
to:
1. Moisture testing for floor tile installation.
2. Ph testing for floor tile installation.
3. Erosion Control and all NPDES weekly inspections and testing. (if
applicable)
4. Test and Balance HVAC (Specific new unit by Contractor) (Entire Building
by Kroger)
5. All required county and state inspections to obtain Certificate of Occupancy.
6. All testing and inspections required to locate all existing underground or
overhead utilities.
7. All plumbing/pressurizing and testing as specified or as required by codes
and AHJ.
8. All testing and inspections as specified throughout the documents.
9. All electrical testing and inspections as required by the NEC and AHJ.
10. All testing of all equipment installed by Contractor.
11. Fire Alarm testing and certification.
12. Sprinkler testing and certification.
13. Contractor shall coordinate all “Special Inspections” as required by codes,
AHJ or Owner requirements.
14. Asbestos testing and inspections as required by any local, state, and/or
federal law, ordinance, and/or rule (if testing has not been provided by
Kroger). Contractor shall submit any and all forms and/or certifications to
all local, state, and/or federal agencies as required.
B. The Kroger Company will provide the following testing and inspections:
1. Geotechnical and Compaction testing.
2. Concrete testing.
3. Roof inspections and testing.
4. Asbestos testing as required by AHJ.
5. Asphalt testing and inspections.
END OF SECTION 00 73 02
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Owner will not permit any person or organization to jeopardize the safety or well-being of
any employee or invitee on the Owner’s premises because of the willful or negligent disregard
or negligence of sound, established safety rules. All federal, state, local, and OSHA safety rules
must be observed.
B. All OSHA standards applicable to the Project, methods and locations must be followed. Any
noticed infractions or violations of these standards will be brought to the attention of the person
in charge for immediate correction.
C. The Contractor shall provide and require the use of conventional fall protection, i.e. personal
fall arrest systems, safety net systems or guardrails systems as defined in 29 CFR 1926.502
when its employees are performing construction work that is in excess of six feet above a lower
level.
D. Safety to all building occupants is of the highest and utmost importance and the Contractor shall
take all means necessary to prevent injury to any person or persons within the boundary of the
project. The means necessary shall include but not be limited to all building occupants,
construction safety which may result in injury to a person or persons, signage which shall direct
occupants clearly away from construction areas and hazard areas.
END OF SECTION 00 73 19
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. General interior finishes and colors for various products specified for the Project not
including interior décor finishes and colors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Refer to specific Sections of the specifications for product and installation requirements
of products listed in this Section.
2. For finishes and colors in areas of the store typically visible and accessible to customers
and associated with interior décor package, see Division 01 Section “Décor Interior
Finishes and Colors.”
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General Interior Finishes and Colors: All finishes and colors in areas of store not typically
accessible or visible to customers. This includes back rooms, break rooms, store offices,
enclosed prep areas. This also includes floors and ceilings in open prep areas.
B. Décor Interior Finishes and Colors: All finishes and colors in areas of the store typically visible
and accessible to customers. This includes sales area, open prep areas (excluding flooring and
ceilings), pharmacy, and public toilet rooms.
B. The products listed in this Section are the “Basis of Design” products. When proposing
products other than the “Basis of Design” products, furnish the proposed product’s actual
samples, data sheets, and certificates of performance along with the “Basis of Design” product’s
actual samples, data sheets, and certificates of performance as a comparison.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. See Drawings.
END OF SECTION 01 61 12
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Interior finishes and colors for various products specified for interior décor finishes and
colors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Refer to specific Sections of the specifications for product and installation requirements
of products listed in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Décor Interior Finishes and Colors: All finishes and colors in areas of the store typically visible
and accessible to customers. This includes sales area, open prep areas (excluding flooring and
ceilings), pharmacy, and public toilet rooms.
B. General Interior Finishes and Colors: All finishes and colors in areas of store not typically
accessible or visible to customers. This includes back rooms, break rooms, store offices,
enclosed prep areas. This also includes floors and ceilings in open prep areas.
B. The products listed in this Section are the “Basis of Design” products. When proposing
products other than the “Basis of Design” products, furnish the proposed product’s actual
samples, data sheets, and certificates of performance along with the “Basis of Design” product’s
actual samples, data sheets, and certificates of performance as a comparison.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. SEE DRAWINGS.
END OF SECTION 01 61 13
A. The following pages contain Kroger’s Direct Buy Vendor Contact List. For more information
on Owner provided products contact the vendor identified on the list.
END OF SECTION 01 64 00
Bumpers / Rub Rails - Rigid PVC Kristina Fossa (Vendor) Dan Perica
McCue Corporation, 35 Congress Street, Salem, MA 01970 (513) 762-1376
4 Phone (800) 800-8503 ext.277
Fax (978) 741-2542
Email kfossa@mccuecorp.com
Cabinet, Restroom Sanitizer Debbie Witzl (Vendor) Dan Perica
National Cart Co., Inc., 3125 Boschertown Road, St. Charles, MO 63301 (513) 762-1376
2 Phone (800) 455-3802 ext. 160
Fax (636) 723-4477
Email debbie.witzl@nationalcart.com
Carpet, Padded Tile Chuck Timmerman (Vendor) Amanda Starzec
Interface Flooring System, Inc., 1503 Orchard Hill Road, Lagrange, GA 30241 (513) 762-4150
3 Phone (513) 939-0668 Cell (513) 470-1123
Fax (513) 939-0669
Email chuck.timmerman@interfaceflor.com
Carpeting Marie Rogers (Vendor) Amanda Starzec
Mohawk Industries, 443 Nathaniel Drive, East Dublin, GA 31027 (513) 762-4150
5 Phone (800) 553-6045 ext. 36625
Fax (706) 422-6776
Email: Marie_Rogers@mohawkind.com
Case Protectors Debbie Witzl (Vendor) Dan Perica
and Removable Stainless Posts National Cart Co., Inc., 3125 Boschertown Road, St. Charles, MO 63301 (513) 762-1376
2 Phone (800) 455-3802 ext. 160
Fax (636) 723-4477
Email debbie.witzl@nationalcart.com
Ceramic Tile - Custom Marsha McCauley
Fresh Fare Daltile Architectural Representative
Kroger supplied; 4650 Lake Forest Dr.
GC installed Cincinnati, Ohio 45242
CT-403 and CT-405 only 513-759-9325 Phone/Fax
marsha.mccauley@daltile.com
Concrete Polishing Jim Gasper (Vendor) Amanda Starzec
QuestMark, 12 Grandview Circle, Canonsburg, PA 15317 (513) 762-4150
4 to 6 Phone (800) 423-5667 Ext. 1672 or (724) 743-7020
Fax (724) 743-7029
Email James.Gasper@CentiMark.com
Controls Package Jim Dock (Vendor - Remodels Equipment - stores that already have CPC systems)
Computer Process Controls (CPC), 1640 Airport Road, Suite 105, Kennesaw, GA 30144
Phone: (770) 425-2724 Cell: (770) 262-1851
Fax (770) 425-9319
Email Jim.Dock@Emerson.com
3 Bob Lewis (Vendor - New Store Equipment) Dan Perica
Danfoss, 11655 Crossroads Circle, Baltimore, MD 21220-2863 (513) 762-1376
Phone: (410) 513-1085 Cell: (410) 736-1162
Fax: 410-931-0679
Email BobLewis@Danfoss.com
Curbs, Roof Dean Cleondis (Vendor) Dan Perica
AES Industries Inc., 2171 Highway 229, P.O. Box 781147, Tallassee, AL 36078 (513) 762-1376
For Fans, HVAC, RTU, and Skylights 2 Phone (800) 786-0402 or (334) 283-6578 Ext. 319
Fax (334) 283-5447
Email dcleondis@aescurb.com
Décor, Bountiful Suzanne Wesoloski (Drawings Vendor) Amanda Starzec
14 business Design Fabrications, 32400 Industrial Drive, Madison Heights, MI 48071 (513) 762-4150
Phone (248) 597-0988
days Fax (248) 597-0989
Email swesoloski@dfabdesign.com
Terry Pappas (East Coast Vendor)
Shaw & Slavsky, 13821 Elmira Avenue, Detroit, MI 48227-3099
4 Phone (800) 521-7527 Ext. 117 or (313) 834-3990
Fax (313) 834-2680
Email tpappas@shawandslavsky.com
Décor, Flagship/Script Steve Hollis (Vendor) Amanda Starzec
Design Fabrications Inc., 1100 E. Mandoline Ave., Suite 100, Madison Heights, MI 48071 (513) 762-4150
4 Phone (800) 968-9440 or (248) 597-0988 ext. 270
Fax (248) 597-0989
Email shollis@dfabdesign.com
Décor, Fresh Fare Steve Hollis (Vendor) Amanda Starzec
Design Fabrications, Inc., 1100 E. Mandoline Ave., Suite 100, Madison Heights, MI 48071 (513) 762-4150
5 Phone 800-968-9440 or (248) 597-0988 ext. 270
Fax 248-597-0989
Email shollis@dfabdesign.com
Décor, Marketplace Doug Waddell (Vendor) Amanda Starzec
Shaw & Slavsky, 13821 Elmira Avenue, Detroit, MI 48227-3099 (513) 762-4150
5 Phone (800) 521-7527 Ext. 124 or (313) 834-3990
Fax (313) 834-2680
Email dwaddell@shawandslavsky.com
Diffusers, Drop Box Dean Cleondis (Vendor) Dan Perica
AES Industries Inc., 2171 Highway 229, P.O. Box 781147, Tallassee, AL 36078 (513) 762-1376
4 Phone (800) 786-0402 or (334) 283-6578 Ext. 319
Fax (334) 283-5447
Email dcleondis@aescurb.com
Doors, Sectional & Overhead Coiling Michelle Beckler (Vendor) Greg Goosman
2-4 Wayne-Dalton Garage Door Systems, 1 Door Drive, P.O. Box 67, Mt. Hope, OH 44660 (513) 762-4497
Phone (888) 767-6437 or 800-598-3667 ext. 5
Fax (330) 763-8038
Email mbeckler@wayne-dalton.com
Doors, Traffic & Walk-In Cooler/Freezer Cathy Garrison (Vendor) Amanda Starzec
Chase Industries, Inc., 10021 Commerce Park Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45246 (513) 762-4150
4 Phone: (800) 543-4455 ext. 2984
Fax: (800) 245-7045
Email: chasekrogermailbox@chasedoors.com
Exhaust Hood - Fire Suppression System Wes Henson (Vendor) Dan Perica
Captive-Aire Systems Inc., 4641 Paragon Park, Raleigh, NC 27616 (513) 762-1376
3 Phone (800) 334-9256 or (919) 882-2410 ext. 316
Fax (919) 227-5942
Email Wes.Henson@captiveaire.com
Fans, Exhaust & Ventilation Wes Henson (Vendor) Dan Perica
Captive-Aire Systems Inc., 4641 Paragon Park, Raleigh, NC 27616 (513) 762-1376
3 Phone (800) 334-9256 or (919) 882-2410 ext. 316
Fax (919) 227-5942
Email wes.henson@captiveaire.com
Flooring System, Entrance Greg Griffin (Vendor) Amanda Starzec
Portico Systems, 1200 Woodruff Road, Bld. A3, Greenville, SC 29607 (513) 762-4150
4 Phone 864-527-3148 or 877-285-8899 Cell: 864-430-3997
Fax 864-527-3149
Email ggriffin@porticosystems.com
Flooring, Faux Wood Vinyl Jamie LaCoe (Vendor) Amanda Starzec
Ohio Valley Flooring, 6635 E. 30th Street, Suite C, Indianapolis, IN 46219 (513) 762-4150
(Konnecto) 2 Phone (513) 527-9541
Fax (513) 527-9561
Email jamie.lacoe@ovf.com
Flooring, VCT Shelley Ackerman (Vendor) Amanda Starzec
Armstrong World Industries, Inc., 2500 Columbia Ave., P.O. Box 3001, Lancaster, PA 17604-3001 (513) 762-4150
3 Phone (800) 356-9301 Ext. 8793
Fax (585) 787-2751
Email TFK_Team@armstrong.com
Heaters, Unit Steve Wertz (Vendor) Dan Perica
Stoermer-Anderson, 3818 Red Bank Road, Cincinnati, OH 45227 (513) 762-1376
3 Phone (513) 527-2300 ext. 101
Fax (513) 527-2306
Email modine@stoermer-anderson.com
HVAC Rooftop Units and Air Handlers Steve Goldenberg (Vendor) Dan Perica
AC Equipment Representatives, Inc., 1300 N. Pennsylvania Street, Indianapolis, IN 46202 (513) 762-1376
10 to 12 Phone (317) 921-8825
Fax (317) 921-8826
Email steveg@acequipmentreps.com
Lamps & Ballasts Lil Howell (Vendor) Amanda Starzec
Sylvania (513) 762-4150
Customer Service Center
2 Phone: 800-553-2548
FAX: 866-674-4785
Email: ncssc.kroger@sylvania.com
Light Fixtures, Interior John "Andy" Wortmann (Performs Take-Off) Amanda Starzec
Cooper Lighting, 1121 Highway 74 South, Peachtree City, GA 30269 (513) 762-4150
Phone (770) 486-4221 Cell: (678) 472-2251
Fax (770) 486-3049
Email john.wortmann@cooperindustries.com
***6 Renee Miller (Supplies Fixtures) Amanda Starzec
Graybar Electric Co., 1022 W. 8th Street, Cincinnati, OH 45203 (513) 762-4150
Phone (800) 846-3230 or (513) 621-0600
Fax (513) 621-0710
Email CIOHKroger@graybar.com
Coordinates with architect to have the HVAC Single Line Plan Drawing (with
equipment schedule) posted to the project folder on Sitefolio.
3a Project Manager (PM) Replacements (excluding remodel projects) - Completes the "request" portion of
the Master DB Equipment Request Letter and posts to the project folder on
Sitefolio along with a .doc file containing the Make/Model of existing unit. Please be
sure to include as much information as possible regarding replacement unit
requirements.
4 Vendor Reviews the information and compares it to the “standard” design and list of approved
items and specifications. Prepares the equipment submittals with materials list and
posts to project folder on Sitefolio. Emails PM to alert him as to availability of
submittals. (Skip step 5 and proceed to step 6)
14 Vendor Makes arrangements with local authorized specialist and confirms start-up date.
(Specialist to perform start-up and submit paperwork to GC for final approval and
acceptance.)
15 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
Delivery date should be based on the GC’s construction schedule and Vendor lead
time.
3 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor of any delivery date changes.
4 Vendor Receives purchase order and ships product as designated.
5 General Contractor (GC) Receives product, provides inspection, and notifies Vendor & PM of missing and/or
damaged materials within 48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed damage).
Trucking company / product manufacturer policy will not allow processing of claims
filed beyond this time frame.
6 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, installation, and removal of any salvage materials.
7 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
Delivery date indicated on letter should be based on the GC’s construction schedule and
Vendor lead time.
4 Vendor Produces takeoff based on Floor Finish Plan Drawing and posts to project folder on
Sitefolio and emails PM to alert him to the availability of the takeoff. Drawing must be in
".dwf" format.
If non-standard design items are found, G.O. Contact is emailed list of carpets for
review/changes/approval.
5 G.O. Contact Reviews non-standard design items and consults with PM for resolution.
6 Project Manager (PM) Creates corporate PO from take-off. Each carpet is to be ordered line by line utilizing item
numbers indicated on the take-off.
060-00005841 Padded Carpet Tile 19.69IN X 19.69IN SQ for RX & Customer Service
Office only. Carpet to be ordered in full cartons (12 tiles per carton = 3.59 sq yds) style:
Turbulence, color no.: 6081. Cushionbac Plus .425 IN., non-directional installation.
060-00005842 Releasable adhesive 2000, 1 Gal pail (approx 40 sq yd spread)
060-00005843 Releasable Adhesive 2000, 4 Gal pail (approx 160 sq yd spread)
7 Vendor Receives purchase order(s) and ensures timely processing of order and delivery to the
field. Shipping agent to contact GC no later than 24 hours prior to delivery.
8 General Contractor (GC) Receives product and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the manifest and
the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the manifest. Vendor
and PM to be notified of discrepancies/damaged materials within 48 hours after delivery
(20 days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the trucking company) will process claim.
Trucking company/equipment manufacturer will not honor claims filed beyond this time
frame.
9 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring and removal of any salvage materials.
10 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and Trisha Ramsey of any Delivery Date Changes . Notification must
be made far enough in advance of ship date(s) for change to be implemented. Change
must be a minimum of two weeks.
11 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Trisha Ramsey of any Order Changes that occur after PO has been processed.
Order can not be changed by request of a non-Kroger employee (i.e. GC) or by Vendor.
PO may only changed by G.O. at PM's request.
12 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Trisha Ramsey of any Order Cancellations . Notification must take place a
minimum of two weeks prior to requested delivery date. PO may only be canceled by G.O.
at PM's request.
13 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty Claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
All carpet types are to be designated by the carpet finish which is listed under the product
finishes and colors found in the G.O. Building Specifications.
Delivery date indicated on letter should be based on the GC’s construction schedule and
Vendor lead time.
3a Project Manager (PM) Minor Remodel Projects: Creates PO using corporate item(s) from the list below:
Carpet adhesive and seam sealer should be ordered along with the carpeting.
Delivery date should be based on GC’s construction schedule and Vendor lead time.
4 Vendor New & Major Remodel Projects: After obtaining both the DB Equipment Request
Letter and the Floor Finish Plan Drawing from Sitefolio, reviews information and
compares drawings to the standard design and list of approved carpets.
If non-standard design items are found, G.O. Contact is emailed list of carpets for
review/changes/approval.
5 G.O. Contact Reviews non-standard design items and consults with PM for resolution.
6 Project Manager (PM) Creates requisition from take-off. Each carpet is to be ordered line by line utilizing item
numbers indicated on the take-off.
NOTE: No DB Equipment Request Letter needs to be sent to this Vendor. Product can
be purchased directly through Pnet. No drawings are needed by the Vendor. No quote is
required.
2 Project Manager (PM) New, Major & Minor Remodel Projects: Creates PO using the following corporate
item(s):
Delivery date should be based on GC’s construction schedule and Vendor lead time.
NOTE: To save freight, cart corrals and restroom sanitizer cabinet (also by National Cart
Co.) should be ordered along with the case protectors on the same PO.
3 Vendor Receives purchase order(s) and ensures timely processing of order and delivery to the
field. If indicated on the PO, shipping agent to contact GC no later than 24 hours prior to
delivery.
4 General Contractor (GC) Receives product and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the manifest and
the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the manifest. Vendor
and PM to be notified of discrepancies/damaged materials within 48 hours after delivery (20
days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the trucking company) will process claim.
Trucking company/equipment manufacturer will not honor claims filed beyond this time
frame.
5 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring and removal of any salvage materials.
6 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and Trisha Ramsey of Delivery Date Change. Notification must take
place a minimum of two weeks prior to requested delivery date and change must be a
minimum of two weeks.
7 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Trisha Ramsey of any Order Changes that occur after PO has been processed.
Order can not be changed by a non-Kroger employee (i.e. GC) or by Vendor. PO must be
changed by G.O. at PM's request.
8 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Trisha Ramsey of any Order Cancellations . Notification must take place a
minimum of two weeks prior to requested delivery date. PO can only be canceled by G.O.
at PM's request.
9 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty Claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
4 Project Manager (PM) Creates PO using corporate items # 060-00044540 thru 060-00044551 and
allowing 4 to 6 weeks lead time from the date PO is received by Vendor.
5 General Contractor (GC) Ensures that concrete has cured for 28 days before polishing begins.
Ensures all joints have been filled before polishing begins.
Ensures work area is free of obstacles.
Ensures work area is broom swept and scrubbed clean.
Ensures store has no uncovered openings through doors, windows or skylights
to be installed.
Supplies adequate ventilation, water and heat.
Permanent lighting should already be installed. If not, GC should provide
temporary lighting equal/approximate to foot-candle reading of the permanent
lighting.
For New Stores, ensures access to power, via licensed electrician and provides
access and connection to building power from switchgear.
For Remodels, power using vendor-supplied generators.
Addresses whether Gondola shelving will be moved for machine polish or will be
hand polished by vendor.
NOTE: For new construction, average project completion time is 7 to 10 days. For remodels, Vendor must be
given a minimum of 2000-4000 square feet nightly for pricing to remain valid. This pricing is based on one
mobilization.
COMMENTS : If additional work is required to correct defect in concrete placement/finishing above and beyond
the Scope of Work stated below, a separate quote will be supplied to cover this.
Scope of Work:
* Install QuestMark's CM5017 Concrete Densifier to concrete.
* Mechanically grind floor surface with # 100 grit resin bonded diamonds to begin the process of creating
the initial shine.
* Grind floor surface with # 200 grit resin bonded diamonds to finish the process of providing the initial
shine.
Printed: 9/29/2009 11:44 AM Direct_Buy_Vendor_Contact_List _and_Procedure.xls 1 of 2
* Start the polishing process utilizing # 400 grit resin bonded diamonds to improve the shine and remove
swirls in the concrete.
* Continue the polishing process utilizing # 800 grit resin bonded diamonds to improve the shine and
remove swirls in the concrete.
* Install QuestMark's DiamondGaurd Plus concrete densifier into concrete. This product will enhance the
overall performance of the DiamondQuest System.
* Resume the polishing process utilizing # 1500 grit DiamondGaurd Pad and burnisher in order to heat
cure the DiamondGaurd Plus and provide the final shine.
* Perform Gloss Meter Reading to insure a measurement of 45-60 is reached.
* Treat Produce area with non-slip treatment Trusty Step
* Perform Slip Coefficient testing
* Perform Job Completion checklist
Matt Hodge (G.O. Contact) Jim Dock (Vendor - Remodels Equipment - stores that already have CPC systems)
The Kroger Co. Computer Process Controls (CPC), 1640 Airport Road, Suite 105, Kennesaw, GA 30144
1014 Vine Street, Cincinnati, OH 45202 Phone: (770) 425-2724 Cell: (770) 262-1851
Phone (513) 762-4567 Fax (770) 425-9319
Fax (513) 762-4012 Email Jim.Dock@Emerson.com
Email matthew.hodge@kroger.com
Bob Lewis (Vendor - New Store Equipment)
Danfoss, 11655 Crossroads Circle, Baltimore, MD 21220-2863
Phone: (410) 513-1085 Cell: (410) 736-1162
Fax: 410-931-0679
Email BobLewis@Danfoss.com
NOTE: New Stores are to receive Danfoss equipment. Use CPC equipment if
project has existing CPC system.
For New Stores see Best Practice 94A for Danfoss Pnet Item Numbers
For Remodels see Best Practice 94B for CPC Pnet Item Numbers
Delivery date should be based on the GC’s construction schedule and Vendor lead
time.
3 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and Trisha Ramsey of any Delivery Date Changes .
4 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and Trisha Ramsey of any Order Changes that occur after PO has
been processed. Order can not be changed by a non-Kroger employee (i.e. GC) or
by Vendor. PO must be changed by G.O. at PM's request.
5 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and Trisha Ramsey of any Order Cancellations . Notification must
take place a minimum of two weeks prior to requested delivery date. PO can only be
canceled by G.O. at PM's request.
6 Vendor Receives purchase order and ships equipment as designated.
7 General Contractor (GC) Receives product and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the manifest
and the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the manifest.
Vendor and PM to be notified of discrepancies/damaged materials within 48 hours
after delivery (20 days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the trucking company)
will process claim. Trucking company/equipment manufacturer will not honor claims
filed beyond this time frame.
8 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, installation, and removal of any salvage materials.
9 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty Claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
Delivery date should be based on GC’s construction schedule and Vendor lead time.
4 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and Trisha Ramsey of any delivery date changes.
5 Vendor Receives purchase order and ships equipment as designated.
6 General Contractor (GC) Receives equipment and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the manifest
and the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the manifest.
Vendor and PM to be notified of discrepancies / damaged materials within 48 hours after
delivery (20 days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the trucking company) will
process claim. Trucking company / equipment manufacturer will not honor claims
filed beyond this time frame.
7 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, installation, and removal of any salvage materials.
8 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
Delivery date indicated on letter should be based on GC's construction schedule and
Vendor lead time.
3 Project Manager (PM) Creates PO to Drawings Vendor for the drawings using Pnet # 060-00065100.
4 Drawings Vendor After receipt of the DB Equipment Request Letter, both sets of plans, and PO,
creates take-off (which will include all appropriate Pnet Item Numbers) and set of
drawings for permit within fourteen (14) business days and posts in project folder on
Sitefolio. Emails PM to alert him to their availability.
5 Project Manager (PM) Creates PO using corporate items numbers indicated on take-off.
6 Project Manager (PM) Notifies both the Vendor and Trisha Ramsey of any delivery date changes.
7 Vendor Receives purchase order and ships decor as designated.
8 Project Manager (PM) Creates PO to installation vendor (Design Fabrications for first store in each
division, after that to local installer) for cost of installation using corporate item
number 060-00065101.
9 Installation Vendor / Receives equipment and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the
General Contractor (GC) manifest and the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the
manifest. Vendor and PM to be notified of discrepancies / damaged materials within
48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the trucking
company) will process claim. Trucking company / equipment manufacturer will
not honor claims filed beyond this time frame.
10 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, and removal of any salvage materials.
11 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
NOTE: After hours labor is always available upon request. Night and Saturday labor is
1.5 times the normal rate and Sunday and holidays are 2 times the normal rate.
060-00042213
060-00042214
060-00042215
060-00042216
060-00042222
060-00042228
060-00042233
060-00042234
060-00042235
060-00042239
OR
for use with entrance flooring system use corporate item(s):
060-00042225
060-00042226
060-00042235
060-00042239
Installation date should be based on the GC’s construction schedule and Vendor lead
time. (Proceed to step 3)
2b Project Manager (PM) Non-Standard Order/Size (New Opening / New Door) - Subject to G.O. approval .
Initiates requisition using corporate item #060-00042242. Must also complete the
"request" portion of the Master DB Equipment Request Letter & post to project
folder in Sitefolio along with the floor plan, elevation plan, and door schedule - "red
lined" with actual dimensions, color and threshold type (i.e. tile to tile, carpet to
tile, etc.) if needed, and any information (sections/steel clearances) to support the
deviation to G.O. Contact. Emails Vendor to alert him to availability. If approved,
G.O. will convert the requisition to a Purchase Order and transmit to Vendor. (Proceed
to step 3)
060-00042224
060-00042236
060-00042240 and/or
060-00042241
060-00042242
Vendor will establish a contact at the division and arrange a site survey by the Local
Dealer/Installer. Local Dealer/Installer will verify existing conditions and Vendor will
quote (if required) any additional materials/labor (including demo) and posts to project
folder in Sitefolio for G.O. Contact. (Skip steps 6 & 8.)
3 Vendor Receives purchase order and coordinates installation with Local Dealer/Installer and
GC. Posts cut sheets/shop drawings to project folder on Sitefolio (for informational
purposes only, not to be returned). Emails PM to alert him to availability.
4 General Contractor (GC) Obtains approval of any installation date changes from PM and coordinates with
Vendor. Arranges for site survey with Local Dealer/Installer to confirm rough-in
dimensions with working drawings.
5 Vendor Notifies Trisha Ramsey of any installation date changes requested by GC.
6 Vendor (Local Dealer/Installer) – Receives equipment, provides inspection, handles any freight
damage claims, confirms actual install date with PM, performs installation (which
includes caulking door frames to building, calibration of doors, adjustment of sensors,
etc.) and handles removal of any salvage materials.
7 Vendor Contacts both GC and PM three weeks before due date indicated on PO to confirm
install date.
8 General Contractor (GC) Coordinates the installation of the glass with Local Dealer/Installer.
9 Vendor (Local Dealer/Installer) – Submits Job Completion Sheet (JCS) to GC (or division
contact in the case of old opening) for signature indicating final approval and
acceptance of installation.
10 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
3 Vendor Reviews the information and compares it to the "standard" design and list of
approved items and specifications, prepares the equipment submittals, materials list,
door/frame/hardware schedule, hardware cut sheets and posts to project folder on
Sitefolio within five (5) business days (or contact the Company Buyer if any
"nonstandard" items or if a questionable application or condition exists by next
business day). Emails PM to alert him to availability.
4 G.O. Contact Contacts PM to resolve any discrepancies.
5 Project Manager (PM) Reviews equipment submittals (shop drawings) and posts signed approval and/or red-
lined submittals to project folder on Sitefolio. Emails Vendor to alert him to
availability before lead time expires as specified above.
6 Vendor Receives approval and posts quotation in project folder on Sitefolio. Emails PM to
alert him to availability.
7 Project Manager (PM) Initiates PO using corporate item #060-00042221 before lead time expires.
8 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and Trisha Ramsey of any Delivery Date Changes.
9 Vendor Receives purchase order and ship equipment as designated. Shipping agent to
contact GC no later than 24 hours prior to delivery.
10 General Contractor (GC) Receives equipment and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the
manifest and the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the
manifest. Vendor and PM to be notified of discrepancies / damaged materials within
48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the trucking
company) will process claim. Trucking company / equipment manufacturer will
not honor claims filed beyond this time frame.
11 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, installation, and removal of any salvage materials.
12 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
13 Project Manager (PM) Contacts Vendor and requests re-key for all lock sets. Must specify brand (Schlage
or Best).
Delivery date should be based on the GC’s construction schedule and Vendor lead
time.
NOTE: Be sure to indicate the decor type & door color on PO.
4b Project Manager (PM) WW Projects (Non-Standard traffic doors, strip doors, cooler/freezer doors
and/or steel framing) - Completes the Direct Buy Order Request Form For
Double Action Traffic Doors available on Sitefolio and posts to project folder on
Sitefolio. Emails Vendor to alert him to availability.
4b Vendor Reviews Direct Buy Order Request form for Double Action Traffic Doors and
creates quote and posts to project folder on Sitefolio.
060-00042137,
060-00042135, and/or
060-00042138
Delivery date should be based on the GC’s construction schedule and Vendor lead
time. Quote number and date should be referenced on PO.
5 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and Trisha Ramsey in writing (email) of any Delivery Date
Changes . Notification must take place a minimum of two weeks prior to original
requested delivery date and change must be a minimum of one week.
6 Vendor Receives purchase order(s) and ensures timely processing of order(s) and delivery to
the field.
7 General Contractor (GC) Receives equipment and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the
manifest and the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the
manifest. Vendor and PM to be notified of discrepancies / damaged materials within
48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the trucking
company) will process claim. Trucking company / equipment manufacturer will
not honor claims filed beyond this time frame.
8 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, installation, and removal of any salvage materials.
9 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty Claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
Hoods: Kroger Supplied/GC Installed; Fire Suppression System: Kroger Supplied/Vendor Installed
060-00042248 Stainless steel to finish fourth side of standard wall mounted hood
060-00042249 2 ft x 4 ft stainless steel ceiling panel
060-00042301 Test and/or permit fees required for type 1 hoods
060-00042500 thru 060-00042548
Delivery date should be based on GC's construction schedule and Vendor lead time.
Orders containing a Type #1 hood also require item #060-00042301 - Test and/or
permit fees required (Qty 1, per project).
4 Vendor Receives purchase order and if applicable, prepares order details regarding Fire
Suppression System and transmits equipment posts to project folder on Sitefolio to
PM.
5 Vendor Contacts GC or Job Supervisor to confirm size of actual gas line being used (to
determine appropriate gas shutoff valve size) and posts quote to project folder on
Sitefolio. Emails PM to alert him to availability.
6 Project Manager (PM) If applicable, reviews equipment submittals regarding Fire Suppression System and
returns signed approval and/or red-lined submittals to Vendor by posting to project
folder on Sitefolio.
7 Project Manager (PM) Initiates PO for gas shutoff valve using corporate item #060-00042549. (To double
check accuracy of quote, prices are listed in the extended description.)
8 Project Manager (PM) Notifies GC, Vendor, and Trisha Ramsey of any Delivery Date Changes (hoods
only).
9 Vendor Ships hoods as designated and if applicable, arranges for local Fire Suppression
System installer (no later that 12-14 weeks prior to opening).
10 General Contractor (GC) Receives equipment and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the
manifest and the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the
manifest. Vendor and PM to be notified of discrepancies / damaged materials within
48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the trucking
company) will process claim. Trucking company / equipment manufacturer will
not honor claims filed beyond this time frame.
3 Project Manager (PM) New & Remodel Projects - Initiates PO using appropriate corporate item
number(s):
Delivery date should be based on GC's construction schedule and Vendor lead
time.
4 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and Trisha Ramsey of any Delivery Date Changes .
5 Vendor Receives purchase order and ships equipment as designated.
6 General Contractor (GC) Receives equipment and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the
manifest and the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on
the manifest. Vendor and PM to be notified of discrepancies / damaged materials
within 48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the
trucking company) will process claim. Trucking company / equipment
manufacturer will not honor claims filed beyond this time frame.
7 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, installation, and removal of any salvage materials.
8 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
NOTE: Be sure to set delivery date as close as possible to date vestibule will be
ready for install.
Delivery date(s) should be based on GC's construction schedule and Vendor lead
time.
NOTE: If VCT is to be shipped directly to the store, please ISSUE ONLY ONE PO
being sure to list delivery dates and quantities to be shipped for each delivery date in
the "More Description" field of the last item on the Req. This will ensure that the
product arrives when it's needed, and that all of the VCT used on a project will be
from the same dye lot.
2b Project Manager (PM) Non-Standard Order (Remodel) - Completes the "request" portion of the DB Equipment
Request Letter and posts to project folder on Sitefolio along with the Floor Finish Plan
Drawing with a delivery date based on the GC's construction schedule and Vendor lead
time. Emails Vendor to alert him to availability.
NOTE : Spot repairs - please use existing product Vendor for consistency of color
and quality.
NOTE: Change out of an entire department - must use current DB Vendor and
reference Floor Finish Schedule for appropriate color/pattern.
3 Vendor Creates take-off and posts in project folder in Sitefolio. Emails PM to alert him to availability.
4 Project Manager (PM) Receives take-off from Sitefolio and creates PO using any combination of the item numbers
below being sure to indicate quantities to be shipped for each delivery date in the notes
field:
NOTE: Vendor's take-off will not include any overages. It is up to the PM to decide if
additional cartons should be ordered for allowances and/or possible future repairs.
5 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and Trisha Ramsey of any Delivery Date Changes . Notification must
take place a minimum of two weeks prior to original requested delivery date and change
must be a minimum of two weeks.
6 Vendor Receives purchase order and ships equipment as designated. Shipping agent to contact
GC no later than 24 hours prior to delivery.
7 General Contractor (GC) Receives equipment and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the manifest and
the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the manifest. Vendor
and PM to be notified of discrepancies / damaged materials within 48 hours after delivery
(20 days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the trucking company) will process claim.
Trucking company / equipment manufacturer will not honor claims filed beyond this
time frame.
8 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, installation, and removal of any salvage materials.
9 General Contractor (GC) Handles any Warranty Claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
Coordinates with architect to have the HVAC Drawing Set (with equipment
schedule), R1/R2 and the .AEF file posted to project folder on Sitefolio. Emails
Vendor to alert him to availability.
4 Vendor Reviews the information and compares it to the “standard” design and list of approved
items and specifications. Prepares the quotation and equipment submittals with
materials list and posts to project folder on Sitefolio within five (5) business days.
Emails PM to alert him to availability. (Skip step 5 and proceed to step 6)
NOTE: Drop Box Diffusers are NOT supplied by AC Equipment with the HVAC
Rooftop Units. Diffusers are purchased from AES Industries using Pnet Item
Numbers 060-00042420 thru 060-00042444.
8 Vendor Receives purchase order (approval optional), ships equipment as designated.
Shipping agent to contact GC no later than 72 hours prior to delivery of unit(s).
NOTE: No DB Equipment Request Letter needs to be sent to this Vendor. No drawings are
needed by the Vendor. No quote is required. Product can be purchased directly through Pnet.
2b Project Manager (PM) Minor Remodel Projects: After manual count of lamps has been taken, creates PO for lamps
using corporate item(s):
Delivery date should be based on the GC’s construction schedule and Vendor lead time.
8 G.O. Receives and reviews all lamp PO's for approved Made-To-Order fixtures (nonstandard).
Completes PO by calculating quantities and cost, then transmits to Vendor.
9 Vendor Receives PO('s) and ensures timely processing of order and delivery to the field.
10 General Contractor (GC) Receives lamps and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the manifest and the actual
delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the manifest. GE and PM to be notified
of discrepancies / damaged materials within 48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed
damage). Sylvania (not the trucking company) will process claim. Trucking company /
equipment manufacturer will not honor claims filed beyond this time frame.
11 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, installation and removal of any salvage materials.
12 Project Manager Notifies Trisha Ramsey and Vendor of any Delivery Date Changes. Notification must take place
a minimum of two weeks prior to original requested delivery date and change must be a minimum
of two weeks.
13 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Trisha Ramsey of any Lamp Count Changes that occur after PO has been processed.
Orders can not be changed by a non-Kroger employee (i.e. GC, EC) or by Vendor. PO can only
be changed by G.O. at PM's request.
14 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Trisha Ramsey of any Cancelation of Orders . Notification must take place a minimum of
two weeks prior to original requested delivery date. PO can only be canceled by G.O. at PM's
request.
15 General Contractor (GC) Handles any Warranty Claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
Light Fixtures, Interior Direct Buy Procedure (revised 03/26/2010)
*** 6 weeks minimum lead time (1 week for take-off to be processed by Cooper Lighting, 1 week administrative, 4 weeks for equipment production
after receipt of purchase order. *** Made To Order (MTO) fixtures 1-2 additional weeks.)
NOTE: Cut sheets for standard light fixtures can be found on Sitefolio on the Direct Buy page
(Files/Capital/Purchasing/Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products Information/Lighting - Interior
Lighting Fixtures/Cut Sheets, Interior Lighting Fixtures).
Cut sheets for non-standard fixtures should be obtained from the project architect.
NOTE: After completing fixture order, be sure to order lamps from Sylvania Lighting.
Drawings are to be from the "Construction" or "Bid" set. Drawings from the "Permit" set are not
acceptable.
Electrical drawings should be in either AutoCAD (using the .dwg extension) or PDF format. All
external reference files ("xref") must be included or bound into the drawing. TIF files and paper
drawings are no longer acceptable.
Delivery date indicated on letter should be based on the GC’s construction schedule and Vendor
lead time.
3a Project Manager (PM) Minor Remodel Projects: After a physical count of the fixtures needed has been taken, creates
PO for the light fixtures using corporate item number(s):
Fixtures:
060-00040000 thru 060-00040007
060-00040020 thru 060-00040027
060-00043010 thru 060-00043075
060-00043077 thru 060-00043172
060-00043174 thru 060-00043186
Delivery date should be based on the GC’s construction schedule and Vendor lead time.
A take-off (a list of required fixtures and lamps) is then produced and a copy (without
pricing) is posted to the project folder on Sitefolio. Cooper Lighting emails both the PM and
Graybar of availability. This version of the take-off is for receiving delivery/taking inventory
of fixtures by EC.
4 Graybar Adds prices to take-off and posts to project folder on Sitefolio. Emails PM and Trisha Ramsey to
alert them of availability. This version of the take-off that includes prices is to be used to create the
PO(s).
5 Project Manager (PM) Creates PO for New Store from Graybar's take-off. Each light fixture is to be ordered line by line
utilizing Pnet item numbers indicated on the take-off.
6 G.O. Receives and reviews requisitions for all lamps for Made-To-Order (nonstandard) fixtures for
calculation of quantities and pricing.
7 Graybar Receives PO('s) and ensures timely processing of order and delivery to the field. Shipping agent to
contact GC no later than 24 hours prior to delivery.
8 General Contractor (GC) Receives equipment and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the Bill of Lading and
the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the Bill of Lading. Graybar
and PM to be notified of discrepancies / damaged materials within 48 hours after delivery (20 days
for concealed damage). Graybar will file and process the claim on Kroger's behalf (not the trucking
company). Trucking company / equipment manufacturer will not honor claims filed beyond
this time frame.
9 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, installation and removal of any salvage materials.
10 Project Manager Notifies Graybar and Trisha Ramsey of any Delivery Date Changes. Notification must take
place a minimum of two weeks prior to original requested delivery date and change must be a
minimum of two weeks.
11 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Graybar and Trisha Ramsey of any Fixture Count Changes that occur after PO has
been processed. Orders can not be changed by a non-Kroger employee (i.e. GC, EC) or by
Graybar/Cooper Lighting. PO can only be changed by G.O. at PM's request.
12 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Graybar and Trisha Ramsey of any Cancelation of Orders . Notification must take place
a minimum of two weeks prior to original requested delivery date. PO can only be canceled by G.O.
at PM's request.
13 General Contractor (GC) Handles any Warranty Claims (prior to store opening) directly with Graybar.
14 General Contractor (GC) All Hanging Hardware to be supplied by GC (except hanging hardware for Prudential fixtures
which is supplied by Graybar).
15 General Contractor (GC) Made-To-Order Fixtures (MTO's) already in production can not be canceled. Delivered MTO's
can not be returned.
060-00040950 - Toilet partitions per quote (includes grab bars for ADA stalls)
060-00040951 - Sanitary Napkin / Tampon Dispenser
060-00040952 - Sanitary napkin disposal receptacle
060-00040953 - Mirror with stainless frame, 18" x 36 1/4"
060-00040954 - Mirror with stainless frame, 10" x 24 1/4"
060-00040957 - Grab bar, 1-1/2in x 36in
060-00040958 - Grab bar, 1-1/2in x 42in
060-00040959 - Fastener kit for accessories for 8 stalls
060-00040960 - Grab bar, 1-1/2in x 18in
8 Vendor Receives purchase order and ships equipment to store or GC's warehouse as
indicated on the PO.
9 General Contractor (GC) Obtains approval of any installation date change from PM and coordinates with
Vendor.
10 (Local Dealer/Installer) Receives equipment and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the
manifest and the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the
manifest. Vendor and PM to be notified of discrepancies / damaged materials within
48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the trucking
company) will process claim. Trucking company / equipment manufacturer will
not honor claims filed beyond this time frame.
11 (Local Dealer/Installer) Performs installation, handles removal of any salvage materials and submits to GC for
final approval and acceptance.
12 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly withVendor.
Sitefolio path: Files / Capital / Purchasing / Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products
Information / Pipes, Copper Refrigeration / Refrigeration Copper Pipes FAQ's.
Delivery date indicated on letter should be based on GC's / IC's schedule and Vendor lead
time. (There are no freight costs as per agreement with the Vendor, however, a maximum
of 6 deliveries per site are allowed.)
4 Project Manager (PM) Initiates PO using corporate item # 060-00044550, based on initial take-off from IC /
Vendor.
5 Vendor Receives purchase order and ensures timely processing of order and delivery to the field.
Shipping agent to contact GC no later than 24 hours prior to delivery.
** If changes to the initial takeoff are required by the IC, any additional cost resulting
from such action will be shouldered by the IC. Vendor will request payment (Cash or
Credit Card) from the IC to process the PO. Cost increase due to inflation will be
shouldered by Kroger. **
6 General Contractor (GC) / Notifies PM, Vendor, and Trisha Ramsey of any Delivery Date Change. Notification
Installation Contractor (IC) must take place a minimum of two weeks prior to requested delivery date and change must
(Depending on your contract) be a minimum of two weeks.
NOTE: Changing delivery date may reset lead time (4 weeks). Confirm with Vendor.
7 General Contractor (GC) / Accepts delivery of pipes, fittings, insulation, etc. Provides inspection, takes inventory and
Installation Contractor (IC) notifies Vendor and PM of shortages within 24 hours. When signing for this shipment,
(Depending on your contract) PIECES must be counted and signed for at time of delivery. Signing for pallets or "subject
to later count" is not acceptable.
NOTE: Trucking company / Vendor will not process claims if above procedures are
not followed.
8 General Contractor (GC) / Handles warranty claims for "hidden damages" directly with Vendor upon discovery.
Installation Contractor (IC)
(Depending on your contract)
Matt Hodge (G.O. Contact) Ann Baker - VP, Senior Relationship Manager
The Kroger Co. Cummings Signs, 4560 Trousdale Drive, Nashville, TN 37204
1014 Vine Street, Cincinnati, OH 45202 Phone: 800-489-7446 ext. 358 Cell: 865-765-1266
Phone (513) 762-4567 Fax: 615-782-6699
Fax (513) 762-4012 Email: ann.baker@cummingssigns.com
Email matt.hodge@kroger.com
Stephanie Hall - Project Manager
Cummings Signs, 4560 Trousdale Drive, Nashville, TN 37204
Phone: 800-489-7446 ext. 315
Fax:
Email: stephanie.hall@cummingssigns.com
If quantity and style are unknown and a takeoff needs to be produced by the Vendor, PM
completes the "request" portion of the Master DB Equipment Request Letter and emails
letter and Front Elevation Drawing to Vendor or directs Vendor to Sitefolio in an email.
Receive installation quote from Vendor's appointed installation contractor and other local
installer(s). Award installation work to either installer. Signs to be shipped to IC, not the
store.
Delivery date indicated on letter should be based on the GC’s construction schedule and
Vendor lead time.
4 Vendor Produces takeoff to include all exterior signage, road sign/monument signage based on
Front Elevation Drawing and forwards email to PM.
If non-standard signs are found, Vendor provides quote and drawing / specification to PM.
5 G.O. Contact Reviews non-standard design items and consults with PM for resolution.
6 Project Manager (PM) Creates PO from take-off. Each item is to be ordered line by line utilizing Pnet item
numbers indicated on the take-off.
If IC is not Vendor's appointed installer, provides "Ship To" address and contact info.
Matt Hodge (G.O. Contact) Karyl Welsher (Processes Orders) Jimmy Owens (Technical Support - Reviews Drawings)
The Kroger Co. Nucor-Vulcraft Group, 6230 Shiloh Road, Suite 140, Alpharetta, GA 30005
1014 Vine Street, Cincinnati, OH 45202 Phone (800) 361-2604 or (678) 455-6553
Phone (513) 762-4567 Fax (678) 455-9216
Fax (513) 762-4012 Email kwelsher@vulcraft-al.com
Email matt.hodge@kroger.com
3 Project Manager (PM) New & Remodel Projects: Must complete the "request" portion of the Master DB
Equipment Request Letter and posts to project folder on Sitefolio with a delivery
date based on the GC’s construction schedule and Vendor lead time. Emails
Vendor to alert him to availability.
4 Vendor Reviews the information and compares it to the “standard” design and list of approved
items and specifications, prepares the equipment submittals with materials list and
posts to project folder on Sitefolio within five (5) business days (or contacts the G.O.
Contact if any “nonstandard” items or if a questionable application or condition exists
by next business day). Emails PM to alert him to availability.
4 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and Trisha Ramsey of any Delivery Date Changes in writing via
email.
5 Vendor Receives purchase order and ships product as designated.
6 General Contractor (GC) Receives equipment and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the
manifest and the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the
manifest. Vendor and PM to be notified of discrepancies / damaged materials within
48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the trucking
company) will process claim. Trucking company / equipment manufacturer will
not honor claims filed beyond this time frame.
7 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, installation, and removal of any salvage materials.
8 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
Walk-In Cooler / Freezer
& Rear Load Systems Direct Buy Procedure (last revised 01/21/10 )
6+ weeks (1 week to provide shop drawings, 1 week for shop drawings to be approved, 2 days to provide quote, 4 weeks for production
of panels and delivery to job site after receipt of Purchase Order) Kroger supplied; GC installed.
Delivery date indicated on letter should be based on GC's construction schedule and
Vendor lead time.
3 Vendors After receipt of Fixture Plans, develops shop drawings within five (5) business days and
posts in project folder on Sitefolio. Emails PM to alert him to availability and to request
approval.
4 Project Manager (PM) Approves shop drawings within five (5) busniess days (any delay longer than seven days,
will move out timeline accordingly) and posts initialed shop drawings in project folder on
Sitefolio.
5 Vendors Creates quote based on approved shop drawings within 48 hours and posts in project
folder on Sitefolio. Emails PM to alert him to availability and to request PO.
If non-standard items are found, G.O. Contact is emailed for review and resolution.
6 G.O. Contact Reviews non-standard items and consults with PM for resolution.
7 Project Manager (PM) Issues PO utilizing Pnet Item Numbers provided on quote.
Delivery date on PO should be based on the GC's construction schedule and Vendors'
lead time. Delivery date on PO is the date Vendor will adhere to.
For list of Walk-in Cooler Pnet Item Numbers refer to Best Practice # 72
(Files/Captila/Procurement/Best Practices/61 - 80/ 72 Walk-in Coolers).
For list of Rear Load System Pnet Item Numbers refer to quote or legends on F1 (Fixture
Plans).
NOTE: Vendor will not reconcile PO with quote. Please insure your order is placed
accurately.
8 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and G.O. Contact of any Delivery Date Changes .
9 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor and G.O. Contact of any Order Changes that occur after PO has been
processed. Order can not be changed by request of a non-Kroger employee (i.e. GC) or
by Vendor. PO may only changed by G.O. at PM's request.
Delivery date should be based on the GC’s construction schedule and Vendor lead
time. (Estimate of number of bolts needed may be performed by the subcontractor.)
NOTE: Most MDC item numbers are by the BOLT . (1 bolt of border = 50 linear
yards. 1 bolt of wallcovering = 30 linear yards.)
3 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Vendor of any Delivery Date Changes in writing via email.
4 Vendor Receives purchase order and ships product as designated.
5 General Contractor (GC) Receives equipment and provides inspection. Any discrepancies between the
manifest and the actual delivery and/or damaged materials are to be indicated on the
manifest. Vendor and PM to be notified of discrepancies / damaged materials within
48 hours after delivery (20 days for concealed damage). Vendor (not the trucking
company) will process claim. Trucking company / equipment manufacturer will
not honor claims filed beyond this time frame.
6 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, installation, and removal of any salvage materials.
7 General Contractor (GC) Handles any warranty claims (prior to store opening) directly with Vendor.
Wires for applications smaller than 100A (#14, #12, #10 THHN) are to be Copper. Wires
for applications of 100A and higher are to be Aluminum. Refer to the Copper/Aluminum
Wire Reference Sheet for equivalent wires on Sitefolio (Files/Capital/Purchasing/Direct Buy
Owner Furnished Products Information/Wire, Electrical).
NOTE: Aluminum wire is larger in diameter than copper for same amperage.
Therefore, when contractor is specifying aluminum as an alternate, he must make
sure that the conduit pipes are correctly sized (always up two sizes).
Any code related issues or special design requests MUST be coordinated through Matt
Hodge, G.O., Equipment Procurement, 513-762-4567 and John Fischer, G.O., Facility
Engineering, 513-698-1948.
2 Project Manager (PM) Emails blank "Electrical Wire Bid Takeoff" form to all GCs scheduled to submit bid.
3 General Contractor (GC) Forwards form via email to all ESs planning to provide a bid to GC.
4 Electrical Subcontractor (ES) Submits completed "Electrical Wire Bid Takeoff" form with bid to GC.
5 General Contractor (GC) Identifies all ESs providing bids in section 8 "Subcontractor Bid Listing" of Trade Proposal
Form and submits Trade Proposal to PM.
6 Project Manager (PM) Reviews Trade Proposals and requests selected GC's to submit specific ES "Electrical
Wire Bid Takeoff" forms to Vendor.
7 General Contractor (GC) Posts requested "Electrical Wire Bid Takeoff" forms to project folder on Sitefolio and emails
Vendor to alert him it availability.
Posts "Electrical Wire Bid Takeoff" form that was completed with bid to project folder on
Sitefolio and emails Vendor to alert him to availability (for pricing quote). GCs MUST use
Kroger form to eliminate errors; Vendor is instructed to reject all other formats.
NOTE: The "Electrical Wire Cuts" form must be completed and posted to project
folder on Sitefolio within 48 hours of PO date. Emails Vendor
(CIOHKroger@graybar.com) to alert him to availability.
!! NOTE: If the cost increased from the initial quote due to monthly price
adjustments, Kroger will shoulder the additional cost. If the cost increased due to
changes in the takeoff volume, Vendor will request payment (Cash or Credit Card)
from the EC to process the PO !!
14 Vendor Receives purchase order and ensures timely processing of order and delivery to the site or
as designated on the purchase order. Freight carrier to contact GC no later than 24 hours
prior to delivery.
15 General Contractor (GC) / Notifies Vendor of any Delivery Date Change in writing via email copying PM and Trisha
Electrical Subcontractor (ES) Ramsey. Notification must take place a minimum of two weeks prior to requested delivery
date and change must be a minimum of two weeks.
16 General Contractor (GC) / Accepts delivery of wire, conducts inspection, takes inventory, confirms count and notifies
Electrical Subcontractor (ES) Vendor and PM of shortages within 24 hours. When signing for this shipment, PIECES
(reels, coils, and/or boxes) must be counted and signed for at time of delivery.
SHORTAGES: Must be noted on Bill of Lading / Packing Slip. Signing for pallets or
"subject to later count" is not acceptable.
NOTE: Freight carrier / wire manufacturer will not process claims if above
procedures are not followed and documentation clearly signed and noted.
17 General Contractor (GE) / Handles warranty claims for "hidden or concealed damages" directly with Vendor upon
Electrical Subcontractor (ES) discovery and notifies PM within 21 days. DO NOT THROW PRODUCT AWAY without
Vendor approval. If product is to be returned, Vendor will supply RMA (Return Good
Authorization). Products should be returned within 48 hours.
18 General Contractor (GC) Provides safe harboring, installation and removal of any salvage materials.
19 Vendor Handles any warranty Claims directly with GC/EC and copies PM.
20 Project Manager (PM) Notifies Trisha Ramsey of any Cancellation of Orders . Notification must take place a
minimum of two (2) weeks prior to requested delivery date. PO will be canceled by G.O. at
PM's request only.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Miscellaneous items other than Direct Buy supplied and installed by Kroger.
2. Miscellaneous items other than Direct Buy supplied by Kroger and installed by
Contractor.
B. Related Sections:
1. Refer to specific Sections of the specifications for product and installation requirements.
Refer to Direct Buy Vendor Contact List and specified requirements.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Refer to specific Sections of the specifications or see Kroger Project Engineer for vendor
information and coordination.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
F. Checklane Power Poles. See Section 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS.
G. Emergency/back-up generator
J. Impact doors.
L. HVAC RTUs
M. Fans
N. Hoods
O. Controls
1. The Kroger Company will supply the following instrumentation and control devices for
HVAC :
a. Environmental control panel
b. Controller
c. Inside temperature sensor
d. Inside relative humidity sensor
e. Outside temperature sensor
f. Outside relative humidity sensor
g. Thermostats
h. Immersable temperature sensor
U. Rooftop air conditioning/air handling units with the following components and accessories
1. Direct-expansion cooling.
2. Electric-heating coils.
3. Gas furnace.
4. Integral, space temperature controls.
5. Roof curbs.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS KROGER SUPPLY AND INSTALL ITEMS (if applicable) includes the
following but is not limited to:
C. Exterior (Kroger) Misting System (Water and valves and power supplied by Contractor)
D. Produce Misting System & Tunes (Produce & Dairy) (Power and water by Contractor)
I. Protective Polish and protective polish application for resilient tile flooring.
J. Coffee Kiosk: Contractor shall provide and install finishes and make final electrical
connections to equipment and lighting. Fixtures set by Kroger (Load King).
L. Electrostatic Painting
END OF SECTION 01 64 01
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1) 1-877-276-7876
2) www.armstrong.com/environmental
2. A representative of the ceiling tile manufacturer recycling the ceiling material must
approve the ceiling material for reclamation.
3. Approved ceiling materials shall include:
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will be minimally disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Ceiling material being reclaimed shall not have come into contact or in any way contain
hazardous materials or special waste.
2. Ceiling material being reclaimed must be dry and free from debris.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of building.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
A. Recycler will pay for the return freight of full trailers, all of which are defined as a minimum of
30,000 square feet of approved material as follows:
1. Forty-four 4 foot (1219 mm) by 4 foot (1219 mm) pallets stacked with ceiling material to
4 foot (1219 mm) tall each and then stacked on top of each other in the trailer.
C. Package approved ceiling materials in a manner allowing both secure shipment by trailer and
the ability of ceiling tile manufacturer recycling ceiling tiles to safely inspect and unload the
trailers' contents. All approved ceiling materials sent to the ceiling tile manufacturer (recycler)
must be neatly stacked as follows:
1. 4 by 4 pallets stacked with ceiling materials to 4 feet tall each and then stacked on top of
each other in the trailer.
D. Neatly stack ceiling panels on 4 by 4 wooden pallets and secure them with bands or stretch
wrap for stable shipment. Pallets must be secured within trailers to prevent shifting in transit.
Carriers will provide load stabilizers.
E. It is recycler’s responsibility to ensure that only full trailer loads of approved ceiling materials
are shipped. Where the amount of approved ceiling materials from a site is insufficient for a full
trailer load, a local distributor or consolidator may elect to consolidate approved ceiling
materials in a secure and dry location, until a full trailer load is ready for shipment. The
consolidator will ensure that all such aggregate shipments are and remain clearly labeled as to
their origin and date of approval by a representative of the ceiling tile recycler.
F. The ceiling tile recycler retains ownership of approved ceiling materials until it is received and
accepted at the recycler’s reclaimation facility as defined by the terms of shipment, F.O.B. (Free
on board) destination, despite recycler’s payment of the freight costs for full trailer loads. While
the recycler-approved common carrier is not a party to this agreement, the following describes
their responsibilities:
1. The common carrier that the recycler has selected is responsible for the transport of the
approved ceiling materials from the pick up location to the recycler’s plant. This carrier is
an independent contractor utilized by the recycler and required to demonstrate general
liability insurance coverage that meets or exceeds industry standards.
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations.
B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Owner’s Representative, items may be
removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled
after selective demolition operations are complete.
A. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction that
are within footprint of new construction and extending 5 feet (1.5 m) outside footprint indicated
for new construction. Abandon below-grade construction outside this area
B. Existing Utilities: Demolish existing utilities and below-grade utility structures that are within
5 feet (1.5 m) outside footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon utilities outside this
area. Fill abandoned utility structures with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill
requirements in Contract Documents.
C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Locate and mark concrete where underground utilities andother
items are to be located. Saw-cut into 2 by 2 foot (610 by 610 mm) sections and remove without
jack hammering.
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the
methods recommended by RFCI.
2. Do not remove any asbestos material.
F. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and
so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight.
G. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Reclaim all refrigerant per EPA regulations and tag equipment
prior to removal.
H. Flourescent Lamp Removal: Remove fluorescent lamps in accordance with all Federal, state,
and local laws, ordinances, and regulations.
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site
and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 02 41 19
1.1 Description
1.1.1 Provide all labor, material, equipment, and tools required to prepare the
existing items for re-roofing as specified in this Section.
1.1.2 Provide for the proper disposal of all existing materials designated to be
removed. Use appropriate trash receptacles in areas designated by
Owner’s representative.
1.1.3 Coordinate the roof preparation work with the new roofing work in such a
manner as to keep the new insulation and roofing materials, building, and
building interior absolutely clean, dry, and watertight.
3.1.1 Contractor shall take all necessary precautions during roof preparation to
protect the building and adjacent surfaces from being soiled or damaged.
3.1.3 Contractor shall protect all vents, deck penetrations, and openings from
entry of construction debris.
3.1.4 When weather threatens, cease work under this section and return roof to a
watertight condition.
3.1.5 Contractor shall restore to the original condition any damage caused during
work performed in this section.
END OF SECTION
ROOF DEMOLITION 02 41 20 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Cast-in place concrete excluding concrete slabs-on-grade and concrete topping on metal
deck formwork.
2. Formwork
3. Reinforcement
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, provide proportion mixes by either laboratory trial
batch or field experience method, complying with ACI 301. Include all admixtures to be used
in the concrete. Include field test data from at least 10 tests or a three-point curve generated
using trial mixtures.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the materials, and admixtures with requirements indicated, for all materials
utilized in the concrete.
1. Submit reports from tests required by section 1.6 of ACI 301-99 to structural engineer,
architect, owner, contractor, concrete supplier, and building official.
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed standard concrete work
similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this project on a minimum of three
similar projects, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-
service performance.
C. ACI Publications: Comply with the latest edition of the following unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents:
1. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
2. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer’s plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the
same manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, #42, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
Select type of portland cement from options in subparagraph below as required by structural engineer.
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type [I] [II] [I/II] [III] [V].
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, type F or C. When used, fly ash-to-total cementitious ratio shall be 15
percent minimum to 25 percent maximum.
D. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag: ASTM C989. Total ground granulated blast furnace
slag-to-total cementitious ratio shall not exceed 30 percent maximum.
H. Chloride Content Of Concrete: Limit total chloride ion content to amount indicated in Table
4.2.2.6 of ACI 301-99. Admixtures containing chloride are not permitted in reinforced concrete
or concrete containing metals.
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1. Spread Footings:
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
1. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement. Apply form release agents.
2. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of other trades.
3. Retighten forms during and after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar
leaks.
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
B. Bar Reinforcement
1. Position reinforcement accurately per plan before concrete is placed. Secure against
displacement with 16 gage annealed wire or suitable clips. Place reinforcing in
accordance with ACI 301.
2. Reinforcement, at time concrete is placed, shall be free of mud, oil, release agents, or
other materials that may adversely affect or reduce bond.
3. Where concrete surface will be exposed to weather in finished structure where rust would
impair architectural finishes, portions of accessories in contact with formwork shall be
stainless steel or plastic.
4. Lap splice reinforcing bars as follows unless noted otherwise:
a. Horizontal bars with more than 12-inches (305-mm) of concrete below: 62 bar
diameters
b. Horizontal bars with less than 12-inches (305-mm) of concrete below, and all other
bars: 50 bar diameters
5. Embed reinforcing dowels in column footings of same size, quantity and spacing, as
required for walls, pedestals or columns carried above. Extend Reinforcing from 3
inches (76.2 mm) above bottom of footing to height equal to lap requirements. Position
and hold securely during concrete placement. Do not bend reinforcement after being
partially embedded in hardened concrete unless specifically instructed by Owner's
Representative.
6. At corners and intersections of footings, walls and grade beams, provide bent bars of
equal size and at same spacing as typical reinforcing around corner and/or into abutting
footing, wall or grade beam. Bars shall have embedment of 30 diameters (18-inches
(457-mm) min.).
7. Securely anchor reinforcing steel before conduit, piping and other items are placed. Do
not displace reinforcing without prior review of Owner's Representative.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
1. Locate and install construction, isolation and control joints as indicated or required. Give
special attention to reentrant corners.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as follows:
1. End pours at control joint saw cut line. Do not end pours at highly visible areas.
2. Provide control/construction joints in concrete walls at a maximum spacing of twice the
height of the wall above the top of footing.
3. Maximum joint spacing shall not exceed 24-feet (7.3-m).
4. Control joints shall have a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) deep by 3/4-inch (19-mm) wide tapered
reveal each side of the wall.
5. At control joints, every other horizontal bar shall be cut back 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) from
the control joint.
6. Construction joints shall be formed similar to control joints.
7. Discontinue horizontal steel at construction joints. Embed dowel bar of size and spacing
to match the horizontal reinforcing a minimum of 40 bar diameters each side of the
construction joint.
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
2. Do not add water at the job site unless approved by the Owner's Representative.
a. If concrete arrives at the point of delivery with a slump below that which will
result in the specified slump at the point of placement and is unsuitable for placing
at that slump, the slump may be adjusted once only to the required value by adding
water up to the amount allowed in the accepted mixture proportions. Addition of
water shall be in accordance with ASTM C94. Do not exceed the specified water-
cementitious material ratio or slump in the approved mix design. Do not add water
to concrete delivered in equipment not acceptable for mixing. After plasticizing or
water reducing admixtures are added to the concrete at the site to achieve flowable
concrete, do not add water to the concrete. Measure slump (and air content of air
entrained concrete), after slump adjustment, to verify compliance with specified
requirements.
C. Do not backfill against retaining walls until concrete strength has reached 0.75 f'c and a
minimum of 7 days.
D. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
temperature range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
1. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-
weather protection during curing.
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Owner’s
Representative. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner’s
Representative approval.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Field testing to
be performed by an ACI certified concrete field testing technician grade I (or equivalent).
B. Contractor’s Responsibilities
C. Inspections:
a. Measure lump prior to the addition of admixtures and after the addition of
admixtures.
4. Air Content: ASTM C-173 or C-231, one for each set of compressive strength specimens.
5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C-31, one set of four standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test, unless directed otherwise.
6. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C-1064
7. Compressive Strength: ASTM C-39, minimum testing is one set per day for each mix
placed for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof; one specimen tested at 7 days, two
specimens tested at 28 days and one retained for later testing if required.
8. Moisture vapor emission testing shall be conducted as required by the Owner’s
Representative.
E. Additional Tests: Owner’s testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Owner’s Representative. Testing and inspecting
agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Owner’s Representative.
F. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with
the Contract Documents
G. Owner’s Representative shall make final acceptance and approval of concrete work.
END OF SECTION 03 31 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Cast-in place concrete slabs-on-grade and concrete topping on metal deck formwork
excluding integral colored cast-in-place concrete slabs and structural concrete.
2. Metal stair pan concrete fill.
3. Formwork
4. Reinforcement
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, provide proportion mixes by either laboratory trial
batch or field experience method, complying with ACI 301. Include all admixtures to be used
in the concrete. Include field test data from at least 10 tests or a three-point curve generated
using trial mixtures.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the materials, and admixtures with requirements indicated, for all materials
utilized in the concrete.
D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement.
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in
material, design and extent to that indicated for this project on a minimum of five similar
projects, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
1. The concrete floor finishing installer’s lead finisher of the finishing crew shall be
certified under the Concrete Flatwork Finisher Training and Certification Program as
granted by the American Concrete Institute.
C. Design Mixture Responsibility: The ready-mix concrete producer shall be responsible for the
compatibility of concrete ingredients and admixtures to ensure that the total air (including
entrapped air) content in the concrete caused by the chemical reaction of ingredients is not
greater than 2 percent.
D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
2. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
3. ACI 305R, "Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International."
4. ACI 306R, "Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International."
5. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork."
6. ACI 403 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete."
E. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same
manufacturer’s plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same
manufacturer.
F. Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade panel to demonstrate surface finish, texture, and
standard of workmanship of anti-slip finish for approval by Owner.
1. Build panel approximately 36 sq. ft. (3.3 sq. m) in location directed by Owner.
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
e. Fibrous reinforcing manufacturer.
2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality
control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,
curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,
semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, floor and slab flatness and
levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
B. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to
length with ends square and free of burrs.
D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, #42, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
A. Fibrous Reinforcing: ASTM C 1116-08, Type IV, Alkali-resistant, virgin cellulose fibers.
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project: Refer to drawings for additional requirements.
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, type F or C. When used, fly ash-to total cementitious ratio shall be 15
percent minimum to 25 percent maximum. (Do not use fly ash for polished dyed concrete.)
D. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag: ASTM C989. Total ground granulated blast furnace
slag-to-total cementitious ratio shall not exceed 30% maximum. (Do not use ground granulated
blast furnace slag for polished dyed concrete.)
a. Fly ash
b. Ground granulated blast furnace slag.
c. Air-entraining admixtures.
B. Concrete Slab Patching Material: Portland cement-based, self-drying, fast setting, trowelable patch.
1. Basis of Design Product (For Patches Larger Than 1 inch (25 mm) in Diameter): Ardex
Engineered Cements; Ardex SD-P.
2. Basis of Design Product (For Patches 1 inch (25 mm) in Diameter and Smaller): Ardex
Engineered Cements; Ardex Feather Finish-Gray.
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder and Protective Plastic Sheet: ASTM E 1745, Class A, polyolefin, 10
mils, in areas as indicated. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive
tape.
1. Products:
A. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Class B, 18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating.
2. Products (remodels and buildings that require a VOC limit below 100):
3. Color: Clear.
1. Products:
a. BASF Building Systems, MBT Protection and Repair Div.; Confilm; 800-496-
6067
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar; 800-321-7628.
c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con. 800-362-3331
d. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre; 800-342-5976.
C. Contraction (Sawed) and Construction (Cold) Joint Filler: 100% solids polyurea filler, Shore A
80 or higher, Rapid curing, self-leveling elastomer.
1. Products:
a. Degussa Building Systems, MBT Protection & Repair Div. Masterfill 400 CT 800-
496-6067
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); EUCO QWIKjoint 200
c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc; Joint Tite 750; 800-362-3331
d. Metzger/McGuire; Spal-Pro RS 88; 800-223-6680
2. Product and Color: See Division 01 Section “General Interior Finishes and Colors.”
D. Joint Filler at Columns: Polyurethane, Type S, Class 25, Use T, gun grade or pourable as
applicable.
1. Products:
a. Gun Grade:
b. Pourable:
E. Cylindrical Sealant Backings for Polyurethane Joint Filler (As Applicable): ASTM C 1330,
Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant
depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
F. Construction Joint Protective Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 4397, polyethylene sheet, not less than 10
mils (0.25 mm) thick.
1. Concrete Reinforced Pit Box: 24x24x30” deep (16”min). Coordinate with refrigeration
requirements.
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1. Types and proportions of chemical admixtures shall be consistent for all pours.
7. Slump Limit:
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Inspect prepared subgrade for suitability for placing of concrete. No standing water,
organic material, debris, or other deleterious materials should be present.
2. Coordinate concrete work with the work of the other trades to allow reasonable time to
set sleeves, inserts and other accessories, which must be in position before concrete is
placed.
3. HVAC system must be operational to maintain proper temperatures for curing throughout
entire installation.
a. If temporary heat must be used, only heaters with sealed combustion chambers and
positive venting to the outside are permitted. Venting to the outside, complying
with ACI 306, is required to prevent discoloration or inconsistency or carbon
dioxide poisoning of the concrete. Use of temporary heat must be approved by
Owner’s Representative.
b. Proper Recommended Temperature: 55 degrees F (13 degrees C).
4. Employ methods to prevent dust and air-born debris from entering building and settling
on slab surface during finishing operations.
5. Proof roll subgrade at least 72 hours prior to concrete placement.
6. Conduct a walkthrough with the Owner’s Representative and concrete installer to
determine that the installation of all underground work is complete and accurately placed.
7. Do not install box outs around interior building columns or other floor penetrations.
8. Pre-wet subgrade. Do not pour concrete over standing water.
3.2 FORMWORK
A. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
1. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement. Apply form release agents.
2. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of other trades.
A. Building Slab Drainage Fill: Install in thickness as indicated on Drawings but no less than 4
inches (101.6 mm) thick.
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643
and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Place under freezers and other locations as indicated. Extend 2-feet (609.6-mm) beyond
edge of freezers and other areas indicated on the drawings.
2. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
1. Locate and install construction, isolation and control joints as indicated or required. Give
special attention to reentrant corners.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Owner’s Representative.
1. Locate construction joints so they do not impair strength and appearance of structure.
End pours at control joint saw cut line. Do not end pours at highly visible areas.
2. Dowel construction joints with 3/4 inch by 16 inch (19 mm by 406 mm) smooth dowel
rods or tapered plate dowels at 2 feet (610 mm) on center unless indicated otherwise on
Drawings or manufacturer’s instructions. Do not key construction joints.
3. Place a 4 foot (1219 mm) wide, plastic protective sheet strip on existing slabs (to protect
against spillage) when new pour is placed against existing. Remove any new concrete
that has overlapped onto previous pour immediately.
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. During placement of slab, a representative of each trade having work in area of pour shall
maintain a presence to protect their work.
C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
2. Do not add water at jobsite. This will constitute rejection of batch.
D. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
temperature range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
B. Place floor slabs in sections as large as practical to meet the final finish requirements.
C. Recess areas that are to receive quarry tile as indicated on drawings. Provide preformed metal
keyed construction joint at perimeter of recessed areas.
1. Food preparation and service areas may be recessed to receive quarry tile or not recessed
if epoxy flooring is used. Verify which material is to be used before placing concrete;
refer to drawings.
D. Sloped Floors:
1. Form out and place areas of floor, which are to be sloped to floor drains, after level areas
of floor have been placed.
2. Slope floor to floor drains at 1/8 inch per foot (10.4 mm per m) in areas indicated on the
drawing.
3. Shape and slope sloped floors as called for on the plans and as detailed.
E. Provide concrete mudsill below underfloor raceway for electrical wiring full length of raceway.
Refer to Division 28 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for additional
information.
F. Provide concrete trenches and pits and/or fiberglass pit boxes for refrigerant lines as indicated
on Drawings. Building floor to form top of trench and/or fiberglass pit box, placed after all
work has been completed in trench and/or fiberglass pit box.
1. After slab placement, cut off PVC or ABS pipes, for refrigeration pipes, flush with
concrete slab.
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces.
B. Finished Appearance:
1. Smooth Finish: Provide in areas not receiving anti-slip finish unless otherwise indicated.
a. Appearance: Dense, smooth, polished finish, uniform in texture free of any trowel
marks or other imperfections.
2. Anti-Slip Finish: Provide in coolers and freezers not to receive resinous flooring or
quarry tile finish material and exposed concrete stair treads
a. Appearance: Equivalent to the texture of medium #80 sandpaper finish free of any
trowel marks or other imperfections to match mock-up.
b. See Drawings for limits of anti-slip finish
C. Initial Strike-Off:
D. Floating:
E. Power Troweling:
1. Timing: Begin power troweling as soon as little or no cement paste clings to the blades.
2. Provide a minimum of two power trowelings at the correct time interval for the floor
surface.
a. For the first troweling, keep trowel blades as flat as possible against the surface to
avoid a "washboard" or "chatter" surface.
b. Continue troweling until surface is dense, smooth, and free of all minor blemishes
and trowel marks.
F. Hand Troweling
1. General: Provide hand troweling to close any pinholes or eliminate minor blemishes
bringing the surface to a dense, smooth, polished finish.
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-
weather protection during curing in unconditioned spaces..
1. Keep concrete floor free of all dirt, debris, paint, oil or other matter that might prevent
adhesion of the surface material.
2. Do not use where finish material (tile or resinous flooring) is to be installed on concrete
slab.
1. Curing Compound:
2. Concrete Sealing:
C. Location: Non-polished concrete slabs, not receiving resinous or resilient flooring and other
areas as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Saw cut joints as specified for contraction joints to receive joint filler.
1. Layout: As indicated on Drawings. Do not use colored chalk to mark saw cut lines.
2. Equipment: Power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades.
3. Joint Depth: 1/4 the slab thickness or a minimum of 1 inch (25.4 mm).
4. Joint Width: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
5. Timing: Saw joints as soon as saw cut can be made without raveling, but no later than 12
hours after concrete has been placed (typically one hour in hot weather to four hours in
cold weather after completing finishing of slab at that joint location).
a. Employ sufficient number of saws and workers to complete cutting saw joints
before shrinkage produces cracking. Maintain at least two saws on site.
6. Change saw blades as needed to insure a clean and sharp joint and to prevent variances in
joint width.
7. Continue joints to column or wall face with hand grinder. Joint width and depth shall
match width and depth of joints formed with large saw.
8. Surface of Concrete at Joints: Smooth without grooves at the joints.
9. After saw cutting, immediately vacuum up and clean residues.
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling as long as possible to allow moisture to escape from concrete slab.
Install just prior to installing fixtures.
B. Chase joints with abrasive blade, remove surface and joint contamination with vacuum. Leave
joint faces of clean and dry prior to joint sealant installation.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in
formed joints.
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Owner’s
Representative. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner’s
Representative approval.
B. Provide test area made of specified materials for Owner’s review and approval.
D. Repair excessive cracking in areas receiving floor finishes (tile or resinous flooring) as
determined by Owner’s Representative.
1. Rout cracks (other than hairline shrinkage openings that have maintained their level) with
crack chaser 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) deep by 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) wide and pack crack with
sand.
2. Caulk top 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) depth with epoxy sealant, using bulk caulking gun.
E. Excessive cracking in areas receiving tile, epoxy or carpet will receive an anti-fracture
membrane (AFM) installed by the tile, epoxy or carpet installer.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Field testing to
be performed by an ACI certified concrete field testing technician grade I (or equivalent).
B. Contractor’s Responsibilities
C. Inspections:
D. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
7. Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness: ASTM E-1155
8. Flatness and levelness numbers shall be in accordance with ACI 302.1R. Conduct test
within 72 hours of concrete pour.
E. Moisture vapor emission testing shall be conducted as required by the Owner’s Representative.
F. Floor Slab Examination: Prior to acceptance, examine floor slab to ensure floor slab can accept
application of surface materials. If excessive cracking is observed repair slab as specified.
G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when
test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements
have not been met, as directed by Owner’s Representative. Testing and inspecting agency may
conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Owner’s Representative.
H. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with
the Contract Documents
I. Owner’s Representative shall make final acceptance and approval of concrete work.
END OF SECTION 03 31 05
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply and install the concrete dying and polishing
system including the following:
1) Removal of existing floor tile, existing floor mastic, and joint filler materials
and pre-polishing cleaning of concrete slab.
2) Joint filling.
3) Concrete dye.
4) Hardener/densifier.
5) Kroger will provide a dumpster for VCT removal only.
6) “Picture Framing” of case work. (Paint staining at perimeter of cases.)
b. Contractor shall relocate all gondolas four separate times to account for shelving
re-set and concrete dying and polishing. Coordinate timing of each move with
Kroger and floor tile/mastic removal and concrete dying and polishing (and
asbestos removal if applicable).
c. Contractor shall core drill at all cleanouts and remove concrete and lower all clean-
outs and hose bibb floor boxes. Patch concrete to match adjacent concrete slab.
Refer to drawings for details.
d. Contractor shall not have any cross-cuts on any trenching or area where concrete is
removed or replaced. Refer to drawings for details.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. The Owner will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s information upon request:
A. Resilient Floor Coverings: Resilient floor coverings and adhesive will be removed according to
recommendations by the Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI) in RFCI-WP and its
Addendum.
B. Pre-installation Conference: Two weeks prior to concrete polishing Work, conduct conference
at Project site with Owner’s concrete staining and polishing installer to comply with
requirements in Division 00 Section "General Conditions." The Owner will be in charge of the
meeting. The Contractor shall take minutes of the meeting and publish on Sitefolio.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
a. Fly ash
b. Ground granulated blast furnace slag.
c. Air-entraining admixtures.
B. Concrete Slab Patching Material: Portland cement-based, self-drying, fast setting, trowelable patch.
1. Basis of Design Product (For Patches Larger Than 1 inch (25 mm) in Diameter): Ardex
Engineered Cements; Ardex SD-P.
2. Basis of Design Product (For Patches 1 inch (25 mm) in Diameter and Smaller): Ardex
Engineered Cements; Ardex Feather Finish-Gray.
A. Protective Covering: Provide sufficient quantity to protect concrete in the main traffic aisles &
staging areas.
1. Products:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Coordinate concrete staining and polishing work with the work of the other trades.
2. Building must be dried in and moisture test must be provided and approved by staining
contractor.
3. Provide adequate temporary lighting to insure high quality workmanship.
4. Employ methods to prevent dust and air-born debris from entering building and settling
on slab surface during finishing operations.
5. Patch concrete floor as required and as recommended by concrete patching material
manufacturer and Owner’s Direct Buy floor polishing contractor.
6. Contractor shall provide temporary power for use by the polishing contractor. Provide
three (3) 50 amp, 480 volt circuits adjacent to the switchgear for final connection by
polishing contractor. If 480 volt is not available, Contractor shall provide equivalent as
directed by Kroger Project Manager. Contractor shall disconnect all temporary power
back to original condition after polishing operation is complete as directed by Kroger.
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Owner. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner’s approval.
B. Provide test area made of specified materials for Owner’s review and approval.
D. Where existing concrete is spalling, Kroger will make arrangements to repair through the
polishing contractor.
A. The concrete floor dying and polishing system will be installed by the Owner. This system
includes the penetrating densifier/hardener.
1. Coordinate dying and polishing operations with other associated work and trades.
2. New concrete slabs shall be cured a minimum of 28 days or at a point polishing
equipment can be put on the slab and does not displace aggregate.
3. Concrete dying and polishing shall be coordinated with the placement of refrigerated
cases and fixtures.
4. Areas to be polished shall be restricted from other uses for the length of time designated
by the concrete polishing.
5. Allow inspection by Owner’s concrete polishing installer during the polishing process.
A. Until Project is turned over to Owner, clean polished concrete floor as required to prevent
surface residue from forming on the concrete surface and to maintain floor in condition as
approved by Owner at completion of polishing. Clean with an automatic floor scrubber
equipped with soft bristle brushes.
B. Do not allow loading on concrete surface until concrete has obtained, by test, its design strength
as noted on Drawings, but not sooner than 9 days after placement.
D. Place skids or shipping containers on protective covering and prevent from coming in direct
contact with the polished concrete floor.
E. Diaper lifts and equipment used on colored concrete to protect from leaks. Tires on such
equipment to be white or taped to prevent marks. Remove lifts from finish floor at end of each
day.
G. Contractor shall use drop cloths and other means necessary to protect concrete floor from dry
fall paint or other finishes and damage.
END OF SECTION 03 35 19
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
A. Masonry Construction And Materials: Comply with requirements of "Specification for Masonry
Structures (ACI 530.1-99/ASCE 6-99/TMS 602-99)" except as modified by the requirements of
these Contract Documents.
B. Mock-Up: Build mock-up panel to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects.
1. Build mock-up approximately 72 inches (1829 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high.
Panel to represent exterior wall including different types of masonry (whether specified
in this section or not), mortar and sealant to represent completed masonry work for
qualities of appearance, materials and construction to be approved by the Owner’s
Representative.
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top
surface is dry to the touch.
D. Do not place masonry units directly on the ground while being stored.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Products:
B. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.
1. Products:
E. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer or compatible
with integral water repellant in concrete block.
F. Water: Potable.
A. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
1. Products:
C. Water: Potable.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60
(Grade 420).
a. Type: Ladder type placed in concrete masonry with projecting eyes for 3/16-inch
(5-mm) diameter double wire rectangular adjustable pintle.
b. Wire Size: 9 gage, W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter.
c. Spacing: 16-inch (406.4-mm) centers vertically unless noted otherwise.
d. Hot dipped galvanized per ASTM A153 class B.
e. Lap horizontal joint reinforcing 6-inches (152-mm) minimum. Horizontal joint
reinforcing shall be discontinuous across movement joints.
3. Provide prefabricated “L” and ”T” shaped horizontal joint reinforcing at wall
intersections.
A. Materials:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Two-piece assemblies which permit vertical or horizontal differential
movement between wall and framework parallel to, but resist tension and compression forces
perpendicular to, plane of wall; consisting of wire tie section and metal anchor section for
attachment over sheathing to metal studs and complying with the following requirements:
1. Wire: 0.1875 inch (4.75 mm) diameter, length as required to extend within 1 inch (25.4
mm) of masonry veneer face.
2. Anchor Section: Tee shaped rib stiffened sheet metal plate; 14 gage, 0.747 inch (19 mm)
by minimum 2-3/4 inch (69.85 mm) by 3 inches (76 mm) high.
3. Metal Fasteners for Steel Studs: Steel drill screws, #10 diameter X length required to
penetrate steel stud flange by not less than (3) exposed threads, complying with ASTM
C-954, except with hex washer and neoprene washer, cadmium-plated.
4. Acceptable Products:
C. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick
by 24 inches (600 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (50 mm) or with cross pins.
A. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following:
a. Products:
B. Provide 15# asphalt paper or approved water barrier in all cavity wall construction.
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not
degrade within the wall cavity, minimum 10 inches (250 mm) wide
1. Products:
2.7 INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, closed-cell product extruded
with an integral skin.
A. Proprietary Cleaner: As specified in other Division 04 Sections for types of unit masonry to be
built into unit masonry assemblies.
1. On wall surfaces with multiple types of masonry, use mildest product specified for types
of masonry used on wall surface. Obtain approval from Owner’s Representative.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated:
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
3. Do not use fly ash in grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor-driven
saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of
units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
1. Install masonry units in the bond pattern indicated or if not indicated in running bond
pattern.
2. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at
corners or jambs.
a. Mortar: Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40°F (4°C)
and 120°F (49°C).
b. Grout: Follow normal masonry procedures.
a. Mortar: Heating mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between
40°F (4°C) and 120°F (49°C); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above
freezing.
b. Grout: Heat grout to 90°F (32°C) to produce in place grout temperature of 70°F
(21°C) at end of work day.
3. Do not heat water for mortar and grout above 160°F (71°C).
E. Protect completed masonry and masonry not being worked on as follows. Temperature ranges
indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures, except for grouted masonry. For grouted
masonry, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures.
1. 40°F (4°C) to 32°F (0°C): Protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by
covering with weather-resistive membrane.
2. 32°F (0°C) to 25°F (-4°C): Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive membrane
for at least 24 hours.
F. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6
m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
A. Cut exposed masonry units, where necessary, with a power saw. Avoid the use (by proper
layout) of less than half size units.
B. Bond intersecting walls with masonry units or provide anchors spaced 2 feet (609.6 mm) on
center.
C. Hold uniform joint sizes as indicated, or if not indicated, hold joint sizes to suit modular size of
masonry units.
E. Reinforce horizontal joints with continuous masonry wire reinforcing, spaced 16 inches (406.4
mm) on center vertically.
1. In parapet walls and immediately above and below openings, for a distance of 24 inches
(609.6 mm) beyond jambs of opening, space horizontal joint reinforcement at 8 inches
(203.2 mm) on center. Do not bridge control and expansion joints in the wall system.
F. Anchor ends of walls to structure with anchors spaced 24 inches (609.6 mm) on center, except
as otherwise shown.
G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Provide movement (control and expansion) joints at locations shown, and keep clean of mortar
droppings.
1. Movement Joints in Concrete Masonry Units: Sash block unit with preformed shear key.
Caulk both faces. Alternate details for control joints may be acceptable when submitted
for approval.
2. Movement Joints in Clay Brick: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) wide clean joint filled with expansion
joint material per ASTM D1056, Class RE 41. Caulk exterior face.
3. Bond beams shall be discontinuous across movement joints unless noted otherwise.
4. Provide building paper bond break below lintel bearing adjacent to control joints.
1. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
2. Provide weep holes spaced 24 inches (609.6 mm) on center at the bottom of (and at
ledges in) exterior walls and at flashing at bond beams.
3. Except as otherwise shown, provide flashing under copings and sills, through wall at
counter flashing locations, and above elements of structural support for masonry and at
bond beams in exterior walls.
a. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall
flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with
mortar, seal penetrations in flashing as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
b. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into
masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at
ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.
J. Build other work into the masonry work as shown, fitting masonry units around other work, and
grouting for secure anchorage.
K. Protect newly laid masonry from exposure to precipitation, excessive drying, freezing, soiling,
backfill and other harmful elements.
L. Clean exposed masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing to
remove mortar spots and droppings.
A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using individual metal ties and masonry joint
reinforcement as indicated.
B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds
away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or
remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.
1. Support and fasten reinforcing steel to approved positioners located at 192 bar diameters
maximum spacing and with a minimum of two positioners per grout pour (one near the
bottom and one near the top) to prevent displacement during the placement of grout.
2. Provide reinforcing bar splices as specified on the Drawings. Bar splice couplers may be
considered as a substitute when submitted for approval.
B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).
3. Grout cells below grade solid.
A. Apply water repellant to the following masonry surfaces as specified in Division 07 Section
"Water Repellants:"
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform inspections and
prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform
inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done
at Contractor's expense.
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-
prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C. Mortar Testing: Comply with ASTM C 270 for batch mixed and ASTM C 780 for field mix.
D. Grout Testing: Comply with ASTM C 1019 for either batch mixed or field mix.
E. Testing Frequency (for both Mortar and Grout): One set of tests for each 2500 sq. ft. (232 sq.
m) of wall area or portion thereof.
1. Set of Tests: Three cubes minimum, one tested at 7 days, one at 14 days and one at 28
days.
F. Site structural observation (not considered special inspection): ACI 530.1-99/ASCE 6-99/TMS
602-99.
1. Site observations will be made by the Architect or an alternate approved by the Owner.
Payment for these services will be made by Owner. Request for observation is the
responsibility of the Contractor. The site observer shall verify compliance with the
design drawings and specifications and any additional requirements to comply with the
local jurisdiction and keep a record which will cover:
2. The Owner shall make continuous observations of grouting procedure to assure that
Portland Cement Lime grout is used to fill cores around reinforcement.
3.8 CLEANING
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample panels before proceeding with cleaning of entire
masonry work.
3. Protect adjacent surfaces including surfaces of different types of masonry as applicable.
4. Thoroughly wet surface of masonry.
5. Scrub using non-metallic brushes.
6. Immediately rinse with water.
7. Do small sections at a time.
END OF SECTION 04 05 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples for each type and color of exposed masonry units. (Match existing brick)
B. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material
properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and
type designations within standards.
1. Provide statement from masonry unit manufacturer that proposed masonry cleaner will
not discolor or cause fading of masonry color.
C. Material Test Reports: For masonry units, substantiating compliance with requirements.
A. Single Source Responsibility for Brick Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture
and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one
manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related
surfaces.
B. Field Constructed Mock-Ups: Build mock-up to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects.
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top
surface is dry to the touch.
C. Do not place brick units directly on the ground while being stored.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BRICK
1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces
finished.
2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in
sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).
2. Product, Color, and Texture: As specified in Division 01 Section “Exterior Finishes and
Colors.”
A. Refer to Division 04 Section “Common Work Results for Masonry” for ties and anchors,
embedded flashing materials, miscellaneous masonry accessories, insulation, and masonry
cleaners.
1. Products: Provide one of the products listed below. Do not use these products for other
types of masonry units specified in other Sections unless approved by the Owner’s
Representative.
A. Refer to Division 04 Section “Common Work Results for Masonry” for mortar and grout mixes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install units in the bond pattern indicated in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and as specified in Division 04 Section “Common Work Results for Masonry.”
B. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.
(30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67.
1. For units with surface temperatures above 32°F (0°C), wet with water heated to above
70°F (21°C).
2. For units with surface temperatures below 32°F (0°C), wet with water heated to above
130°F (54°C).
B. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 67.
END OF SECTION 04 21 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material
properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and
type designations within standards.
1. Provide statement from masonry unit manufacturer that proposed masonry cleaner will
not discolor or cause fading of masonry color.
B. Material Test Reports: For masonry units, substantiating compliance with requirements.
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those
of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction. See plans for required fire ratings.
B. Field Constructed Mock-Ups: Build mock-up to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects.
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top
surface is dry to the touch.
C. Do not place concrete masonry units directly on the ground while being stored.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General:
1. Shapes: Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints,
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Integral Water Repellent: For concrete masonry units exposed to weather (painted or
unpainted), provide units made with integral water-repellent admixture that does not
reduce flexural bond strength.
3. Construction: Modular size, straight, uniform, sound, clean and free from cracks and
chips. Texture shall be fine, based on a block mix approximately 3.00 fineness modulus.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).
1. Products: Provide one of the products listed below. Do not use these products for other
types of masonry units specified in other Sections unless approved by the Owner’s
Representative.
A. Refer to other Division 04 Section “Common Work Results for Masonry” for mortar and grout
mixes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install units in the bond pattern indicated in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and as specified in Division 04 Section “Common Work Results for Masonry.”
B. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.
END OF SECTION 04 22 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for [precast concrete units][ and
][cast stone]. Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each trim unit required.
B. Samples for each type and color of exposed cast stone units.
C. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material
properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and
type designations within standards.
1. Provide statement from cast stone unit manufacturer that proposed masonry cleaner will
not discolor or cause fading of cast stone color.
D. Material Test Reports: For cast stone units, substantiating compliance with requirements.
B. Single Source Responsibility for Cast Stone Units: Obtain exposed cast stone units of uniform
texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from
one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually
related surfaces.
C. Field Constructed Mock-Ups: Build mock-up to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects.
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top
surface is dry to the touch.
C. Do not place cast stone units directly on the ground while being stored.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory
testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364.
C. Reinforce units as indicated and as required by ASTM C 1364. Use galvanized or epoxy-coated
reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of material.
D. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with
ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
E. Product, Color, and Texture: As specified in Division 01 Section “Exterior Finishes and
Colors.”
A. Ties and Anchors for Cast Stone: Type and size indicated, fabricated from Type 304 stainless
steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.
B. Refer to Division 04 Section “Common Work Results for Masonry” for embedded flashing
materials, miscellaneous masonry accessories, and insulation.
1. Products: Provide one of the products listed below. Do not use these products for other
types of masonry units specified in other Sections unless approved by the Owner’s
Representative.
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; 222Cast Stone & Burnished Masonry Cleaner; 800-
323-3565
b. ProSoCo, Inc.; Sure Klean Burnished Custom Masonry Cleaner; 800-255-4255.
A. Refer to Division 04 Section “Common Work Results for Masonry” for mortar and grout mixes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install units in the bond pattern indicated in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and as specified in Division 04 Section “Common Work Results for Masonry.”
END OF SECTION 04 72 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes
A. All detailing, fabrication, and erection shall conform to AISC specifications for "Design,
Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", and the AISC "Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges", latest edition.
B. Fabricator shall design connections and, when requested, submit calculations to aid the
Architect in review. Unless specific end moments and reactions are indicated on drawings,
design and fabricate connections to resist shear based on the maximum uniform load capacity of
the member for the span increased by 15 percent, but no more than the shear capacity of the
member.
1. Design bolted field connections except where welded connections are indicated on the
structural drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show complete details and schedules for fabrication and erection, including
layout, special connections, jointing and accessories. Locate anchor bolts for installation in
other work; furnish templates for bolt installation by others. Submit shop drawings prior to
fabrication.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel."
B. Comply with applicable provisions of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers with Plain Finish: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M),
Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel
nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.
B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished
carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.
C. Anchor Rods and Bolts: ASTM A36 or ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, plain finish configuration as
shown on the drawings.
D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M, plain finish, size and embedment as indicated on
Drawings.
2.3 PRIMER
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd.
2.4 GROUT
2.5 FABRICATION
B. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." Mark and
match-mark units for field assembly.
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Structural Steel Unless Noted: Prepare steel surfaces per SSPC-SP3 “power tool
cleaning” and paint with fabricator's standard prime coat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's
"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
B. Provide minimum 3-inch (76.2-mm) concrete cover for steel below grade.
C. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface
of base and bearing plates.
1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or
bearing plate before packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no
voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.
D. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
E. No modification that affects the strength of a member shall be made without the approval of the
project structural Engineer of Record (EOR).
B. Headed Composite Studs: Conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1:2002 sections 7.4 and
7.5. Test in accordance with AWS D1.1:2002 sections 7.6, 7.7, and 7.8 by a qualified testing
agency. Submit copies of the test reports.
C. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for
bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces
adjacent to field welds.
A. Touch up prime paint after erection. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas,
and apply same type paint as used in shop.
END OF SECTION 05 12 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply the steel roof deck for the project including:
1) Steel roof deck complying with ASTM A 1008, Grade C, with acrylic
primer for:
2) Steel noncomposite form deck ASTM A 653, Grade E, G60 zinc coated, for
mezzanine.
a. Deck fasteners, including self-tapping sidelap screws necessary for a complete and
structurally sound installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing
channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other
construction.
2. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
3. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.
STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding
Code - Sheet Steel."
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those
tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according
to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members."
D. Provide erection of steel deck conforming to the requirements of the latest edition of the
specifications of the Steel Deck Institute (SDI).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Direct Buy Owner-Furnished Products,” Drawings, and vendor
provided shop drawings for sizes and locations.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi (230 MPa), not less than 20 gage, 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of
same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
2.3 FINISHES
A. Prime Painted: Manufacturers standard gray or white baked-on lead and chromate free rust-
inhibitive primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, requirements in this Section, and as
indicated.
C. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side-lap interlocks.
D. Lap ends of roof deck and concrete form deck 2-inch (51-mm) minimum.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to deck.
1. Openings up to 6-inches (152-mm) square may be cut through metal deck without
reinforcing.
2. Openings between 6-inches (152-mm) and 18-inches (457-mm) shall be reinforced with 2
x 2x 1/4 steel angles puddle welded to the metal deck flutes and oriented perpendicular to
the flutes.
3. Steel reinforcing angle shall extend a minimum of 2 flutes each side of the opening
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. Connect metal
deck to structural members, including perimeter angles.
STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
d. #12-24 x 1 1/4-inch (32-mm) ICH Traxx 5 Climaseal (for total steel flange
thickness of 0.5-inch (13-mm) or less).
I. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span by one of the following
methods:
J. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches (38 mm).
K. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld
flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least one
weld at each corner.
1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Architect.
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
3.3 REPAIRS
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck
with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of
prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.
END OF SECTION 05 31 00
STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing [and roof trusses] capable of
withstanding design loads and deflection limits as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions."
C. Roof Trusses: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss
Design."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Truss Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed
metal framing for trusses; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including
mechanical fasteners. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the
Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated.
2.2 FRAMING
A. General:
B. Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened
flanges, and as follows:
1. Structural Framing Members 16 Gage, 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and Heavier: ASTM
A446, Grade D, fy minimum = 50 ksi, galvanized grade G 60 per ASTM A653.
2. Structural Framing Members 18 Gage, 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) and Lighter: ASTM
A446, Grade A, fy minimum = 33 ksi, galvanized grade G 60 per ASTM A653.
3. Metal Studs for Brick Veneer Backup: 18 gage minimum thickness, galvanized grade G
90 per ASTM A653.
4. Track & Bridging: fy = 33 ksi minimum, ASTM A653, galvanized grade G60 per ASTM
A653.
C. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched,
with straight flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs.
D. Furring Channels: Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install vertically at spacing indicated on
drawings.
1. Provide 2-1/2 inch (63.5 mm) furring inside along front wall at canopy area only to
accommodate installation of canopy sidewall sprinkler piping
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural
Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel and carbon-steel nuts; and flat,
hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class C.
E. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10
times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
B. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing trusses plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,
manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection
stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line except as
needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar
requirements and with connections securely fastened
C. Cut all framing components so they fit squarely together. Bear studs must tight against track
web. Hold members positively in place until properly fastened. Brace wall components as
required during erection to prevent racking and distortion.
E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
F. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.
Independently frame both sides of joints.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from
plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
I. Install continuous runner tracks, sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base
and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction
involved, except do not exceed 24 inches (609.6 mm) o.c. spacing for nail or power-driven
fasteners, or 16 inches (406.4 mm) o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at
corners and ends of tracks.
J. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of
stiffeners to supporting structure.
K. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or
partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, grab bars
and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of
supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's
recommendations and industry standards, in each case, considering weight or loading resulting
from item supported. Deflection of the studs and supports shall not exceed L/600 for the
unsheathed wall.
L. Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks, either by welding or screw fastening at both inside
and outside flanges.
M. Where studs are to extend to the roof deck or structure above, a 3 inch (76.2 mm) deep leg stud
track is to be used at the top. Do not attach studs to this track.
N. Wall openings larger than 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide shall be framed with double stud at each
frame jamb. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks
to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding. Space jack studs same as full-height studs of wall.
Secure stud system wall opening frame.
O. Bridging Requirements for Bearing and Exterior Walls: Minimum bridging 1-1/2-inch (38-
mm) "C" channel with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) by 2-inch (51-mm) by 16 gage, 0.06-inch (1.5-mm)
clip angles at each stud.
A. Install, bridge, and brace trusses according to Shop Drawings and requirements in this Section.
D. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately
position at spacings indicated.
F. Attach trusses to supporting steel members and bearing plates using manufacturer’s standard
clips capable of resisting the design wind uplift loads as indicated.
G. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on Shop Drawings and
designed according to LGSEA's Technical Note 551e, "Design Guide for Permanent Bracing of
Cold-Formed Steel Trusses."
H. Brace trusses under 60 feet (18 m) long during erection per Light Gage Steel Engineer’s
Association “Field Installation Guide For Cold-Formed Steel Roof Trusses,” unless more strict
bracing is required by the truss manufacturer. Provide temporary bracing for trusses over 60
feet (18 m) long designed by a professional engineer registered in the state where the project
occurs. Provide drawings, with the designer’s seal, showing the details of the temporary
bracing. This bracing shall remain as permanent bracing. For all trusses, bracing in the plane of
the top chord may be removed when the top chord is laterally braced by the metal roof deck.
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 40 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. Fabrications from steel and iron shapes, plates, bars, tubes, and pipe
1) Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
2) Loose bearing and leveling plates.
3) Loose steel lintels for masonry.
4) Structural steel door frames.
5) Ladders[ and safety cages] to roof hatch and from roof to roof.
6) Downspout Guards.
7) Burglar bars.
8) Bollards.
9) Miscellaneous steel trim.
a. Fabrications from steel and iron shapes, plates, bars, tubes, and pipe.
b. Fabrications from sheet metal.
c. Owner supplied prefabricated and prefinished column covers and prefinished metal
sheets.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
1. Shop Drawings shall bear the seal of a professional engineer who is registered in the state
the project occurs, and who is providing services as a specialty engineer.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
B. Ferrous Metals:
C. Fasteners
1. General: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with
coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide
stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and
class required.
2. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous
castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel.
Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
3. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36. Sizes and embedment as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Concrete Inserts: Malleable iron (ASTM A-47) or cast steel (ASTM A-27) inserts, with
steel bolts, washers and shims; hot dip galvanized.
5. Expansion Anchors: Size, and embedment indicated on Drawings.
D. Miscellaneous Materials
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General:
a. Weld corners and seams continuously; grind exposed welds smooth and flush.
b. Form exposed connections with hairline, flush joints; use concealed fasteners
where possible.
3. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices to be built into other work
for installation of miscellaneous metal items; coordinate delivery to job site to avoid
delay.
C. Loose Bearing Plates: Provide for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete. Drill plates to
receive anchor bolts.
E. Frame and Sill for Traffic and Overhead Doors: Provide shop assembled continuous ¼ inch
(6mm) thick bent plate frames as detailed on the Drawings. Miter and weld corners and provide
spreaders tack welded to frame for shipping. Jambs shall be provided with strap anchors spaced
at 16 inch (406.4 mm) centers.
F. Metal Ladders [and safety cages]: Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
2. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Fabricate from same metal as
ladders to which safety cages are attached and assemble by welding or riveting.
G. Downspout Guards: Fabricate from steel plate as detailed. Provide at each downspout indicated.
1. Provide for generator discharge air opening and for HVAC openings provided by Owner.
2. Coordinate size with plans.
J. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate to shapes and sizes as required for profiles shown and
continuously weld joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever
possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages; coordinate assembly and installation with
other work.
L. Wall protection at hoods and photo lab sink: Provide 22 gage, 0.031 inch (0.787 mm) stainless
steel wall covering with #4 finish on walls under hoods and sinks, where indicated on
Drawings, extending the length of hood, or longer if indicated on plans.
1. Use minimum number of sections with top and bottom raw edges dressed with 1/2 inch
(12.7 mm) inward hems on edges exposed at the end of the hood.
2. Use stainless steel “S” joints between sections. Fasten “S” joints at perimeter of covering
to the wall with stainless steel screws on 12” centers.
3. Seal perimeter with silicone sealant as specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”
2.3 FINISHES
a. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing,
or masonry, to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting.
b. For lintels supporting exterior masonry wythes and members exposed to weather in
finished structures blast steel clean per SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning"
and paint with zinc rich primer.
1) Products:
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set
metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true.
1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as
exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be
fastened to in-place construction.
a. For masonry and concrete, drill holes with a coarse cutting rock chisel using
pneumatic percussion equipment equipped with hollow stem drill rod and
continuous air jet to remove cuttings. Blow out holes with compressed air or
vacuum to remove all dust and chips.
3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After
bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
C. Bollards: Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp
for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
1. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
D. Owner Supplied Prefinished Column Covers: Install column covers in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up
paint with the same material as used for shop painting.
2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails:
3. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN/sq. m) applied horizontally.
c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
METAL STAIRS 05 51 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
C. Seismic Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Furnish templates for installation of embedded items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).
D. Iron Castings: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, or malleable iron,
ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B,
or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205).
A. Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls.
B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips,
brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and
platforms on supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Use materials and methods that
minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain
fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed
connections, finish exposed welds smooth and blended.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
METAL STAIRS 05 51 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
3. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges, unless
otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
4. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work.
5. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
1. Weld corners and seams continuously; grind exposed welds smooth and flush.
D. Form exposed connections with hairline, flush joints; use concealed fasteners where possible.
E. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from
steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 15
gage, 0.0677 inch (1.7 mm).
2.4 FINISHES
A. Shop Primer: Zinc chromate or oil alkyd or red oxide with no lead content. Apply to cleaned
and degreased steel surfaces at rate to provide a 2.0 mil dry film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints.
METAL STAIRS 05 51 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
C. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms with fine sandpaper texture finish to
comply with Division 03 Sections.
1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting.
END OF SECTION 05 51 00
METAL STAIRS 05 51 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails:
3. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN/sq. m) applied horizontally.
c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).
2. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40),
unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
3. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
4. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or
required by structural loads.
b. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
A. Fasteners: Plated steel concealed fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for
electrodeposited zinc coating.
C. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with
ASTM C 1107; or water-resistant, nonshrink anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer
for exterior use.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated, but not
less than that required to support structural loads.
B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Shop-Primed Steel Finish: Prepare to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning" and apply zinc-rich primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation.
B. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset steel pipe sleeves and grouting annular space.
C. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and
anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.
D. Adjusting and Cleaning: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting.
END OF SECTION 05 52 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
1.3 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. Provide dressed
lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Application:
B. `Wood-Preservative-Treated Materials
C. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including blocking, nailers, rooftop equipment bases and support curbs, and
furring.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19
percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content.
2.4 SHEATHING
1. Products:
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
2. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing:
Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape
and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-
fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners as indicated on the drawings.
a. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide,
10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m), of type
recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion
sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of
successful in-service use.
2.5 PLYWOOD
B. Interior Walls: Exterior C-D grade, fire-retardant treated, thickness as indicated on Drawings.
B. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Species as indicated on
drawings.
C. Lumber Trim for Opaque (Painted) Finish: Either finger-jointed or solid lumber.
2.7 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL
A. Products:
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
E. Solid-Surfacing-Material Countertops
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or if not indicated as required to meet
manufacturer’s warranty.
3. Color: As specified in Division 01 Section "Décor Interior Finishes and Colors."
4. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-
material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and
finishing.
a. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges and integral backsplashes of materials and
configuration indicated.
b. Fabricate tops with loose sidesplashes for field application.
2.8 FASTENERS
D. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads
and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring,
nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
B. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates and supporting members using fasteners of size
that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or receive finish
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
materials. Install fasteners without splitting wood; fasten panel products to allow for expansion
at joints, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Gypsum Sheathing Installation: Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts
structural elements. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut
masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
2. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.
3. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's and EIFS manufacturer’s
written instructions.
a. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply
and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply
sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered.
Seal other penetrations and openings as indicated on the drawings.
F. Wood Trim Installation: Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length
pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Cope at returns and miter at corners to
produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints
for end-to-end joints.
G. Solid-Surfacing-Material Installation:
1. Shop prime and seal concealed work with at least first coat specified in Division 09
Section "Painting." Machine and sand woodwork to comply with requirements of
standards for specified grade.
2. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work. Anchor tops securely to support systems. All
joints should be supported by framing and specified slipsheet. Edges to be joined should
be straight, smooth and clean.
3. Make joints between adjacent horizontal sheets with manufacturer’s standard adhesive.
4. Make cutouts with router equipped with sharp 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum diameter
carbide bit. Round corners of cutout and smooth edges top and bottom, all around cutout.
5. Clearances between joints:
a. Uncaulked joints 1/32 inch (0.79 mm) for every 8 feet (2438 mm) length.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
b. Caulked joints 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide to allow satisfactory sealant penetration and
expansion.
END OF SECTION 06 10 53
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 6
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply the interior decor package as indicated on the
Drawings including:
a. Anchors, blocking, fasteners, and other items not provided by Owner necessary for
a complete installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting heights, and
attachments to other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for information on
interior décor package,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install Interior Décor Package per manufacturer’s instructions and general installation
instructions of Division 06 Section " Miscellaneous Carpentry."
END OF SECTION 06 46 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Surface Burning Classification: ASTM E84 Class C; flamespread of 200 or less, smoke
developed of 450 or less.
1. For fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) wall panels used in a fire exit way, provide panels
with a Class A surface burning classification per ASTM E84.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PREFINISHED PANELING 06 64 00 - 1
463463066400_PrefinishedPaneling_04-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. General:
A. Manufacturers:
1. Material: ASTM D5319, composite plastic panels of random chopped fiberglass roving,
modified polyester copolymer, inorganic fillers and pigments.
PREFINISHED PANELING 06 64 00 - 2
463463066400_PrefinishedPaneling_04-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
2. Trim: Panel manufacturer’s standard 0.09 inch (2.3 mm) thick vinyl moldings to meet
project conditions and matching panel color. Provide division bar, inside corner, outside
corner and end cap.
3. Adhesive: Solvent based panel adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Set all paneling to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true, and cut to fit.
B. Scribe and cut paneling to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
D. Install prefinished paneling over substrate as indicated on Drawings, in strict accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations, using non-flammable adhesive (100 percent coverage). Panels
to be set in full bead of silicone caulking at top of base. Extend moisture resistant gypsum
wallboard to 48 inches (1219 mm) above finished floor on metal studs with a spacing of 16
inches (406.4 mm) o.c. Top edge to have finished trim.
END OF SECTION 06 64 00
PREFINISHED PANELING 06 64 00 - 3
463463066400_PrefinishedPaneling_04-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes
1. Removal of existing roofing, insulation, and flashing to deck (as indicated on drawings).
2. Required minor renovation for reroofing work.
A. Sequence demolition and renovation with work sequence of work being installed.
B. Coordinate with reroofing work so that all existing items removed in one day can be replaced
along with the new roofing work in the same day.
D. All existing RTUs, exhaust fans to remain shall be raised to create a 8” minimum curb.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Provide installers warranty on the attached form covering defects in installed materials and
workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Plywood Sheathing: Fir or Southern Yellow Pine Plywood, C-C plugged, NCX exterior type,
fire retardant treated FR-S U.L. rating, 5/8 inch (16 mm) minimum thickness or match existing.
B. Wood Nailers and blocking: Wolmanized lumber; preservative treated with preservatives that
are compatible with the roof membrane.
C. Fasteners:
D. Miscellaneous Materials: Best grade of quality approved by roofing manufacturer for specific
application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that required barricades and other protective measures are in place as specified in
Division 01 Section "General Conditions."
B. As a minimum requirement one layer minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) isocyanurate insulation
covered by 1 layer minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm) CDX plywood must be utilized for any areas
of traffic, (foot traffic, roof top equipment or any other type traffic), across any roof area.
1. The covering must be installed in a manner to withstand applicable wind loads expected
at the site during construction.
A. Perform demolition activities in a careful and orderly manner with the least amount of
disturbance or damage to adjoining surfaces and structures.
B. Avoid excessive vibrations in demolition procedure that would be transmitted through the
existing structure and finish materials.
3.3 DISPOSAL
A. Materials, equipment and debris resulting from demolition operations shall become property of
the Contractor. Remove and dispose of demolition debris in accordance with requirements of
Division 01 Section "General Conditions."
A. Nailers:
1. Replace damaged or deteriorated wood nailers with new nailers and curbs as required.
Install additional nailers as required.
2. Clean and prepare existing surfaces to receive wood nailers and curbs.
3. Install nailers and curbs continuously without gaps and level and true with joints flush.
4. Securely fasten nailers to structure with expansion fasteners. Use of power-actuated
fasteners is prohibited.
5. Apply sealant to voids.
E. Abandoned Equipment Curbs & Supports: Remove all abandoned equipment curbs & supports
down to deck. Repair or install new steel decking as needed to match existing. Refer to
Drawings.
F. Plumbing Vents: Extend plumbing vents or modify as necessary to accommodate new flashing
installation; minimum height as required by local code.
G. Drains, Sleeves and Curbs: Secure and seal drains, sleeves, curbs, ducts and other work which
pass through roof as required to receive new roofing system.
1. Install new decking of like type, gauge and dimensions to provide suitable substrate in
areas where penetrations through deck are removed. Extend new decking 18 inches (457
mm) minimum past next nearest bar joist or support member. Include demolition and
related work in Bid.
2. Coordinate demolition work and removal with reroof project to maintain facility in dry
watertight condition. Promptly dispose of removed equipment and materials at an
authorized disposal site.
END OF SECTION 07 01 50
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a
damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are
less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above dew point.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Products:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
B. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
C. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other
voids.
D. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing
and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
E. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 and
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks
complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces.
F. Install sheet flashing and bond to wall substrates where indicated or required according to
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate
according to ASTM C 898.
B. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting
subsequent construction operations.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07 14 16
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Fire and Insurance Ratings: Provide insulation, complying with governing regulations for
applications indicated.
C. Fire Hazard Control: Do not deliver plastic insulation to project site prior to time of installation
and protect against ignition at all times. Conceal with other work as indicated immediately
upon installation; do not allow plastic insulation to remain exposed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Manufacturers:
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1
463072100_ThermalInsulation_11-09-09
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. Perimeter Insulation Under Slabs-On-Grade: ASTM C 578, Type IV (1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26
kg/cu. m)), or X (1.30 lb/cu. ft. (21 kg/cu. m)), with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 5 and 165, respectively:
2. Freezer Floor Insulation: Extruded-Polystyrene Foam Insulation Board: ASTM C 578,
Type VI, 30 psi minimum, 1.8 lbs/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m) with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 5 and 165, respectively:
A. Manufacturers:
B. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective
membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less);
Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-
polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.
1. Thickness: 6-1/2 inches (165 mm) thick (or as indicated on the drawings) with a thermal
resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (3.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C).
C. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25
and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
1. Thickness: 6-1/2 inches (165 mm) thick (or as indicated on the drawings) with a thermal
resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (3.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C).
A. Product:
B. Material:
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 2
463072100_ThermalInsulation_11-09-09
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. Products:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice, rain, and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere
with placement.
A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Tape joints and ruptures and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction
to ensure airtight installation.
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 3
463072100_ThermalInsulation_11-09-09
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
C. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more
than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between
ends.
D. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges
of insulation and adjoining framing members.
E. Where exterior walls are to receive batt insulation on metal studs, apply vapor retarder to metal
studs using manufacturer’s approved fasteners or adhesive.
F. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures unless
recessed lighting fixtures are rated for contact with insulation
G. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown.
Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of
approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
A. Masonry-Cell Insulation: Drill holes in CMU face shell or in mortar joint around entire wall
area approximately 5 feet (1.52 m) from floor level. Repeat at height no greater than 15 feet
(4.57 m) in vertical height until completion of wall area fill cores completely with foam
insulation. Patch holes flush to match adjacent material.
B. Steel Tube Insulation: Drill holes in steel tubes approximately 10 feet (3 m) o.c. Patch holes
flush to match adjacent material.
END OF SECTION 07 21 00
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 4
463072100_ThermalInsulation_11-09-09
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1.1 Description
1.1.1 Work Included: Provide and install all infill and top cover insulation including, but not
necessarily limited to: Roofs.
1. Miscellaneous Carpentry 06 10 53
2. EPDM Membrane Roofing 07 53 23
3. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00
4. Joint Sealants, 07 92 00
1.2.1 Protection: Use all means to protect the materials of this section before, during, and
after installation and to protect the work and materials of all other trades.
1.2.2 Delivery and storage: Materials to be stored up, off of the roof deck or ground, and
covered with a weatherproof covering anchored sufficiently so as to resist wind blow-off.
When storing materials on the roof, do not overstress deck or roof structure.
NOTE: Factory shrink-wrap or cover is not acceptable cover
1.2.3 Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
to the approval of the consultant and at no additional cost to the owner.
1.3 References: Materials used in this section shall be listed in the latest edition of the
following:
2.2 Insulation Material: Insulation type is to be as shown in the details. Insulation to be of the
type and minimum thickness as listed here. R-20 two (2) layers.
2.2.2 Isocyanurate
3.1 After deck has been prepared adhere board in a pattern as recommended by the
manufacturer, with joints staggered
3.1.1 All joints must be tight and fittings around penetrations are to be snug.
3.1.2 Joints larger then 1/8” shall be filled with pieces that are adhered to the existing roof
deck.
3.1.3 Verification
Upon completion of the installation in each area, visually inspect and verify all
components are complete and properly installed.
END OF SECTION
ROOF INSULATION 07 23 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over water-resistive
coating over sheathing.
1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and
supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or
other in-service conditions.
2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into water-drainage EIFS
and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in
deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and
assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior
finish, and including a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assembly to drain to
the exterior.
B. Class PB EIFS: Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that
comply with the following:
1. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E331
and EIMA 101.02.
2. Moisture Resistance: No deleterious effects after 14 days when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 2247.
3. Drainage: Greater than 90 percent efficiency when tested in accordance with ASTM
E2273.
4. Salt Spray Resistance: No deleterious effects after 300 hours when tested in accordance
with ASTM B117.
5. Freeze/Thaw: No deleterious effects when tested in accordance with EIMA 101.01.
6. Mildew Resistance: No growth supported during 28 day exposure period when tested in
accordance with ASTM D3273.
7. Impact Resistance: Standard [and heavy duty] as indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details of penetration
and termination, flashing details, joint locations and configurations, fastening and anchorage
details including mechanical fasteners, and connections and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: 1 sq. ft. (93 sq. mm) square panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture
indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work.
E. Affidavits:
1. Where mandated by applicable building codes, provide affidavits from EIFS and sealant
applicators confirming full compliance to manufacturer's application requirements.
2. Refer to Exterior Insulation and Finish Affidavit at the end of this Section. Complete the
document and submit it as an attachment to the EIFS warranty.
1. The EIFS as installed has been tested per Code requirements and does not affect the fire
rating of the exterior wall assembly.
2. The EIFS application and installation has been inspected by manufacturer's representative
and are confirmed to be in full compliance to the manufacturer's minimum application
requirements.
3. The specific brand and type of sealants used on this project are compatible with the
correctly installed in conjunction with the approved EIFS. Document to also list the
approved sealant manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from
sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site with the Owner, EIFS installer
and a representative of the EIFS system manufacturer.
E. Inspections: Provide independent third party inspection where required by applicable building
codes and agencies within the jurisdiction of the Project. Conduct inspections in accordance
with code requirements and Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products:
2.2 MATERIALS
B. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as
water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and
performance criteria of ICC-ES AC212.
1. Sheathing Joint Tape: Type recommended by EIFS manufacturer for sealing joints
between and penetrations through sheathing.
D. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use;
compatible with substrate; with VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24);.
E. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I;
EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded
Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for most stringent requirements for material performance
and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following:
1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not
less than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent
results.
2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, per
ASTM E 84.
3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm)
and in thickness indicated but not more than 4 inches (102 mm) thick or less than
thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397.
1. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.3 oz./sq. yd. (146 g/sq. m).
2. Heavy-Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 20 oz./sq. yd. (678 g/sq. m).
G. Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with Type I, white or
natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive.
J. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply
with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and
complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard Cell Class for use intended, and
ASTM C 1063.
2.5 MIXING
A. General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials.
Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS
manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by
EIFS manufacturer or discard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS.
Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish
coats on other work.
B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during
installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of
substrates.
C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain
optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for
installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.
A. Primer/Sealer: Apply over gypsum sheathing substrates to protect substrates from degradation
and where required by EIFS manufacturer for improving adhesion of insulation to substrate.
B. Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to
provide water-/weather-resistive barrier. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and
inside and outside corners of sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed
water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS manufacturer's
written instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime substrates, if required,
and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions and details.
A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints,[ at window sills,] and
elsewhere as indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with
installation of insulation.
B. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated; where required by EIFS manufacturer; where
expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar
substrates, materials, and construction; at floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction;
and where wall height changes.
A. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation [and foam shapes ]in minimum thickness
recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) dry-coat
thickness.
B. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free
installation with mesh continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm)
or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches (204 mm) of corners. Completely
embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and
pattern are not visible.
1. Install standard impact reinforcing mesh in all areas 8 foot above finish floor and above.
2. Install heavy duty reinforcing mesh in all areas 8 foot above finish floor and below.
A. Finish Coat: Apply over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform
appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color
and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture
variations.
A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable
requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and in ASTM C 1481.
1. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat.
2. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and EIFS
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Apply primer recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed.
4. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent
sealant from adhering to back of joint.
5. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape immediately
after tooling joints, without disturbing joint seal.
Delete paragraph below if not applicable. The International Building Code requires special inspections
for some EIFS installations; verify requirements of applicable building code.
Note: The Architect may serve as qualified special inspector unless otherwise required by authority
having jurisdiction.
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform inspections
according to ICC-ES AC235 or as required by authority having jurisdiction.
B. EFIS Inspection: Arrange for EFIS system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect EFIS
installation at the following times.
A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials
from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS
coatings.
EIFS Applicator:
(Type Name)
Completion Date:
The information entered above is offered in testimony that the EIFS installation conforms with the listed EIFS
manufacturer's installation methods and procedures and all applicable model or jurisdictional building codes.
Note: An affidavit shall be received from the sealant installer indicating that the sealant installation conforms
with the EIFS minimum application requirements and sealant manufacturer's installation methods and proce-
dures and must accompany this declaration. These affidavits must be attached to the EIFS project warranty for
this project.
END OF SECTION 07 24 19
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Pre-Installation Conference: Not less than two weeks before start of weather resistant barrier
installation, meet at project site with Architect, Contractor, barrier material manufacturer's
representative.
B. Clean surfaces of dirt, oils, lubricants or other debris that may inhibit adhesion of the flashing
tape to the substrate.
C. Allow a minimum of 24 hours for drying after precipitation and before installing the flashing
tape. For optimal performance, install flashing tape at temperatures above 40 degrees F (4
degrees C).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Air Barrier: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV
stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
B. Fasteners:
C. Sealants: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant, of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight, compatible with air barrier, and
approved and recommended by the flashing tape manufacturer
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEQUENCING
A. Install air barrier after sheathing is installed and before windows and doors are installed.
B. Install air barrier flashing concurrent with window and door installation
C. Installation of windows, doors and flashing before installation of air barrier is not acceptable.
1. Horizontally unroll air barrier starting at lowest level. Ensure barrier is plumb and level
with foundation.
2. Extend bottom edge over sill plate a minimum of 3 inches (76 mm). Apply continuous
sealant bead to seal bottom edge to sheathing.
3. Attach air barrier to sheathing every 12 to 18 inches (305 to 457 mm) at vertical studs.
4. Shingle upper level barrier over lower layers and overlap 6 inches minimum.
5. Overlap air barrier at corners of building by a minimum of 12 inches (305 mm).
6. Overlap air barrier vertical seams by a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm).
7. Extend air barrier over window and door openings. Do not pre-cut.
a. Horizontally cut air barrier along bottom of door header and along top of sill.
b. Vertically cut air barrier down the center of door openings from the top of the door
opening (header) down to the bottom of the door opening (sill).
c. Fold side flaps inside around door openings and fasten every 6 inches (152 mm).
Trim off excess.
C. Tape all horizontal and vertical seam of air barrier with joint sealing tape.
D. Seal all tears and cuts in air barrier with joint sealing tape.
A. Make angular cuts upward from upper corners of the rough opening to create an upper head flap
to expose sheathing to allow head flashing installation. Flip head flap up and temporarily
secure.
B. Sills:
1. Cut flexible flashing tape at least 12 inches (305 mm) longer than width of rough opening
sill.
2. Remove first piece of release paper, align edge of sill flashing with inside edge of sill,
and adhere into rough opening across sill and up jambs 6 inches (152 mm) minimum. Sill
flashing should not wrap onto interior surface of framing.
3. Remove second release paper and fan flashing tape at bottom corners onto face of wall.
Firmly press sill flashing to insure full adhesion.
4. Secure edges of bottom corners with fasteners
C. Jambs.
1. Remove release paper and install jamb flashings overlapping entire jamb mounting
flange. Extend jamb flashings 6 inches (152 mm) above top of rough opening to below
bottom of sill flashing.
2. For brick mold, non-integral flanged, and non-flanged windows install dual sided
flashing tape at jamb areas per the installation instructions.
D. Heads:
a. Remove release paper and install head flashing covering entire mounting flange
and adhering to exposed sheathing or framing members. Extend head flashing
beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings.
b. Flip head flap down over the head flashing
c. Secure flap above window with joint sealing tape
d. For brick mold, non-integral flanged, and non-flanged windows install dual sided
flashing tape at head areas per the installation instructions.
a. Cut flexible head flashing at least 12 inches (305 mm) longer than the arc length of
arched opening
b. Remove both release papers and install conforming around top of window,
covering entire mounting flange. Overlap head flashing over jamb flashings at least
6 inches (152 mm).
c. To facilitate installation to round-top window or door heads, remove short lengths
of release papers, begin installation, and repeat to work flashing into position and
complete installation.
d. Secure outer edges of head flashing with fasteners.
e. Secure flap above window with joint sealing tape.
E. Seal rear of window or door frame to rough opening per requirements of Division 07 Section
“Joint Sealants.”
F. Other Openings and Penetrations: Install flashing components in a lapped manner to provide a
weathertight barrier.
END OF SECTION 07 27 19
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: Full-size units of each type of soffit and trim in each color, texture, and pattern
required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Integrally colored solid vinyl soffit complying with ASTM D 4477.
B. Products:
C. Pattern: 12-inch (300-mm) exposure in V-grooved, triple, 4-inch (102-mm) board style.
D. Texture: Smooth.
SOFFIT PANELS 07 43 00 - 1
463463074300_SoffitPanels_11-09-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. General: Formed and coated aluminum soffit complying with AAMA 1402.
B. Product:
C. Pattern: 12-inch (300-mm) exposure in V-grooved, triple, 4-inch (102-mm) board style.
D. Texture: Smooth.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, and other items as recommended by soffit
manufacturer for building configuration.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper
sequencing.
B. Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent
requirements apply.
SOFFIT PANELS 07 43 00 - 2
463463074300_SoffitPanels_11-09-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
END OF SECTION 07 43 00
SOFFIT PANELS 07 43 00 - 3
463463074300_SoffitPanels_11-09-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data:
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that retained and new
materials and components comply with Project Specifications and that materials furnished are
compatible with one another and the adjacent work and are new and first quality. Include
manufacturer’s written approval of project details, materials, fastener pattern for insulation and
membrane, and warranty requirements for the specific project substrate and location.
F. Warranty: Roof manufacturer’s Kroger Limited Warranty with Product Data Submittal,
including evidence of application for warranty.
G. Manufacturer’s Reports:
A. Installer Qualifications:
a. Shall be present at the job site at all times when Work is being performed.
b. Supervise workers as required to ascertain workmanship, progress and adherence
to details.
c. Report to Owner’s Representative daily.
d. Responsible for schedule and coordination.
e. Authority to make binding commitments upon Contractor at the Project site.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer
as roofing membrane.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes
indicated.
a. Maintaining water tightness of the building during roof installation, including night
seal procedures.
b. Roofing details and procedures.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Contractor:
1. Warranty under roofing installer’s letterhead covering repairs required to correct defects
due to faulty materials or workmanship, and to otherwise maintain the roof in a
watertight condition and to correct all other defects without regard to watertightness.
Any repair shall be done at the expense of the Contractor.
2. Warranty Work against the following:
3. In event that any of the work does not perform as warranted, provide the following
without cost to the Owner:
4. The Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs to protect the building contents
from damage without invalidating manufacturer’s warranty and guarantee. Written
notice of such repairs shall be made in the prescribed time.
5. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Owner’s final acceptance
1. Roof manufacturer’s Kroger Limited Warranty that warrants Owner with a watertight
condition of roof system and all components thereof. Warranty shall cover all
workmanship and materials required to maintain a watertight condition and a roof system
free of defects.
2. Amend manufacturer’s warranty to cover roof related components and roof brand
membranes when supplied and installed in accordance with the technical specifications
set forth by the manufacturer.
3. Submit a Material Certification Form to certify that materials made available by the
membrane manufacturer are used throughout the project where needed.
Select first option below (10 years) for ballasted roof systems. Select second option (15 years) for
adhered systems.
4. Warranty Period: [10][15] years from date of Owner’s final acceptance.
5. Warranty Form: Refer to sample form in Division 00 Section "Warranty Forms."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Loose Laid Ballasted Membrane Roofing System: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced
uniform, flexible sheet made from EPDM, and as follows:
For remodels and expansions, select option in first paragraph below. Delete option for all new
construction.
2. Membrane:
Select loose laid ballasted membrane roofing system above K.for projects in Alabama, Arkansas,
Colorado, Georgia, Idaho, Indiana, Illinois, Kentucky, Louisiana, Michigan, Mississippi, Montana, North
Carolina, Ohio, Oregon, South Carolina, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Virginia, Washington, West Virginia
and Wyoming. Select fully adhered membrane roofing system below L for projects in Kansas,
Missouri, Oklahoma and Nebraska.
B. Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing System: ASTM D 4637, Type I, fire rated, nonreinforced
uniform, flexible sheet made from EPDM, and as follows:
1. Products:
2. Membrane:
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with membrane roofing.
B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, reinforced or non-
reinforced, according to application, black, as furnished by roofing membrane manufacturer.
D. Sealant: Roofing membrane manufacturer’s approved sealant used to seal penetrations through
the membrane system or miscellaneous sealant applications that come in contact with roofing
system components.
E. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- (75-
mm-) wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film furnished by membrane manufacturer
for EPDM systems.
G. Insulation Fastening Plates: FM I-90 approved corrosion resistant plates as furnished and
approved by roof system manufacturer for specific application.
H. Fasteners (Insulation): FM I-90 approved #14 heavy duty, self tapping series 300, screws as
furnished and/or warranted in writing by roofing system manufacturer.
J. Inside Corners and Outside Corners and Molded Pipe Flashings: Pre-molded components as
furnished by membrane manufacturer for this system.
M. Other miscellaneous materials shall be manufacturer’s best grade available and approved in
writing by the roof system manufacturer for the specific application.
N. Stone Ballast: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) to 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal round washed
gravel meeting ASTM D-448 & ASTM C-136 testing for EPDM ballasted systems.
O. Sealants
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid closed cell polyisocyanurate foam ASTM C 1289,
Type II, glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. Minimum compressive strength 20 psi,
minimum density 2.0 pcf. See Drawings for total insulation thickness.
1. Products:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roof areas for conditions that would prevent the proper application of new roofing and
verify the following.
a. Decking, curbing, renovation, and wall substrate construction has been completed.
b. Deck and substrates are clean, smooth and free from depressions, waves,
projections, defects and damage.
c. Wood nailers are properly installed to receive roofing system.
d. Surfaces in contact with any single ply material are free from bitumen, grease, oil
or other foreign material.
e. Surfaces in contact with roofing membrane are free from sharp edges, fins or
projections.
f. Materials are completely dry and free from ice and snow, including substrate,
deck, insulation and roofing membrane as applicable. Confirm dryness by
moisture meter and demonstrate to Owner’s Representative.
g. Roof equipment, openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, vents and blocking
members are solidly and properly set.
h. Work has been completed where possible for other trades that require work or
traffic on the roofing area.
B. Correct or complete any conditions requiring correction or completion prior to the installation
of the roofing system. Notify the Owner’s representative in writing of any unacceptable
conditions.
C. Verify the location of interior ducts, electrical lines, piping, conduit, and/or similar obstructions.
Perform Work in such a manner as to avoid contact with the above-mentioned items.
D. Verify existing conditions that may cause moisture penetration. Notify the Owner’s
representative in writing prior to beginning construction.
E. Start of work under this section constitutes acceptance of deck substrate and site conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Broom clean roof surface immediately prior to roofing application. Debris under roof
membrane is unacceptable.
Retain paragraph and associated subparagraph below if project is a remodel. Delete subparagraph below
if no VSAT dish.
B. Move or remove existing equipment as required for roofing Work. Contact Owner 7 days in
advance and obtain permission in writing to move or relocate equipment.
1. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing
roof insulation.
B. Tapered Insulation
A. Roofing Membrane:
Typically delete subparagraph below L unless a fully adhered roofing membrane is specified.
4. Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing
membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing
roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane.
5. Execute work so membrane can be temporarily sealed on a down slope surface at the end
of each day with night seal. Tie off with a water stop to the structural deck to prevent
water flow into the new roofing installation.
6. Secure perimeter in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures for
building height and location.
7. Secure field membrane with fasteners and plates at 12-inches (305-mm) on center at
expansion joints, curbs, interior walls, penthouses, and any other penetrations which
exceed 24-inches (610-mm) in any direction.
B. Membrane Splicing:
1. Membrane Lap Splices: 4.5-inches (114-mm) wide, minimum. Locate field splices at
roof drains outside drain sump.
2. Allow top sheet to fall freely into place over bottom ply without wrinkling or stretching.
3. Insure that surfaces to be spliced are cleaned, primed and dirt free. Remove excessive
dirt by washing with a detergent. Rinse thoroughly, allow to dry, and then wipe cured
surface with manufacturer's solvent/cleaner.
4. Apply a liberal amount of manufacturer's splice primer. Allow splice primer to dry. If
seam tape has not been applied after 30 minutes, reapply splice primer.
5. Seam joints with seam tape approved by roof system manufacturer for all EPDM field
seams.
6. Probe laps each day to verify seams are bonded. In addition, perform random lap test
sample checks (including checks at start of each day) to verify peel strength. Caulk cut
edges by applying manufacturer's seam sealant, if required.
7. Roof system manufacturer's representative shall be on site at start of project to supervise
operations and to inspect and approve seams.
3.5 FLASHING
1. Install flashing at roof penetrations, interruptions, and any roof intersection including
roof edges with vertical or sloped surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended procedures and the detail drawings.
2. Curbs, projections and risewall conditions require a minimum 8-inch (203-mm) height
for base flashings and sleeves.
3. Apply manufacturer's bonding adhesive to both underside of flashing and surface to
which it is to be bonded, at a rate of approximately 1 gallon (3.8 l) per 50 sq.ft (4.65-
sq.m) of surface coverage.
4. Do not apply bonding adhesive to portion of flashing that overlaps onto itself. Use seam
tape where membrane overlaps itself.
5. Allow bonding adhesive to dry to a finger touch until it does not string or stick to a dry
finger. Roll the flashing into dry adhesive. Care must be taken to assure that flashing
does not bridge where there is any change of direction.
6. Mechanically fasten top all of flashing under or through appropriate counter flashing with
approved fasteners as shown in detail drawings.
7. Install flashings for vents, pipe, soil vents and other round projections in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and the Drawings.
8. Install uncured or preformed flashing membrane as required to form a continuous
membrane seal in each corner or change in plane.
9. Waterproof and positively secure flashings with termination bar at the top and sides to
prevent seepage behind or into the flashing or roofing system.
B. Other Penetrations:
a. Flash pipes with pre-moulded pipe flashings where their installation is possible.
b. Where molded pipe flashings cannot be installed, use field fabricated pipe seals.
4. Pipe Clusters and Unusually Shaped Penetrations: Flash pipe clusters and unusually
shaped penetrations which prohibit the installation of field fabricated pipe seals with
hooded sheet metal boxes. Provide penetration boxes with solid sheet metal face
closures. Slope piping away from the penetration flashings. Provide removable tops.
Limit the use of pitch pans and sealer to specific Owner Representative-approved
locations. Provide rain-tight umbrellas/hoods for all pitch pans.
A. Apply stone ballast daily on completed roof areas. Apply at the rate of 10-lbs/sf (48.8-kg/sm).
A. Install the manufacturer's walk pads on the roof as indicated on the Drawings.
A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or
inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
3.9 CLEANING
END OF SECTION 07 53 23
1.1 Description
Make all submittals as required by the contract documents, and revise and
resubmit as necessary to establish compliance with the specified
requirements
Prior to each submittals, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each
item being submitted and verify that each item and the submittal for it
conforms in all respects with the requirements of the contract documents.
By affixing the contractor’s signature to each submittal, certify this
coordination has been performed.
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Procedures
2.2.2 Submit a minimum of four (4) copes, two (2) of which will be retained by
the architect.
2.3 Samples
2.3.2 Unless otherwise specified, submit three (3) samples of all materials to be
utilized.
2.4 Colors
Unless the precise color is specifically described in the contract documents,
and whenever a choice of color is available in a specified product, submit
accurate color charts to the Architect for review and selection.
2.5 Substitutions
3.1.1 Make all submittals far enough in advance for scheduled dates for
installation to provide all time required for reviews, for securing necessary
approvals, for possible revisions and resubmittals, and for placing orders
and securing delivery.
3.3.3 Samples
END OF SECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Copings
2. Gravel stops / metal edge flashing
3. Counter flashings
4. Gutters, downspouts, scuppers, and conductors heads.
5. Reglets and receivers
A. Manufacturer shall certify that reglet and counter flashing system to resist anticipated wind
loads when tested in accordance with ASTM D3161-95a for a minimum of two continuous
hours as verified by independent test results.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, profiles, shapes, seams, dimensions, and details for fastening,
joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, layouts at 1/4 inch scale,
details at 3 inch scale
1. Show layout, joining profiles, and anchorage's of fabricated work, including major
counter flashings, trim and fascia units, gutters, downspouts, scuppers and expansion
joint systems.
C. Samples:
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Contractor's Warranty: Warranty for sheet metal flashing and trim for roofing shall be covered
in the roofing installer’s full system warranty and shall warrant sheet metal work to be free of
leaks and defects in materials and workmanship for two years after date of final acceptance of
Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; structural quality, mill phosphatized for field painting.
B. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and
prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M, minimum “Kynar
500” or “Duranar 200” Fluoropolymer finish, one mil min. dry film thickness.
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing
and trim installation.
B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,
nonperforated.
1. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m).
C. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with
hex washer head.
3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class,
and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
A. General: Provide either prefabricated or field/factory formed sheet metal flashing and trim as
indicated on the Drawings.
B. Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply
to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items
where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Fabricate
nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and
solder where applicable.
D. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
deep, filled with elastomeric or butyl sealant concealed within joints.
F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal
flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal, and in thickness not less than one gauge heavier than that
of metal being secured.
A. General: Provide either prefabricated or field formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications.
B. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross-section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 120-inch- (3048-mm-) long sections.
Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of
C. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with
metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, of size and thickness as recommended by
SMACNA, and anchors.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to
exterior, 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches (100 mm)
beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof.
E. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of
dimensions and shape indicated.
F. Colors for Roof Drainage Sheet Metal Fabrications: As specified in Division 01 Section
“Exterior Finishes and Colors.”
A. General: Provide either prefabricated or field formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
B. Manufacturers
C. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop/Metal Edge) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-
inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch-
(150-mm-) wide joint cover plates. Install along perimeters, and parapets exceeding 18 inches
(457 mm) across the top dimension except for gabled walls as indicated in "Copings" paragraph
below.
D. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-)
long, sections, maximum top dimension of 18 inches (457mm). Fabricate joint plates of same
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 4
463463076200_SheetMetalFlashingAndTrim_04-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
thickness as copings. Furnish with concealed anchorage, concealed splice plates with same
finish as coping caps, mitered corner units, and continuous cleats to support edge of external
leg. Exception shall be for gabled walls with minimum slope of 1 inch (25 mm) in 12 inches
(305 mm), seamed with flat lock seams.
G. Colors for Low-Slope Roof Sheet Metal Fabrications: As specified in Division 01 Section
“Exterior Finishes and Colors.”
A. Provide prefabricated units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure
interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing
indicated with factory- mitered and -welded corners and junctions.
1. Product:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks.
D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric or butyl sealant.
E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600
mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be
used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with elastomeric or butyl sealant concealed
within joints.
G. Fasteners: Use stainless-steel fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4
inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.
H. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required for watertight construction.
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof
perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with lapped joints sealed with elastomeric or butyl sealant,
double riveted 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Flash joints with minimum 5-inch (127-mm) wide EPDM
flashing, with edges sealed with urethane sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach
gutters at eaves or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets and spacers spaced not more than
36-inches (900-mm) apart in a staggered pattern. Provide end closures and seal watertight with
sealant. Slope to downspouts
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet (15.24
m) apart. Install expansion joint caps.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Locate straps at top
and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support
scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered
edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
E. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support
scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face over the roofing
membrane.
A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams
that will be permanently watertight.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations
in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.
1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate
at 12-inch (300-mm) centers minimum.
C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG
Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at
12-inch (300-mm) centers minimum.
2. Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 18-inch (450-mm)
centers.
END OF SECTION 07 62 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply roof curbs for skylights and roof-mounted
equipment with the exception of roof top units with integral curbs.
b. Comply with requirements in Division 00 Section “General Conditions.”
a. Bolts, nuts, washers, screws, and other items not provided by Owner necessary for
a complete installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1. Shop Drawings: Showing fabrication and installation details for roof accessories.
A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details as
required for installation of units to coordinate with type of roofing indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Direct Buy Owner-Furnished Products” and vendor provided
shop drawings for sizes and locations.
MANUFACTURED CURBS 07 72 13 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof curbs according to manufacturer's written instructions and Drawings.
Anchor roof curbs securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof curb
installation. Install roof curbs to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking,
and fastener disengagement.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Install roof curbs level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in
alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
E. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by manufacturer of roof curbs.
END OF SECTION 07 72 13
MANUFACTURED CURBS 07 72 13 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Roof hatches.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories.
A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details
for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated double-wall
curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with
welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight
perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware.
1. Products:
2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) external and 20-lbf/sq.
ft. (0.95-kPa) internal loads.
3. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches (750 by 900 mm).
4. Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 14 gage, 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick.
ROOF HATCHES 07 72 33 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
6. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as
outer metal lid.
7. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches (300 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
8. Hardware: Galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge
system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.
9. Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock in place on
full extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to closed position.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof hatches according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
hatches securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof hatch installation.
Install roof hatches to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener
disengagement.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Install roof hatches level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in
alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
E. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.
F. Adjust hardware and operating devices for smooth, uninhibited operation of roof hatches.
END OF SECTION 07 72 33
ROOF HATCHES 07 72 33 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Joint sealants
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Provide products listed in other Part 2 articles by one of the following manufacturers.
Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the manufacturers' names are used in Part 2:
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
6. (TRM) Tremco
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Match adjacent color or as indicated on the drawings.
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
A. Exterior and interior vertical expansion and control joints in masonry, aluminum or steel to
masonry.
a. BASF Sonolastic NP 2.
b. PEC Dynatrol II
c. SIK Sikaflex-2c
d. TRM Dymeric 240
C. Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters and joints
requiring NSF, USDA and other sanitary code requirements.
1. S-2: Silicone, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, A or N-Curing, Mildew-Res.
a. BASF Omniplus
b. DOW 786 Mildew Resistant.
c. GE Sanitary SCS1700.
d. PEC 898
e. TRM Tremsil 200
D. Exterior horizontal surfaces subject to traffic requiring caulking, unless otherwise indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
a. Pourable:
1) Type S
a) BASF Sonolastic SL 1
b) PEC Urexpan NR-201
c) SIK Sikaflex-1c SL
d) TRM Vulkem 45
b. Non-Sag:
1) Type M
a) BASF Sonolastic NP 2
b) PEC Dynatred
c) SIK Sikaflex-2c NS
d) TRM Vulkem 227
2) Type S
a) BASF Sonolastic NP 1
b) PEC Dynatrol 2 SG
c) SIK Sikaflex-1a
d) TRM Vulkem 116
F. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and other
interior non-moving joints.
1. S-4: Latex Sealant. Comply with ASTM C 834, Type O P, Grade NF.
a. BASF Sonolac
b. PEC AC-20+.
c. TRM Tremflex 834.
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance:
1. Products:
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
a. Degussa Building Systems, Sonneborn Div.; Sonolastic Closed Cell Baker Rod;
800-496-6067
b. Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic Expand-O-Foam 1380 Series; 800-521-9594.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
C. Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
A. Pavement/Sidewalk Traffic Joints: Depth equal to 75 percent of normal joint width, but not
more than 5/8 inch (16 mm) and not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
B. Elastomeric Sealants, Non-Traffic Joints: Depth equal to 50 percent of normal joint width, but
not more than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) and not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.4 SUMMARY
C. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated door assemblies. Provide assemblies identical to those
tested per ASTM E 152, and labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Doors and frame assemblies
shall meet SBCCI and other code requirements including temperature rise.
D. Steel Finish: Doors shall be factory primed with manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead-
and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria for field-painted
finish.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
B. Steel Doors: 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-) thick of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and models
specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules:
1. Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0478-inch-
(16 ga) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet faces, or as indicated on the drawings.
2. Exterior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum
0.0598-inch- (16 ga) thick, galvanized steel sheet faces. Provide flush tops and bottoms.
1. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Actuated by fusible links at 150 deg F (65 deg C) and
listed and labeled or unrated louvers to provide airflow as required per HVAC drawings.
D. Fabricate 16 ga welded steel frames to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects,
warp, or buckle.
1. For interior frames, provide units with mitered or coped and continuously welded
corners, formed from 14 ga, cold-rolled steel for openings 48 inches or less in width and
from 16 ga steel for openings more than 48 inches in width.
2. For exterior frames, provide units with mitered or coped and continuously welded
corners, formed 16 ga, galvanized steel sheet.
E. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to SDI 107.
F. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations relative to applying finishes.
A. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
B. Jamb Anchors: Masonry, stud-wall, compression, or postinstalled expansion type; not less
than 18 gage, 0.052 inch (1.321 mm) thick.
1. Masonry wall anchors: Crimped tees at least 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) by 10 inches (254
mm).
C. Floor Anchors: Single-unit clip angles, formed from same material as frames, not less than 16
gage, 0.064 inch (1.626 mm) thick.
D. Tension Plates: Provide 18 gage, 0.052 inch (1.321 mm), 2-inch (50.8 mm) by buck width,
with tube spacers welded to bucks at approximately 2 feet (609.6 mm) o.c. for anchorage of
jambs against steel or concrete columns, or at other locations where masonry anchors cannot be
used. Frames shall be drilled and countersunk for 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) flat head bolts.
E. Plaster Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 26 gage, 0.022-inch
(0.559-mm) thick.
F. Astragals for Pairs of Labeled Fire Doors: Two-piece, overlapping, where required, consisting
of 16 gage, 0.060 inch (1.524 mm) steel edge cap applied to active door and 12 gage, 0.105
inch (2.667 mm) steel overlap strip applied to inactive door on stop side.
A. Tubelite Storefront & Entrances, “ICU Sliding Door” modified for installation in a hollow metal
pocket door frame.
B. Sliding Door Head Rail and Vertical Stiles: Manufacturer’s standard dimension.
D. Hardware: Provide manufacturer’s extra heavy-duty door hangers, guides, flush aluminum
pulls (both sides of door), stops, and weatherstripping for use as sound-stripping.
E. Contractor at Contractor’s option may submit a door and sliding head rail system alternate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.4 INSTALLATION
B. Install standard steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Standard Steel Frames: Install standard steel frames for doors and other openings, of size and
profile indicated. Comply with SDI 105.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
2. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with mortar as specified in Division 4 Section "Common
Work Results for Masonry."
D. Standard Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames. Shim as necessary.
1. Door to Frame Clearances: 3/32-inch (2.38 mm) at jambs, 1/8-inch (3.175 mm) at head,
and 5/8-inch (15.875 mm) at bottom.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
E. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
unacceptable.
1. Interior doors shall require no more than 5 ft.lbs. of force to pull or push open.
F. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
END OF SECTION 08 11 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply and install the manually operated side sliding
grilles.
b. Comply with requirements in Division 00 Section “General Conditions.”
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1. Product Data: For each type and size of side sliding grille and accessory.
2. Shop Drawings: Including plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other
work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for information on side
sliding grilles.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Side sliding grilles will be installed by the Owner. Coordinate installation with Owner’s
Representative.
END OF SECTION 08 33 36
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. Door frames for traffic doors per as indicated on Drawings and as specified in
Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications.”
b. Fasteners, supports, and other items not provided by Owner necessary for a
complete installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Rigid Plastic Traffic Doors: Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished
Products" for information on rigid plastic traffic doors.
TRAFFIC DOORS 08 38 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
B. Flexible PVC Traffic Doors: Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished
Products" for information on rigid plastic traffic doors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install traffic doors complete with frames, necessary hardware and accessories,
anchors, inserts, and hangers in accordance with Shop Drawings and manufacturer’s
instructions.
C. Lubricate, test and adjust traffic doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion.
END OF SECTION 08 38 00
TRAFFIC DOORS 08 38 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Structural loads.
2. Thermal movements.
3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
B. Structural Loads:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems,
including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent
deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.
E. Temperature Change (Range): Systems accommodate 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180
deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
F. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of systems of
0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at
a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
G. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Systems do not evidence water penetration through
fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-
pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24
lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions, quantities, and locations.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish. Provide minimum 3-inch (76.2-mm) by 5-inch (127-mm)
color sample applied to aluminum sheet of same gage as specified herein.
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts from one
source and from a single manufacturer.
C. Modification of Details: Drawings are based on one manufacturer's standard aluminum system.
Other standard system of equivalent nature are acceptable when differences do not materially
detract from design concept or intended performances as judged solely by Owner
Representative.
1.5 WARRANTY
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does
not include normal weathering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. EFCO Corporation
2. Kawneer.
3. United States Aluminum.
4. Vistawall Architectural Products.
5. YKK AP America Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
A. Glazing Members: "Snap-On" without visible screws, including neoprene glazing bead.
C. Frame Sizes:
3. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm)
above floor or ground plane.
4. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.
A. General: Provide the following hardware in sizes and types recommended by entrance system
and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated.
1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1; Door manufacturer’s standard heavy duty
top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots.
2. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation,
sized as required by door size.
3. Deadbolt: Door manufacturer’s standard.
4. Cylinders: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
5. Push/Pull: 1-inch (25.4-mm) diameter pull with 9-inch (228.6-mm) o.c. mounting, both
sides as standard with door manufacturer.
6. Finishes: As specified in Division 01 Section “Exterior Finishes and Colors” or in
Hardware Schedule.
A. Exterior Storefront: Match existing clear anodized finish. [Color Anodic Finish, Class I, color
anodic coating complying with AAMA 611, color as specified on documents”][Clear
Anodic Finish, AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.]
B. Wine Cooler: Color Anodic Finish, Class I, color anodic coating complying with AAMA 611,
color as specified on documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp
or rack.
F. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
G. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to
produce weathertight installation.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum
tolerances:
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet
(3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch
(0.8 mm).
END OF SECTION 08 41 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply and install the exterior biparting-sliding,
automatic entrance door assemblies.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete floors for recessed sliding tracks when
recessed tracks are specified.
B. Templates: Obtain templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared
for installing automatic entrance doors.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for information on sliding
automatic entrance doors.
B. Automatic entrance door assemblies will have door panels attached to a door carrier hanger
assembly by means of an adjustable support rod pivot assembly and corrosion resistant
adjustable breakaway release latch holding panel in the closed position under normal automatic
operation. The support rod pivot assembly allows the door panel to be broken outward at any
point in the door's opening or closing cycle allowing for safe emergency egress in compliance
with NFPA 101. The door panel in the breakout mode disconnects the power to the control
circuit inhibiting automatic door operation. The control circuit shall be resettable by re-
engaging the door panel with the door carrier hanger assembly. Breakaway pressure shall be
field adjustable, 5-50 lbs. (2.3- 22.7 kg) to meet local building code requirements but will be
factory set at 50 lbs. (22.7 kg) maximum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Automatic entrance door assemblies will be installed by the Owner. Coordinate installation
with Owner’s Representative.
B. Install glazing in doors as recommended by sliding automatic entrance doors and as specified in
Division 08 Section "Glazing."
END OF SECTION 08 42 29
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply and install bullet resistant pharmacy service
window units [with deal tray][without deal tray].
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1. Product Data: For pharmacy service window unit [with deal tray][without deal tray].
2. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, mounting heights, and
attachments to other work including wiring diagrams.
3. Manufacturer’s instructions for the cleaning of the glazing material.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of unit with other construction supported by, or penetrating
through surrounding equipment.
B. Coordinate the termination of interior and exterior finishes with unit installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for information on
pharmacy service window units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Pharmacy service window units will be installed by the Owner. Coordinate installation with
Owner’s Representative.
3.2 CLEANING
END OF SECTION 08 56 59
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. Fasteners, supports, and other items not provided by Owner necessary for a
complete installation.
a. Door hardware.
b. Code compliant signage for restroom doors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1. A tactile sign stating EXIT and complying with ADAAG shall be provided adjacent to
each door to an egress stairway, an exit passageway and the exit discharge.
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1
463463087100_DoorHardware_07-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
a. Signs shall be installed on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door. Where
there is no wall space to the latch side of the door, including at double leaf doors,
signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall. Mounting height shall be 60
inches (1524 mm) above the finish floor to the centerline of the sign. Mounting
location for such signage shall be so that a person may approach within three
inches of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the
swing of a door.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for information on door
hardware.
B. Door Hardware Sets: Hardware sets are indicated in Part 3 of this Section. Verify with Owner
hardware sets to be installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. Drill and tap doors and frames for
surface-applied door hardware according to ANSI A250.6.
C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install
surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
E. Installation of Thresholds: Miter corner and return exposed ends to wall/door frame
construction. Anchor with not less than No. 10 screws, 12-inches (305-mm) o.c. set edges in
polyisobutylene mastic or silicone sealant.
F. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 2
463463087100_DoorHardware_07-08-10.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep
period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds
to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the
door.
2. Interior doors should require maximum force for pushing or pulling open of 5 pounds per
ft. per ADAG.
3. Fire doors should be the minimum opening force required by appropriate authority and
ADAG
4. Adjust seals to maintain uniform contact pressure, without leaks at corners, and without
excessive interference with door operation.
G. Install signs where indicated on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door using mounting
methods of types complying with manufacturer's written instructions. Where there is no wall
space to the latch side of the door, including at double leaf doors, install sign on the nearest
adjacent wall.
1. Mounting Height: 60 inches above the finish floor to the centerline of the sign in
accordance with ADAAG 4.30.6. Mount so that a person may approach within three
inches of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of
a door.
2. Install signs level and plumb with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in
appearance.
END OF SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 3
463463087100_DoorHardware_07-08-10.doc
2
FINISH PAGE
Group # 1
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D 13
1 ELECTRONIC LOCK PRO5196-06 SFS 626 31
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 40" US32D 51
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
1 10” x 10” VISION PANEL—ONE WAY GLASS BY OTHERS
ACCOUNTING/TELLER ROOM
Group # 2
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 LOCKSET T581BD D 626 23
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
SECURITY,GENERATOR,RISER,OTC,WATER
HEATER, RX STORAGE, PEM STOCK, LPM, KSP.
Group # 3
1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD X 83" CLR 16
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 PUSH PLATE 30S 4 X 16 US32D 46
1 DOOR PULL 33G 4 X 16 US32D 47
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
1 DOOR STOP AND HOLDER 256W US26D 60
1 SIGN ADA "WOMEN" 368W-W3 66
1 SIGN ADA "MEN" 368M-W3 66
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
MULTI-STALL REST ROOMS - FRONT HOUSE
RALPHS EXCEPTION - ALSO USES SIGNS 370W/M-W3
3
Group # 4
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 PUSH PLATE 30S 4 X 16 US32D 46
1 DOOR PULL 33G 4 X 16 US32D 47
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
LUNCH ROOM
Group # 5
3 HINGES ECBB1101 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D 15
1 EXIT DEVICE CX 99EO 48" US26D 33
DELAYED EGRESS EXIT DEVICE. MUST BE
TIED TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.
1 MORTISE CYLINDER 80-102 626 26
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 POWER SUPPLY PS873 34
1 DOOR CORD 788-18 35
1 CLOSER 1261 CUSH AL 43
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 42" US32D 51
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 44" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
1 THRESHOLD 412S X 44" MIL 55
1 DOOR BOTTOM 770S V X 44" MIL 56
1 DRIP CAP 810S X 48" MIL 58
1 DOOR VIEWER 1756 US26D 64
1 SIGN ADA “EXIT” 368E-W2 BLK 72
EXTERIOR DOCK DOOR - DELIVERY DRIVER DOOR
Group # 5A
3 HINGES ECBB1101 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D 15
1 EXIT DEVICE 22EO 48" ALK-RX SP28 37
1 MORTISE CYLINDER 80-102 626 26
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 CUSH AL 43
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 42" US32D 51
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 44" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
1 THRESHOLD 412S X 44" MIL 55
1 DOOR BOTTOM 770S V X 44" MIL 56
1 DRIP CAP 810S X 48" MIL 58
1 DOOR VIEWER 1756 US26D 64
1 SIGN ADA “EXIT” 368E-W2 BLK 72
EXTERIOR DOCK DOOR - DELIVERY DRIVER DOOR
NON-DELAYED EGRESS
4
Group # 6
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 PASSAGE SET T101S D 626 22
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
PHARMACY COUNSEL/WAITING
SMITHS EXCEPTION - ALSO USES DEADBOLT
B660 WITH LOCKSET ND80
Group # 7
1 MORTISE CYLINDER 80-103 626 26
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
REMAINDER OF HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER
ALUM FRONT ENTRY DOORS, GRILLE DOORS,
JEWELRY, GARDEN CENTER
Group # 8
3 HINGES ECBB1101 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D 15
1 EXIT DEVICE AL715 48" AL 36
DELAYED EGRESS EXIT DEVICE TO BE TIED TO
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.
1 RIM CYLINDER 80-129 626 27
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CONDUIT SWK715 36
1 CLOSER 1261 CUSH AL 43
1 THRESHOLD 412S X 44" MIL 55
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 44" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
1 DOOR BOTTOM 770S V X 44" MIL 56
1 DRIP CAP 810S X 48" MIL 58
1 SIGN ADA “EXIT” 368E-W2 BLK 72
EXTERIOR EMERGENCY EXIT DOOR FROM BUILDING
(EXCLUDES DELIVERY DRIVER DOOR)
Group # 8A
1 EXIT DEVICE CX 99NL-OP X 1439 STRIKE US26D 33
DELAYED EGRESS EXIT DEVICE. MUST BE
TIED TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.
1 POWER SUPPLY PS873 34
1 POWER TRANSFER EPT-10 SP28 40
1 MORTISE CYLINDER 80-102 626 26
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
REMAINDER OF HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER
ALUM EMERGENCY EXIT DOOR FROM SALES FLOOR
***EXCEPTION*** MINUM SYLE WIDTH OF 4”, IF USING
A STYLE WIDTH NARROWER THAN 4”, A 33 SERIES CHEXIT
MUST BE USED IN LIEU OF THE 99 SERIES CHEXIT.
5
Group # 8F
3 HINGES ECBB1101 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D 15
1 EXIT DEVICE CX99EO-F 48" AL 33
DELAYED EGRESS EXIT DEVICE TO BE TIED TO
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.
1 MORTISE CYLINDER 80-102 626 26
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 POWER SUPPLY PS873 34
1 DOOR CORD 788-18 35
1 CLOSER 1261 CUSH AL 43
1 THRESHOLD 412S X 44" MIL 55
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 44" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
1 DOOR BOTTOM 770S V X 44" MIL 56
1 DRIP CAP 810S X 48" MIL 58
1 SIGN ADA “EXIT” 368E-W2 BLK 72
FIRE RATED EXTERIOR EMERGENCY EXIT DOOR FROM BUILDING
(EXCLUDES DELIVERY DRIVER DOOR)
Group # 9
6 HINGES ECBB1101 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D 15
2 EXIT DEVICE AL715 AL 36
DELAYED EGRESS EXIT DEVICE TO BE TIED TO
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
2 RIM CYLINDER 80-129 626 27
2 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
2 CONDUIT SWK715 36
1 MULLION 4954 7'2" SP28 42
2 CLOSER 1261 CUSH AL 43
1 THRESHOLD 412S X 72" MIL 55
2 DOOR BOTTOM 770S V X 36" MIL 56
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 72" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
1 DRIP CAP 810S X 76" MIL 56
1 SIGN ADA “EXIT” 368E-W2 BLK 72
EXTERIOR EMERGENCY EXIT DOOR (PAIR) FROM BUILDING
(EXCLUDES DELIVERY DRIVER DOOR)
Group # 10
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D 14
1 LOCKSET T581BD D 626 23
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
STORAGE ROOMS (CIGAR,PHARMACY,FLORAL),
PHARMACY STOCK,CLEANING CLOSET,
ADMINISTRATION AREA,MOP ROOM,SHOE STOCK
6
Group # 10A
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 NRP US26D 14
1 LOCKSET T581BD D 626 23
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8” x 34” US32D 51
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
1 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
PHARMACY ENTRANCE DOOR
Group # 11
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 LOCKSET T561BD D 626 24
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
CBT,MGR OFFICE,STAFFING,GENERAL OFFICE,
ASSISTANT MGR,TRAINING,DIRECTOR,POS
OFFICE,WBT OFFICE
Group # 12
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D 14
1 ELECTRONIC LOCK PRO5196-06 SFS 626 31
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
ECR ROOM
FRED MEYER - JEWERLY STOCK, CHANGE FUND, PC
Group # 13
3 HINGES ECBB1101 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D 15
1 EXIT DEVICE 22NL X 210NL SP28 37
1 RIM CYLINDER 80-129 626 27
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 CUSH AL 43
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 36" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
1 THRESHOLD 412S X 36" MIL 55
1 DOOR BOTTOM 770S V X 36" MIL 56
1 DRIP CAP 810S X 40" MIL 58
1 SIGN ADA “EXIT” 368E-W2 BLK 72
EXTERIOR ELECTRICAL DOOR
7
Group # 14
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D 14
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 22NL-F X 210NL SP28 37
1 RIM CYLINDER 80-129 626 27
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 CUSH AL 43
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
INTERIOR ELECTRICAL DOOR
Group # 15
1 PADLOCK KS41D1200 626 32
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
OVERHEAD DOORS, SECURITY CAGE DOORS, ROOF HATCH
Group # 16
6 HINGES ECBB1101 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D 15
1 DEADLOCK D141BD 626 30
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 DOOR PULL 3E US32D 45
2 FLUSH BOLT 282D US26D 48
1 DUST PROOF STRIKE 280X US26D 65
2 CLOSER 1261 H CUSH AL 43
2 BRUSH WEATHERSTRIP 802S B X 84" MIL 54
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 72" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
2 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 740S N X 36" CLR 57
BASCART DOORS, CART CORRAL DOORS (PAIR)
Group # 17
ALL HARDWARE BY OTHERS
IMPACT/ABS DOORS, COOLER/FREEZER DOORS,
CHAINLINK GATES
Group # 18
1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD X 83" CLR 16
1 PRIVACY DEADLOCK D271 626 29
WITH INDICATOR
1 PUSH PLATE 30S 4 X 16 US32D 46
1 DOOR PULL 33G 4 X 16 US32D 47
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 DOOR STOP AND HOLDER 256W US26D 60
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
1 SIGN ADA "UNISEX" 368U-W3 66
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
ALL SINGLE STALL RR, FRONT OR BACK, EMPLOYEE OR PUBLIC
RALPHS EXCEPTION - ALSO USES SIGNS 370U-W3
8
Group # 19
1 CONT. HINGE 780-210 34 1/2" AL 17
1 EXIT LOCKSET ND25 X 80 BD RHO 626 25
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 36" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
COMPACTOR DOOR—PER ASD 21
Group # 20
2 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 PASSAGE SET T101S D 626 22
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
2 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
CUSTOMER SERVICE/PHARMACY HALF DOOR
Group # 21
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 22L X 230L-BE SP28 37
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
STAIRWELL DOOR
Group # 22
3 HINGES ECBB1101 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D 15
1 LOCKSET T581BD D 626 23
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 CUSH AL 43
1 THRESHOLD 412S X 36" MIL 55
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 36" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
1 DOOR BOTTOM 770S V X 36" MIL 56
1 DRIP CAP 810S X 40" MIL 58
EXTERIOR DOOR FROM FIRE RISER,
SPRINKLER,ASR,MECHANICAL YARD,FSR,MET
9
Group # 23
2 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD X 83" CLR 16
1 DEADLOCK D121BD 626 30
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 DOOR PULL 3E US32D 45
2 FLUSH BOLT 282D US26D 48
1 DUST PROOF STRIKE 280X US26D 65
2 FLOOR STOP 243F US26D 61
2 PLUNGER HOLDER FS1154 US26D 68
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 60" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
1 DRIP CAP 810S X 64" GLD 56
1 THRESHOLD 412S X 60" MIL 55
2 DOOR BOTTOM 770S V X 36" MIL 56
BOTTLE ROOM (PAIR)
Group # 24
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 PUSH PLATE 30S 4 X 16 US32D 46
1 DOOR PULL 33G 4 X 16 US32D 47
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
1 SIGN "MENS LOCKER ROOM"
1 SIGN "WOMENS LOCKER ROOM"
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
LOCKER ROOMS
Group # 25
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 22L-F X 230L-BE ALK-RX SP28 37
1 MORTISE CYLINDER 80-102 626 26
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
1 SIGN ADA “EXIT” 368E-W2 BLK 72
EMERGENCY EXIT-1HR CORRIDOR FROM SALES FLOOR
Group # 26
6 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
2 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 2227L-F X 230L-BE ALK-RX SP28 38
2 MORTISE CYLINDER 80-102 626 26
2 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
2 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
2 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
2 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
1 SIGN ADA “EXIT” 368E-W2 BLK 72
EMERGENCY EXIT-1HR CORRIDOR FROM SALES FLOOR (PAIR)
10
Group # 27
4 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 LOCKSET T581BD D 626 23
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 DUTCH DOOR BOLT 279D US26D 50
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
DUTCH DOOR - PHARMACY/CUSTOMER SERVICE
Group # 28
3 HINGES ECBB1101 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D 15
1 EXIT DEVICE 22EO ALK-RX SP28 37
1 MORTISE CYLINDER 80-102 626 26
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 CUSH AL 43
1 THRESHOLD 412S X 36" MIL 55
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 36" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
1 DOOR BOTTOM 770S V X 36" MIL 56
1 DRIP CAP 810S X 40" MIL 58
1 SIGN ADA “EXIT” 368E-W2 BLK 72
EMERGENCY EXIT DOOR - SALES FLOOR FOR
SMITHS (Las Vegas) - NO DELAYED EGRESS ALLOWED
Group # 29
1 POCKET DOOR KIT 9850 96 AL 68
1 PRIVACY LATCH 330M US26D 69
2 FASCIA 9709 X 72" AL 68
POCKET DOOR - PHARMACY AREA
Group # 30
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 LOCKSET T511BD D 626 21
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
CONFERENCE ROOM, NEW HIRE ROOM
11
Group # 31
6 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D 14
1 LOCKSET T581BD D 626 23
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
2 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
2 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
2 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLTS 292D (2) US26D 49
1 DUST PROOF STRIKE 280X US26D 65
1 ASTRAGAL 383A 84" AL 71
1 COORDINATING DEVICE 297D 72" USP 70
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 728 20' S 53
2 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
FRED MEYER APPAREL STOCK (PAIR)
Group # 32
3 HINGES ECBB1101 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D 15
1 EXIT ALARM LOCK 2670 US28 41
1 RIM CYLINDER 80-129 626 27
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 CUSH AL 43
1 THRESHOLD 412S X 36" MIL 55
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 36" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
1 DRIP CAP 810S X 40" MIL 58
1 DOOR BOTTOM 770S V X 36" MIL 56
1 SIGN ADA “EXIT” 368E-W2 BLK 72
FRED MEYER EMERGENCY EXIT DOOR
Group # 33
6 HINGES ECBB1101 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D 15
2 EXIT ALARM LOCK 2670 US28 41
2 RIM CYLINDER 80-129 626 27
2 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 MULLION 4954 7'2" SP28 42
2 DOOR PULL 3E US32D 45
2 CLOSER 1261 CUSH AL 43
1 DOOR VIEWER 1756 US26D 64
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 891S N 1 X 72" + 2 X 84" MIL 52
1 THRESHOLD 412S X 72" MIL 55
2 DOOR BOTTOM 770S V X 36" MIL 56
1 DRIP CAP 810S X 76" MIL 58
1 SIGN ADA “EXIT” 368E-W2 BLK 72
FRED MEYER EMERGENCY EXIT DOOR-DOCK DOORS (PAIR)
12
Group # 34
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 LOCKSET T581BD D 626 23
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 CLOSER 1261 H AL 43
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
FRED MEYER TELE ROOM,PLAY-LAND CLOSET
Group # 35
4 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 LOCKSET T581BD D 626 23
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 OVERHEAD DOOR HOLDER 454H US32D 44
1 DUTCH DOOR BOLT 279D US26D 50
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
FRED MEYER DUTCH DOOR
Group # 36
2 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 LOCKSET T581BD D 626 23
1 CONSTRUCTION CORE 80-035 GREEN 28
PERMANENT CORE BY KROGER
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
FRED MEYER HALF DUTCH DOOR
Group # 37
3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 13
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 22L X 230L-BE SP28 37
1 CLOSER 1261 REG/PA AL 43
1 KICK PLATE 190S 8" X 34" US32D 51
1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 728 17' S 53
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D 59
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY 63
STOCKROOM DOORS FOR QFC/FRED MEYER
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other
Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
a. Automatic doors.
b. Transom at automatic entrance doors.
c. Doors.
d. Glazed entrances.
e. Storefront framing.
f. Other interior and exterior lites.
g. Mirrored glass
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other
defects in construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers
A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Class 1 (clear)
1. Type A: Uncoated Clear Annealed Float Glass: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.
2. Type B: Uncoated Clear Kind HS Float Glass: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.
3. Type C: Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass: Kind FT (fully tempered);
minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.
B. Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Class 2 (tinted,
heat-absorbing, and light-reducing) with tint color as specified in Division 01 Section "Exterior
Finishes and Colors."
1. Type D: Uncoated, Tinted, Kind HS Float Glass: Minimum 1/4-inch (6 mm) thick.
2. Type E: Uncoated, Tinted, Fully Tempered Float Glass: Kind FT (fully tempered);
minimum 1/4-inch (6 mm) thick.
C. Coated Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Class 1 (clear) glass
lites with low-E coating complying with the following:
1. Type F: Coated, Clear, Kind HS Float Glass: Minimum 1/4-inch (6 mm) thick.
2. Type G: Coated, Clear, Kind FT, Fully Tempered Float Glass: Minimum 1/4-inch (6
mm) thick.
D. Coated Tinted Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Class 2 (tinted, heat-
absorbing, and light-reducing) glass lites with tint color as specified in Division 1 Section
"Product Finishes and Colors" and complying with the following:
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants.
2. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
3. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (24 mm) thick.
4. Interspace Content: Air.
5. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on third surface.
a. Outdoor Lite: D
b. Indoor Lite: F
c. Color: Match existing and/or as indicated on the drawings.
a. Outdoor Lite: E
b. Indoor Lite: G
c. Color: Match existing and/or as indicated on the drawings.
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Silvered Mirrored Glass: Type as indicated below with successive layers of chemically
deposited silver, electrically or chemically deposited copper, and manufacturer's standard
organic protective coating applied to second glass surface to produce a coating system
complying with FS DD-M-411.
a. Glass Type: A
b. Mirrored Glass Edge Treatment: Flat polished edge.
c. Seal edges of silvered mirrored glass after edge treatment to prevent chemical or
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
d. Require mirrored glass manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in
factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.
B. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids
content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with
or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800.
D. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
E. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness
required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
F. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
G. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant, black in color.
H. Mirror Mastic (As Required): An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting
mirrored glass by spot application, certified by both mirrored glass manufacturer and mastic
manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrored glass will be
installed.
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING
A. General: Install mirrored glass units to comply with written instructions of mirrored glass
manufacturer and with referenced GANA and NAAMM publications. Mount mirrored glass
accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.
1. Provide space for air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of
mounting surface.
2. Use mastic only when recommended by mirror manufacturer to support large mirror
surfaces laterally and only in combination with channels and clips.
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating
substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such
protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances
immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
END OF SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
2.2 MATERIALS
B. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel.
A. Fabricate frames to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and
installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
1. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) for blades and
0.080 inch (2.0 mm) for frames.
2. Performance Requirements:
a. Free Area: Not less than 8.0 sq. ft. (0.74 sq. m) for 48-inch- (1.2-m-) wide by 48-
inch- (1.2-m-) high louver.
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 750 fpm.
B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens
are attached.
C. Louver Screening:
2.6 FINISHES
1. Color and Gloss: As specified in Division 01 Section “Exterior Finishes and Colors.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where
required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot
be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or
provide new units.
E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying
a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry,
or dissimilar metals.
END OF SECTION 08 90 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring,
etc.).
b. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, etc.).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-
(1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter
wire.
b. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-
inch (4.12-mm) diameter.
c. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal
thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide
flanges.
d. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep,
minimum base metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).
2. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of
main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
a. Products:
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.
A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Do not attach
hangers to roof deck.
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. Splay hangers
only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Do not attach hangers to roof deck.
C. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
D. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3
mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely
between parallel members that will receive finishes.
A. Install steel studs with bottom and top runner tracks anchored to substrates. Isolate system from
building structure to prevent transfer of loading and deflections into metal support system, both
vertically and horizontally.
B. Reinforce hanging support of gypsum drops with 1 5/8-inch (41.27-mm) black iron channels, or
other steel channels approved by structural engineer, by threading through metal studs as low as
practical. Do not locate at middle of stud. Support wire to be attached to top cord of joists/joist
girders panel points or as indicated on drawings. Do not attach hangers to roof deck.
C. Space steel studs and furring 24-inches (609.6-mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings.
D. Steel stud spacing for fascias and soffits shall be 16-inches (406.4-mm) o.c. maximum.
E. Frame doors, recessed light fixtures and other openings with studs and runners, gage and
number, and arrangement as manufacturer's recommends for size of opening, weight of doors,
and height and stud size, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install supplementary framing, runners, furring, blocking and bracing at openings and
terminations in gypsum drywall, and where required for support of other work which cannot be
adequately supported on gypsum board alone.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 09 22 16
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Certainteed Corp.
2. G-P Gypsum Corporation.
3. National Gypsum Company.
4. Temple-Inland
5. USG Corporation.
B. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
C. Regular Type: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), tapered, unless noted otherwise.
E. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M,
1/2 inch (12.7 mm), Type X, tapered.
A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. Products:
A. Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047, manufacturer's standard metal trim accessories, of the beaded
type, with face flanges for concealment in joint compound, except where semi-finishing or
exposed type is indicated. Provide corner beads, L-type edge trim beads, U-type trim beads,
special L-kerf-type edge trim beads, and one-piece control joint beads.
B. Joint Tape:
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Provide chemical-hardening type for tape bedding, and ready-mixed vinyl-type for
topping, on interior work.
2. Provide water-resistant type manufactured by United States Gypsum Co. for use with
water-resistant (MR) gypsum board.
3. Provide chemical-hardening type for exterior work.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
D. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
1. Cementitious backer board: Provide in food preparation areas and restrooms from floor
up to 4-feet (1.22-m) AFF.
2. Provide fiberglass faced water gypsum board for ceilings and soffits in compressor room.
3. Moisture resistant gypsum board: Provide in all food preparation areas and restrooms
from 4-feet (1.22-m) to ceiling.
4. Provide gypsum board on partitions from floor to ceiling, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Provide drywall at vertical transition between ceilings of different height.
6. Provide cementitious backer board for back-up behind ceramic tile as noted on drawings.
a. Cementitious backer board is not required for "decorative bands" of ceramic tile as
indicated in room finish schedule on Drawings.
7. Do not apply drywall to exterior walls behind refrigerated cases and shelving.
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings or if not indicated
according to ASTM C 840.
a. Frame both sides of joints with furring and other supports, as indicated.
b. Leave space of the width indicated between boards, and install one-piece metal
control joint.
2. Place control joints, using a standard “V” joint. Coordinate joint locations with masonry
wall control joints.
3. Isolate drywall work from abutting structural and masonry work; provide edge trim and
acoustical sealant as recommended by manufacturer.
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM
C 840:
1. Level 2: HVAC return air plenums, return airshafts and air-cooled compressor rooms to
ensure airtight and surfaces to receive additional finishes such as FRP or ceramic tile.
a. At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and
immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply one coat of the joint
compound on fastener heads, and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces must
be free of excess joint compound, but tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
a. At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and
immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply two additional
separate coats of the joint compound over flat joints. Apply one additional coat of
the joint compound over interior angles. Apply three separate coats of the joint
compound over fastener heads and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces and
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
the joint compound must be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. "Drywall
primer" must be applied to surfaces before applying final decoration.
END OF SECTION 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Co. will supply the following ceramic tile as specified in Division 01
Section "Décor Interior Finishes and Colors - Bountiful" unless otherwise noted.
All other ceramic tile to be provided by the Contractor:
1) CT-601
2) CT-602
3) CT-603
4) CT-604
5) CT-605
6) CT-606
7) CT-607
8) CT-614
9) CT-615
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish one full, unopened box of each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated that
match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents.
THIN/THICK-SET TILING 09 30 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1,
"Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
E. Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and
coursing where applicable.
F. Utilize bullnose and other trim units to avoid any exposed raw edges of tile.
a. Products:
a. Products:
THIN/THICK-SET TILING 09 30 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
B. Waterproofing Membrane: Polyethylene sheet faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-
inch (0.203-mm) minimum nominal thickness.
1. Products:
A. Manufacturers:
D. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1A and as specified
below:
1. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part
or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer
for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
E. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Epoxy Grout (Floors): ANSI A118.3, 100 percent solids
epoxy, stainless, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Products:
1. Products:
THIN/THICK-SET TILING 09 30 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that
comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Basis of Design: Pantheon; number and color as specified in Division 01 Section “Décor
Interior Finishes and Colors.”
D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not
change color or appearance of grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil,
or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according
to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project
site before installing.
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to
methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules and on the drawings.
D. Install waterproofing membrane at wall to floor juncture including inside and outside corners of
interior walls of toilet rooms to prevent water leakage into adjacent areas.
THIN/THICK-SET TILING 09 30 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. For toilet rooms on elevated slabs, install waterproofing membrane on entire floor and
wall to floor juncture including inside and outside corners of interior walls.
E. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
F. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to
electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap
tile.
G. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile
fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Metal Edge Strips or Granite Thresholds: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge
of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. Refer to
floor covering plan and details.
J. Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints of restroom walls according to grout-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove
excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Cover tile floors with heavy-duty, non-staining construction paper, masked in place. Remove
paper and rinse protective coat of neutral cleaner from all tile surfaces prior to acceptance of tile
work
B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using newly tiled floors for 24 hours
THIN/THICK-SET TILING 09 30 00 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Interior wall installation; thin-set mortar; over gypsum board or cementitious backer units.
1. Tile: Ceramic
2. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
3. Grout:
END OF SECTION 09 31 00
THIN/THICK-SET TILING 09 30 00 - 6
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the
effects of earthquake motions according to the following:
C. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads in accordance with the
International Building Code, Section 1613.1 (2006 IBC) or 1621 (2003 IBC) for Category A, B,
C, D, E, or F as defined per applicable IBC.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: One full, unopened box of each type and color of ceiling tile
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
A. Manufacturers:
B. Panel Types:
1. Type 1: ASTM E1264, Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, Pattern C E,
square edge, 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm) with mold and mildew inhibitor.
2. Type 2: ASTM E1264, Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, Pattern C E K,
tegular edge, scored, 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm) with mold and mildew inhibitor.
3. Type 3: ASTM E1264, Type XX, gypsum base with washable membrane-faced overlay;
square edge, 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm).
4. Type 4: ASTM E1264, Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 4, Pattern E,
tegular edge, 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
B. Panel Type
A. Manufacturers:
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," and the International Building Code, Section 1621.2.5 for seismic building
category indicated.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire, ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1
zinc coating, soft temper or nickel-copper-alloy wire, ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy
UNS No. N04400.
1. Size: 12-gage minimum or as required so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, and in
accordance with the International Building Code, Section 1621.2.5 for seismic building
category indicated.
E. Aircraft Cable (For Ceiling Cloud Suspension System): Stainless steel, type 304, 7 x 7 multi-
stranded complying with Federal Specification RR-W-410E.
1. Size: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) diameter minimum or as required so its stress at three times
hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress
of cable, and in accordance with the International Building Code, Section 1621.2.5 for
seismic building category indicated.
2. Cable Fittings: Provide sleeves, turnbuckles, clamps, terminals as required for a complete
installation.
H. Seismic Separation Joints: Where requited, separation joints shall not be visible from below.
A. Type A: Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners
roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished, cold-rolled, 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide, metal
caps on flanges.
B. Type B: Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Hot-Dip Galvanized, G60 (Z180), Steel Suspension
System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation, with prefinished, cold-
rolled, 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide, metal caps on flanges.
A. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel
edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material,
finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1. Provide 7/8 inch (22 mm) horizontal flange (for Categories A, B, and C)
2. Provide manufacturer’s propriety 7/8 inch (22 mm) horizontal flange meeting ICC ERS-
1308 (for Categories D, E, and F as allowed by AHJ; if not allowed by AHJ, utilize #3
below).
a. Basis of Design for 7/8 inch horizontal flange: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;
BERC2.
3. Provide 2 inch (54 mm) horizontal flange (for Categories D, E, and F.)
A. Edge Trim System: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel, 10 foot straight and curved
profiles.
1. Products:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic
requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems
Handbook."
B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system
to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and
connect securely.
2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
C. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
D. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit.
E. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-
rated assembly.
B. Hangers
1. Attachment of the hangers to the building structural steel must be by means demonstrated
to be suitable by standard construction practice or by certified test data. Do not attach
hangers to roof deck. Install slotted channel framing as required to attach hangers.
2. Space hangers four feet on center or adjust suspension system allowable load based on
actual center spacing.
3. Hangers must be plumb within one in six (±10 ) unless counter-sloping wire or
horizontal bracing is provided.
4. Devices used to attach wires to the grid must be certified to carry five times the design
load.
5. Wires loops must be tightly formed and secured by a minimum of three complete wraps
completed within three inches.
C. Main Beams
D. Cross Tees:
B. Ceiling Weight: No more than 2.5 psf., including grid, panels, light fixtures, and air terminals.
Support other services independently from the ceiling system.
C. Wall Molding:
D. Hangers: Meet requirements of ASTM C 636. Do not attach hangers to roof deck. Install slotted
channel framing as required to attach hangers.
E. Suspension System: 60-pound connection strengths in compression and tension at main beam
and cross tee intersections and splices.
G. Light fixtures: For light fixtures weighing 56 lbs or less, provide 12-gage wires attached slack at
diagonal corners. For light fixtures weighing in excess of 56 pounds, independently support
from building structure.
A. Install according to CISCA 3-4 and eight additional requirements listed in section 1621.2.5.2.2
of the IBC and section 9.6.2.6.2.2 in ASCE 7-02.
B. Wall Molding:
1. Horizontal Flange: 7/8 inch (22 mm) complying with ICC ERS-1308 or 2 inches (51 mm)
as applicable.
2. Attach ceiling grid to the molding at two adjacent walls.
3. Provide 3/4-inch clearance from the wall at unattached ends of the grid system.
C. Hangers:
D. Perimeter Support: Support terminal ends of each main beam and cross tee within 8 inches of
each wall or ceiling discontinuity with 12-gage wire or approved wall support. Plumb to within
one in six and attach to the adjacent wall or to the structure above.
E. Perimeter Spacers: Tie ends of main runners and cross tees together to prevent spreading.
F. Suspension System: Cross tees supporting light fixtures must have the same load carrying
capacity as the main beams or be fitted with supplemental hangers.
1. Provide for ceiling areas greater than 1,000 square feet with rigid bracing or diagonal
splay wires.
2. Bracing must limit ceiling movement to less than 1/4-inch at the point of attachment.
3. Splay Wire Bracing: Clusters of four 12-gage wires attached to the main beam within 2
inches of the cross tee intersection. Wires are arrayed 90 degrees from each other at an
angle not exceeding 45 degrees from the plane of the ceiling.
4. Strut Bracing: Stiffness adequate to resist the vertical loads imposed Attach to the
suspension system and to the structure above at each bracing location.
5. Provide horizontal restraint points at no more than 12 feet on center in each direction.
The first point shall be within 6 feet of each wall.
6. Attachment of the bracing wires to the main beam and to the structure shall be capable of
supporting the greater of 200 pounds or the actual design load with a safety factor of 2.
H. Light Fixtures:
1. Positively attached to the suspension system. The attachment device must be able to
withstand 100% of the weight of the fixture acting in any direction.
2. Fixtures Weighing 56 Pounds or Less: Two 12-gage wires attached slack at diagonal
corners.
3. Fixtures Weighing In Excess of 56 Pounds: Independently supported from the building
structure.
4. Pendant Mounted Fixtures: Support directly from the structure using 9-gage wire.
I. Mechanical Services:
1. Positively attached to the suspension system main beams or to cross tees with the same
load carrying capacity.
2. Terminals Or Services Weighing 20 Pounds To 56 Pounds: Provide two 12-gage wires
connecting them to the ceiling system hangers or to the structure above.
3. Terminals Or Services Weighing More Than 56 Pounds: Independently support from
structure.
J. Penetrations: Except when rigid bracing is used, provide 2-inch oversized trim to allow 1-inch
horizontal movement in all horizontal directions.
K. Seismic Separation Joints: Provide for ceiling areas greater than 2500 square feet.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform special inspections and to prepare test reports.
B. Remove and replace acoustical panel ceiling hangers where test results indicate that they do not
comply with specified requirements.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09 51 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Wall base.
2. Stair accessories.
3. Molding accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples of each
resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
time periods:
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
A. Furnish one unopened box of each type, color, and pattern of resilient base and accessory
installed that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Manufacturers
C. Colors and Patterns: As specified in Division 01 Section "General Interior Finishes and Colors"
and "Décor Interior Finishes and Colors."
K. Surface: Smooth.
A. Manufacturers
B. Basis of Design: As specified in Division 01 Section "General Interior Finishes and Colors."
a. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per
ASTM E 648.
E. Risers: Smooth, flat, coved-toe, 7 inches (178 mm) high by length matching treads; produced
by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads.
F. Stringers: Of same thickness as risers, height and length after cutting to fit risers and treads and
to cover stair stringers; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by
manufacturer for installation with treads.
A. Description: Edging Strip: 1/8-inch (3-mm) by 1-inch (25.4-mm), beveled vinyl as indicated on
Drawings.
1. Wherever the level change exceeds 1/4-inch (6-mm), edge trim shall have a beveled edge
with a slope no greater than 1:2.
2. Color: Match adjacent surface.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after
substrates pass testing.
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where
they are to be installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
B. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09 65 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
B. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
time periods:
A. Owner will furnish one unopened box of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed that
are packaged with protective covering for storage. Identify with labels describing contents and
store with other extra materials
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for information on
resilient tile flooring:
B. Refer to Drawings for style, color, and quality of resilient flooring for Starbucks Coffee area.
1. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for information on
adhesives:
2. Water-resistant type with 50 g/L VOC content or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) as recommended by manufacturer to suit
resilient products and substrate conditions indicated and to assure full warranty
protection.
3. Adhesive for produce areas to 10-feet (3.048-m) out from wall where cases are equipped
with mister system: Two part epoxy or polyurethane type recommended by manufacturer
to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated and to assure full warranty
protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur,
with installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates
and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements
specified.
1. Prior to existing floor tile removal, identify on a fixture plan and floor covering plan
locations of the following conditions:
3.2 PREPARATION
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after
substrates pass testing.
c. Contractor shall perform a sufficient number of tests to allow proper analysis of
the entire floor area.
d. All testing shall be performed and submitted to Owner and Architect within two
weeks after starting construction.
C. Repair damaged existing substrates (above and beyond typical small imperfections) as
identified by Contractor and reviewed and approved by the Kroger Engineer utilizing a system
similar to MAPI Ultra Plan One – Self-leveling underlayment or approved equal.
D. Provide additional floor prep for spray applied adhesives including but not limited to cleaning,
locating imperfections that would telegraph through the applied tile.
F. Contractor shall provide wet grinding, dustless bead blasting or complete concrete slab removal
and replacement where substrate is not stable, is cracking, spalling, or will telegraph through the
tile and cause the tile to crack, dimple, and/or wave. Kroger or its agent shall be the sole judge
as to the acceptability of the VCT installation and its aesthetic. Note: Contractor shall obtain
the Kroger engineer’s approval regarding problem areas that require special grinding, dustless
bead blasting, and/or slab removal and replacement prior to performing work.
G. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
H. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
I. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
J. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).
D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and
nosings.
E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
G. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas.
Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly
adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce
a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
I. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
J. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
A. Install floating vinyl plank system without adhesive according to manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION 09 65 19
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
requirements.
D. Concrete Moisture and Ph Test Reports: For each area where resinous flooring system is to be
installed.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who employs only persons trained and
approved by resinous flooring manufacturer for applying resinous flooring systems indicated
and has completed at least five installations of similar size and complexity.
C. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference not less than thirty days prior to starting work
at Project site with Contractor, installer, Owner, and manufacturer’s representative.
RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 1
463463096723_ResinousFlooring_12-23-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty covering both material and workmanship as a joint and
several warranty signed on a single document by material manufacturer and applicator jointly
and severally warranting the materials and workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Products:
1. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc.; BASF Building Systems; Selbaclad 425 with Selby
OP Floor Coating topcoat; 800-433-9517.
2. General Polymers Corporation, a division of the Sherwin-Williams Company; TPM #
115-U4 with 3744 chemical resistant top coat; 800-543-7694
3. Stonhard, Inc.; Stonclad GS with Stonkote GS-4 coating; 800-257-7953.
1. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc.; BASF Building Systems; Selbatwede HD; 800-433-
9517.
2. General Polymers Corporation, a division of the Sherwin-Williams Company; TPM #
115-U1 with 3744 chemical resistant top coat; 800-543-7694
3. Stonhard, Inc.; Stoneshield HRI; 800-257-7953.
C. System Characteristics:
1. Color and Pattern: As specified in Division 01 Section "Interior Finishes and Colors."
2. Wearing Surface: “Medium sandpaper (#80 grit)" non-slip finish. Coordinate with
Owner’s Representative for final approval of finish.
3. Overall System Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
D. System Components: Manufacturer's standard components that are compatible with each other
and as follows:
1. Body Coat(s):
a. Resin: Epoxy.
b. Application Method: Troweled or screeded.
c. Aggregates: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coat(s) indicated.
3. Topcoat: Chemical-resistant sealing or finish coat(s).
RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 2
463463096723_ResinousFlooring_12-23-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Manufacturers:
B. Systems:
C. System Characteristics:
A. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer
and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 3
463463096723_ResinousFlooring_12-23-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
D. Contraction (Sawed) Joint Filler and Construction (Cold) Joint Filler: 100 percent solids
polyurea filler, Shore A 80 or higher, Rapid curing, self-leveling elastomer.
1. Product:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written
instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral Ph substrate for resinous
flooring application.
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence,
curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants
incompatible with resinous flooring.
1. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the
dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.
2. Concrete Substrate Testing: Perform concrete substrate testing indicated and submit
results to Owner for verification. Proceed with application only after substrates pass
testing and have been verified by Owner’s testing agency.
a. Perform in situ probe test, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with application only after
substrates do not exceed a maximum potential equilibrium relative humidity of 85
percent.
b. Verify that concrete substrates are dry. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test,
ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application only after substrates have maximum
moisture-vapor-emission rate of 5-lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9
sq. m) of slab in 24 hours.
c. Verify that concrete substrates have neutral Ph and that resinous flooring will
adhere to them. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 4
463463096723_ResinousFlooring_12-23-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting
through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. At the direction of Owner and at locations designated by Owner, conduct the following tests:
1. Core Sampling: Take one core sample per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) of resinous flooring,
or portion of, to verify thickness. For each sample that fails to comply with requirements,
take two additional samples. Repair damage caused by coring and correct deficiencies.
2. Bond Test: At the direction of Owner and at locations designated by Owner, conduct
bond test using procedures as recommended by the resinous flooring manufacturer.
B. Any area found to be defective will result in a complete removal of the material within the room
or area and require reinstallation at the expense of the Contractor.
A. Protect resinous flooring materials from damage and wear during construction
operation. Where temporary covering is required for this purpose, comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for protective materials and method of application.
B. Remove temporary covering and clean resinous flooring just prior to final inspection.
Use cleaning materials and procedures recommended by resinous flooring
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09 67 23
RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 5
463463096723_ResinousFlooring_12-23-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
SECTION 09 68 00 - CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply the carpeting (broadloom carpet and carpet
tiles).
b. Comply with requirements in Division 00 Section “General Conditions.”
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, “Site Conditions, Temperature and Humidity”.
B. Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and
ceilings and overhead work has been tested, approved, and completed.
C. In areas to receive carpet, room temperatures shall be maintained at 65-90 degrees F and with
relative humidity ranging between 20 and 65 percent minimum for 72 hours prior to, during,
and 72 hours following application. Materials shall be conditioned at application temperature
and humidity at least 24 hours prior to application. Provide sufficient lighting for carpet
installation.
D. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Before installing carpet verify that moisture emission rate of not
more than 3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in
CARPETING 09 68 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
compliance with CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor temperatures not less than 55 deg F, or as
recommended by manufacturer.
E. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: Before installing carpet, verify that a pH range of 5 to 9 when
subfloor is wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper is applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for information on
carpeting.
B. Performance Specifications:
C. Thickness .425-inch.
E. Density: 22 lbs/sqft.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, low VOC type to suit products and
subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet.
CARPETING 09 68 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. Manufacturers:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and
comply with requirements specified.
B. Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive
carpet installation.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
CARPETING 09 68 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers' written installation
instructions for the following:
B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction
of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams
under the door in closed position.
D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
END OF SECTION 09 68 00
CARPETING 09 68 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply the vinyl-coated fabric wall covering.
b. Comply with requirements in Division 00 Section “General Conditions.”
a. Adhesive, primer, sealer, and all trim and accessories as required for a complete
installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
A. Owner will furnish more wall covering than required. Store extra material as directed by
Owner’s Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for information on vinyl-
coated fabric wall covering.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable, low VOC adhesive, for use with specific
wall covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall-covering
manufacturer, and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking,
unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.
B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and
similar items.
C. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas
not less than 24 hours before installation.
D. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall-covering manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and
corners.
B. Place wallcovering panels consecutively in order, cut from rolls; hang by reversing alternate
strips, except on match patterns.
C. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible
shrinkage.
D. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 6 inches
(150 mm) from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal
seams are permitted.
E. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
F. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams
without any overlay or spacing between strips.
G. Remove excess adhesive promptly, using clean sponge and warm water; replace panels which
cannot be completely cleaned.
H. Replace wall plates and fixtures removed to permit wallcovering installation; verify cut edges of
wallcovering completely concealed.
END OF SECTION 09 72 16
SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: Three factory color chips 3/4-inch by 2-inches (19-mm by 51-mm) minimum with
color name and product number for each finish and for each color and texture required.
A. Only those brands and qualities of paint listed in Part 2 shall be used. Materials must be top line
as specified. “Professional” or “Economy” lines will not be acceptable.
B. The same manufacturer to be used for the finish coat as was used for the prime coat for any one
(1) area. Prime coat to be tinted to the approximate shade of the finish coat. All coats must be
thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. When items to be painted have received a
shop coat of paint, the prime coat and finish coat called for are in addition to the shop coat.
C. Exposed Structure Ceiling Test Sample: Apply sample of specified paint system indicated to
verify compatibility of specified system with substrates and atmospheric conditions, to verify
paint thickness, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers
PAINTING 09 91 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. Paints and coatings in this specification are based on the products of the Sherwin
Williams Company. If products are provided by one of the other approved manufacturers
above, submittals must be accompanied by a product comparison chart and color
comparison board showing proof of equality with the Sherwin Williams products.
C. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
D. Colors: As specified in Division 01 Section “General Interior Finishes and Colors” and “Décor
Interior Finishes and Colors”
PAINTING 09 91 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
J. P-10: Water-Based Latex Enamel Exterior Pipe Insulation Paint (Insulation paint and pipe
insulation shall be of same manufacturer).
1. Products
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Where interior traffic paint is indicated for sealed concrete, apply traffic paint prior to
application of sealer.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
PAINTING 09 91 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates and paint systems
indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.
If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-
applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
2. Verify that metal decks have been provided “paintable” with surface films and other
agents removed that may impede adhesion of paint.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
written instructions.
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in
writing by paint manufacturer.
G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
H. Wood Substrates:
PAINTING 09 91 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
I. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and
sanded smooth.
J. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material
that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
a. New coating shall be compatible with existing coating based on previous testing of
coating products for adhesion by manufacturer and installer’s field experience.
b. A test patch shall be used when previous testing does not exist or is unacceptable
to the Kroger Representative.
c. The preparation of substrates does not apply to previously coated surfaces that
contain lead. These surfaces require special preparation. Refer to the
recommendations of the paint manufacturer for preparation requirements.
3. High pressure water clean all exterior surfaces prior to repainting using pressures
indicated below to ensure complete removal of all loose paint, stains, dirt and other
foreign matter, with such work to be carried out only by qualified tradesmen experienced
in high pressure water cleaning. The use of spray equipment such as water hose cleaning
will not be considered satisfactory. Allow sufficient drying time and test all surfaces
using an electronic moisture meter before commencing work.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
PAINTING 09 91 00 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Paint vents, electrical panels, doors and frames to match adjacent wall finish unless noted
otherwise.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
2. Omit primer over previously painted surfaces except as required to provide compatibility
between existing coating and finish coat and as required to cover bare substrate.
C. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint exposed plumbing, heating, and electrical
material to match the walls and ceilings of that area unless noted otherwise. This includes, but
is not limited to, pipes, insulation, conduit ducts, access panels, grilles, diffusers, whether the
adjacent surfaces receive paint or not. Include dampers or baffles behind grilles.
1. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, and operating
parts unless noted otherwise.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
3. Do not paint low voltage wiring and cabling.
E. Terminate finishes 6-inches (152-mm) behind line of sight at permanent fixtures or casework.
G. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
PAINTING 09 91 00 - 6
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
Prime Finish
Area Coat Coat
(1 Coat) (1 Coat)
Concrete and Asphalt Paving:
P-9
Concrete masonry unit walls PP-4
(1 coat)
DO NOT DO NOT
Clay brick, decorative concrete brick, decorative concrete block, cast stone
PAINT PAINT
Plastic: PVC
Steel: Semi-Gloss
Miscellaneous steel including ladders, railings, lintels, structural steel door frames, canopy PP-1
P-1
steel, equipment supports, pipe supports, and any other exterior non-galvanized metal. (Spot Prime)
PP-1
Hollow metal doors and frames on exterior face and edges. P-1
(Spot Prime)
PP-1 P-1
Exposed steel and iron piping and other bare metal.
(Spot Prime) (2 coats)
PP-1 P-1
Exterior fire protection piping (including P.I.V. fire dept connections and sprinkler drains)
(Spot Prime) (2 coats)
Aluminum
DO NOT DO NOT
Aluminum storefront, including doors, structure and flashing, other prefinished aluminum.
PAINT PAINT
DO NOT DO NOT
Prefinished aluminum vents and flues above roof
PAINT PAINT
DO NOT DO NOT
Exterior insulation & finish system, synthetic stucco
PAINT PAINT
PAINTING 09 91 00 - 7
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
Prime Finish
Area Coat Coat
(1 Coat) (1 Coat)
Concrete
Masonry, Semi-Gloss
DO NOT DO NOT
Concrete masonry walls. PAINT PAINT
P-7
Cleaning center & prep area concrete masonry walls. PP-2
(1 coat)
P-5
Breakroom block walls PP-2
(1 coat)
Metal, Semi-Gloss
DO NOT DO NOT
Concealed structural steel, metal deck, piping, ductwork, etc.
PAINT PAINT
Exposed steel columns, piping, other exposed miscellaneous steel not part of ceiling sys- PP-1
P-1
tem (Spot Prime)
PP-1
All exposed steel members on storefront P-1
(Spot Prime)
PP-1
Office mezzanine stair hand railings, backroom ladders, handrails, and stairs. P-1
(Spot Prime)
PP-1
Steel supports for dock lights. P-1
(Spot Prime)
Steel angles at dock levelers, interior pipe bollards and bent plate end wall cap at the PP-1
P-1
cleaning center (when required) to a height of 8-feet (2.4-m) (Spot Prime)
DO NOT DO NOT
Exposed galvanized metal
PAINT PAINT
P-1
Hollow metal doors and frames, factory primed -
(2 coats)
P-1
Vents, electrical panels, factory primed -
(2 coats)
Exposed ceiling structural steel, joist, and deck and piping and ductwork in ceiling area. - P-8
Aluminum
DO NOT DO NOT
Aluminum or vinyl clad storefront system
PAINT PAINT
PAINTING 09 91 00 - 8
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
Prime Finish
Area Coat Coat
(1 Coat) (1 Coat)
Wood, Semi-Gloss
DO NOT DO NOT
Plywood walls
PAINT PAINT
P-3
Exposed gypsum board ceilings, where indicated PP-3
(1 coat)
P-4
Exposed gypsum board walls, unless otherwise indicated PP-3
(1 coat)
Other
DO NOT DO NOT
Aluminum interior window frames
PAINT PAINT
DO NOT DO NOT
Cooler and freezer walls and doors
PAINT PAINT
END OF SECTION 09 91 00
PAINTING 09 91 00 - 9
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. Blocking, anchor, hardware, fasteners, and other items not provided by Owner
necessary for a complete installation.
a. Toilet compartments.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for contact information
on toilet compartments.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than three brackets
attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.
a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
3.2 ADJUSTING
END OF SECTION 10 21 13
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply the following protection devices to be installed
by Contractor where indicated on Drawings:
1) Entrance door roller posts at vestibule main entrance doors or cart storage
entrance where indicated on drawings.
2) Accessories:
a) Concrete inserts
b) Nonshrink, non-metallic grout
c) Bumper fasteners
d) Other items not provided by Owner necessary for a complete
installation.
e) Joint sealant.
B. See Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for interior and exterior steel pipe bollards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for information on Owner
provided protection devices.
1. Construction: One 1-7/8-inch (47.63-mm) O.D., 42-inches (1066.8-mm) long roller post.
Part # CE-910-2 with two bumper wheels, four adjusting collars and one finish plate, part
# CE-910-F.
2. Finish: Polyester powder coat.
3. Color: Bronze, unless otherwise noted to match storefront.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete Inserts: Malleable iron (ASTM A-47) or cast steel (ASTM A-27) inserts, with steel
bolts, washers and shims; hot dip galvanized. 3-inch (76-mm) long 1/2-inch (13-mm) diameter
concrete sleeve anchor with flat washer and nut for installing corner guards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform drilling and fitting required for installation; set work accurately in location, alignment
and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. Provide anchorage devices and
fasteners where necessary for installation to other work.
B. Interior Protective Guard Posts: Top of posts to be 2 feet 8 inches (812.8 mm) above floor.
Core floor and install posts after cases have been set, maintaining 1-inch (25-mm) clearance
between posts and cases. Refer to fixture plan for exact quantity and locations.
END OF SECTION 10 26 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices and
cut-out requirements in other work.
C. The Owner’s representative will provide submittals for the Contractor’s information upon
request for items furnished by the Owner.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for contact information on
products furnished by the Owner.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Keys: Properly label keys and turn over to Owner’s Representative. Provide minimum of six
keys of each type to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
END OF SECTION 10 28 13
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply prefabricated insulated wall panels for the walk-
in cooler, freezers and the prep room walls as indicated on the drawings.
b. Comply with requirements in Division 00 Section “General Conditions.”
a. Anchors, hardware, fasteners, and other items not provided by Owner necessary
for a complete installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of panels, anchorage details, openings, special
jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
2. Product Data: For each type of panel indicated.
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Insulated walk-in cooler and freezer panels will have
insulation-core materials with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by
testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products,” Drawings, and vendor
provided shop drawings for sizes and locations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units to building structure where indicated on the shop
drawings with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices
3.2 ADJUSTING
END OF SECTION 11 41 23
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches (300
mm) long.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet
and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Springs Window Fashions; Graber Traditions Faux Wood Blinds or
a comparable product by one of the following:
B. Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
C. Slats: Polymers that are lead free, UV stabilized, integrally colored, opaque, and will not crack
or yellow; antistatic, dust-repellent treated.
D. Headrail: Formed steel; long edges returned or rolled. Headrail fully encloses operating
mechanisms on three sides and ends.
a. Lift-Cord Lock: Variable; stops lift cord at user-selected position within full
operating range.
b. Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift-cord lock mechanism to form cord
pull.
3. Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm-gear and pulley mechanism that adjusts
ladders.
a. Tilt: Full.
b. Operator: Tilt cords secured to pulley and treated with tassels at tilt end.
E. Bottom Rail: Secures and protects ends of ladders and lift cords.
G. Ladders: Evenly spaced across headrail at spacing that prevents long-term slat sag.
I. Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment
indicated.
J. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As specified in Division 01 Section "Décor Interior
Colors and Finishes."
1. Components: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and materials exposed to view matching or
coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated.
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1
including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and
warning labels.
C. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without
damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket
positions and blind placement indicated.
D. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard
baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned
with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating
ranges.
A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by
Owner before time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 12 21 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply and install the entrance flooring system.
b. Comply with requirements in Division 00 Section “General Conditions.”
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of entrance flooring system. Refer to drawings for location and
quantity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for information on
entrance flooring system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Entrance flooring system will be installed by the Owner. Coordinate installation with Owner’s
Representative.
END OF SECTION 12 48 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Hangers and supports for the following facility services piping and equipment:
a. Fire suppression
b. Plumbing
c. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning
d. Electrical
e. Electronic safety and security
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
A. Design supports for multiple pipes and raceways capable of supporting combined weight of
supported systems, system contents, and test water.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Trapeze hangers.
2. Steel slotted channel systems.
3. Equipment supports.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
A. Provide supporting devices which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and
construction, in accordance with published product information and as required for complete
installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one type of supporting device meets
requirements, selection is Contractor's option.
B. Supports: Provide supporting devices of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the
following construction features:
C. Clevis Hangers: For supporting rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 1/2-inch (13-mm)
diameter hole for round steel rod; approximately 54-lbs. (25-kg) per 100 units.
D. Riser Clamps: For supporting rigid metal conduit; black steel; with two (2) bolts and nuts, and
4-inch (101.6-mm) ears; approximately 510-lbs. (231-kg) per 100 units.
E. C-Clamps: Malleable iron; 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod size; approximately 70-lbs. (32-kg) per 100
units.
F. Beam Clamps: Malleable iron, 1-1/4-inch by 3/16-inch (32-mm by 5-mm) stock; 5/16-inch (8-
mm) cross bolt; approximately 22-lbs. (10-kg) per 100 units for 1-inch (25.4-mm) size.
G. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4-inch (19-mm) rigid metal conduit, galvanized
steel; approximately 7-lbs. (3-kg) per 100 units.
H. Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4-inch (19-mm) rigid metal conduit, galvanized
steel; 3/4-inch (19-mm) strap width; and 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) between center of screw holes.
I. Conduit Clamps: For supporting electrical metal tubing or rigid steel conduit; galvanized stamp
steel, with bolt, approximately 7-lbs. (3-kg) per 100 units. Heat-treated spring steel clamps not
permitted.
J. Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod size; galvanized steel; approximately 4 lbs. (2-kg)
per 100 units.
K. Round Steel Rod: Black steel; 1/2-inch (13-mm) diameter; approximately 67 lbs. (30-kg)
pounds per 100-ft. (30.5-m).
L. Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes and materials indicated, with following construction
features:
1. Lead Expansion Anchors: 1/2-inch (13-mm); approximately 38 lbs. (17-kg) per 100
units.
2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead; 3/16-inch by 4-inch (5-mm by 102-mm); approximately 5-lbs
(2-kg) per 100 units.
3. Wood Screws: Cadmium-plated, with machine or flat heads; size.
4. Sheet Metal Screws: Cadmium-plated, with machine, pan heads or hex-drive heads; size.
5. Threaded Studs: Cadmium-plated, set by a power charge, and provided with lock
washers and nuts; size.
6. Nylon Anchors: Nail-type.
M. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment,
12 gage, 0.108-inch (2.743-mm), hot-dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated;
construct with 9/16-inch (14-mm) diameter holes, 8-inches (203-mm) o.c. on top surface, with
standard plated finish and with the following fittings, which mate and match with U-channel:
1. Fixture Hangers
2. Channel Hangers
3. End Caps
4. Beam Clamps
5. Wiring Studs
6. Thinwall Conduit Clamps
7. Rigid Conduit Clamps
8. Conduit Hangers
9. U-Bolts
2.3 SUPPORTING DEVICES (FIRE SUPRESSION, PLUMBING, AND HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT)
B. Trapeze Pipe Hangers: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly
made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
E. Fastener Systems
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Electrical Systems
1. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for
electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
2. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space
supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be
1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
3. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted
or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future
without exceeding specified design load limits.
a. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
4. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be
provided for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and
communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze
supports.
1. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping
systems and equipment.
2. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
3. Provide hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and
equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
4. Provide nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
5. Provide padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
6. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
a. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated
or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
b. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49
to 232 deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400), requiring up to 4
inches (100 mm) of insulation.
c. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension
of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and
up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.
d. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
e. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15
to DN 750).
f. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36
(DN 100 to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor
flange.
g. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30
(DN 25 to DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
h. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42
(DN 50 to DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
a. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500).
b. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser
clamps.
a. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for
heavy loads.
b. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
a. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
b. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-
joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
c. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to top flange of
beams, channels, or angles.
d. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of top flange of
beams.
e. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to top of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
f. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
g. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
h. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
i. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
10. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
a. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
b. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
c. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
11. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
a. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
b. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger
with springs.
c. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from base support.
12. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
13. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
14. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in
concrete construction.
A. Electrical Systems
1. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary
to interface installation of supporting devices with other work.
2. Install supporting devices and attachments, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and with recognized industry practices.
3. Supports and Anchors: Securely and rigidly fasten equipment in place with pipe hangers,
wall brackets, clamps, approved hangers, threaded C-clamps, with retainers or ceiling
trapeze.
1. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
2. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange
for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated
trapeze pipe hangers.
a. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size
or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for
individual pipe hangers.
b. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
3. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
4. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
5. Fastener System Installation:
a. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and cured for
28 days. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer.
Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating
manual.
b. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and cured
for 28 days. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
6. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers,
and other accessories.
7. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
9. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
10. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete
inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars
through openings at top of inserts.
11. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
12. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and
ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
13. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
b. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier
is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
c. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
d. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
1) NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and
0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.
2) NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
3) NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and
0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
4) NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075
inch (1.91 mm) thick.
5) NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and
0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION 20 05 29
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. Fire suppression
b. Plumbing
c. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning
d. Electrical
e. Electronic safety and security
2. Seismic requirements for single rod hanger supports for conduit, pipe, ductwork, and
other similar systems.
3. Seismic requirements for trapeze type supports for cable tray, conduit, pipe, ductwork,
and other similar systems.
B. Work under this Section complements optional seismic construction requirements in the various
facility services component Sections (Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, and 28).
1.2 REFERENCES
D. Cooper B-Line SRS-02 – Seismic Restraints: Multi-Directional Bracing for Electrical Conduit,
Cable Tray, and Mechanical Piping Systems.
B. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components used shall be at least two
times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
C. Code Information
1. Comply with seismic bracing requirements of the [International Building Code (IBC),
[2000][2003] edition][NFPA 5000, Building Construction and Safety Code]
A. General:
1. Provide seismic restraint systems to meet total design lateral force requirements for
support and restraint of piping, conduit, cable trays, ductwork, and other similar systems
and equipment where required by the applicable building code.
2. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data on strut channels including, but not limited to, types,
materials, finishes, gauge thickness, and hole patterns. For each different strut cross-section,
submit cross sectional properties including Section Modulus (Sx) and Moment of Inertia (Ix).
B. Coordination Drawings:
1. Include layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structural system and
architectural features, and with fire-protection, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, and other
building features in the vicinity.
2. Identify each system type and size on the coordination drawings. Clearly indicate
locations of transverse and longitudinal supports.
3. Provide table indicating system type, system size, rod size, and C-channel size.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of
seismic control devices for compliance with requirements indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
A. Materials:
1. Concrete and Masonry Anchor Bolts and Studs: Steel-expansion wedge type.
2. Concrete Inserts: Steel-channel type.
3. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
4. Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS SP-69, Type 57.
5. Beam Clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided. Single-sided type is not
acceptable.
6. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for
seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of anchor
bolts and studs used.
7. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and
matched to the type and size of attachment devices used.
A. Steel strut shall be 1-5/8-inches (41-mm) wide in varying heights and welded combinations as
required to meet load capacities and designs indicated.
1. Material:
a. Products shall be of the same manufacturer as strut and designed for use with that
product.
6. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Slotted steel channels with internally bolted connections to
hanger rod.
A. General:
B. Friction from gravity loads shall not be considered resistance to seismic forces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install seismic restraints according to applicable codes and regulations and as approved by
authorities having jurisdiction, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
A. Refer to drawings details for attachment type. Closely coordinate with Architect’s structural
engineer.
B. Provide bolted connections with steel brackets, slotted channel, and slotted-channel fittings to
spread structural loads and reduce stresses.
E. Holes for Expansion Anchors in Concrete: Drill at locations and to depths that avoid
reinforcing bars.
G. Attachments to Hollow Walls: Bolt to slotted steel channels fastened to wall with expansion
anchors.
I. Attachments to Steel: Bolt to clamps on flanges of beams or on upper truss chords of bar joists.
B. Expansion and Contraction: Install to allow for thermal movement of braced components.
C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to the structure
at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
A. Make flexible connections in piping, ductwork, raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and
busways where they cross expansion and seismic control joints, where adjacent sections or
branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate at equipment
anchored to a different mobile structural element from the one supporting them.
A. Testing Agency: Owner shall engage a qualified third party testing agency to perform the
following field quality-control testing:
END OF SECTION 20 05 48
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
a. Description: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that
is connected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when
they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys
frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.
A. Modify the existing fire protection system to provide a fire protection wet system throughout
the building covering all areas of buildings as required herein and by local jurisdictions,
including but not limited to internal and external canopies, loading docks, walk-in refrigerated
boxes, trash compactor chute, attic or concealed spaces having combustible construction,
prefabricated mechanical center (refrigeration equipment) and vendor kiosks (i.e. Starbucks
Coffee, Papa Murphy’s Pizza) when indicated on Drawings (fixture plan), and any other areas
as identified on the Drawings complete in all respects and in complete operating condition
including underground connection to water main with all necessary controlling equipment.
B. The sprinkler system shall be hydraulically designed and installed in accordance with the latest
edition of NFPA. The minimum requirements for all components, materials, and methods shall
be in accordance with NFPA and as listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. or FM Global, or
the requirements of “The Kroger Co.”, prior to the start of work.
C. Include design, hydraulic calculations, piping layout, drawings, details and other drawings
necessary for fabrication and installation of the fire protection system, and required changes or
revisions thereof necessary to obtain approval from the agency of authority having jurisdiction.
D. No extra charges will be allowed for changes to drawings, piping, etc., required to conform to
NFPA Standards, the Owner requirements, of the authority having jurisdiction, the Owner's
underwriter or with conflict with other trades. Design drawings become the property of the
Owner.
A. Hydraulic Calculations
1. Provide hydraulic calculations performed in accordance with NFPA for each system for
new and remodeled stores.
2. Perform hydraulic calculations beyond the sprinkler system riser to the water flow test
location. This may extend beyond the point of the Contractor installation and include
information for sprinkler system additions and renovations.
3. Provide water flow test information with static residual and pressure readings in
accordance with recommended AWWA and NFPA procedures and location and date of
test, on the preliminary and final drawings submitted to the Owner's underwriter for
approval. If available water flow and residual pressure at base of riser has to be
calculated, indicate this calculation.
4. Conduct flow tests within six months prior to design submittal.
5. Minimum available water supply for sprinkler system design shall be 600 gpm (38-L/s) at
35-psi residual pressure. If this is not available, consider other methods to increase the
water supply (pressure and/or flow) to meet system demands..
6. Supply sprinkler system with a minimum 6-inch (152-mm) diameter water main. Refer to
Drawings for additional information.
7. Include fire hydrants, check valve, and back flow prevention devices (as required by state
or local authorities) in calculation for wet sprinkler system. An allowance for friction
head losses through these devices must be made in hydraulic calculations.
8. Select the hydraulically most demanding area in accordance with NFPA. For grid style
pipe arrangement, provide information to demonstrate the peaking of the demand when
compared to areas immediately adjacent along the same branch lines.
C. Total water demand shall not exceed 90 percent of available water supply including 250-gpm
hose stream.
D. Connect to existing site fire main, including but not limited to, any and all key gates, swing
check valves, detector checks, PIV’s, concrete valve pits and other valves as may be required,
including backflow prevention devices. PIV’s that control the underground connection shall be
remote and exterior, not mounted on or within the structure.
E. Hydrants shall be available along the city water main or underground supply connection and
located in accordance with the local fire department requirements.
F. Provide either a backflow prevention valve in water supply line or check valve in system riser.
Backflow prevention design must meet the requirements of the local authorities having
jurisdiction and water providers.
G. Control systems by separate valves. Inside valves shall be OS & Y valves. FM Approved
butterfly valves may also be considered.
H. Sprinkler system design density shall be based on Ordinary Hazard Group II occupancy for the
retail sales area and any concealed space containing combustible construction. Minimum
design density for standard sprinklers shall be 0.20 gpm per square foot over the hydraulically
most remote 1500 square feet. If extended coverage heads are used, the minimum design
density shall be 0.20 gpm per square foot over the hydraulically most remote 2000 square feet.
In either case, a hose stream allowance of 250 gpm shall be provided.
I. A placard shall be attached to each sprinkler system riser to indicate the design basis and water
demand.
K. Provide each riser with an inside control valve, main drain and fire department connection
(location approved by agency of authority having jurisdiction) with check vale and ball drip.
Provide each riser with two pressure indicating gauges, one on the system side and one on the
supply side of each system.
L. Install a main drain system on each system riser. Route piping from the drain connection to
direct water discharge outside the building.
N. Individual sprinkler system area of operation shall not exceed 52,000 square feet.
O. Methods of meeting these requirements shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s listed and
approved equipment. This includes use of extended coverage ordinary hazard sprinklers, quick-
response style sprinklers and large orifice sprinklers to meet the density requirements.
Q. Where merchandise storage and display exceeds a height of 12 feet, the sprinkler system design
density shall be at least 0.39 gpm per square foot over the most remote 2000 square feet based
on storage of Class IV commodity to a height up to 15 feet.
R. Where merchandise storage and display exceed a height of 12 feet, the maximum area of
coverage per individual sprinkler shall not exceed 130 square feet.
S. Sprinkler heads located in soffit areas to be positioned a maximum of 1-foot from the front
(Sales Area) edge of soffit.
T. Provide wet system with dry-pendent sprinkler heads in ceilings of coolers, retarders, and
freezers with piping installed above insulated roof panels. Provide dry-pendent sidewall heads
for coverage in coolers, retarders, and freezers with ceilings less than 9 feet (2.74 m) high where
piping cannot be installed above roof panel and ceiling mounted heads are not possible.
U. Protect exterior building canopies including but not limited to sidewalk, entrance, and pick-up
canopies by means of dry sidewall brass heads, with matching brass escutcheon plates, supplied
by a wet type system with piping concealed in stud walls inside the building.
1. Base under canopy sprinkler system design density on Ordinary Hazard Group II
occupancy.
V. Do not provide fire protection for drive thru pharmacy or bank canopy unless required by local
authority having jurisdiction. Where required, protect by means of dry sidewall brass heads,
with matching brass escutcheon plates, supplied by a wet type system with piping concealed in
stud walls inside the building. For area of canopy beyond reach of sidewall heads, provide
protection by means of a dry pipe system. Provide condensate drain and air compressor in easily
accessible location approved by Owner.
W. Protect other areas subject to freezing temperatures by dry-pipe sprinkler systems, dry pendent
or dry sidewall sprinklers. Provide condensate drain and air compressor in easily accessible
location approved by Owner.
1. Dry-pipe system and water supply pipe shall be protected against freezing. Valve rooms
shall be lighted and heated. Heat tape shall not be used.
2. Dry-pipe system design operating area shall be increased 30 percent in accordance with
NFPA-13.
3. Dry-pipe systems shall not exceed a 750 gallon capacity.
4. Do not use grid style pipe arrangement for dry-pipe systems.
X. Do not use pipe schedule design for new system installations. [Additions to existing pipe
schedule design are permitted within NFPA regulations.]
Y. Protective Signaling:
1. Provide necessary system interfaces and related fire sprinkler system devices for alarm
notification for sprinkler system water flow or discharge to the Fire Alarm Panel
equipped with Central Station Monitoring by KCAC.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Two sets of detailed shop drawings and hydraulic calculations for the complete
sprinkler system to Owner’s Insurance Underwriter’s Engineers, listed below, for approval.
Provide all data required by NFPA and the authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Furnish all drawings accurately to scale on sheets of uniform size and include all
necessary data, as required by NFPA.
3. Shop drawings for the following fire protection equipment and accessories:
a. Flow Switches
b. Valve Switches
c. OS&Y Valves (or FM Approved butterfly valves)
B. System Zone Drawing: Indicate sprinkler zone coverage. Title drawing ”Fire Protection
Sprinkler System Zoning”. Indicate the location of shut-off inspector’s test drains and valves.
Submit one copy of the drawing to Owner’s Representative for approval.
D. As Built Drawings: Upon completion of the installation, correct all engineering tracings, if
changes were made in the field, and submit to the Owner’s Representative two complete sets of
final as-built layout drawings and one complete set of reproducible tracings.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operations and maintenance literature and instructions
provided by the manufacturer for installed equipment and devices along with a copy of NFPA
25.
H. Installer’s Warranty.
A. Fire suppression system installer shall be licensed in the state and registered in the jurisdiction
in which the store is located.
B. Materials, devices and equipment shall be new and listed by U.L. and/or approved by Factory
Mutual (FM) for use in fire protection systems.
C. Complete design including seismic bracing (as required) shall comply with all U.L. and/or
Factory Mutual requirements.
E. Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with local
regulations of fire department or Fire Marshal.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Workmanship and Material Warranty: Standard form in which fire suppression system installer
agrees to repair or replace components of fire suppression system that fail for any cause, other
than misuse within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate all piping and head locations with all trades: No monies will be paid to correct
conflicts arising from lack of coordination.
B. Piping installed both underground and above ground and within the building shall be U.L. listed
and/or Factory Mutual approved.
D. Fittings used on these systems to be capable of withstanding test pressures. Do not thread light
wall pipe.
E. Piping extending from the main building into the prefabricated mechanical center shall be
installed and insulated as indicated in Division 23 Section, “HVAC Insulation” and in
accordance with Drawings.
F. Exterior:
standard weight malleable iron fittings or by means of grooved type couplings and
matching fittings, and have a minimum working pressure of 175 psig.
2. Provide two pressure indicating gauges on wet pipe sprinkler systems; one on the system
side and one on the water supply side of the system check valve.
H. Dry Pipe: Schedule 10 or Schedule 40 galvanized piping. Black steel fittings are allowed in
interior of building only.
1. Provide pressure indicating gauges for the water supply and the supervisory air pressure
on dry-pipe sprinkler systems.
I. Provide a fire department connection to supply sprinkler systems and arrange in accordance
with NFPA 13. The fire department connection shall be easily accessible and clearly labeled.
Hose threads shall be the same as those of the public fire department.
J. Provide a sprinkler system test connection for each system. Locate the test connection remote
from the sprinkler riser, easily accessible and arranged to discharge outside the building.
K. Install auxiliary drains where needed to remove water from low points in piping.
A. Metal pipe supports, hangers, clamps, etc. and other accessories of an approved pattern and so
placed as to conform to requirements of National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 13.
B. Provide necessary hanger rods, standard hangers and special hangers of approved type and size
to support overhead and vertical sprinkler piping for type of construction as shown on the plans.
Provide all auxiliary angles where required.
C. Piping 5-inches size and larger must be supported by a minimum of two joists, with pipe
support centered between joists and hanger spacing of 6-foot maximum.
D. Hangers shall be attached to the top cord of joists/joist girder panel points.
E. For underground piping, provide site constructed concrete thrust blocks. Do not use restraining
type clamps.
2.3 SPRINKLERS
B. Protect sprinklers installed below 10 feet above finished floor, such as in backrooms and under
stairwells, or in any other accessible area where they might receive mechanical damage with
approved guarding.
C. Provide semi recessed, white Teflon coated sprinklers “Ordinary Rated” at 155 degrees F
throughout finished areas receiving a lay-in or gypsum wallboard ceiling except when near heat
source, then high temperature rated sprinklers shall be provided.
D. Sprinklers installed above high temperature areas (such as ovens) shall be rated at 286-degrees
F (141-degrees C).
E. Provide one brass, dry head, 286-degree F (141-degree C), 1/2-inch (15-mm) sprinkler in the
chute leading to the trash compactor so as to avoid physical damage to the sprinkler.
F. Install recessed white heads and concealed piping in all areas with ceiling or soffit height less
than 7-feet. See Drawings for additional information.
G. Install high temperature rated sprinklers in the backroom and storage areas.
I. Sprinkler escutcheon plates and recessed fittings shall be part of a listed and approved sprinkler
assembly.
K. Install sprinklers located at the roof deck level in accordance with the manufacturer’s listing. Do
not obstruct water discharge by roof supports or truss members.
L. Provide brass sprinkler heads above and below ductwork which is over 4-feet wide.
N. Install sprinklers above and below stairways if open or accessible. The area beneath a stairway
is considered accessible unless it is completely enclosed by drywall and no access doors are
provided.
O. Provide a sprinkler cabinet containing spare sprinklers and equipment in accordance with
NFPA. The stock of spare sprinklers shall include all types and ratings installed but not less
than a total of six.
2.4 VALVES
A. Provide, from the same manufacturer, valves and accessories that are UL listed or FM approved
for industrial fire protection use.
B. Alarm Switches: Install on valves, and lock valves open with unbreakable locks and sturdy
chain.
C. Gate Valves: Where approved by code, provide flanged, outside screw and yoke stem, iron
body, bronze mounted, double disc, parallel seat type, UL/FM psi non-shock.
D. OS&Y Valves: Each individual water control valve shall be installed for each system. This can
be an interior valve or an exterior wall mounted valve. FM approved butterfly type valves are
permitted.
E. Check Valves: Provide flanged, iron body, bronze mounted swing check valve, with rubber
faced disc, and 175 psi cold water working pressure.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
H. Locate post indicator valves remote and not mounted on or within the building.
I. Fire department connection shall be easily accessible and clearly labeled. The hose threads shall
match those of the public fire department.
J. Backflow Prevention Device: Provide Backflow Prevention Device for the water supply system
as required by the jurisdictional authorities and water providers.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Febco
b. Ames
c. Watts
A. When pits are required, construct in accordance with the local governing authority.
B. Provide galvanized, traffic type, gratings and covers when located in drive aisles or parking lots.
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
B. Sprinkler alarm system shall consist of the following Basis of Design equipment:
1. Water Flow Indicator: Autocall Type WF-5; Grinnell Fire Protection; a Tyco
International Company.
2. Vane Type Waterflow Alarm Switch with Retard: Potter VSR series
3. High/Low Pressure Switches (if required): Potter PS40A
4. Outside Screw and Yoke Valve Supervisory Switch: Potter OSYSU series
C. Water Flow Indicator (Type WF-5 or VSR): Contains two (2) sets of normally open 120 volt
contacts. One (1) set of contacts shall activate fire alarm system. The other set of contacts shall
activate a 120 volt outside horn-strobe or bell.
D. Shut off valve with tamper switch and water flow indicator for branch line to refrigeration
equipment center when refrigeration equipment center is indicated on plans.
E. Sprinkler alarm system wiring shall be in accordance with the electrical section of the
specifications.
F. Owner’s central station alarm monitoring shall include the following conditions to be alarmed
and monitored:
1. Products:
2. Alarm Horn
A. Provide red enamel steel identification signs on all control and drain valves.
B. Apply signs to all test and alarm valves, etc., to identify their purpose and function required by
NFPA or authority having jurisdiction. Provide lettering size and style selected by the Owner
from NFPA suggested styles.
C. Post a suitable sign adjacent to supply valves giving adequate instructions in the operation.
D. System Zone Drawing: Indicate sprinkler zone coverage. Title drawing ”Fire Protection
Sprinkler System Zoning”. Indicate the location of shut-off inspector’s test drains and valves.
Provide in a wood frame with plexiglas cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify the adequacy of existing water pressure prior to submitting bid, and include in the bid all
costs for a new service entrance
B. Coordinate with the electrical trades for installation of electric sprinkler operated flow and
alarm bell, if required. Verify during bid period which system is required so there will be no
additional cost to the Owner.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish labor, equipment, and conduct required tests in the presence of and to the satisfaction of
local authorities having jurisdiction, the Owner and the representative of the underwriters.
B. Do not install pipes less than 7.5-feet (2.3-m) above finished floor.
C. Align and install sprinklers in straight lines in both directions in coordination with lighting and
air conditioning ceiling fixtures, and with the grid ceiling where they occur, subject to approval
of the Owner’s Representative before installation.
D. Install horizontal runs for mains and branches as close as practical to the bottom cord of roof
joists taking into account allowance for system piping drainage.
E. Consult with local fire protection authorities and incorporate their requirements in the system.
F. Prior to connecting sprinkler piping with underground main, the underground main shall be
flushed. The water flow during the flushing shall be at least equal to the greatest water demand
of the sprinkler system. This flushing shall be witnessed as per requirements of NFPA.
H. Provide concealed piping in public areas with a finished or suspended ceiling and other areas
wherever possible.
I. Install electrical equipment in conformance with the latest edition, National Electrical Code
(NEC) in coordination with electrical trades.
J. Supervisory and Alarm Switches: Install flow switches and valve switches.
L. System Zone Drawing: Mount the plan near the main riser assembly.
A. Seismic-restraint devices (as required) are specified in Division 20 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Facility Services."
B. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 20 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Facility Services." Install the following:
a. 100-feet (30.5-m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100-feet (30.5-m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100-feet (30.5-m): MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100-feet (30.5-m) or Longer: MSS Type 44,
pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Install supports according to Division 20 Section "Hangers and Supports for Facility Services."
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8-inch (9.5-
mm).
F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches (2-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches (2.7-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
3. NPS 2: 10-foot (3-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2: 11-foot (3.35-m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12-foot (3.7-m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12-foot (3.7-m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
7. NPS 6: 12-foot (3.7-m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches (1.5-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches (1.8-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches (2.4-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches (2.7-m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10-foot (3-m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 6: 10-foot (3-m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
A. Except as otherwise specified, perform cutting and patching provide openings with lintel and
supports as required for installation of fire suppression system including paving, floors and
walls. Patch with the same materials, workmanship and finish matching surrounding
construction.
3.5 TESTS:
A. Upon completion of work, test entire system as specified in NFPA Standard No. 13.
B. Perform tests in such a manner as to prevent water damage or staining of building and property.
C. Test piping and devices comprising the fire protection system under hydrostatic pressure of not
less than 200 psi for not less than two hours. Furnish water for tests. Repair any leaks or cracks
developing as a result of these tests to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative.
D. In addition to the hydrostatic test, conduct an air pressure leakage test at 40 psi for 24 hours on
dry-pipe systems.
E. Conduct tests in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of, local authorities having jurisdiction
and the Owner’s Representative. Notify each three days in advance of any such test.
F. Notify Owner’s Representative upon completion of hydrostatic and alarm tests to permit final
inspections. A representative of the fire suppression system installer shall be present during the
final inspections.
G. Upon completion of tests and when satisfactory results have been obtained, submit a signed and
dated Material and Test Certificate for each system to Owner’s Representative and the Owner’s
insurance broker.
H. Deficiencies noted as a result of the Owner's insurance inspection must be promptly corrected in
accordance with the warranty.
3.6 COMPLETION:
A. Remove all debris, materials and equipment from the premises upon completion of work.
Piping to be cleaned, ready for painting. Repair any areas damaged or stained as a result of the
testing.
B. System shall be fully operational two weeks prior to fixture date as established by the Owner’s
Representative.
C. Notify TVA Fire and Life Safety Attn: Andrea Thoms athoms@telgian.com via email upon
completion of installation and opening date.
END OF SECTION 21 10 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1. The Kroger Company has in place to purchase many plumbing related items directly
from the manufacturer. The Owner will provide equipment and the Contractor will
install.
2. Comply with requirements in Division 00 Section “General Conditions.”
B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
C. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
E. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
F. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Unless otherwise specified and in addition to provisions of Division 00 Section "General Conditions,"
submit drawings having each sheet, and each page of a brochure, marked with identification and
containing information described below. Submittals are to be complete, partial submittals will not be
accepted.
A. Identification:
1. Include project name and Architect’s job number. If pages are securely bound in
brochure, this is needed on cover only.
2. Identification by specification section and article under which equipment or material is
described, and by name, number and intended use as designated by contract drawings and
specifications.
3. When more than one item of equipment is covered by a single drawing or catalog cut,
each project equipment item must be separately identified thereon with clear delineation
as to which model or catalog number or performance data applies to each project item.
B. Information:
1. Include manufacturer’s model number or catalog number, size and other data as
requested.
2. Maintenance Manuals: Organize each maintenance manual with index and thumb-tab
marker for each section of information; bind in 2-inch (51-mm) 3-ring, vinyl-covered
binder, with pockets for folded sheets, properly labeled on spine and face of binder.
B. Listing of Associations, Standards and Abbreviations Specific to Plumbing Work (in addition to
standards specified in individual work sections), conform to following applicable standards:
25. SMACNA - Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Associations, Inc.
26. TIMA - Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association
27. UL - Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
D. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of products of quality, types and
sizes required; and which have been in satisfactory use of not less than four years in similar
service, except as otherwise noted in specific sections of this division.
E. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least three years of successful installation experience on
projects with work similar to this project and meet applicable regulatory agencies requirements.
F. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the plumbing
work, and with other work requiring interface with the plumbing work. Provide products with
the proper or correct power characteristics, fuel-burning characteristics and similar adaptations
for this project. Coordinate the selections from among options (if any) for compatibility of
products.
G. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
H. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
I. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
1.5 DESCRIPTIONS
C. Examine all Drawings, and available soil reports. Visit site and become acquainted with all
conditions which may affect execution of work.
D. Provide work in accordance with state and local codes, regulations and/or ordinances, and meet
approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only new material and as specified.
F. Comply with all requirements for permits and licenses, and pay all associated costs.
A. General Outline: The facilities and systems of the plumbing work include all Division 22
Sections.
B. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems, system contents, and test water.
D. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval
from authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Arrange plumbing work in a neat, well organized manner, with piping and similar services
running parallel with primary lines of the building.
D. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire
plumbing work with adequate access for operation and maintenance.
E. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large units
of plumbing work (equipment).
F. Strictly adhere to invert elevations for all underground piping. Pitch piping evenly between
pipe junctions and where indicated on the drawings. Piping, not installed at invert elevations
indicated on the drawings, shall be removed and re-laid at Contractor’s expense.
G. Coordination of Drawings: For locations where elements of plumbing (or combined plumbing
and electrical) work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the
available space, provide coordination drawings (shop drawings) showing the actual physical
dimensions (at accurate scale) required for the installation. Prepare coordination drawings prior
to purchase/fabrication/installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination.
Submittals are not required by the Kroger Representative or the Architect, unless otherwise
noted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the plumbing
work, and with other work requiring interface with the plumbing work. Provide products with
the proper or correct power characteristics, fuel-burning characteristics and similar adaptations
for this project. Coordinate the selections from among options (if any) for compatibility of
products.
A. Protect products against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. do not install damaged
products.
B. Deliver products to site in factory fabricated containers, with the manufacturer’s label clearly
visible. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure and finish, and in strict
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Store products in clean dry place in original containers, protected from weather and construction
traffic.
A. Refer to individual Division 22 Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-
mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
2.7 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: Polished chrome-plated with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.8 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
A. Signs:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Refer to Division 00 Section "General Conditions" for general demolition requirements and
procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to
be removed.
A. See Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation and backfilling for exterior
underground piping installations and Division 33 Sections for site utilities.
B. Excavate and backfill utility trenches for piping systems as specified in Division 31 Section
"Earth Moving" and as follows:
1. Perform all excavation and backfilling required for installation of piping systems.
Consult with utilities prior to beginning excavation.
2. Comply with codes of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide slope sides, shore and
brace as required for stability.
3. Remove all materials encountered in obtaining indicated lines and grades as shown on
Drawings. No extras will be allowed due to variations of proportion and the variation of
materials.
4. Lay piping on a bed of sand 6 inches (152 mm) deep well tamped into place and properly
graded to permit the pipe to have an even bearing throughout its entire length. Install
sand around the piping and to a point 6 inches (152 mm) above the piping.
5. Install flowable fill or bankrun gravel with clay compaction for backfilling above piping
to the subbase.
6. Perform compaction in 12 inch (305 mm) lifts and spread evenly.
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems:
1. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
2. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
3. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
4. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
5. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
6. Install piping at indicated slopes.
7. Install piping free of sags and bends.
8. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
9. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
10. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
11. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
12. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
13. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
plumbing sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing plumbing sleeve seals.
14. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using plumbing sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing plumbing sleeve seals.
a. Plumbing Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
plumbing sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.
Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.
a. For pipes passing through brick or concrete walls, or concrete floor slabs, provide
steel pipe sleeves, two (2) sizes larger than the pipe for which they are intended.
Coordinate setting of sleeves as construction progresses. Set sleeves flush with
finished line of walls and floors.
b. Caulk sleeves through foundation walls to make them watertight.
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Follow manufacturer’s suggested procedure for protection of equipment which will be idle for
an extended period of time prior to start-up
B. Mount and align equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in
accordance with procedures described below. In case of conflict, these procedures govern.
Where structural or miscellaneous steel is not drilled, drill in field as directed.
D. Neatly cut all openings in roof decks as needed for equipment and pipe penetrations.
1. Provide structural steel and steel rod hangers. Weld (with approval of Architect where
attaching to building steel) structural steel hangers or bolt with hex head machine bolts
and with spring lock washers under nuts.
2. For suspension from concrete, provide steel or malleable iron inserts in poured concrete
construction, as specified for pipe hangers and supports, and expansion shields, toggle
bolts or lag screws, in other construction. Use electric drill with carbide bit for drilling
concrete blocks.
3. For suspension from structural steel, use beam or channel clamps with locking clips.
4. Do not support plumbing components from ceiling grids.
5. Do not suspend hangers from roof decks.
6. Suspend from roof trusses and joists/joist girders only at panel points, at top cord only,
unless otherwise indicated.
7. Provide additional supports wherever needed, and structural steel members attached to
building frame to provide additional points of support where required. Do no drilling or
building structural and miscellaneous steel, except as directed or indicated.
F. Equipment Set on Structural Steel: For bolting equipment directly to structural steel, provide
machine bolts, lock washers and nuts.
G. Floor-Mounted Equipment: Set and level equipment on foundation. Grout in place, using non-
ferrous grout. Provide wedges and shims for leveling.
1. Turn Over of Operation: Upon substantial Completion, turn over prime responsibility for
operation of plumbing equipment and systems to Kroger’s personnel. However, until
time of final acceptance, respond promptly with consultation and services, as required.
Provide one operating engineer, who is completely familiar with the work, to consult
with and continue training Kroger personnel.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)
larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement steel
and/or mesh as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete Slabs."
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
plumbing materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
A. Provide engraved plastic-laminate signs at locations of major equipment units, primary control
devices, emergency equipment, dangerous elements of plumbing work and similar places.
Mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location.
B. Operational Tags: Provide proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of
plumbing systems.
3.12 INSPECTION
A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which products are to be installed. Notify
Kroger Representative, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work.
Starting of installation constitutes acceptance.
A. Comply with Division 00 Section "General Conditions" for cutting and patching of other work,
to accommodate the installation of plumbing work. Except as individually authorized by the
Kroger Representative or the Architect, cutting and patching of plumbing work to accommodate
the installation of other work is not permitted, other than necessary penetrations of plumbing
sheet metal work for electrical conduit and similar purposes.
3.14 TRIMMING
A. Inspect pipe supports, in occupied and equipment spaces for sharp angles which protrude into
path of occupants and may cause injury. Trim such protrusions or cover with s suitable spongy
material to prevent such injuries.
3.15 TOUCH-UP
A. Touch-up with zinc dust-zinc oxide primer galvanized or steel equipment which has been
welded or otherwise scarred. Provide additional finished equipment of paint type and color to
match original.
A. Perform all system tests in the presence of Kroger Representative. Notify Kroger
Representative of all system’s tests at least 48 hours in advance.
3.18 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
END OF SECTION 22 05 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
B. Scope
1. The plumbing installer shall be responsible for furnishing and installing heat tracing for
plumbing work. The electrical installer shall furnish and install the power supply to a
junction box and 30mA ground fault protection required (GFEP) by NEC for each heat
trace circuit. The electrical installer shall furnish automatic controls as specified in Part 2
Article “Controls,” if required.
2. The electrical installer shall be responsible for furnishing and installing heat tracing under
freezer floors and gutter and downspouts as indicated on Drawings. The electrical
installer shall furnish and install the power supply to a junction box and 30mA ground
fault protection required (GFEP) by NEC for each heat trace circuit. The electrical
installer shall furnish automatic controls as specified in Part 2 Article “Controls,” if
required.
3. The refrigeration installer shall be responsible for furnishing and installing heat tracing
for freezer coil condensate drain line(s). The electrical installer shall furnish and install
the power supply to a junction box and 30mA ground fault protection required (GFEP) by
NEC for each heat trace circuit. The electrical installer shall furnish automatic controls as
specified in Part 2 Article “Controls,” if required.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each type of product indicated.
1. Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for
each electric heating cable required.
HEAT TRACING 22 05 33 - 1
463463220533_HeatTracing_07-31-09
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.4 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. BH Thermal Corporation.
2. Chromalox, Inc.; Wiegard Industrial Division; Emerson Electric Company.
3. Delta-Therm Corporation.
4. Easy Heat Inc.
5. Nelson Heat Trace.
6. Pyrotenax; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls.
7. Raychem; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls.
8. Thermon Manufacturing Co.
9. Trasor Corp.
B. Basis of Design for Under Freezer Floor Applications: Raychem, a division of Tyco Thermal
Controls; Type “Raysol 1” with Type FTC-XC Termination Kits.
C. Basis of Design for Gutter and Downspouts De-icing Applications: Raychem, a division of
Tyco Thermal Controls; # GM-IX.
1. For gutters of 6 to 12 inches (152 to 305 mm) wide, provide two runs of cable secured
with GM-RAKE.
2. Provide a single run of heat trace for downspouts.
3. Provide RayClic type termination kits with the system.
D. Basis of Design for Condensate Applications: Raychem, a division of Tyco Thermal Controls; #
5XL1-CR.
HEAT TRACING 22 05 33 - 2
463463220533_HeatTracing_07-31-09
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. Provide for plumbing water and condensate drain piping exposed to freezing conditions
indoors and outdoors.
2. Provide RayClic Type Termination Kits with the system.
2.2 CONTROLS
A. Pipe-Mounting Thermostats for Freeze Protection for Cold Water Lines to Mechanical and
Exposed to Outdoor Ambient Conditions: Raychem, a division of Tyco Thermal Controls; #
EC-TS-AMB for ambient control or # EC-TS-25 for pipe sensing.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end
seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in
writing by manufacturer.
B. Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils thick, and with
pressure-sensitive, permanent, waterproof, self-adhesive back.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install electric heating cable or mats across expansion, construction, and control joints
according to manufacturer's written recommendations using cable protection conduit and slack
cable to allow movement without damage to cable.
B. Do not energize cables embedded in concrete or plaster until those assemblies are cured.
1. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is
installed.
2. Install electric heating cables according to IEEE 515.1.
HEAT TRACING 22 05 33 - 3
463463220533_HeatTracing_07-31-09
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
3. Install insulation over piping with electric cables according to Division 22 Section
"Plumbing Insulation."
4. Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating
cables.
F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
A. Testing: Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as
insulation, wall or ceiling construction, or concrete.
1. Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing.
2. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current
simultaneously.
B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying finished surface
on heating cables.
C. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal
insulation on pipe-mounting cables.
END OF SECTION 22 05 33
HEAT TRACING 22 05 33 - 4
463463220533_HeatTracing_07-31-09
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for
tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products:
a. Armstrong; Armaflex II
b. Rubatex; R-180-FS
B. Insulation shall be listed and labeled per ASTM E 84 for plenum installations employing slip on
techniques.
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 1
463463220700_PlumbingInsulation_10-22-07.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Exposed outside piping: Encase pipe fittings insulation with 1-piece premolded PVC fitting
covers, minimum 10 mil thick. fastened as per manufacturer's recommendations.
2.4 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
C. Joint Adhesive:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping, unions, balance cocks,
flow regulators, fire protection piping within main building only and pre-insulated equipment.
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 2
463463220700_PlumbingInsulation_10-22-07.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
B. Piping:
1. Insulate domestic cold water piping, associated fittings and valves with 1/2-inch (13-mm)
wall thickness insulation only when piping is located above ceilings or in other
unconditioned spaces.
2. Insulate domestic hot and hot water return piping, associated fittings and valves with 3/4-
inch (19-mm) wall thickness insulation.
3. Insulate hot water piping below floor with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) wall thickness insulation.
4. Insulate reclaim hot water piping with 3/4-inch (19-mm) wall thickness insulation.
5. In geographical areas subject to freezing, insulate horizontal above floor storm drain and
roof drain pans with 1/2-inch (13-mm) wall thickness insulation.
6. Insulate waste piping above ceilings that receive condensate with 1/2-inch (13-mm) wall
thickness insulation.
7. Insulate waste piping, supply piping, stops, and valves under handicap accessible
plumbing fixtures.
B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing and
acceptance of tests.
C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of
piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut
pieces or scraps abutting each other.
D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulation. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure
complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
E. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and
composition of insulation, as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job
fabricated units (at Installer's option), except where specific form or type is indicated.
F. Extend piping insulation, without interruption, through walls, floors and similar piping
penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 3
463463220700_PlumbingInsulation_10-22-07.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
G. Provide continuous insulation through hangers, straps and all other supporting members.
B. Protection: Provide adequate protection for insulation work during remainder of construction
period, to avoid damage and deterioration.
3.5 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 4
463463220700_PlumbingInsulation_10-22-07.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
END OF SECTION 22 07 00
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 5
463463220700_PlumbingInsulation_10-22-07.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
domestic water piping components.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Interior Above Floor: Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing, with wrought copper bronze fittings
and 95/5 tin/antimony or 94/6 tin/silver solder.
B. Interior Under Floor: Type "K" soft copper tubing of one continuous piece, where possible,
with wrought copper fittings and 15 percent silver alloy brazed joints.
1. Products:
2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM O-ring seal in each
end.
3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Bronze fitting with stainless-steel grip ring and
EPDM O-ring seal in each end.
2.2 VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Provide the Basis of Design products by the Wm. Powell Co. or comparable
products by one of the following:
A. Manufacturers: Provide the Basis of Design products by the Woodford Manufacturing Co. or
comparable products by one of the following:
1. Interior Hose Bibbs (HB): Woodford Manufacturing Co.; Model 24P-CH, chrome-plated
brass.
2. Yard Hydrants, When Used Inside Building: Woodford Manufacturing Co.; Model Y-95,
key actuated. Provide weep in bottom of box.
3. Exterior Hose Bibs (WB): Woodford Manufacturing Co.; Model B-65 wall hydrant with
chrome finish on brass casting. Conceal within interior partitions.
4. Roof Hydrant (RH): Woodford Manufacturing Co.; Model RHY2-MS, complete system
with freezeless roof hydrant, double check valve backflow preventer, and mounting
system.
A. Manufacturers: Provide the Basis of Design product by the Watts Regulator Co. or a
comparable product by one of the following:
1. Backflow Preventer for Interior Hose Bibbs Including Prep Room Hose Bibb
Connections: Watts Regulator Co.; #9D.
2. Backflow Preventer for Coffee Machines, Ice Machines, Seafood Steamer and Water
Machine: Watts Regulator Co.; No. #SD3.
3. Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventer for carbonators (such as soda fountain)
(ASSE 1013): Watts Regulator Co.; No. 009-QT. Copper shall not be used downstream
from the backflow.
A. Basis of Design Product: American Standard; 2591.017, 0.5 gpm flow restrictor/aerator.
A. Basis of Design Product: Amtrol, Inc.; AST #12 Extrol Expansion Tank where required by
authority having jurisdiction on water heaters.
A. Manufacturers: Provide the Basis of Design product by the Sioux Chief Manufacturing
Company, Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following:
B. Basis of Design Product: Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.; 650/660 Series Piston
Type, Copper.
A. Provide flush metal access panels, where valves occur in inaccessible locations, as specified in
Division 08 “Access Doors and Frames.”
1. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers:
A. General: Provide water pressure regulators where necessary to limit the incoming water
pressure to 80 psi inside the building.
B. Pressure Reducing Valves (PRV's) for Water Heaters, Proofers, Ice Machines, and Seafood
Steamers:
C. Water Regulators:
1. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers:
A. (TMV) Point of use Water-Temperature Limiting Devices for Public Hand Washing Lavatories:
1. Manufacturers: Provide the Basis of Design product by Powers Controls, a Watts Water
Technologies Company, or a comparable product by one of the following:
2. Basis of Design Product: Powers Controls, a Watts Water Technologies Company; Model
MM431.
3. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
4. Finish: Chrome plated.
5. Construction: Paraffin actuation, single-seat design for virtual shut down in the event of
cold-water failure, and triple-duty check stops with screens.
6. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-
control handle.
7. Flow Rate: Minimum 0.5 gpm (3 gpm to ASSE 1017) to 28 gpm at 20 psi pressure drop.
8. Certification: ASSE 1017 and certified to CSA B125.
9. Approach Temperature: 5 degrees F (3 degrees C).
10. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
A. Manufacturers: Provide the Basis of Design product by Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company,
Inc., or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. MIFAB, Inc.
2. PPP Inc.
3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
4. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
F. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Appropriate compression shutoff valve and ground joint unions shall be used at each fixture and
piece of equipment to facilitate removal of equipment.
B. Adapters used for screwed valves and any connection to steel shall be insulated to prevent
electrolysis.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and
outlet.
D. Install Owner supplied immersion temperature sensor for connection to the environmental
control system.
E. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.
G. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for
proper flow.
H. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
J. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing.”
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
B. Remove excavating debris, materials and equipment promptly from the premises upon
completion.
3.4 TESTING
A. The entire water distribution system shall be tested and proven tight under air or water pressure
of fifty percent more than the maximum pressure of each system but in no case less than 100
pounds.
B. Combination domestic and sprinkler service piping shall be tested and proven under a water
pressure of 200 psi. for two hours.
C. Test temperature at sink locations to comply with 110 degrees F (43.3 degrees C) delivered
temperature.
D. Perform systems tests in the presence of the Plumbing Inspector and Owner. Notify Owner of
systems tests at least 48 hours in advance.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Upon completion of testing, flush all domestic water piping until water shows no discoloration.
Clean all valves, strainers, etc.
B. After flushing and cleaning, disinfect pipe by the use of chlorine or chlorine compounds in
amounts to produce a concentration of 50 parts per million. At the end of six (6) hours, flush all
piping until chlorine residual is less the two (2) parts per million.
1. Provide any additional system cleaning and disinfecting as required by state or local
codes.
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22
Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance.
E. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mechanically formed tee-drill fittings are only acceptable where new piping is connected
to existing piping.
D. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating
stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
A. Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 20 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Facility Services."
B. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 20 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Facility Services." Install the following:
a. 100-feet (30.5-m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100-feet (30.5-m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100-feet (30.5-m): MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100-feet (30.5-m) or Longer: MSS Type 44,
pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Install supports according to Division 20 Section "Hangers and Supports for Facility Services."
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8-inch (9.5-
mm).
F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches (2-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches (2.7-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
3. NPS 2: 10-foot (3-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2: 11-foot (3.35-m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12-foot (3.7-m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches (1.5-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches (1.8-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches (2.4-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches (2.7-m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10-foot (3-m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 6: 10-foot (3-m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.11 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Install piping to all mechanical equipment and all food preparation equipment
requiring water, including equipment supplied by Owner and equipment supplied and installed
by Owner.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and
connect to the following:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
END OF SECTION 22 11 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Soil and waste systems including connections to sanitary mains as indicated on the
Drawings. Work includes, but is not limited to:
a. Providing and paying for permits and taps for facility sanitary sewerage.
b. Excavation and backfilling as specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving”
c. Sanitary waste, drain and vent piping
d. Floor drains
e. Hub drains
f. Trench drains
g. Area drain
h. Cleanouts
i. Grease interceptor
j. Plumbing fixture connections
k. Mechanical equipment connections
l. Food preparation equipment connections
m. Utensil and dish washing equipment connections
n. Testing
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding 10-foot head of water (30 kPa)
minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings for Grease Interceptor. Submit to local officials having jurisdiction for approval
prior to purchase.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
and "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Copper Piping:
1. Drain Connection, Trap and First 20 Feet of Piping Downstream From Fixtures
Discharging 140 Degree F. (60 Degree C.) or Hotter Water: Type “L” hard drawn copper
tubing, with wrought copper bronze fittings and 95/5 tin/antimony or 94/6 tin/silver
solder for drain lines and fittings.
a. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain,
waste, and vent patterns.
a. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and
vent patterns.
4. Protect plastic piping above slab in stock rooms from damage with guards or concrete
curbs.
B. Exposed vent piping will not be permitted in sales area or customer vision areas below bottom
elevation of decor.
D. Collect vent piping where practical so roof will be pierced a minimum number of times. Vent
sizes and heights above roof per governing codes. Vents piercing roofs flashed per roofing
manufacturer’s requirements. Provide wire basket strainer in top of all vents.
2.2 DRAINS:
A. Manufacturers:
B. FD1-Light Duty Floor Drain: PVC body, with 6-inch (152-mm) round nickel bronze adjustable
strainer.
1. Basis of Design: Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.; Finish Line, adjustable
drainage system, 863-44NR.
C. FD2-Heavy Duty Floor Drain: smooth antimicrobial PVC body, with 8-1/2-inch (216-mm)
round stainless steel ring and grate and stainless steel sediment basket.
1. Basis of Design:
a. FD3: Outside cooler: Zurn Industries, Inc.; Z-511-V-J with auxiliary drain inlet
and backwater valve.
b. FD3S: Inside Cooler: Zurn Industries, Inc.; Z-556-90-Y with DI strainer.
E. FD4 - Floor Sink (for case drains use when required by code): Heavy Duty PVC body, with 8-
1/2-inch (216-mm) round PVC half grate strainer and PVC debris basket.
F. FD5-Light Duty Adjustable Flashing Floor Drain for Mezzanine Installations: PVC body, with
6-1/2-inch (152-mm) round nickel bronze adjustable strainer.
1. Basis of Design: Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.; Finish Line, adjustable
drainage system, 833-4PNR.
A. Manufacturers
1. Basis of Design: Zurn Industries, Inc.; Z-806, polymer drain with ductile iron grates.
2. Paint per Division 09 Section “Painting.”
A. Manufacturers:
B. General: All floor cleanouts, regardless of what size piping they are installed in shall be 4-inch
(102-mm).
1. Basis of Design: Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.; Finish Line, adjustable
drainage system 852-4PNR.
D. Unfinished Concrete Floor: 4-inch (102-mm) adjustable cleanout with cast iron ring and top.
E. Wall Cleanouts: 4-inch (102-mm) cleanout cover kit, with brass plug and stainless steel
polished top.
F. Grade Cleanouts: 4-inch (102-mm) adjustable heavy duty cleanout in concrete pad at grade.
C. Provide a minimum of two manholes with heavy-duty truck traffic rated manhole covers for
access and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. General:
1. Do not run sanitary piping under freezers and avoid running sanitary piping under coolers
if at all possible. Run indirect system vents separately through roof independent from
sanitary system vents.
2. Do not install exposed vent piping in sales area below 14-feet (4.3-m) or customer vision
areas. Coordinate location to be grouped with other piping and conduit extending to roof.
3. Collect vent piping where practical so roof will be pierced a minimum number of times
without increasing depth of wall. Vent sizes and heights above roof per governing codes.
Vents piercing roofs flashed per roof manufacturer’s recommended details. Provide wire
basket strainer in top of all vents.
4. Do not run sanitary vent piping in return air shaft wall. If no other option is available,
cast iron, steel, or copper vent piping may be run in return air shaft wall upon approval of
the Owner.
B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22
Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
D. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
E. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
F. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
G. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
H. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661.
I. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
J. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
K. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Facility Services."
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Facility Services." Install the following:
a. 100-feet (30.5-m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100-feet (30.5-m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100-feet (30.5-m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100-feet (30.5-m) or Longer: MSS Type 44,
pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Install supports according to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for Facility Services."
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum
rods.
F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15-feet (4.5-m).
G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
I. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches (1.2-m) with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rod.
2. NPS 3: 48 inches (1.2-m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches (1.2-m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
4. NPS 6: 48 inches (1.2-m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
K. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
4. Mechanical Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if
indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections
NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
5. Food Prep Equipment: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code, to equipment supplied by Owner and equipment supplied and
installed by Owner.
6. Utensil and Dishwashing Equipment: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code to equipment supplied by Owner and equipment
supplied and installed by Owner.
a. Provide only Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing, with wrought copper bronze
fittings and 95/5 tin/antimony or 94/6 tin/silver solder for drain lines and fittings
for this equipment due to the higher discharge water temperature.
7. Refrigerated Equipment: Drain lines from refrigerated equipment to building system shall
be provided under Refrigeration Equipment Installation Specifications.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.7 TESTING:
A. The entire soil, waste and vent system shall be tested per code and to the satisfaction of the
Plumbing Inspector and the Owner. Cover no work until it has been approved. The minimum
requirements shall be as follows:
B. Water pressure: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa) of water for 15 minutes without loss of water.
D. Entire soil and waste systems to be inspected for debris and flushed prior to pouring of concrete
floor slab.
E. Perform all systems tests in the presence of an authorized representative of the Owner. Notify
the Owner of all systems tests at least 48 hours in advance.
3.8 CLEANUP:
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 22 13 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories will be included.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 1
463463223000_PlumbingEquipment_11-09-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for contact information
on reclaim water heaters provided by Owner.
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for contact information
on domestic water heaters provided by Owner.
1. Manufacturers:
2. Basis of Design: Bell and Gossett; Series 100 BNFI, bronze circulating pump.
1. Manufacturers:
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 2
463463223000_PlumbingEquipment_11-09-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Manufacturers:
A. Manufacturers
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Install water heater and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
Install water heater where indicated on Drawings.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.
2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
D. Install water heater restraint system and secure water heaters for projects located in seismic
zone requiring restraints.
E. Install water heaters level and plumb (on water heater stand where indicated), according to
layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.
2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure
regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.
3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation
of safety control.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 3
463463223000_PlumbingEquipment_11-09-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
G. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial, water-heater,
relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward
pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
H. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters
that do not have tank drains.
J. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting-type heat traps.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of water heaters.
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for gas and water leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
a. Gas supply pipe fittings inside unit may become loose during shipment. Test gas
supply system fittings inside and outside the unit before startup with a
noncorrosive leak-detecting fluid such as a soap solution.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified
above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
END OF SECTION 22 30 00
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 4
463463223000_PlumbingEquipment_11-09-09.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply the following commercial plumbing fixtures
complete with drain and faucet as indicated on Drawings:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Direct Buy Submittals: The Owner will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Regulatory Requirements: "Americans with Disabilities Act" for plumbing fixtures for people
with disabilities.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for contact information
on plumbing fixtures, faucets and accessories provided by Owner.
1. Provide drains, p-traps with clean outs, and associated fittings and piping for a complete
installation of direct buy owner furnished products.
1. Provide the Basis of Design products specified or one of the other following approved
products:
American Crane Kohler Eljer
Standard
(Basis of Design)
Madera Whirlton Wellcomme Signature
Water Closet
2234.015 3325 K-4350 111-2125
Water Closet Madera Hymont Highcliff Signature
Accessible 3461.150 3701 K-4368 111-2145
2. Water Closets:
a. Water Closet: Elongated open front with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) top spud, vitreous
china.
b. Water Closet Seat: White, injection molded, high strength, impact and chemical
resistant polypropylene, open front with stainless steel check hinge and bolt caps.
3. Urinal:
a. Urinal: Wall hung, low consumption (1.0) siphon jet, 3/4-inch (19-mm) top spud.
b. Flushometer Valve: Battery powered, sensor operated, diaphragm type, chrome
plated.
c. Concealed Urinal Carrier: ASME A112.6.1M, Type I, urinal carrier with fixture
support plates and coupling with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching
fixture.
1) Manufacturers:
a) Josem Company
b) Tyler Pipe, Wade Division
c) J. R. Smith Mfg. Co.
4. Restroom Lavatories:
1) Manufacturers:
a) Josem Company
b) Tyler Pipe, Wade Division
c) J. R. Smith Mfg. Co.
1. Faucet: Commercial, 6 inch lever handle, with 2 hole 4-inch counterset, 2.2 gpm Aerator,
vandal resistant screws, ADA approved
2. Products:
3. Drain: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) integral grid drain and 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) cast P-trap w/ CO.
4. Include manual hand wheel type shutoff valves and connecting stem pipes to permit
outlet servicing without shut-down of water supply piping systems.
1. Manufacturers: Provide the Basis of Design product by Fiat Products, a division of Crane
Plumbing or a comparable product by one of the following:
2. Basis of Design Product: Fiat Products, a division of Crane Plumbing; model MSB-2424
and #830-AA faucet with vacuum breaker.
3. Size: 24-inches by 24 inches by 10-inches (610-mm by 610-mm by 254-mm) high.
4. Drain: 3-inch (76-mm) drain,
5. Provide "P" trap.
D. Eye Wash:
1. Products:
2. Provide complete with high visibility yellow ABS or polyethylene catch basin 10.8 inch
(275 mm) diameter, self-adjusting regulator to flow at 3.2 gpm (12.1 lpm), stay open
valve, and wall bracket.
1. Products
2. Provide units accessible to both wheelchairs and to individuals who have difficulty
bending or stooping.
3. Provide a hi-lo fountain utilizing two spouts at different heights and meeting the ADA
Accessibility Guidelines.
4. Include manual hand wheel type shutoff valves and connecting stem pipes to permit
outlet servicing without shut-down of water supply piping systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
H. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with
disabilities to reach.
J. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
L. Install escutcheons at piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
fittings.
M. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where
installed.
B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
3.4 PROTECTION
B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
END OF SECTION 22 42 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1. The Kroger Company has in place to purchase many HVAC related items directly from
the manufacturer. The Owner will provide equipment and the Contractor will install.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Unless otherwise specified and in addition to provisions of the General Conditions, submit
drawings having each sheet, and each page of a brochure, marked with identification and
containing information described below. Submittals are to be complete, partial submittals will
not be accepted.
B. Identification:
1. Include project name and Architect’s job number. If pages are securely bound in
brochure, this is needed on cover only.
C. Information:
1. Include manufacturer’s model number or catalog number, size and other data as
requested.
2. Maintenance Manuals: Organize each maintenance manual with index and thumb-tab
marker for each section of information; bind in 2-inch (51-mm) 3-ring, vinyl-covered
binder, with pockets for folded sheets, properly labeled on spine and face of binder.
A. Application: HVAC work shall comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of
standards published by listed agencies and trade associations, except to extent more detailed and
stringent requirements are indicated or required by governing regulations.
B. Listing of Associations, Standards and Abbreviations Specific to HVAC Work (in addition to
standards specified in individual work sections), conform to following applicable standards:
25. SMACNA - Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Associations,
Inc.
26. TIMA - Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association
27. UL - Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
D. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of products of quality, types and
sizes required; and which have been in satisfactory use of not less than four years in similar
service, except as otherwise noted in specific sections of this division.
E. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least three years of successful installation experience on
projects with work similar to this project and meet applicable regulatory agencies requirements.
F. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the plumbing
work, and with other work requiring interface with the plumbing work. Provide products with
the proper or correct power characteristics, fuel-burning characteristics and similar adaptations
for this project. Coordinate the selections from among options (if any) for compatibility of
products.
G. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
H. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
I. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
1.5 DESCRIPTIONS
C. Examine all Drawings, and visit site and become acquainted with all conditions which may
affect execution of work.
D. Provide work in accordance with state and local codes, regulations and/or ordinances, and meet
approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only new material and as specified.
F. Comply with all requirements for permits and licenses, and pay all associated costs.
G. Provide piping specialties and condensate drain piping for air conditioning units.
B. Arrange HVAC work in a neat, well organized manner, with piping and similar services running
parallel with primary lines of the building.
D. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire
HVAC work with adequate access for operation and maintenance.
E. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large units
of HVAC work (equipment).
F. Coordination of Drawings: For locations where elements of HVAC (or combined HVAC,
plumbing, fire protection and electrical) work must be sequenced and positioned with precision
in order to fit into the available space, provide to Contractor coordination drawings (shop
drawings) showing the actual physical dimensions (at accurate scale) required for the
installation. Prepare and submit to the Contractor coordination drawings prior to
purchase/fabrication/installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the HVAC work,
and with other work requiring interface with the HVAC work. Provide products with the proper
or correct power characteristics, fuel-burning characteristics and similar adaptations for this
project. Coordinate the selections from among options (if any) for compatibility of products.
A. First listed manufacturer shown in Specifications and Drawings was used for design basis,
layout, performance and indication of style and appearance.
B. Equipment selected from this list of manufacturers, other than design basis, must be compatible
with the facility and meet requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. If any changes are required to the Work scope, due to the selected equipment being different
from the design basis equipment, Contractor is responsible for coordinating increases or
decreases in Work scope, paying Contractor’s cost increases and any consultant fees.
A. Drain Piping: Provide condensate drain piping from HVAC units as required to complete the
system. Provide piping of Schedule 40 PVC. Trap and pipe as required.
B. Pipe Escutcheons: Provide pipe escutcheons with inside diameter close to outside diameter of
pipe or outside diameter of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of
escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls or ceilings; and pipe
sleeve extension, if any. Unless other indicated, furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome
finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.
1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock
joint, welded spiral seams or welded longitudinal joint.
2. PVC Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40, PVC
A. General: Provide supports and anchors in accordance with the following listing:
A. For equipment that does not have identification applied at the factory, identify such equipment
as follows:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Refer to Division 00 Section “General Conditions" for general demolition requirements and
procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be
removed.
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
piping systems.
1. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
2. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
3. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
4. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal
and clearance for light fixtures.
5. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
6. Install piping at indicated slopes.
7. Install piping free of sags and bends.
8. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
9. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
10. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
11. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
12. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
a. Pipe Sleeves:
1) For pipes passing through brick or concrete walls, or concrete floor slabs,
provide steel pipe sleeves, two sizes larger than the pipe for which they are
intended. Coordinate setting of sleeves as construction progresses. Set
sleeves flush with finished line of walls and floors.
2) Caulk sleeves through foundation walls to make them watertight.
13. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
HVAC sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing HVAC sleeve seals.
a. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
b. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter.
c. HVAC Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
HVAC sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
14. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using HVAC sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch
(25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing HVAC sleeve seals.
a. HVAC Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
HVAC sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
15. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated,
to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded
or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators.
7. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads.
8. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
a. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
b. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
c. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
d. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC
pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
e. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
f. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
11. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join
according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
E. Follow manufacturer’s suggested procedure for protection of equipment which will be idle for
an extended period of time prior to start-up
F. Mount and align equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in
accordance with procedures described below. In case of conflict, these procedures govern.
Where structural or miscellaneous steel is not drilled, drill in field as directed.
H. Neatly cut all openings in roof decks as needed for equipment, duct and pipe penetrations.
1. Provide structural steel and steel rod hangers, rigid in appearance. Weld (with approval
of Architect where attaching to building steel) structural steel hangers or bolt with hex
head machine bolts and with spring lock washers under nuts.
2. For suspension from concrete, provide steel or malleable iron inserts in poured concrete
construction, as specified for pipe hangers and supports, and expansion shields, toggle
bolts or lag screws, in other construction. Use electric drill with carbide bit for drilling
concrete blocks.
3. For suspension from structural steel, use beam or channel clamps with locking clips.
4. Do not support HVAC components from ceiling grids.
5. Do not suspend hangers from roof decks.
6. Suspend from roof trusses and joists/joist girders only at panel points, at top cord only,
unless otherwise indicated.
7. Provide additional supports wherever needed, and structural steel members attached to
building frame to provide additional points of support where required. Do no drilling of
building structural and miscellaneous steel, except as directed or indicated.
J. Hanger Rods and Hanger Spacing: 8-feet to 10-feet (2.4-m to 3-m) spacing maximum, provide
auxiliary angles spanning between joints, as required. Comply with current A.S.M.E. code for
pressure piping. Piping 5-inches (127-mm) size and larger to be supported by a minimum of
two joists, with pipe center between joists.
K. Insulated Pipe: Fit pipe hangers over outside diameter of insulation; provide sheet metal
saddles 16 gage, 6-inches (152-mm) long by 1/3 of the circumference.
1. Weld or bolt equipment to roof curbs or structural supports. For bolting equipment
directly to structural supports, provide machine bolts, lock washers and nuts.
M. Floor-Mounted Equipment:
1. Set and level equipment on foundation. Grout in place, using non-ferrous grout. Provide
wedges and shims for leveling.
2. Accurately align equipment prior to operation.
N. Maintain daily log of operational data on HVAC equipment and systems through the close-out
period; record hours of operation, assigned personnel, fuel consumption and similar
information; submit copy to Kroger Representative.
O. Turn Over of Operation: Upon substantial Completion, turn over prime responsibility for
operation of HVAC equipment and systems to Kroger’s personnel. However, until time of final
acceptance, respond promptly with consultation and services, as required. Provide one
operating engineer, who is completely familiar with the work, to consult with and continue
training Kroger personnel.
A. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will
achieve permanently leakproof piping systems. Install piping with a minimum of offsets.
B. Accurately cut pipe to measurements established at the site and work into place without
springing or forcing. Install piping with sufficient flexibility to adequately provide for
expansion and contraction due to temperature fluctuation inherent in its work operation.
C. Do not conceal piping in walls or partitions nor underground or under the floor. Where pipe
passes through building structure, pipe joints are not to be concealed, but located where they
may be readily inspected.
E. Run pipes to be insulated as shown as required with sufficient clearance to permit application of
insulation.
F. Use cadmium plated or galvanized nuts and bolts with self locking type nut or double nut on
pipe clamps. Use double nuts or self locking nuts on hanger rods for piping support.
G. Connect condensate drain piping to HVAC equipment in manner shown, and comply with
equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)
larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete Slabs."
A. Refer to Division 05 Sections "Structural Steel" and "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
HVAC materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
B. Provide engraved plastic-laminate signs at locations of major equipment units, primary control
devices, emergency equipment, dangerous elements of HVAC work and similar places. Mount
permanently in an appropriate and effective location.
C. Operational Tags: Provide proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of
mechanical systems.
3.11 INSPECTION
A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which products are to be installed. Notify
Kroger Representative, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work.
Starting of installation constitutes acceptance.
A. Comply with Division 00 Section “General Conditions” for cutting and patching of other work,
to accommodate the installation of HVAC work. Except as individually authorized by the
Architect, cutting and patching of HVAC work to accommodate the installation of other work is
not permitted, other than necessary penetrations of HVAC sheet metal work for electrical
conduit and similar purposes.
3.13 TRIMMING
A. Inspect ductwork, pipe supports, in occupied and equipment spaces for sharp angles which
protrude into path of occupants and may cause injury. Trim such protrusions or cover with
suitable spongy material to prevent such injuries.
3.14 TOUCH-UP
A. Touch-up with zinc dust-zinc oxide primer galvanized or steel equipment which has been
welded or otherwise scarred. Provide additional finished equipment with paint type and color to
match original.
A. Provide necessary filter changes for equipment operated during building construction. Replace
each set of filters with clean filters at time of project close-out.
A. Perform system tests in the presence of Kroger Representative. Notify Kroger Representative
of system’s tests at least 48 hours in advance.
END OF SECTION 23 05 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
B. See individual Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements
for motor-driven equipment.
C. This section does not apply to motors provided through Kroger Direct Buy Program.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product data for motors, starters and other electrical components, with submittal data
required for the equipment which it serves, as required by the individual equipment
specification sections.
A. Provide all factory assembled and wired equipment listed and labeled in accordance with the
National Electrical Code (NEC) and by an organization acceptable to the authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. References:
C. Standards: Where not otherwise indicated, comply with applicable provisions of the National
Electrical Code (NFPA 70), NEMA Standards and Division 26 Sections.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features that comply
with the following:
a. Magnetic controllers.
b. Multispeed controllers.
c. Reduced-voltage controllers.
2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use
throughout speed range without overheating.
3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.
4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motor
replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for
belt tensioning.
C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section “Cast-In-Place
Concrete Slabs.”
A. This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral
part of packaged HVAC equipment. These components include, but are not limited to, factory
installed motors, starters and disconnect switches furnished as an integral part of packaged
HVAC equipment; wiring from HVAC equipment to electrical work termination (junction box
or disconnect switch); control switch, pilot lights, interlocks and similar devices; electrical work
specified as HVAC work in temperature control systems; and drip pans to protect electrical
work.
B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e., horsepower and electrical characteristics) for HVAC
equipment are scheduled on the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 MOTORS:
A. Manufacturers
C. Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of NEMA MG 1, NEC Article 430, ANSI C50,
ANSI C6.1. Provide equipment listed and labeled, in accordance with the National Electric
Code, by an organization acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction (i.e., UL).
D. Temperature Rating: Class A insulation, except where other- wise indicated or required for
service indicated.
E. Starting Capability: As required for service indicated, but not less than five starts per hour.
F. Provide 2-speed motors as 2-speed - one winding, with consequent pole starters.
G. Motor Size: Provide motor size as indicated or, if not indicated, large enough so that driven
load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range.
I. Construction: General purpose, continuous duty; Design "B", except "C" for high starting
torque applications.
J. Bearings: Ball or roller, and designed for thrust, where applicable; shaft seals and regreasable,
except provide permanently sealed where not accessible for greasing. Sleeve type bearings
permitted only where indicted for light-duty fractional horsepower motors.
K. Enclosure Type: Open drip-proof for normal concealed indoor use, guarded where exposed to
employees or occupants. Type II for outdoor use, except where weather-protected; Type I
where adequately housed. Totally enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC) where specified or indicated on
drawings.
L. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal for all single-phase motors, with internal sensing device
for stopping motor.
M. Noise Rating: Provide "quiet" rating on motors located in occupied spaces of building.
D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to
which motor is connected.
E. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F (40 deg C) and at altitude of 3300
feet (1005 m) above sea level.
F. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
E. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
I. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control
method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output.
2. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.
3. Insulation: Class H.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
C. Rugged-Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings,
integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with non-hygroscopic
material.
D. Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor
according to NEMA MG 1:
B. Starters Characteristics: Type I general purpose enclosure for indoor use and Type II for
outdoor use, with padlock ears and supports of mounting, as indicated or required. Starter type
and size as recommended by motor manufacturer. Locate disconnect switch within sight of
motor.
D. Magnetic Starters: Where indicated on drawings or specifications, provide for 1/2 horsepower
and larger motors on automatic control or with interlock switch. Include push- buttons, pilot
lights, reset, trip-free relay on each phase, undervoltage release, and devices for coordination
with control system (including 120 volt transformer for control circuit where service exceeds
120 volts).
A. Motors: Wired connections in rigid and flexible metal conduit, except where plug-in electrical
cords are indicated and permitted by governing regulations.
C. Piping, General: Do not run mechanical piping directly above electrical (or electronic) work.
A. Fusible Switches: Fused, each phase; general duty; horsepower rated; nonteasible quick-mate,
quick-break mechanism, dead front line shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper conductors;
spring reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts; hinged doors; operating
lever arranged for locking in the "OPEN" position; arc quenchers; capacity and characteristic as
indicated.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC 23 05 13 - 5
230513_CommonMotorRequirementsForHVAC_04-10-06.DOC
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
B. Non-Fusible Switches: For equipment 2 horsepower and smaller, shall be horsepower rated;
toggle switch type; quantity of poles and voltage rating as indicated. For equipment larger than
2 horsepower, switches shall be the same as fusible type.
A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor
application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on
motor shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.
E. Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor
according to NEMA MG 1:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with load
transfer link.
B. Install motors on concrete bases complying with Division 03 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete
Slabs.”
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration
And Seismic Controls For Facility Services.”
1. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys, and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
2. Verify bearing lubrication.
3. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at
motor design load.
4. Test interlocks and control and safety features for proper operation.
5. Verify that current and voltage for each phase comply with nameplate rating and
NEMA MG 1 tolerances.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform electrical tests and visual and mechanical inspections including optional tests
and inspections stated in NETA ATS on field installed motors. Certify compliance with
test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 23 05 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) to produce design objectives for
the following:
B. Testing, adjusting and balancing firm (OTF) to be provided by Owner. OTF is to test, adjust and
balance HVAC systems to meet or exceed the specified performance requirements.
A. OTF Qualifications: Either AABC, “Associated Air Balance Council” or NEBB, “National
Environmental Balancing Bureau” certified.
A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting and balancing until work has been completed and is
operable. Ensure that there is not latent residual work still to be completed.
1. Field mounted accessories shall be assembled and economizer/OA dampers installed and
wired (when required). Units shall be properly tagged per design drawings.
2. Gas piping shall be completed and gas turned on.
3. Power wiring shall be completed, disconnects mounted, and power turned on, fan rotation
checked.
4. Control wiring shall be completed including thermostats and smoke detectors.
5. Doors and windows shall be installed and ceiling tiles in place.
6. Duct work is to be installed completely; clean and sealed tightly against leaks.
7. Balancing dampers, diffusers, and controls shall be fully installed and operational.
8. One day prior to starting of testing, adjusting, and balancing, clean filters of the type
specified for permanent installation must be installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Patching Materials:
1. Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for
patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housing which have been cut or drilled for test
purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs and similar purposes.
2. Provide plastic plugs with retainers to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Provide a minimum of two weeks notice in writing to OTF that system will be ready for testing,
adjusting and balancing. TAB work to be completed prior to fixture date and scheduled
accordingly by Contractor.
B. If, for any reason, the HVAC system is not operational in time for the OTF to schedule the work
prior to fixture date, the contractor shall be responsible for additional costs incurred by
rescheduling the OTF.
C. Provide lifts, ladders and other means of access to HVAC systems for OTF.
D. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment and
make available to support and assist TAB activities.
E. Schedule systems testing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems
have been satisfactorily completed.
A. Furnish OTF with Contract Documents so that they may become familiar with Project
requirements and are able to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper
TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control
devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the
Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are
accessible and appropriate for effective testing, adjusting and balancing and for efficient system
and equipment operation.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for any adjustments to equipment, such as motor change-out or
sheave changes, at the OTF’s direction to achieve proper TAB of HVAC systems.
D. OTF shall notify the Owner of any deficiencies needing immediate attention. Contractor shall
be available during TAB to promptly correct any such problems (i.e. replace burned out motors,
failed thermostats, incorrect wiring, bad circuit breakers and starters, dirty filters, missing
dampers, undersized outside air intakes, etc.).
E. The contractor shall be responsible for any additional cost incurred, including travel, as a result
of rescheduling a follow up visit to test and balance any equipment not ready on the originally
scheduled TAB date.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 2
230593_TestingAdjustingAndBalancingForHVAC_11-09-09.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. CertainTeed Corp.
2. Knauf Fiberglass
3. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.
A. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type II, Class B-6, 1 lb./cu.ft. with
integral foil vapor barrier.
A. Refractory Ceramic Fiber Blanket: ASTM tested, UL approved, 1 layer of flexible high
temperature (2300°F) fireproof 2 inch (51 mm) thick blanket with aluminum foil jacket. 1-hour
fire resistive enclosure.
1. Manufacturers
B. Calcium Silicate Fireproofing Board: 2-1/2 inch (63.5 mm) thick, UL listed and IBCO
approved.
1. Basis of Design: Mesa Insulation Inc., a division of Johns Manville; Super Firetemp-L.
A. PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil-thick, high-
impact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC. Adhesive shall be as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
5. Exposed HVAC supply and return ductwork extending through air-conditioned spaces.
B. Insulate each ductwork system with flexible fiberglass insulation in thickness and R-value as
indicated on Drawings.
C. Insulate range hood exhaust duct with fire resistive grease ductwork material. Provide material
and installation to meet Local and State requirements. Provide clearances as required per
manufacturers requirements and Local and State requirements.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and
in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended
purpose.
B. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork
penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
A. Replace damaged insulation that cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor
barrier damage and moisture saturated units.
B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation
work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.
END OF SECTION 23 07 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
a. The Kroger Company will supply the following instrumentation and control
devices for HVAC
a. Anchors and tension plates, and other items not provided by Owner necessary for a
complete installation.
b. Locking thermostat covers.
B. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for heating and cooling units.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s use as
requested.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for contact information
on HVAC controls.
1. Basis of Design: Better Engineered Controls; Sentinel Model BTG-54VL (Metal Beige).
2. Provide thermostat guards for manager’s office and vestibule thermostats.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Contractors are responsible for coordinating delivery, proper storage (if necessary), installation,
startup and the first year of labor warranty. Installation includes: replacement of missing and/
or damaged materials final connections to HVAC Units and heat reclaim water tank temperature
sensors.
A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes."
B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
1. Conceal cable up to 14 feet above finish floor or above Décor elevation, except in
mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed.
2. Install exposed cable in raceway.
3. Install concealed cable in raceway.
4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where
several cables follow a common path.
5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control
system, except local individual room control cables.
7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration
of piping and equipment.
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control
set points are as required.
4. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence
of operation.
5. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
6. Test software and hardware interlocks.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
END OF SECTION 23 09 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and
elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple
pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building
structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C. Welding certificates.
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Piping from Outside Foundation Wall to Gas Fired Equipment Connections: Black steel
pipe.
2. Accessories
1) Sizes:
b. Overpressure protection devices must be installed for elevated systems higher than
2-PSI and up to 5-PSI to prevent downstream pressure from exceeding 2-PSI in the
event of regulator failure.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with
AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are
prohibited.
A. Manufacturers:
B. Gas Cocks 2-inches (51-mm) and Smaller: 150 psi non-shock WOG, bronze straightway
ground plug shut-off cock, flat or square head, threaded ends.
C. Gas Cocks 2-1/2-inches (63.5-mm) and Larger: 125 psi non-shock WOG, iron body bronze
mounted, straightway ground plug shut-off cock, square head, flanged ends.
1. Verify with Owner the proper size Automatic Gas Valve required to shut off the gas
service to cooking appliances located under exhaust hood.
A. General Requirements:
1. Manufacturers:
f. Maxitrol Company.
g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
1. Preformed polycarbonate
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which natural gas air systems and equipment are to be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in
manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative.
A. Arrange with utility company to provide gas service to indicate location with shutoff terminus.
Consult with utility as to extent of its work, costs, fees and permits involved. Pay such costs
and fee; obtain permits. Refer to Drawings for additional work included.
B. Provide shutoff in gas service distribution pipe at entry in building, extend pipe to gas meter
location indicated; provide parts and accessories required by utility to connect meter.
D. Install gas piping above roof on pipe supports. Guide the pipes with clamp one size larger than
the pipe. Provide either preformed polycarbonate or pressure treated lumber supports as detailed
on the Drawings at intervals in accordance with specification Division 20 Section "Hangers and
Supports for Facility Services" and Drawings and at each change in direction.
E. Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel or cast-iron pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
F. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and
install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
G. Paint exterior facility natural gas piping as specified in Division 09 Section "Painting."
A. Provide necessary hanger rods, standard hangers and special hangers of approved type and size
to support overhead and vertical gas piping for type of construction as shown on the plans and
as indicated in Division 20 Sections.
C. Use sealant on metal gas piping threads, which are chemically resistant to natural gas. Use
sealant sparingly, and apply only to male threads of metal joints.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
F. Threaded Joints:
1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.
4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal
threading is specified.
5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints:
H. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter.
I. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare
dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not
overtighten.
J. Do not install defective piping or fittings. Do not use pipe with threads, which are chipped,
stripped or damaged. Do not use bushings.
K. Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or cap immediately after installation
and retain until continuing piping, or until equipment connections are completed. Ground gas
piping electrically and continuously within project and bond tightly to grounding connections.
L. Install drip-legs in gas piping where indicated and where required by code or regulation.
M. Install "tee" fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped, at bottom of pipe risers.
N. Use unions only on final connections to equipment. No other unions will be permitted. Proper
reducing fittings shall be used. Bushings will not be accepted.
P. For piping running through ducts or air plenums, install in welded conduit, ventilated on both
ends.
R. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure
protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
S. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, and above ceilings unless
indicated to be exposed to view. Do not run gas piping under floor.
T. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
W. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated
valve.
A. Gas Cock: Provide at connection to gas train for each gas-fired equipment item; and on risers
and branches where indicated.
1. Locate gas cocks where easily accessible, and where they will be protected from possible
injury.
B. Gas Shut-Off Valves: Install automatic gas shut-off valve for gas piping servicing all cooking
equipment under exhaust hoods. Owner’s fire suppression installer will install and connect
mechanical cable.
D. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate
for servicing and testing.
1. Pipe atmospheric vent to outdoors, full size of outlet. Install gas shutoff valve upstream
of each pressure-regulating valve.
2. Valve inlet and outlet piping to each regulator with American Gas Association approved
valves.
3. Regulators with Relief Vents: Pipe vents to outside, maintaining a minimum clearance of
15 feet (4.6 m) to any door opening, window opening, louver, or outside air intake.
4. Separately vent regulators full size to the exterior, with a turndown elbow and insect
screen. Do not terminate vent outlet next to a combustion or fresh air intake.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Install gas-piping run-outs to mechanical gas-fired equipment and food preparation
gas-fired equipment, including equipment supplied by Owner and equipment supplied and
installed by Owner.
1. Install piping full-size (as indicated on the Drawings) to each unit’s gas inlet connection,
burner, regulator, etc.
2. Provide gas cock and make final connections.
3. Include a drip leg and shutoff gas cock for connections to each gas-fired equipment item.
4. Connections to Each Gas-Fired Equipment Item: Include a drip leg and shutoff gas cock.
Install per equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Connections to gas-fired rooftop equipment:
a. Provide roof penetration and repair roof in accordance with roof manufacturer’s
instructions so as to not void warranty.
b. Install gas piping through the roof in a location that has been coordinated with the
HVAC installer.
1. Arrange with gas utility company to provide gas meter and gas regulator where indicated.
Consult with utility as to extent to its work, costs, fees and permits involves. Pay such
costs and fees; obtain permits. Provide concrete pad or wall brackets as required by gas
utility company.
C. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
E. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within
72-inches (1829-mm) of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve
and appliances or equipment.
F. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with 4-inch pipe with capped nipple in bottom to form trap,
as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.
A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 23 11 23
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Metal, rectangular ducts and fittings with or without duct liner for supply, return, outside,
and exhaust air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg
(minus 500 to plus 2500 Pa).
B. See Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounted access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.
A. Compliance Standards:
1. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and
installation of metal ductwork.
2. ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1, "Duct Construction", for
fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
3. ANSI/NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems" and ANSI/NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and
Air Conditioning Systems".
A. Internally Lined Ductwork: Store up off of the floor. Protect internally lined ductwork from
water and dust. Protect the leading edge of internal duct lining with the manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 1
233113_MetalDucts_04-08-10.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G60 (Z180) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces
exposed to view.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900
mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
E. Carbon Steel: Deli/Bakery hoods shall meet the requirements NFPA 96. Materials shall be a
minimum .054” (16 gage) and welded liquid tight.
A. Fibrous-Glass Matt-Faced Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or
NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1. Manufacturers
a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 2
233113_MetalDucts_04-08-10.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers
of duct liner is prohibited.
2. Protect upstream edge of duct liner preceded by unlined duct with zee or channel metal
nosing.
3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-
edge overlapping.
5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.
6. In addition to adhesive, secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from
corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75
mm) from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm)
longitudinally. Ensure mechanical fasteners do not compress duct liner/wrap more than
10 percent.
A. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches (50 mm) wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.
B. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,
airtight seal.
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 3
233113_MetalDucts_04-08-10.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers:
2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches (750 mm) wide and up to 2-inch wg (500-Pa) pressure
class.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches (480 mm)
and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of
nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined.
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 4
233113_MetalDucts_04-08-10.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
A. 90-degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to conform to SMACNA "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards" 1985 edition, Figures 3-4 and 3-5 and with metal thicknesses
specified for longitudinal seam straight duct.
B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess
material projecting from the body onto branch tap entrance.
C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated or mitered construction. Fabricate the bend
radius of die-formed, gored, pleated elbows 1.5 times the elbow diameter. Unless elbow
construction type is indicated, provide elbows meeting the following requirements:
D. Round Mitered Elbows: Solid welded metal thickness listed below for pressure classes 2-inches
(51-mm) to 10-inches (254-mm):
B. Flexible duct shall conform to SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards” and UL 181.
Flexible duct can be used for branch drops to air devices. Connection to main trunk shall be
made with a bellmouth fitting and an adjustable metal clamp ring.
C. Maximum length allowable shall be determined by the length of branch drop, but in no case
shall exceed 14-feet (4.3-m).
D. Construction of flexible duct to consist of a full interior liner bonded to a zinc coated, high
carbon spring steel helix wire. Bonded to this wire shall be 1-inch (25.4-mm) by 1-lb/cf (16-
kg/cu.m) density fiberglass and an outer jacket comprised of seamless copolymer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 5
233113_MetalDucts_04-08-10.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches (300 mm), with a
minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.
E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
1. Inspect and repair damaged lining prior to installation of ductwork. Repair cuts or
gouges in surface of duct liner with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
2. Protect upstream edge of duct liner preceded by unlined duct with zee or channel metal
nosing.
3. Line the following ductwork with flexible duct liner:
a. In spaces without ceilings, supply and return ductwork from the roof penetration to
the first 10 feet (3 m) past the first elbow below the roof line, i.e. ductwork in
mezzanines without ceilings and the main sales area unit. Do not line branch
ducts.
b. Supply and return ductwork of units with drop box diffusers. Do not line branch
ducts.
c. Provide additional insulation where required for thermal purposes as specified in
Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions
unless specifically indicated.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,
and similar finished work.
K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward
to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 6
233113_MetalDucts_04-08-10.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts
or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings
on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke
dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and
installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop
Systems."
O. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow
SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."
A. Seal ductwork after installation to seal class recommended, and method prescribed in
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".
B. Welded Joints: Weld all seams and joints where ductwork is indicated to be watertight.
C. All metal longitudinal seams to be Pittsburgh Lock or other SMACNA listed seams. Button
punch nap lock not acceptable.
D. Round Metal Ductwork: Connect sections of duct by using beaded sleeve joint couplings, joint
Type RT-1, with noncorroding, self-tapping, sheet metal screws, installed in accordance with
duct manufacturer's recommendations.
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 20 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Facility Services."
B. Hanger and support devices are specified in Division 20 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Facility Services."
C. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches (600 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200
mm) of each branch intersection.
E. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
G. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 7
233113_MetalDucts_04-08-10.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section "Air
Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6 BALANCING:
A. Test balancing will be conducted by Owner. Any deficiencies or corrections required by testing
will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION 23 31 13
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 8
233113_MetalDucts_04-08-10.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,
components, and attachments to other work including:
B. NFPA Compliance:
A. Prevent objectionable aesthetic damage to the outer surface of duct segments during transport
and storage.
NONMETAL DUCTS 23 31 16 - 1
233116_NonMetalDucts_05-12-09.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Product:
B. Polymeric Sealing System: Coat ducts, including gang-nail couplings, grip flanges, and
couplings.
C. Duct Panel: CFC-free phenolic-foam bonded on both sides with factory-applied 0.001-inch-
(0.03 mm-) thick, aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass scrim.
1. Maximum Temperature: 158 deg F (70 deg C) inside ducts or ambient temperature
surrounding ducts.
2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.13 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
3. Permeability: 0.02 perms maximum when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M,
Procedure A.
4. Antimicrobial Agent: Compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL, and registered
by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.
5. Noise-Reduction Coefficient: 0.05 minimum when tested according to ASTM C 423,
Mounting A.
6. Required Markings: UL label and other markings required by UL 181 on each full sheet
of duct panel; UL ratings for closure materials.
7. R-Value:
D. Closure Materials:
NONMETAL DUCTS 23 31 16 - 2
233116_NonMetalDucts_05-12-09.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
E. Fabrication:
B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
C. Steel Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized steel with end connections made of cadmium-plated
steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an
automatic-locking and clamping device.
D. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
E. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
F. Cable Lock System: Duro Dyne; CL23 or CL12 cable locks with the WC4 or WC6 cable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Limit installation of non-metal duct to non-sales areas where non-metal duct is concealed by a
ceiling.
B. Install foam ducts and fittings to comply with manufacturer’s written system design guide and
as follows:
4. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are
exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with
sheet metal flanges. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
5. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire
dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for
fire and smoke dampers.
6. Protect duct interiors from the moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction
Guidelines."
C. Air Leakage: Duct air leakage rates to be in compliance with “SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards” latest version per applicable leakage class based on pressure.
D. Exterior Installations: Incorporate 0.025 inch (0.6 mm) minimum thickness aluminum sheet on
duct segments.
A. Install hangers and supports for fibrous-glass ducts and fittings to comply with manufacturer’s
written instructions and SMACNA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," Chapter 6,
"Hangers and Supports."
B. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Remove and replace duct system where inspection indicates that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
NONMETAL DUCTS 23 31 16 - 4
233116_NonMetalDucts_05-12-09.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
END OF SECTION 23 31 16
NONMETAL DUCTS 23 31 16 - 5
233116_NonMetalDucts_05-12-09.doc
R/L/R PROJECT NO. 10-218 KROGER #GA-463
WOODSTOCK, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounting access doors.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Flexible ducts.
7. Duct accessory hardware.
B. See Division 28 Section "Fire Alarm/Security System" for duct-mounting fire and smoke
detectors.
C. See Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC" for electric and
pneumatic damper actuators.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounting access doors.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Flexible ducts.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Special fittings.
2. Manual-volume damper installations.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
A. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) "HVAC Duct Const. Standards, Metal &
Flexible".
B. Industry Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating Refrigeration, and Air
Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to construction of duct
accessories except as otherwise indicated.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of duct accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G60 (Z180) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces
exposed to view.
D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish
for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900
mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
A. Manufacturers:
C. Frame: 0.052-inch (1.3-mm) thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting
flange.
A. Manufacturers:
B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62
mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for
attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze.
5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
E. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-
mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include center hole
to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, single-vane, curved blades
of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set
2 inches (50 mm) o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Manufacturers:
A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where
indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
1. Manufacturers:
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:
a. Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: Secure with two sash locks.
b. Up to 18 Inches (450 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two compression
latches.
d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm) and Larger: One additional hinge.
C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and 1-inch (25-mm) thickness. Include cam latches.
1. Manufacturers:
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
A. Manufacturers:
A. Manufacturers:
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F (Minus 28 to plus 99 deg C).
C. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C).
D. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band
with a worm-gear action or Nylon strap, in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit
duct size.
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,
and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths
from branch takeoff.
F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and
terminal units as follows:
J. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
K. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and higher, cover flexible
connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
L. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of
flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
M. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch
(1500-mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape.
O. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2 ADJUSTING
END OF SECTION 23 33 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
a. The Kroger Company will supply the power and gravity ventilators.
b. Comply with requirements in Division 00 Section “General Conditions.”
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1. Product Data: Including rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type of product indicated.
2. Shop Drawings: Equipment assemblies and dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for contact information
on power and gravity ventilators.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Support units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm). Vibration- and
seismic-control devices are specified in Division 20 Section "Vibration And Seismic Controls
For Facility Services.”
1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in
concrete base.
E. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
F. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers
having a static deflection of 1-inch (25-mm). Vibration-control devices are specified in
Division 20 Section "Vibration And Seismic Controls For Facility Services.”
H. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 20 Section "Common Work Results
for Facility Services."
I. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section
"Air Duct Accessories."
K. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
L. Provide low voltage connections according to Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
B. Start up units and test and adjust controls and safeties to insure proper operation. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
END OF SECTION 23 34 23
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. The Kroger Company will supply the drop box diffusers for air conditioning/air
handling equipment.
b. Comply with requirements in Division 00 Section “General Conditions.”
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for contact information
on drop box diffuser system.
1. Products:
2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel.
4. Color:
a. Adjustable Bar Register Located in Painted Open Structural Steel: Custom color,
ICI paints; Golden Champagne #549.
b. All Other Adjustable Bar Registers: White.
5. Face Blade Arrangement: Fixed horizontal spaced 1-1/2 inches (38mm) apart.
6. Rear Blade Arrangement: Fixed vertical spaced 3/4 inch (19 mm) apart.
7. Frame: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide.
8. Mounting Frame: Filter.
9. Mounting: Lay in.
10. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed-blade assembly.
1. Products:
2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel.
4. Color:
a. Diffusers Located in Painted Open Structural Steel: Custom color, ICI paints;
Golden Champagne #549.
b. All Other Diffusers: White
a. Equaling grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
B. Round Diffusers:
1. Products:
2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel.
4. Color:
a. Diffusers Located in Painted Open Structural Steel: Custom color, ICI paints;
Golden Champagne #549.
b. All Other Diffusers: White
a. Equaling grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
e. Sectorizing baffles.
f. Operating rod extension.
A. Provide registers similar to the model numbers indicated on the drawings. Provide registers
with an aluminum opposed blade damper. Color of registers to match adjoining surface color.
a. Price Industries
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install drop box diffusers, diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling
panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict
with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 23 37 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes
a) Direct-expansion cooling.
b) Electric-heating coils.
c) Gas furnace.
d) Integral, space temperature controls.
e) Roof curbs.
a. Fasteners and other items not provided by Owner necessary for a complete
installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for each air conditioning/air-handling unit,
including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished
specialties, and accessories.
2. Shop Drawings: Equipment assemblies and dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
A. ARI Compliance:
1. ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for air
conditioning/air-handling units.
2. ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for air conditioning/air-handling units.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
D. UL Compliance: UL 1995.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall be responsible for handling manufacturer warranty service during the 90 day
warranty period. Contractor shall be responsible for following all warranty procedures and
notifying Owner of all warranty repairs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for contact information
on air conditioning/air-handling units.
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for contact information
on duct-free split system cooling and heat pump units.
2.3 CONTROLS
A. Roof curbs with vibration isolators and wind or seismic restraints are specified in Division 20
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Facility Services", (where applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install rooftop air conditioning/air-handling units and split system cooling and heat pump units
in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Installation Includes:
C. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope
Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop
Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install air conditioning/air-handling units on curbs and
coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Secure air conditioning/air-
handling units to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with
anchor bolts.
D. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and drain as required by
authorities of local jurisdiction.
E. Install piping adjacent to air conditioning/air-handling units to allow service and maintenance.
F. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:
3. Connect supply ducts to air conditioning/air-handling units with flexible duct connectors
specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
H. Control Wiring: Electrical installer shall provide control wiring. HVAC installer shall provide
final connections.
A. Provide a factory certified technician for start up. Ensure that all components of the rooftop
units are operating properly.
B. Owner will provide a technician for review of and inspection of balancing and will make
recommendations to Contractor regarding adjustments for final balancing. Contractor will make
final adjustments in response to these recommendations.
A. Clean up work. Touch-up with matching paint all damaged factory finishes.
B. Fully charge all rooftop equipment with refrigerant and ensure proper oil levels.
C. Provide new filters on the day building is turned over to Owner for grand opening.
PRE-START-UP INSPECTION
YES NO
1. Proper electrical supply voltage available (insert voltage) L1 ______ L2 ______ L3______
SIGNED:
_________________________________________________
Signature
_________________________________________________
Print Name
END OF SECTION 23 74 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This Division and the accompanying electrical drawings cover furnishing all labor, equipment
and materials and performing all operations in connection with the installation of the complete
electrical system as documented.
B. There are many interfaces between the work involved with this Division and the work in other
Divisions, particularly with Division 15. Be aware of the requirements of the other Divisions
and the responsibilities at the interfaces.
C. Substitutions for manufacturers and materials named herein are not allowed.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Provide: furnish, install, connect, test, demonstrate and leave fully operable.
B. Wiring: wire or cable installed in raceway with all required boxes, fittings, connectors, etc.
D. Raceway: Galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRC) electrical metallic tubing (EMT), Intermediate
metal conduit (ICM), schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), flexible steel (FLX), sheathed
flexible steel (SFX). Also, underfloor duct (UFD) and plug in surface raceway
(plugmold).
E. Apparatus & Equipment: conduit, wire, devices, components, enclosures, materials, elements
and systems or parts of systems.
F. Shop Drawings: fabrication drawings, marked product data, catalog cuts, or field drawings of
any type.
A. All work shall comply with all local, state, and national codes, laws, ordinances, standards and
regulations applicable to the electrical installation, applicable building codes and with the
requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC), Vol. 70 of the N.F.P.A., the National
Electrical Safety Code, and the Life Safety Code, Vol., 101 of the N.F.P.A.
B. Where different sections of any of the aforementioned codes and regulations, the Specifications
and/or the Drawings require different materials, methods of construction or other requirements,
the most restrictive shall govern. In any conflict between a general provision and a special
provision, the special provision shall govern.
C. Obtain all permits and licenses, and pay all fees as required for execution of the Contract.
Arrange for necessary inspections required by the city, county, state and other authorities
having jurisdiction and present certificates of approval to the Owner or his designated
representative.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
D. Under no circumstances will asbestos or asbestos related materials be allowed on this project.
Should any be found on the project, they will be reported in writing and removed from the
project by the contractor at no change in contract time or price.
E. The restrictions of the item above shall also apply to PCB (polychlorinated biphenol) and to
radio-active materials (except smoke detectors).
F. Communicate with all required utility offices to meet utility schedules and regulations. Acquire
services to avoid project delays.
A. Contractor shall visit the site and thoroughly familiarize themselves with the local conditions in
advance of bid submittal.
A. The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and are not intended to show the exact location of
raceways outlets, boxes, bends, sleeves, couplings or other such elements.
B. The Drawings and Specifications shall both be considered as part of the Contract. Any work or
material shown in one and omitted in the other, or which may fairly be implied by both or
either, shall be provided in order to give a complete job.
C. Should conflicts exist between the Drawings and/or Specifications, the Contractor shall provide
the highest cost item and request clarification from Architect.
D. Refer to the Architectural, Structural and Mechanical plans and details for dimensions, and fit
the work to conform to the details of building construction. The right is reserved to shift any
device or outlet a maximum of 10'-0" from its location as shown before it is permanently
installed, without incurring additions to the Contract in time or cost.
E. All conduit and wiring shown on the Electrical Drawings shall be provided under this Division
regardless of its function.
1.6 DEVIATIONS
A. No deviations from the drawings and specifications shall be made without the full knowledge
and consent of the Owner or his Representative and the Architect and Engineer.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. The horsepower, wattage (or amperes) of motor driven equipment indicated is the estimated
requirement of equipment furnished under another Division. All wiring, protective devices and
disconnect switches shall be of the voltage, size and ampacity for the actual equipment installed.
In no case shall these items be of smaller capacity than those indicated.
B. Coordinate with other trades and provide suitable equipment so that the above requirements
shall be met without incurring additions to the Contract in time of cost.
C. Each mechanical equipment appliance installed on roofs of buildings shall have an accessible
weatherproof disconnect switch and a 120 volt AC grounding type convenience outlet on the
roof adjacent to the appliance. The convenience outlet shall be on the supply side of the
disconnect switch. For voltages other than 120 volts provide suitable 750 VA transformer or
separate circuit.
D. The contractor shall provide suitable disconnecting means in conformance with the above
requirements and those of the NEC for all items or equipment utilized on the project no matter
how, or by whom, furnished. However, duplication, or redundancy, is not required.
E. Verify and coordinate all motor starter overloads provided under this division to match the
specific installed motor. Provide an overload in each and every phase of motor circuits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. All material shall be new and shall bear the inspection label of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
(UL).
B. The published standards and requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
(NEMA), the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), the Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers (IEEE) and the American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) shall
govern where applicable.
C. Specified catalog numbers and trade or manufacturers names describe the material, devices, or
apparatus desired.
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all apparatus and equipment suitable bound, and marked,
and with contracts of no less than one specification section, per individual submission.
Submittals not called for herein and/or submittals pertaining to the actual construction process
will not be reviewed.
B. Samples shall be submitted, for approval, for all items so requested by the Owner or his
ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
representative.
C. Shop drawings and/or catalog data submittals on all items of equipment and materials shall be
submitted in conformity with requirements of the General and Supplementary Conditions. Do
not submit more than the required number of sets.
D. A submittal including a list of the manufacturers of the principal items of material. Wire,
conduit, connectors, devices, boxes, lighting fixtures, special system, panelboards,
switchboards, motor controls, etc., shall be submitted prior to the first shop drawing submission
and within 30 days after contract award.
G. All material lists and shop drawing submittals shall include a stamped indication signifying that
the submittals have been previously reviewed for compliance with the contract Documents, that
all coordination required prior to field installation had occurred.
1. The stamped indication shall include the name of the contracting firm, the date of the
review and the signature of the contractor. The Engineer will not review the shop
drawing submittals without the contractors stamped approval already on the shop
drawings. The responsibility of complying with the Contract Documents will not be
relieved by the Engineer's review which requires two weeks from date the shop drawings
are received by the Engineer.
H. All pricing is to be based upon the products, manufacturers, and processes described in the
Contract Documents.
I. Intended use of specified items does not relieve the Contractor of shop drawings submission
requirements. Failure to submit shop drawings shall place the Contractor entirely and solely at
risk for the product and the portion of work not submitted.
A. Maintain on the job site at all times during construction a set of "As-Built" mylar sepias with all
changes during construction marked thereon. Include any sketches or "marked-up" drawing
prints as may be generated on the job site to assist in recording the changes.
B. The "As-Built" sepias shall show all changes and deviations from the Contract Drawings
including relocation of outlets, conduit and equipment. Record final dimensioned locations for
switchboards, panelboards, transformers, disconnect switches, etc. Make sufficient
measurements to locate all underground work including raceways.
C. At the completion of construction, the sepia drawings, sketches and marked-up prints shall be
presented to the Owner's Representative.
A. Submit to the Owner or his Representative, upon completion of the work, three (3) copies of
maintenance and instruction manuals for equipment provided.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Submission of Engineer's drawings for shop drawings and unaltered Engineer's drawings for
"As-Builts" will not be acceptable.
B. The tape shall be laid 6 to 12 inches below finished grade above all underground cables,
conduit, ducts, duct banks.
A. All other materials and accessories, not specifically described or called for, but which are
required for a complete and finished installation for the work of this section shall be furnished
and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Buyer. These materials shall be
selected by the contractor, subject to be reviewed by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Before any piping, conduit, outlets, equipment or lighting fixtures are located in any area,
coordinate the space requirements with all trades. Such shall be arranged so that space
conditions will allow all trades to install their work, and will also permit access for future
maintenance and repair.
B. Piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment installed at variance with the above requirements
without incurring additions to the Contract cost or time.
1. No piping or ductwork, other than electrical, shall be run within 42" of panelboards,
switchboards or transformers.
2. No pipes or ducts that operate at a temperature in excess of 120 degrees F. shall be
installed nearer than 3" to any electrical conductor.
A. All conduit and other openings shall be kept protected to prevent entry of foreign matter.
Fixtures, equipment, and apparatus shall be kept covered for protection against dirt, water,
chemical or mechanical damage before and during construction.
B. The original finish, including shop coat of paint of fixtures, apparatus or equipment that has
ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 00 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
been damaged shall be restored without incurring additions to the Contract in time or price.
A. The Contractor shall provide 4" minimum height reinforced concrete pad, integral with floor,
under all floor mounted electrical equipment or apparatus.
A. The Contractor is responsible for all cutting and patching, including escutcheon plates where
necessary, whether or not such cutting and patching is shown or indicated.
A. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining access to all concealed electrical equipment,
apparatus, or devices whether, or not, shown or indicated. Where access panels are required,
refer to Architect, Owner or Engineer for approved means, methods and appearance.
A. Doors to electric rooms and closets shall open outwards. If in conflict with architectural
drawings refer to Owner or engineer for resolution.
B. Manufacturer's equipment shall not be larger than that dimensioned, or scaled, on plans.
Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Owner or Engineer for resolution prior to order.
C. Clear working space in electric rooms and closets shall be no less than that required by the
N.E.C.
D. The contractor shall submit for review, prior to construction or purchase of any equipment,
scaled drawings of electrical rooms, closets, or spaces showing, in detail, his planned installation
locations of the equipment he intends to purchase. These shall clearly show compliance with
above paragraphs.
3.7 UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall verify, in writing, that the utility companies have been contacted for service
(including power, telephone, and cable TV if utilized on this project) and that the services to be
provided by the utilities are compatible with the needs of the project.
B. The Contractor shall pay all fees, charges, costs and penalties to obtain utility services and such
costs are included in the basic Contract.
C. In addition to the above, the Contractor shall obtain from the utility companies, information in
writing defining the available fault at the project and the circumstances on which the utility
companies base their information. The Contractor shall notify suitable parties if it is found that
the project service equipment cannot withstand or interrupt the available fault at the equipment
terminals or point of service entrance.
D. The design of this project incorporates equipment to protect against faults from normal sources
ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 00 - 6
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
and equipment of the utility. Source changes or emergency solutions to provide power to this
project may require the utilization of restrictive components or measures to prevent damage to
the project and its components.
3.8 TESTS
A. Upon completion of the electrical work, conduct an operating test in the presence of the Owner
or his designated representative.
B. The installation shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Any material or workmanship which does not meet with the approval of the Owner or his
representative shall be removed, repaired or replaced as directed without incurring additions to
the Contract in time or cost.
C. Furnish all instructions, tools, and personnel required for the test. Have sufficient tools and
personnel available to remove panel covers, coverplates, etc., as required for proper inspection.
Provide suitable test equipment.
A. Present to the Owner or his designated representatives a physical demonstration and oral
instructions for proper operation and maintenance of electrical equipment and systems
installed.
B. The time, date and length shall be prearranged with the Owner.
3.10 GUARANTEE
A. All systems and components shall be provided with a one-year guarantee from the time of final
acceptance. The guarantee shall cover all materials and workmanship. During this guarantee
period, all defects in materials and workmanship shall be corrected without incurring additions
to the Contract. The correction shall include all required cutting, patching, repainting, or other
work involved, including repair or restoration of any damaged sections or parts of the premises
resulting from any fault and is covered by the guarantee.
B. In addition to this general guarantee, present to the Owner any other guarantees or warranties
from equipment or system manufacturers. These supplemental guarantees or warranties shall
not invalidate the general guarantee.
C. Where requested, provide suitable maintenance contracts for all or specific parts of the work at
extra agreed cost to the Owner and not included n the base contract.
END OF SECTION 26 00 00
ELECTRICAL GENERAL 26 00 00 - 7
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Types of electrical connections specified in this section include, but are not necessarily limited
to, the following:
1. Distribution Equipment
2. Grounding System
3. Motors
4. Motor Starters
5. Starters for Hood fans
6. Light Fixtures
7. Fire Alarm Equipment
8. Temperature Control Wiring
9. Emergency Equipment
10. HVAC Equipment
11. Water Heaters.
12. Sprinkler and Fire Alarm System
13. Disposers
14. Installation of operator controls for bascart door.
C. Related Work
1. HVAC work: Provide conduit for wiring for HVAC equipment in accordance with the
drawings and specifications.
a. Refer to Division 23 Section “Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC” for
work performed by HVAC installer.
b. Refer to Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables” for wiring.
2. Temperature control work to include conduit and wiring for smoke detector. Installation
in ductwork included in Division 23 Sections. Refer to Division 23 Section
“Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC” for work performed by HVAC
installer.
3. Sprinkler alarm system shall be wired complete. Provide a "lock-on" device on the
circuit breaker supplying the alarm system. Identify circuit breaker with a sign reading:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no
side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches
(1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm),
thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.
Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or Stainless
steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for
each sealing element.
2.3 GROUT
A. Manufacturers:
A. For each electrical connection indicated, provide a complete assembly of materials, including
but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape,
cable ties, solderless connectors and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices
and terminations of the type indicated.
B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of the type,
grade, size and weight (wall thickness) required for each service.
D. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals as recommended by the
connector and terminal manufacturer for the intended application.
E. Electrical Connections Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, connectors and cable ties
as recommended for the type job designated by the accessories manufacturers.
F. All other materials and accessories, not specifically described or called for, but which are
required for a complete and finished installation for the work of this section shall be furnished
and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Buyer. These materials shall be
selected by the contractor, subject to be reviewed by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Fasten electrical components securely to structural support steel. Do not fasten to metal deck.
C. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounting items.
D. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom
consistent with these requirements.
F. Right of Way: Give right of way to piping systems installed at a required slope. Work shall be
coordinated between trades prior to installation.
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways
penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway
or cable, unless indicated otherwise.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed
surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow
for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable
material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
END OF SECTION 26 05 00
3.5
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
B. Provide electrical conductors, cable and electrical work is required by drawings schedules.
C. Provide circuitry conductors, cable, wire and connectors required on the project for:
1. Power Distribution
2. Lighting
3. Appliances
4. Equipment
5. Motor Branches
6. HVAC Control
7. CPC Control wiring
8. Sprinkler/Fire Alarm
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Building Wires: Provide copper conductors, conductor insulation, and multi-conductor cable
complying with NEMA WC70.
1. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Anixter; 800-264-9837
b. Beldon CDT, Inc., 800- 235-3361
c. Walker; Division of Butler Manufacturing; 816-968-3000
d. Harvey Hubbel Incorporated; 203-882-4900
2. Basis of Design: Beldon CDT, Inc., 800- 235-3361
A. Manufacturers:
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
C. General: Provide electrical wires, cables and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials,
as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by
manufacturer, for a complete installation, and for application indicated. Except as otherwise
indicated, provide stranded copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98 percent at
20-degrees C (68 degrees F). Aluminum conductors are not acceptable.
D. Conductor sizes shall not be less than indicated. Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No.
10 AWG, for #10 solid conductors are preferred; for Class 1 remote control and signal, circuits
to be No. 14 stranded; for Class 2 low-energy remote control and signal, circuits to be No. 16
AWG stranded conductors.
E. Metal clad cable (MC cable) shall be only #10 copper conductors—type THHN insulation
twisted and covered with polyester tape. Metal Clad Cable (Type MC) to comply with National
Electrical Code (NEC) and authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Building Wires:
1. Provide factory fabricated wire of sizes, ampacity ratings and materials for applications
and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper wire selection as determined
by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA
standards. Select from the following UL types, those wires with construction features
that will fulfill project requirements.
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and cable.
1. Refer to Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical” for more
information on sealing materials.
A. All wire #10 AWG and smaller to be factory color-coded. Where factory color is not available
for sizes larger than #10 AWG, mark conductors on each end with 1-inch (25.4-mm) band of
colored pressure sensitive plastic tape.
B. Color for each phase and neutral to be consistent throughout the system color code to be as
follows:
1. The same color to be used for each phase throughout system of feeders, subfeeders and
branches.
C. Connections:
a. Type:
1) Pressure
2) Crimp
3) Threaded
b. Class:
1) Insulated
2) Non-insulated
c. Kind:
2) AL/CU Dual-Rated for use with aluminum and copper conductors (for
copper to aluminum connection and for aluminum to aluminum connection).
Properly wire brush conductor surface and utilize Listed anti-oxidation joint
compound. Wipe away excess compound. All connection/termination
materials shall be UL Listed and Labeled for the specific application and
applied accordingly.
d. Style:
1) Butt Connection
2) Elbow Connection
3) Combined "T" and Straight Connection
4) "T" Connection
5) Parallel Connection
6) Tap Connection
All other materials and accessories, not specifically described or called for, but which are
required for a complete and finished installation for the work of this section shall be furnished
and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Buyer. These materials shall be
selected by the contractor, subject to be reviewed by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC): Type MC cable may be used to the extent permitted by the
National Electrical Code (NEC) and by authorities having jurisdiction. Install in strict
compliance with NEC Article 330, including all references therein to other articles and sections
of NEC, and in strict compliance with all other authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Feeder and subfeeder descriptions shown on drawings are based on traditional conduit/wire type
installation; however, the Contractor may, at it’s option, run feeder MC cable from service
entrance switchboard or distributions panels to panelboards rated 100 A or larger.
C. Branch circuit MC cable is permitted in limited use conditions only. The rule of thumb distance
is 20 foot maximum length. Homeruns to departments or areas where a large number of branch
circuits are being installed shall be in conduit. From junction boxes installed above the ceiling
in a space, MC shall be permitted to connect to devices as required.
D. Feeders: Provide aluminum alloy AA-8000 compact stranded conductors for 100 ampere and
larger feeders unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
E. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
F. Do not install conductors of sizes less than indicated. Minimum size for branch circuits shall be
No. 12 AWG; for #12 and #10 solid conductors are preferred; for Class 1 remote control and
signal, circuits to be No. 14 stranded; for Class 2 low-energy remote control and signal, circuits
to be No. 16 AWG stranded conductors.
G. Metal clad cable (Type MC) shall be only #12 and #10 copper conductors, Type THHN
insulation twisted and covered with polyester tape.
Wire Type
Description
Plenum Non-Plenum
WAN Connection #24-8 Cat-5 Cable #24-5 Cat-8 Cable
Analog/Digital
#22-2 Shielded Cable #22-2 Shielded Cable
Temperature Sensor/Input
Defrost Termination
#22-2 Shielded Cable #22-2 Shielded Cable
Sensor
Outdoor Temperature
#22-2 Shielded Cable #22-2 Shielded Cable
Sensor/Drop Leg Sensor
#14 Twisted Pair per Lighting #14 Twisted Pair per Lighting
Lighting Control
Contactor (Plenum Rated) Contactor
Refrigeration Solenoid
#14 Twisted Pair (Plenum Rated) #14 Twisted Pair
Valve
2-#16-10 Multi-Conductor Cable
HVAC Staging Control 2-#16-10 Multi-Conductor Cable
(Plenum Rated)
Unit Heater Control #14 Twisted Pair (Plenum Rated) #14 Twisted Pair
Line Voltage in Conduit Per NEC and Mfr’s Guidelines Per NEC and Mfr’s Guidelines
I. Color Coding:
1. Wire #10 AWG and smaller to be factory color-coded. Where factory color is not
available for sizes larger than #10 AWG, mark conductors on each end with 1-inch (25.4-
mm) band of colored pressure sensitive plastic tape.
2. Color for each phase and neutral to be consistent throughout the system color code to be
as follows:
208Y/120V System 277/480V System
Phase A Black Brown
a. The same color to be used for each phase throughout system of feeders, subfeeders
and branches.
A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors as indicated in compliance with
applicable requirement so NEC, NEMA, UL and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in
accordance with recognized industry practices.
B. Provide circuitry conductors, cable, wire and connectors required on the project for:
1. Power Distribution
2. Lighting
3. Appliances
4. Equipment
5. Motor Branches
6. HVAC Control
7. CPC wiring
C. Sprinkler/Fire Alarm
D. Coordinate wire/cable installation work including electrical raceway and equipment installation
work, as necessary to properly interface installation of wires/cables with other work and in
accordance with proper phasing.
F. Install UL Type XHHW wire for underground service and feeder conductors as well as other
exterior branch circuits.
G. Install UL Type THHN or THWN wiring in conduit, for feeders and branch circuits in all
interior building areas above grade.
H. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use
pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor
or insulation. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable rope and basket weave wire/cable
grips that will not damage cables or raceway.
I. Where outlets only are indicated, 12-inch (305-mm) conductor leads to be provided for
connection of Owner's equipment. All conductors to be identified at terminals and junctions
with circuit numbers.
J. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-
steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
1. Color of Cord
a. White: In areas in view to the customers such as sales and service areas.
b. Black: For only equipment in rooms not subject to view by customers such as meat
and produce prep areas.
A. For splice and tap connections for wire sizes #10 AWG and smaller, provide joints in
conductors by twisting the conductors and then connector in sizes and quantity of conductors as
catalog rated by manufacturer. In no case will wire nuts be permitted. Connector to be
Scotchlok Type Y, R, G or B.
B. For splicing wire sizes larger than #10 AWG, provide UL-listed insulated copper compression
connectors. Provide AL/CU-rated connectors only where aluminum conductors are specifically
noted on drawings for feeders rated 100A or greater.. Compression to be either indent or crimp
type hydraulic. Burndy Type YS for splices. Tap connections larger than #8 AWG to be
copper mechanical connectors Burndy Type KVS and Type QPX. Keep conductor splices to a
minimum.
C. Install splices and tapes which possess equivalent, or better, mechanical strength and insulation
ratings than conductors being spliced.
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will
not damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed runs of cables down walls to surface mounted panelboards by one of the
following methods:
1. Within a partition chase wall (constructed by the electrical installer in manner approved
by Architect).
2. Within appropriately sized steel raceway(s)
3. Within a custom fabricated heavy-gage painted sheet metal chase approved in advance by
the Owner’s Representative.
F. Install chases and wireways in a manner that fully conceals and protects cables, prevents any
overheating of cables and is approved by the local authority having jurisdiction.
G. Type MC Cables shall be concealed from view in all applications except for the following
conditions where it may be exposed
H. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 20 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Facility Services."
I. Support cables according to Division 20 Section "Hangers and Supports for Facility Services"
and Division 20 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Facility Services."
J. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Electrical
Identification."
L. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (305 mm) of slack.
A. For work penetrating a fire rated wall, contractor shall coordinate sleeve selection and
application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping.”
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and
size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular
space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing
elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test and service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide for each electrical grounding, a complete assembly of
materials, including, but not necessarily limited to, cable, wire, connectors, terminals (solderless
lugs), bonding jumped braid, and other accessories needed for complete installation. Where
more than one type meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where material
or component is not otherwise indicated, provide products complying with NEC, and
established industry standards.
B. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-
5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
6. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,
with at least two bolts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.
Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.
A. Provide a separate grounding conductor for branch circuits and feeders from the load side
terminals of the device or equipment to the source grounding bar (i.e. at the panelboard or
switchboard). Mechanical grounding (i.e. grounding connecting the device or equipment to the
junction box or conduit) will not be permissible. Other applications in addition to that required
by NFPA 70 are listed below:
C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway
fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a
separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication equipment, provide No. 6 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
cabinet, and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding bus. Coordinate
with equipment installers for locations requiring grounding.
G. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate
insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with
branch-circuit conductors.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
1. Fasten cables directly to the structural steel using factory clamps/clips specifically
designed for the respective cable. Do not attach cables to metal deck.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if
any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length
from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,
and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes,
using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using
one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed,
connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor
conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.Retain and edit paragraph below to exceed NFPA 70 requirements, and
comply with NFPA 70 recommendations for a higher standard of safety or
electromagnetic interference suppression if needed.
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test
wells.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s).
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Clevis Hangers
2. Riser Clamps
3. C-Clamp
4. I-Beam Clamps
5. One-Hole Conduit Straps
6. Two-Hole Conduit Straps
7. Conduit Clamps
8. Round Steel Rods
9. Toggle Bolts
10. Structural Steel Angles
A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the
applied force.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Provide supporting devices which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and
construction, in accordance with published product information and as required for complete
installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one type of supporting device meets
requirements, selection is Contractor's option.
B. Supports: Provide supporting devices of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the
following construction features:
C. Clevis Hangers: For supporting rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 1/2-inch (13-mm)
diameter hole for round steel rod; approximately 54-lbs. (25-kg) per 100 units.
D. Riser Clamps: For supporting rigid metal conduit; black steel; with two (2) bolts and nuts, and
4-inch (101.6-mm) ears; approximately 510-lbs. (231-kg) per 100 units.
E. C-Clamps: Malleable iron; 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod size; approximately 70-lbs. (32-kg) per 100
units.
F. Beam Clamps: Malleable iron, 1-1/4-inch by 3/16-inch (32-mm by 5-mm) stock; 5/16-inch (8-
mm) cross bolt; approximately 22-lbs. (10-kg) per 100 units for 1-inch (25.4-mm) size.
G. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4-inch (19-mm) rigid metal conduit, galvanized
steel; approximately 7-lbs. (3-kg) per 100 units.
H. Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4-inch (19-mm) rigid metal conduit, galvanized
steel; 3/4-inch (19-mm) strap width; and 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) between center of screw holes.
I. Conduit Clamps: For supporting electrical metal tubing or rigid steel conduit; galvanized stamp
steel, with bolt, approximately 7-lbs. (3-kg) per 100 units. Heat-treated spring steel clamps not
permitted.
J. Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod size; galvanized steel; approximately 4 lbs. (2-kg)
per 100 units.
K. Round Steel Rod: Black steel; 1/2-inch (13-mm) diameter; approximately 67 lbs. (30-kg)
pounds per 100-ft. (30.5-m).
L. Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes and materials indicated, with following construction
features:
1. Lead Expansion Anchors: 1/2-inch (13-mm); approximately 38 lbs. (17-kg) per 100
units.
2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead; 3/16-inch by 4-inch (5-mm by 102-mm); approximately 5-lbs
(2-kg) per 100 units.
3. Wood Screws: Cadmium-plated, with machine or flat heads; size.
4. Sheet Metal Screws: Cadmium-plated, with machine, pan heads or hex-drive heads; size.
5. Threaded Studs: Cadmium-plated, set by a power charge, and provided with lock
washers and nuts; size.
6. Nylon Anchors: Nail-type.
M. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment,
12 gage, 0.108-inch (2.743-mm), hot-dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated;
construct with 9/16-inch (14-mm) diameter holes, 8-inches (203-mm) o.c. on top surface, with
standard plated finish and with the following fittings, which mate and match with U-channel:
1. Fixture Hangers
2. Channel Hangers
3. End Caps
4. Beam Clamps
5. Wiring Studs
6. Thinwall Conduit Clamps
7. Rigid Conduit Clamps
8. Conduit Hangers
9. U-Bolts
A. Provide required structural steel shapes, complying with Division 05, for added support, where
required.
All other materials and accessories, not specifically described or called for, but which are re-
quired for a complete and finished installation for the work of this section shall be furnished
and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Buyer. These materials shall be se-
lected by the contractor, subject to be reviewed by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or
other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without
exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-
1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems
above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
A. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to
interface installation of supporting devices with other work.
C. Supports and Anchors: Securely and rigidly fasten equipment in place with pipe hangers, wall
brackets, clamps, approved hangers, threaded C-clamps, with retainers or ceiling trapeze. All
hangers, clamps and support fittings to be malleable iron. Fasten using wood screws or screw-
type bolts on concrete or brick; by machine screws, welded threaded studs, steel or malleable
iron clamps on steel work. Nail-type nylon anchors and threaded studs, driven in by powder
charge, and provided with lock washers and nuts, may be used in lieu of expansion bolts or
machine or wood screws. Anchors shall not be welded to steel structures, or attached to roof or
floor deck. Cut holes in reinforced concrete beams or in concrete joists without cutting
reinforcing bars. Holes not used, to be filled.
END OF SECTION 26 05 29
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
6. Reddot
A. In addition to other contract document requirements, the following special requirements shall be
strictly enforced.
1. Install wiring for all systems in conduit (sized per NEC, minimum ¾-inch (19-mm) dia.
unless otherwise indicated).
2. Install wiring for different power voltages in raceway systems separate from each other
(i.e. 24V separate from 208Y/120V separate from 480Y/277V, etc.).
3. Install wiring, with the exception of voice and data, for the various electrical systems in
raceway systems separate from each other (i.e. fire alarm separate from voice/data
separate from etc.).
a. Low voltage systems are permitted to be run free air above the ceiling (in stores
with ceilings) or in the structure (in stores without ceilings) if j-hooks or other
standard installation methods are followed. Low voltage systems wiring is
required to be in conduit stub ups above ceiling or to structure in all cases.
4. Install normal system power feeders and branch circuits in separate raceways from
emergency system power.
5. Do not install conduits within slabs.
6. Do not install conduit beneath slabs on grade, except where specifically indicated
otherwise on drawings or as specifically agreed to by Kroger Representative and
Architect.
7. Conduit and fittings installed indoors above the slabs shall be steel.
8. Provide conduit fittings with insulated throats (or plastic bushings for conduits 2-inches
(51-mm) and larger where insulated throats are not readily available).
9. Provide conduit runs exceeding 100-feet (30.5-m) in length or having in excess of three
90 degree turns with pull boxes.
10. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent or per NEC, whichever is less.
1. EMT shall be FS WW-C-563, ANSI C80.3 and UL 797, galvanized or zinc coated steel.
2. Fittings: Galvanized or zinc coated steel, concrete-tight; provide compression-type for
trade size 2-inches and smaller; provide set-screw type for trade sizes larger than 2-
inches.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Steel City
2) T&B
3) Regal
4) Efcor.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Heavy wall, full weight, zinc-coated, threaded type
(galvanized after cutting/threading) conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. Provide zinc coating
fused to inside and outside walls
A. General:
1. Kroger will only allow limited use of nonmetallic (PVC-Sch 40) conduit material to
underground installations and in areas that are exposed to moisture (i.e. coolers, freezers).
Transition from PVC to EMT after leaving the cooler/freezer. Provide conduit seal-off at
the transition from PVC to EMT to prevent air transfer; install seal-off no more than 12-
inches from freezer/cooler exterior wall.
2. Where underground conduits project out of the concrete slab, change from PVC to IMC
prior to emerging from the slab.
3. Unless noted otherwise in Contract Documents, provide for all horizontal conduit runs
below grade and for other applications as indicated in Contract Documents.
B. Underground Plastic Conduits/Ducts: Heavy wall, Schedule 40, PVC, 90 degrees C, conforming
to NEMA TC-2, UL listed and labeled for direct burial or concrete encasement and in
conformity with NEC Article 354.
1. Basis of Design: Carlon; Plus 40, Heavy Wall EPC Type EB-35
1. General: Provide conduit/duct accessories of types, sizes, and materials, complying with
manufacturer's published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing.
4. Other Elbows:
5. Provide all other couplers, adapters, "O" rings, sealing, etc. as required. Provide
miscellaneous fittings that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their
particular application.
1. See Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electric Power Conductors and Cables” for MC
Cable for low voltage electric power conductors and cables
2. General:
E. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and double-
wrapped steel; galvanized inside and outside.
A. Manufacturers:
B. Provide conduit joints with standard conduit couplings, (no running-threads) cadmium plated.
Schedule 40 PVC conduit is also permitted for use in masonry or concrete.
C. Provide conduit and tubing accessories of types, sizes and materials complying with
manufacturer's published product information which mate and match conduit and tubing.
a. Manufacturers
1) Neer #DC
2) 3M "Scotchfill".
D. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast metal conduit bodies of types, shapes and sizes as
required to fulfill job requirements and NEC requirements. Construct conduit bodies with
threaded conduit entrance ends, removable covers, either cast or of galvanized steel and
corrosion resistant screws.
1. Construct locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with sharp edge for digging
into metal and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening.
2. Bushings for terminating conduits smaller than 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) are to have flared
bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent injury to cable insulation.
3. Provide insulated type bushings for terminating threaded conduits. Bushings are to have
flared bottom and ribbed sides. Provide phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing in
upper edge.
4. Bushing of standard or insulated type to have screw type grounding terminal.
5. Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions, split couplings and
plugs to be specifically designed for their particular application.
F. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Provide cadmium plated, malleable iron fittings
with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings, with insulated, or non-
insulated throat.
1. Products
A. Provide electrical wireways of types, grades, sizes and number of channels for each type of
service as indicated. Provide complete assembly of raceway including, but not limited to,
couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps and other
components and accessories as required for complete system.
B. Lay-In Wireways: Construct lay-in wireways with covers, in accordance with UL 870 and with
components UL listed, including lengths, connectors and fittings.
C. Select units to allow fastening cover closed without use of parts other than standard lengths,
fittings connectors. Construct units to be capable of sealing cover in closed position with
sealing wire. Provide wireways without knockouts.
D. Connectors: Provide wireway connectors suitable for lay-in conductors, with connector covers
permanently attached which removal is not necessary to utilize lay-in feature.
E. Finish: Protect sheet metal parts with rust inhibiting coating and baked enamel finish. Plate
finish hardware to prevent corrosion. Protect screws installed toward inside wireway with
spring nuts to prevent wire insulation damage.
F. Wireways to be square duct of standard lengths factory finished ANSI-49 gray with hinged
cover lengths and removal cover. Metal to be not less than 0.0740-inches (2-mm) thick.
G. Wireways and all fittings to be UL Listed File No. E6625, provided without knockouts and
complete with all 2-piece universal hangers and connectors.
A. In-Floor Raceway System: (In-floor systems are only used in under shelving units and
sometimes at the checklanes. Refer to drawings for exact locations on use.)
A. General: Use surface raceways only where indicated on the Drawings or as approved by Kroger
Representative.
B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Raceway shall be provided
with an ivory finish.
1. Manufacturers:
A. Provide electrical boxes and fittings as required by the National Electric Code (NEC) and as
necessary for ease of installation, including
1. Outlet Boxes
2. Junction Boxes
3. Pull Boxes
4. Conduit Bodies
5. Bushings
6. Locknuts
7. Seals
B. Low Voltage System (Premise Alarm, Telephone, Fire Alarm, Data, etc.): Provide conduits and
outlet boxes for premise alarms indicated on the drawings or as required.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed
cover.
H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed
cover.
I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic
J. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
K. Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape
and size, including depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation.
1. Provide with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws
for securing box covers or wiring devices.
2. Boxes Recessed in Furred Walls: Not less than 4-inches (102-mm) square minimum.
3. Provide single or double gang plaster cover as required for device.
4. Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each
installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture
studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes being used and meeting
requirements of individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is installer's option.
L. Surface Mounted and Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion resistant cast metal outlet
wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit ends,
face plates suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion
resistant fasteners. In wet locations provide an enclosure that is weatherproof whether or not
the plug cap is inserted.
M. Pull and Junction Boxes: Provide necessary junction and pull boxes, whether shown on
drawings or not, which may be required for pulling or splicing cables to make the conduit
system practical.
1. Construct boxes of code gage galvanized steel sized to turn or support cables.
2. Provide covers with brass screws.
3. Provide hinged covers on boxes larger than 24-inches by 24-inches (609-mm by 609-
mm).
A. Checklane Power Poles: Furnished by the checklane manufactiurer and installed by the
equipment installation installer.
1. Power and/or data poles shall be provided only where indicated in the construction
documents.
2. General Use Tele-Power Poles: Multiple service aluminum modular type, small frame
with rounded end panels, number of compartments (2 or 3), etc. as required for each
application.
1. Product:
A. All other materials and accessories, not specifically described or called for, but which are
required for a complete and finished installation for the work of this section shall be furnished
and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Buyer. These materials shall be se-
lected by the contractor, subject to be reviewed by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. In addition to other contract document requirements, the following special requirements shall be
strictly enforced.
1. Install wiring for all systems in conduit (sized per NEC, minimum ¾-inch (19-mm) dia.
unless otherwise indicated).
2. Install wiring for different power voltages in raceway systems separate from each other
(i.e. 24V separate from 208Y/120V separate from 480Y/277V, etc.).
3. Install wiring, with the exception of voice and data, for the various electrical systems in
raceway systems separate from each other (i.e. fire alarm separate from voice/data
separate from etc.).
a. Low voltage systems are permitted to be run free air above the ceiling (in stores
with ceilings unless space above ceilings is an air plenum in which case plenum
rated cable shall be used) or in the structure (in stores without ceilings) if j-hooks
or other standard installation methods are followed. Low voltage systems wiring is
required to be in conduit stub ups above ceiling or to structure in all cases.
4. Install normal system power feeders and branch circuits in separate raceways from
emergency system power.
5. Do not install conduits within slabs.
6. Conduit and fittings installed indoors above the slabs shall be steel.
7. Provide conduit fittings with insulated throats (or plastic bushings for conduits 2-inches
(51-mm) and larger where insulated throats are not readily available).
8. Provide conduit runs exceeding 100-feet (30.5-m) in length or having in excess of three
90 degree turns with pull boxes.
B. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent or per NEC, whichever is less.
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 20 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Facility Services."
B. Hanger and support devices are specified in Division 20 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Facility Services."
C. Use liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and for other electrical equipment
where subject to movement or vibration, and also where subjected to one or more of following
conditions:
1. Exterior location.
2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate.
3. Corrosive atmosphere.
4. Subjected to water supply.
5. Subjected to dripping oil, grease and/or water.
D. Cut conduits straight, properly ream and cut threads for heavy wall conduit deep and clean.
E. Size conduits to meet NEC, except not conduit smaller than 3/4-inch (19-mm) trade size, except
for switch legs or where expressly noted otherwise.
F. Fasten conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures by two locknuts and terminate with
bushing. Install locknuts inside and outside enclosure.
H. Keep conduits a minimum distance of 6-inches (152-mm) from parallel runs of flues, hot water
pipes or other sources of heat. Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water
and steam piping.
J. Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited. When required, use a 3-
piece union or split coupling.
K. Complete electrical raceway installation before starting installing cables/wires within raceways.
L. Concealed Conduits:
1. Conceal conduit in sales area or within customer view to a point 14-ft (4.27-m) above
finish floor (i.e. above décor height line).
2. Install concealed raceways parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls and structural
members.
3. Metallic raceways installed underground are to have factory applied epoxy or coal-tar
coating. The Field paint conduit threads with corrosion inhibiting compound before
couplings are assembled. Draw up coupling and conduit sufficiently tight to ensure
watertightness.
4. For slabs on grade, install conduits minimum of 3-inches (76-mm) below bottom of
concrete slabs.
5. Install exterior underground conduits minimum 24-inches (610-mm) below finished
grade.
6. Conduits in Concrete Slabs: Do not install conduits within concrete slabs.
M. Exposed Conduits:
1. Install exposed conduits and extensions from concealed conduit systems neatly, parallel
with, or at right angles to walls of building.
2. Install exposed conduit work as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or ventilation
ducts or outlets.
3. Support exposed conduits by use of hanger, clamps or clips. Support conduits on each
side of bends within 3-feet (1-m) of connection to junction box, outlet box, cabinet or
fitting, and on spacing not to exceed 10-feet (3-m).
4. Above requirements for exposed conduits also apply to conduits installed in space above
hung ceilings and in crawl spaces.
5. Provide minimum intermediate metal conduit (IMC) for exposed conduits in the back
room or dock area below a height of 15-feet (4.6-m).
N. Non-Metallic Conduits:
O. Conduit Seals:
1. See manufacturers details for requirements and coordinate with division 07.
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches
(150 mm) in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end
of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction
as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12
inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and
complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth
Moving."
4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts
throughout the length of the elbow.
a. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit
horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or
foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
b. For stub-ups not for outdoor equipment mounted (i.e. branch circuits), transition
from PVC to RMC above grade.
5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct-
buried conduits, placing them 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Align planks along the width and
along the centerline of conduit.
B. Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated complying with manufacturer's written
instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in
compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
C. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation
work.
D. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations as indicated on drawings by
"WP"
E. Provide cast metal outlet boxes with exposed rigid steel or IMC raceway systems and as
required for surface mounted devices. Caulk around entire perimeter with Clear Silicone when
set on floor slab.
F. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.
G. Install boxes and conduit bodies in those locations to ensure ready accessibility of electrical
wiring.
H. Install boxes and conduit bodies in accordance with proper work phasing of the work.
I. Owner Supplied and Installed Checklane Power Poles: Provide wiring to check lane powerpoles
and terminate in junction box. Final connections by checklane equipment installer.
J. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result
in difficult and insecure connections where fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded
surface.
K. Fasten boxes rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed
electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Supports and anchors to be in accordance with
Division 20 Section "Hangers and Supports for Facility Services."
M. Provide hangers and brackets for junction and pull boxes, and coordinated properly with conduit
hangers or fastenings to maintain proper alignment and prevent distortion of box. See Division
20 Section "Hangers and Supports for Facility Services" for supports.
N. The Owner reserves the right to change the location of any outlet a distance of 6-feet (1829-
mm) in any direction from plan location before the work is actually roughed in at no additional
charge.
B. Mount power poles to structure above with galvanized steel channel and mount to floor or
fixture.
1. Provide junction boxes in structure with flexible conduit into pole and down to electronic
equipment as required per the Drawings.
A. Mount where indicated to bottom of structural steel beam or joist as recommended by drop reel
cord manufacturer.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements
are specified in Division 07 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation
and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145.
Use consistent designations throughout Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers
A. Marker Tape: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
B. Labels: Configured for display on front covers, doors, or other access to electrical service
equipment.
C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
A. All other materials and accessories, not specifically described or called for, but which are
required for a complete and finished installation for the work of this section shall be furnished
and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Buyer. These materials shall be
selected by the contractor, subject to be reviewed by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Clearly label branch circuit conduits and boxes with a permanent felt tip marker.
B. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor and Cable Identification: Use marker tape to identify
field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data wiring
connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
cable pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
C. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply
with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with
black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
D. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to
the location and substrate.
F. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed
below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
a. Phase A: Brown.
b. Phase B: Orange.
c. Phase C: Yellow.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
These specifications are for the electrical installation of a Kroger store and form a part of the agreement
between The Kroger Co. and the contractor. The General Conditions, any addenda, plans, request for
bids, and the contract will contain any special information for this project. Work as used herein shall
mean a complete installation of equipment or devices as described by the contract, specifications,
fixturing schedule, addenda, plans, special detail drawings and request for bids. Manufacturer or vendor
shall mean the company or companies which will supply the various equipment and fixtures.
A. Refer to the General Conditions, fixture layout plan, scope of work, schedule, legend,
standard specification drawings, manufacturer’s instructions, lighting and floor electric
plans, addenda, contract, National Electrical Code, and any applicable local code or
ordinances for description of the work.
B. All labor, material, and/or equipment specified or named herein or on the drawings or
required for the installation of a complete and operating system shall be the responsibility
of this contractor.
C. Provide and install wiring and conduit from specified junction boxes and stub-ups on
lighting and floor electric plans to all equipment and fixtures specified herein, shown on
the fixture plan, listed in legend, or found in any contract addendums. Junction boxes,
stub-ups, and wiring are provided by the building contractor to within close proximity to
all equipment and fixtures.
D. Necessary supervision to coordinate the activities of all crafts will be furnished by others.
The electrical contractor shall be responsible for meeting dates shown on the installation
schedule and as modified from week to week.
E. All general and refrigeration work, including unloading, uncrating, and joining of
refrigerated cases and placement of equipment specified on the fixture plan shall be by
others unless otherwise specified or allowances provided elsewhere in the contract
documents.
F. Label breakers for all circuits installed or modified by electrical fixture contractor.
H. Include, in base bid, 5 days (40 hours) of electrician time before grand opening at no
labor (extra) cost to Kroger. Contractor shall provide timesheets and work orders to
account for time. If time is not utilized, contractor will provide deduct pro-rated at the
hourly rate submitted under unit costs.
A. High voltage (over 50 volts) wiring shall be #10 AWG minimum or equal in size to home
run wire. Wire sizes shall conform with applicable electric codes. The most current
National Electric Code shall be the minimum standard. Insulation shall be type THW,
C. All receptacles shall be hospital grade with identifying marks. Watertight plugs and
outlets required in preparation rooms and under all refrigerated cases.
E. Conduit, fittings, flexible tubing, junction boxes, and outlet boxes shall meet National
Electric Code specifications as required by AHJ.
G. Miscellaneous materials and devices necessary for a complete and operational installation
will be supplied by this contractor.
I. Furnish and install all cabling and connector for P.O.S. and I.S.P. system.
B. All equipment as shown on the fixture plan, R-1 and R-2 drawings, and / or listed in the
legends found in any contract addendums are supplied by Kroger. Some of these are as
follows, but are not limited to these:
A. Equipment and material includes, but is not limited to the following:(Refer to Fixture
Plans)
A. Make all necessary additions and / or modifications to existing compressor room racks
and connections to all new roof mounted or cooler top mounted condenser units as
indicated on the R-1 and R-2 drawings. The R-1 and R-2 drawings shall be provided by
Kroger. Refer to electrical drawings for monitor and defrost.
B. All new compressor-condenser unit components are prewired at the factory. Refer to
refrigerated equipment manufacturer’s application data for compressor / condenser
electrical loads.
C. Compressor feeder conductors routed inside wireways. Make all compressor connections
using Thomas and Betts, Hinjon Jr. connectors or Burndy, versitap type QPX connectors
with adhesive insulating covers. All electric loads are to be balanced across the phases.
Coordinate placement of the compressors with the refrigeration contractor so that electric
loading of the feeder conductor circuits is not exceeded.
D. Check and assure tightness of all electrical connections in compressor control panels,
feeders, etc.
E. Close and secure all electrical raceways in compressor room after completing
connections.
F. Furnish material and labor for installation of CPC system. This includes but is not
limited to:
1. Pull shielded cable to each refrigeration system. Maintain proper grounding and
minmize high voltage exposure.
2. Tie network cable in on all controllers to phone modem.
3. Install termination klixons in frozen food freezer, deli freezers and both meat
coolers, if applicable.
4. Each system will have one temperature sensor on at least one case, cooler, freezer
or prep room coils, depending on what the system calls for.
5. All temperature sensors furnished by others, and shall be installed under this
contract.
G. Furnish and install electrical connections and power to the rooftop condensing units as
indicated.
H. Furnish and install the conduit and cable for the communications network for the rooftop
condensing units.
A. Obtain one set of installation drawings for each type of refrigerated case on the job.
Several copies of these drawings are shipped with each case and show all necessary
wiring diagrams. Acquire and retain a copy of each drawings immediately upon receipt
of the cases. It shall be the further responsibility of this contractor to familiarize himself
with the control devices for refrigerated equipment, study the drawings and diagrams and
wire the cases accordingly. Upon completion, turn over one bound set of case
installation instructions to the Kroger Engineer. (These instructions are shipped with
each case.) Kroger has established a procedure for chain of custody and contractor shall
follow this procedure.
B. Make final connections on all refrigerated cases from circuited junction boxes or stub-ups
at floor and walls. Refer to refrigerated equipment manufacturer’s application data for
electrical loads and floor electric plan for junction box locations. Refrigerated cases are
internally prewired. Wire liquid line solenoids and thermostats on all cases as per R-1
plan.
C. Contractor will provide circuits at floor and wall junction boxes for anti-sweat heaters,
fans, and lights (see Electrical Drawings). Contractor shall extend these circuits through
wireways provided in refrigerated equipment or as indicated and make final connection.
Case fans, anti-sweat heaters and lights shall be kept on separate circuits. This contractor
shall provide, install and connect all defrost circuits and control wiring for refrigerated
equipment. Separate branch circuit conductors shall be pulled from the condensing unit
to each individual case defrost circuit. The condensing units will be supplied with
multiple defrost circuit breakers, one per case. See manufacturer’s legend sheets for all
electrical loads. All defrost circuits shall be wired for best possible phase balance.
Provide conduit form electrical wireways in compressor room to a location near the
refrigerated equipment. Verify circuit connections to equipment are in accordance with
Building electric panel schedules or as directed by engineer.
D. Anti-sweat heaters – Wire the dew point controllers to heater in accordance with the
wiring diagrams supplied. Controls will be furnished for all low temperature systems.
Cycling device may be factory mounted in all but low temperature single deck cases.
E. Label fan, light and heater breakers by case number to identify correct cases with circuits.
F. Install electrical floor duct inserts for defrost wiring at need locations.
H. On all back to back glass door low temp cases that don’t have return air routed
underneath, provide and install 10”, 550 CFM, axial ventilation fans at 10’ O.C. (wood
blocking in between fans, provided and installed by contractor). Provide separate
circuit(s) for these fans. This also applies to glass door low temp. refrigerated cases
located along he walls.
I. Contractor to provide list of bulbs, bulb guars and ballasts, needed in refrigerated cases.
Kroger to provide bulbs, contractor to install.
J. Contractor is to do all work required to install and run power to six in-line self-contained
merchandisers. Contractor is to assume merchandisers will be located at the front ends of
aisle 2-8.
K. Contractor shall furnish and install one convenience receptacle on top of each refrigerated
beverage case.
A. See the R-1 plan for controls furnished. Some gas defrost systems are temperature
terminated by wiring to be connected between case thermostats and the unit control
panel. A liquid line solenoid near the case is wired to control case temperature. Wiring
for case temperature control and defrost control thermostats is wired to the unit control
panels. Thermostats shall not control liquid line solenoid valves installed more than 10’
form the expansion valve. System pump down does not include pump out of liquid line
back to the rack manifold solenoid valves.
A. Provide, install and connect wiring from respective compressor control panel through
control conduit to respective cooling coils with electric defrost heaters. Check control
wiring to insure that these coils operate properly between cooling and defrost cycles.
Refer to refrigerated and coil manufacturers’ application data. Check sequence of defrost
operation. Check coil electrical loads. Refer to fixture plan for types of coolers and
freezers.
B. All cooler coil fans shall be connected to circuits furnished by contractor at nearby
junction boxes. Make final connections from junction box above coolers and freezers for
cooling coil fan motors. Refer to coil manufacturer’s electrical application data. The
meat cooler, meat holding cooler, walk-in freezer, and deli freezer electric defrost and fan
circuits are to be wired from the coils to junction boxes and then through conduits to the
compressor room. Refer to EQ-2 for new equipment.
C. Walk-in freezer and Deli freezer: Provide wiring and make connections for defrost
controls on both freezers (if applicable).
D. Furnish and install moisture proof receptacle in walk-in freezer and deli freezer on wall
behind coil housing for drain line heater tape. Furnish and install drain line heater tape
wrapped in a spiral helix around the drain line.
A. Make final connection to prewired a/c coils to electrical junction boxes above ceiling.
B. Manual lift solenoid and thermostats will be furnished and installed by refrigeration
contractor. Thermostats and solenoids will be located above ceiling near cooler ceiling.
Contractor shall provide necessary materials (including switch) to wire thermostats,
solenoids, fans and switch in accordance with detail EISD-90.
C. Refer to electrical plans and manufacturer’s application data for circuit loads.
A. Furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete final connections on all equipment
shown on the fixture plans, listed in the legend, found in any contract addendums, or as
designated by the Kroger Engineer. Most large equipment will require direct wiring to
junction boxes or conduit provide by building contractor. Other equipment requires the
addition of a plug to match the receptacle. Some equipment only requires plugging in.
C. Contractor will assemble oven and grill under this contract. Contractor will make final
electrical connections and check for proper operation. Make sure all elements are
operating. (If applicable. See Fixture Plan EQ-1 and EQ-2.)
A. Furnish all labor and material necessary to complete final connections on all equipment
shown on the fixture plan, listed in the legend, found in any contract addendums, or as
designated by the Kroger engineer. Most large equipment will require direct wiring to
junction boxes or conduit provided by building contractor. Other equipment requires the
addition of a plug to match the receptacle (usually supplied but not always). Some
equipment only requires plugging in.
B. Ceiling drop connections, wall outlets, junction boxes and disconnects shall be furnished
by contractor.
C. Provide and install all necessary material to connect meat customer service bell. Kroger
shall provide sign with button. Locate this sign as directed by the Kroger engineer.
D. Check plugs supplied with meat slicers and cubers. Install twist lock plug and cover if
supplied unconnected by equipment manufacturers.
A. Furnish all labor and material necessary to complete final connections on all equipment
shown on the fixture plan, listed in the legend, found in any contract addendums, or as
designated by the Kroger engineer. Most large equipment will require direct wiring to
junction boxes or conduit provide by building contractor. Some equipment only requires
plugging in.
A. Floral
A. Make final electrical connections to Kroger supplied signs. This may include but is not
limited to signs for restaurants, cheese shop, film sign, service cosmetics accent lighting,
deli, produce, seafood, meat, frozen food, etc.
A. Check for the proper operation of all lights, motors, heating elements, etc. that are part of
all equipment. Correct all problems as necessary.
B. All equipment shall be 100% operational before this contract is considered fulfilled.
15.1 SCANNING
1. Run cable between all Model 1 registers to the loop connector located in the ECR
room. Contractor is to supply and install Beldon #9855 cable. Model 1 registers
will be located at every other checklane, the accounting room, and pharmacy.
2. Contractor to install cable from all Model 1 registers to all Model 2 registers.
This cable will e supplied by Kroger. For exception see 9.
3. Run two (2) cables (Beldon #8723) from the accounting room to the store
controller in the ECR room. Contractor shall supply and install data connector
(part #8310574) at all Model 1 registers.
4. Contractor shall supply and install two (2) male connectors onto pulled cable in
the accounting room. This is male connector #2510D.
5. Contractor shall supply and install two (2) female connectors in the ECR room
onto pulled cable. This is female connector #2510D. This will be used for the
monitor and printer.
6. Contractor shall make all connection with a crimping tool, which is recommend
by IBM.
7. Contractor shall install all scanning equipment into the checklanes. IE: scanner,
display, keyboard, etc. Installation is to include making all connections and
making all scanning equipment operational.
8. See Radial Store Loop Configuration and Data Connectors for further details.
9. When Model 1 and Model 2 registers are located farther than 65 feet apart, the
contractor must run Beldon #9855 from the Model 1 to the Model 2 registers.
The contractor then will need to supply data connectors accordingly.
10. Contractor is responsible for labeling all cable for maintenance purposes.
B. Wire printer paper alarm system to remote location as designated by Kroger engineer.
C. Provide and install conduit and wire from dedicated panel stub up to “orange” (IG-
isolated ground) dedicated panel duplex receptacle located on check stand. Only
scanning equipment is to be plugged into these “dedicated circuit” receptacles.
D. Furnish and install IG (isolated ground) duplex receptacle at each remote computer
register in the store as indicated on the drawings.
A. Install computer cables from the ECR (Electronic Cash Register) Room to the following
locations:
A. All other materials and accessories, not specifically described or called for, but which are
required for a complete and finished installation for the work of this section shall be
furnished and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Buyer. These
materials shall be selected by the contractor, subject to be reviewed by the Architect.
END OF SECTION 26 09 80
SECTION 26 14 16 – PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. All work specified in this Section shall comply with the provisions of Section 26 0 00.
B. Provide a complete electrical distribution system. The system shall include the new switches at
the existing main switchboard, feeder, distribution panel (s), panelboard (s), busway, remote
control switches, contactors, etc., to provide a complete system.
D. Shop drawings for equipment specified in this Section shall show that all specified requirements
have been incorporated.
E. All floor mounted distribution equipment shall be mounted on a 4" high concrete pad, integral
with the floor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Panelboards (panels) shall be general purpose enclosures and shall be surface or flush mounted
as indicated. Panels shall be of the automatic circuit breaker type, factory assembled by the
manufacturer of the circuit breakers. Panels shall be for the voltage indicated with the quantity
of poles and ampacity of circuit breakers shown.
B. Boxes and trim shall be made from code gauge steel. Boxes shall be of sufficient size to
provide a minimum gutter space of 4' on all sides. Boxes shall be minimum 20" width and 5-
3/4" depth.
C. Hinged door covering all device handles shall be included in all panel trim. Doors shall have
flush-type cylinder lock and catch, except that doors over 48" in height shall have auxiliary
fasteners at top and bottom of door in addition to flush-type cylinder lock and catch. Door
hinges shall be concealed. All locks shall be keyed alike. Directory frame and card having a
transparent cover shall be furnished each panel door.
D. Trims for flush panels shall overlap the box by at least 3/4" all around. Surface trims shall have
the same width and height as the box. Trims shall be mountable by a screwdriver without the
need for special tools. After installation, trim mounting mechanism or hardware shall not be
accessible when panel door is closed and locked.
PANELBOARDS 26 14 16 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
E. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the trim shall be cleaned and finished with gray paint
over a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating. No crinkle finishes permitted on trim.
F. All interiors shall be completely factory assembled with protective devices, wire connectors,
etc. All wire connectors, except screw terminals, shall be of the anti-turn solderless type and all
shall be suitable for copper or aluminum wire.
G. Interiors shall be so designed that devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and
without removing the main bus connectors, and shall be so designed that devices may be
changed without machining, drilling or tapping.
H. Bus bars for the mains shall be tin plated aluminum or silver plated copper sized in accordance
with U.L. Standards. Full size bars shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole
branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices.
I. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction. Cross and center connectors shall be of
the same material as the bus.
J. The neutral bus shall utilize set-screws to bond the neutral wire to the neutral bus through holes
drilled in the neutral bar. A sheet copper neutral bus utilizing flathead screws to hold the
neutral wire will not be acceptable.
K. Spaces for future devices shall be included as indicated and shall be bussed for the maximum
rated device that can be fitted into them.
L. All circuit breakers shall be manually operated, thermal-magnetic, automatic, of the ampacity
and poles as indicated. They shall be quick-make, quick-break, both on manual and automatic
operation. Breakers shall be over-the-center toggle operating type, with the handle going to a
position between ON and OFF to indicate automatic tripping. All multi-pole breakers shall
have internal common trip.
M. Panels having sub-feed lugs for feeding through shall have 8" minimum extra gutter space at the
lug end and on one side. Provide extra gutter space for panels with special features such as:
split bus, contactors, subfeed breakers, etc.
N. Each panel as a complete unit shall have a short-circuit current rating equal to or greater than
the equipment rating indicated.
O. Provide 10% spare circuit breakers. Spare circuit breakers shall be 20 amp. Single pole unless
noted otherwise.
PANELBOARDS 26 14 16 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Distribution panelboards (panels) shall be of the circuit breaker type, factory assembled by the
manufacturer of the circuit breakers, complete with front door cover. The main breaker and the
branch circuit breakers shall be as indicated. The main bus shall be standard plated aluminum,
rated as and of capacity equal to or greater than the rating or setting of the over-current
protective device next back in the line. Panel shall be suitable for the voltage and phase
indicated. Provide 25% ground bus.
B. Panels shall be flush or surface mounted as indicated, with bake-on enamel trim, adjustable trim
clamps and door with chromium plated combination cylinder lock and catch, all locks keyed
alike. Provide a phenolic nameplate for each device and a blank (not engraved) nameplate for
each spare breaker or space.
C. The neutral bus shall utilize set-screws to bond the neutral bus through holes drilled in the
neutral bar. A sheet copper neutral bus utilizing flathead crews to hold the neutral wires will
not be acceptable.
D. All circuit breakers shall be manually operated, thermal-magnetic, automatic, of the ampacity
and poles as indicated. They shall be quick-make, quick-break both on manual and on
automatic operation. Breakers shall be over-the-center toggle operating type, with the handle
going to a position between "ON" and "OFF" to indicate automatic tripping. All multi-pole
breakers shall have internal common trip.
E. The interrupting capacity of the breakers furnished shall be 10,000 RMS symmetrical for 208 or
240 volts and 14000 RMS symmetrical for 480 volts unless otherwise indicated.
F. All circuit breakers, including any connectors to the main bus, shall be bolted and rigidly
braced.
G. Spaces for future installation of molded case circuit breakers are specifically by range of trip
rather than a single trip size or frame size. The spaces so scheduled shall be complete with all
bus and required bus connectors such that future breakers can be installed without adding or
changing bus connectors on the main bus and without using a larger (frame size) or more
expensive breaker than the trip size and interrupting capacity would require. If the bus
connectors furnished on the main bus will not cover the trip range specified, then duplicate sets
of connectors shall be furnished on the main bus for each frame size required.
A. The switches shall be NEMA 1 construction and shall have provisions with clear indications
that the device is in "ON" or "OFF". The switches shall be quick-make, quick-break
mechanisms with a defeatable door interlock to prevent door from being opened when the
operating handle is in the "ON" position.
B. Switches shall be operated by a lever-type handle extending through a door with provisions for
padlocking in the closed position.
C. Switches of 30-600 amperes shall have plug-on line side connections. Switches of 30-100
amperes shall have built-in fuse pullers. Switches shall have a 200,000 ampere short-circuit
rating. Switch enclosures shall have formed openings for maximum protection of load side
cables.
PANELBOARDS 26 14 16 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
D. Switches 800 amperes and larger shall be of the bolted pressure contact type with rating as
shown. Pressure contacts are to be made by firmly bolting blades to both top and bottom
stationary contacts. Switches shall have quick-make, quick-break Kinematic-action
mechanisms, interphase barriers and arcing equipment. Switches shall be manually operated.
480 volt switches 1000 amperes and larger shall have an electric trip mechanism piloted by the
output of ground fault sensing circuitry and other protection features. Power for the electric trip
circuit shall be obtained from a control transformer connected from phase to phase on the line
side of the switch. The electric trip coil shall be designed to operate at 55% of the rated voltage.
Switches shall have an interrupting rating of 12 times continuous rating and have an operating
mechanism that shall permit closure of the switch only after the opening mechanism has been
charged, to assure that electrical tripping means shall immediately be in condition to open the
switch.
A. Circuit breakers may be used as protective devices downstream from main service entrance
fused disconnects provided their fault current interrupting rating cannot by exceeded.
B. Electrical circuits shall be protected by molded case circuit breakers. Each pole shall provide
inverse time delay and instantaneous circuit protection. Interrupting rating shall be suitable to
meet requirements of incoming service.
C. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-
break overcenter switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle so that the
contacts cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal circuits.
1. Tripping due to overload or short circuit shall be indicated by the handle automatically
assuming a position midway between ON and OFF positions.
E. All circuit breakers with frame sizes 600 amps and larger shall have interchangeable rating
plugs which shall establish the continuous current rating of each breaker. An interlock in the
rating plug shall trip the breaker if an attempt is made to remove the plug with the breaker in the
ON position. With the plug removed, it shall not be possible to close the breaker.
F. The magnetic trip shall include a short time delay permitting coordination and selective tripping
with downstream devices. It shall be possible to check the breaker electrically and
mechanically while in service without dismantling equipment and with minimum down time.
A. All motors shall be properly and adequately ground bonded to system ground.
B. Where fuses are used, they shall be cartridge type, delayed action combination thermal cutout
and fuse, Buss Fusetron.
PANELBOARDS 26 14 16 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
C. Provide circuit breaker protection (not fuses) for branch circuits supplying motor driven
equipment located in Meat preparation and Produce preparation rooms and in Deli and Bakery
areas (example: saws, mills, disposers).
D. For Kroger supplied items: rooftop HVAC units, hood fans, trash compactors, balers,
refrigeration condenser fans, fluid coolers (protocol) and generators – Contractor shall supply
the disconnect (or shut off) switch. Contractor to make all final electrical connections.
A. The switchboard as a complete unit shall be given a single short circuit current rating by the
manufacturer of the switchboard as shown. Such a rating shall be established by actual test in
accordance with U.L. specifications and shall be a minimum of 65,000 amps sym.
2.7 CONTACTORS
A. Contactors shall be mechanically held of proper capacity, with coil clearing contacts.
Contactors shall be wired with a relay furnished by the electrical contractor to properly engage
and release the contactor based on one channel switching in the central controller.
1. See ESD-37A for proper wiring at the contactor. Controller located in roof-top
refrigeration module.
A. All other materials and accessories, not specifically described or called for, but which are
required for a complete and finished installation for the work of this section shall be furnished
and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Buyer. These materials shall be
selected by the contractor, subject to be reviewed by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide a typewritten directory under plastic for all panelboards with spares marked in pencil.
B. Provide all necessary hardware to level and secure the switchgear as required by the
manufacturer's instructions. Make all electrical connections for supply and load circuits and
leave in operating condition.
C. Clean enclosure of all switchgear of all foreign matter, including dust. Vacuum as necessary.
E. Mount panels on steel channels such as unistrut to allow airspace behind cabinet.
G. Provide circuit breaker protection (not fuses) for branch circuits supplying motor driven
PANELBOARDS 26 14 16 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
equipment located in meat preparation and product preparation rooms and in deli-bakery areas
(example: saws, mills, disposers).
I. Panels should be circuited such that lights, case fans and antisweat circuits are separated into
individual panels. Panels located away from the primary electrical area may combine fans and
antisweat circuits.
J. All outside lighting and sign circuits shall include photocell control. An extra relay or a
"normally closed" photocell will be required for correct operation.
K. Lighting panels shall be controlled as indicated on the plans via the TOD load Controller
(Model CPC "SEC") to be furnished and installed under Division 15000, usually located at the
existing rear mezzanine. Power to CFC and connection to lighting contactors shall be
performed under Division 16000.
N. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 20 Section "Seismic
Controls for Electrical Work Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
O. Mount top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
P. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts
uniformly flush with wall finish.
T. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or
space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits
into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
PANELBOARDS 26 14 16 - 6
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 26 14 16
PANELBOARDS 26 14 16 - 7
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. The Kroger Company will supply the following items for the Contractor to install.
a. Occupancy sensors
b. Lighting controller
c. Building environmental control
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 RECEPTACLES
a. Where duplex and GF receptacles are indicated, provide The Wiremold Company;
Series V3000; 800-621-0049.
2. Color:
a. Raceway: Ivory.
b. Outlets: Ivory.
C. Commercial Grade Blade Receptacles: Provide duplex, straight blade receptacles, 2-pole, 3-
wire, grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw. 20 amp, 125 volt, with metal
plaster ears; design for side and back wiring with spring loaded, screw activated pressure plate,
with NEMA configuration 5-20R, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
D. Color of Receptacles:
E. Locking receptacles other than 20 amp, 120 volt, shall be NEMA configuration of proper size
for loads indicated on plans or as required for equipment served.
F. Provide outlets with standard plate, blank, receptacle, switch or cord hole, as required by outlet
symbol. Multiple devices mounted on one (1) piece gangplates of appropriate design. No
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
sectionalized plates permitted. Provide plates throughout building of same manufacturer and
design.
D. Receptacles in Deli, Bakery and Floral Department: GFI type without covers.
A. Watertight receptacles up to, and including, 20 amp (120 volt); coordinate with above:
1. Basis of Design: Hubbell Incorporated; (203) 882-4800. For ampacities larger than
the 20 amp, provide Hubbell “Water tight Safety Shroud Twist Lock System” of
equivalent.
2. Watertight receptacles: Provide Self-closing covers for wall mounted or interlocking type
receptacles and connector cover type if cord mounted receptacles.
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
2.5 SWITCHES
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Snap: Provide heavy-duty flush quiet toggle switches, 20 amps, 120-277 volts AC, with
mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster ears, switch handle and
back wired clamp pressure plate screw terminals.
2. Basis of Design: Hubbell Incorporated; (203) 882-4800.
a. Standard: #1221
b. 3-Way: #1223
c. 4-Way: #1224.
1. Pilot Light: Heavy-duty flush toggle switches, 20 amps, 120-277 VAC, with pilot light
handle illuminated when switch is on.
2. Basis of Design: Hubbell Incorporated; (203) 882-4800.
a. Single-Pole: #1221-PL
b. 2-Pole: #1222-PC
c. 3-Way: #1223-PL
E. Cooler and Freezer lighting switches: Digital time switch, with warning light. Universal
120/230/277 VAC; 50/60 Hz, single level or 3-way lighting application.
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products” for information
occupancy sensors.
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Single and combination types to match physical configuration of corresponding wiring devices.
(single hole for simplex, two holes for duplex, etc.).
B. Wall Plates: Provide standard plate, blank, cord hole, switch and duplex outlet wall plates for
wiring devices, of types, sizes and ganging, and cutouts, as indicated. Construct with stainless
steel screws for securing plates to devices. Provide plates possessing following additional
construction features, unless noted otherwise:
D. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with NEMA Type 3R
weather-resistant die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Lighting Controller and Contactors: Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished
Products" for information on lighting controller and contactors.
B. Wiring between lighting controller and contactors to be provided and installed by Contractor.
C. Building Environmental Control, CPC Model: Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner
Furnished Products" for information on building environmental control.
1. The control will be through contactors which turn the power on/off to the lighting panels
D. Contactors: Mechanically held of proper capacity, with coil clearing contacts. Wire contactors
with a relay to properly engage and release the contactor based on one channel switching. See
Drawings for proper wiring at the contactor.
E. Control outside sign and lighting circuits with a photocell control wired through the building
environmental control.
A. All other materials and accessories, not specifically described or called for, but which are
required for a complete and finished installation for the work of this section shall be furnished
and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Buyer. These materials shall be
selected by the contractor, subject to be reviewed by the Architect.
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
noted.
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by
riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
D. Device Installation:
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 6
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
9. Install wiring devices per proper work phasing, as described in Division 01.
10. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals
to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A. Use properly scaled torque,
indicating hand tool.
E. Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise other trades regarding proper and
cautions use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items
which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
F. Receptacle Orientation: Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on
horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.
G. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 7
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Division 26 shall furnish and install fused and unfused circuit and motor disconnects.
A. Install disconnects of the type and size denoted on Drawings in location indicated on
Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosures shall generally be NEMA Type 1 in dry locations and NEMA Type 3 where
exposed to rain or spray, unless indicated otherwise.
A. Fusible disconnects shall be heavy duty type, horsepower rated, 600 volt, with ampere
rating indicated on Drawings. Fuse holders shall be designed to receive type “R” dual
element fuses.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Unfused disconnects shall be heavy duty type, horsepower rated, 600 volt, with ampere
rating indicated on Drawings.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers
D. Acceptable Manufacturers
A. All other materials and accessories, not specifically described or called for, but which are
required for a complete and finished installation for the work of this section shall be
furnished and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Buyer. These
materials shall be selected by the contractor, subject to be reviewed by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 LOCATION
B. When used for disconnecting means, disconnects shall be located as near as practicable to
the load controlled.
C. Disconnects provided integral with equipment may serve as disconnecting means where
allowed by Code, unless indicated otherwise.
B. Fuses shall be installed in all fusible disconnects; size as indicated on Drawings, when
indicated, and coordinated with equipment manufacturer when not indicated. Refer to
Section: FUSES for specific requirements.
3.4 DISCONNECTS
3.5 MOUNTING
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 26 28 17
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. The owner / Kroger will supply Variable Speed Drives (VSD’s) indicated on drawings
and schedules. Contractor shall install.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
1. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated.
2. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Motors will be provided with overcurrent protection, motor disconnect and motor overload
protection as required by NEC.
D. Single-phase motors will be provided with NEMA Type A fusible disconnect, with lockable
handle for circuit protection, except where circuit to motor is already individually protected by
overcurrent protective device and disconnect in panelboard located within sight of and not more
than 50-feet (15.25-m) from motor.
F. Three-Phase Motors:
1. Combination circuit breakers or separate disconnect and magnetic starters for 3-phase
motors will be provided in NEMA 12 enclosure.
2. Combination fused disconnect switch and enclosed magnetic across-the-line starters, as
indicated, will be provided in NEMA 12 enclosure.
3. Starters will be provided with circuit protection, ambient compensated thermal overload
protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers
A. Provide motors with overcurrent protection, motor disconnect and motor overload protection, as
indicated on the drawings, as required by NEC, and as specified herein. Overload protectors to
be ambient compensated bimetallic snap-action type in ungrounded lines. Heaters in motor
starters to be sized according to nameplate data of motors installed.
B. Single-Phase Motors: Provide NEMA Type A fusible disconnect, with lockable handle for
circuit protection, except where circuit to motor is already individually protected by overcurrent
protective device and disconnect in panelboard located within sight of and not more than 50-feet
(15.25-m) from motor.
C. Install magnetic across-the-line starters, in NEMA Type 12 enclosures. Provide starters with
thermal overload protection and control circuit protection, with built-in momentary contact
START/STOP pushbuttons, selector switches and pilot light, oil-tight heavy-duty type, in flush
or surface enclosures, as indicated on the drawings.
D. Install manual starters for motors less than 1/2 horsepower, with pilot light and selector switch,
as indicated on drawings. Provide outlet box, stainless steel flush plate or surface outlet box, as
indicated.
E. Motor snap switches may be installed as a safety disconnect for single-phase motors or
equipment, with approved outlet box and stainless steel cover plate.
F. Three-Phase Motors:
1. Provide combination or separate disconnect and magnetic starters for 3-phase motors.
2. Provide combination fused disconnect switch and enclosed magnetic across-the-line
starters, as indicated, in NEMA Type 12 enclosure.
3. Provide starters with circuit protection, ambient compensated thermal overload protection
in three ungrounded lines and control circuit protection, with pushbuttons or selector
switch, and white pilot lights.
4. Remote Stations: Oil-tight heavy-duty type, in surface enclosures or panel mounted, as
indicated on the Drawings.
5. Nameplates to indicate OPEN/CLOSE, ON/OFF, START/STOP,
LOCAL/OFF/CENTRAL, STOP, EMERGENCY/OFF and HAND/OFF/AUTO, as
required or indicated on the Drawings.
6. Manual starters for 3-phase motors are not acceptable.
G. Control Relays: Provide control relays and time delay relays with number of normally open
(NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts as indicated on the Drawings.
H. Indicating Lamps: Provide transformer type indicating lamps for motor control equipment with
colored jewel.
A. All other materials and accessories, not specifically described or called for, but which are
required for a complete and finished installation for the work of this section shall be furnished
and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Buyer. These materials shall be
selected by the contractor, subject to be reviewed by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Coordinate with other work, including motor and electrical wiring/cabling work, as necessary to
interface installation of motor starters with other work.
1. Provide fuse size per drawings; if fuse size is not indicated on drawings, size fuses per
nameplate data, not to exceed 125 percent of motor full load amps for 1.15 service factor
motors, and 115 percent for 1.00 service factor motors. Fuses above 600 amps rating for
motors shall be sized up to 150 percent of motor full load amps. Refer abnormal motor
starting conditions to Owner’s representative.
END OF SECTION 26 29 00
SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
a. Lighting fixture support components, accessories and other items not provided by
Owner necessary for a complete installation.
a. General Lighting
b. Outdoor Lighting
c. Local Lighting
d. Emergency Lighting
e. Lamps for lighting fixtures
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The Owner’s representative will provide the following submittals for the Contractor’s
information upon request:
LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
3. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures,
signed by product manufacturer.
1. H.I.D. Ballasts: All H.I.D. fixtures and ballasts to be suitable for operation in 50o C.
ambient.
2. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed
fixtures.
3. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER (Luminaire Efficacy Rating)
is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.
4. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
5. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5B.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size,
comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for Light Fixture and
Lamp Package.
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for Site Lighting
Package.
B. Wiring: Provide schedule 40 PVC conduit and Type XHHW wire for parking lot lighting
system. Provide sealed conduit to prevent moisture penetration.
1. Transition to rigid galvanized steel IMC just prior to emergence through grade.
LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Direct Buy Owner Furnished Products" for Light Fixture and
Lamp Package.
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Owner Furnished Products" for Light Fixture and Lamp Package.
A. Lighting shall not be supported from deck. All supports shall be connected to building steel.
B. Comply with Division 20 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Facility Services" and "Vibration
and Seismic Control for Facility Services" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic
channel and angle supports.
C. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling
canopy. Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
F. Lay In and Troffer Light Fixture Support Clips: Comply with NEC Article 410-16 “Means of
Support “
A. All other materials and accessories, not specifically described or called for, but which are re-
quired for a complete and finished installation for the work of this section shall be furnished and
installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Buyer. These materials shall be selected
by the contractor, subject to be reviewed by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify if PCB ballasts exist in light fixtures to be removed. If PCB light fixture ballasts exist,
then follow requirements in PCB ballast handling and disposal requirements below.
LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Coordinate with other electrical work, as appropriate to properly interface installation of interior
lighting fixtures with other work and to properly interface with project work phasing.
B. Fasten fixtures securely to structural support steel and check to ensure solid pendant fixtures are
plumb. Do not fasten to metal deck.
C. Install four support clips, one in each corner, to fixtures installed in tee-bar ceilings.
C. Provide quantities and types of damaged fixtures to Owner’s Representative for replacement.
A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
A. Fluorescent Lamp Removal: Remove fluorescent lamps in accordance with local or state
regulations and Federal Regulation 40 CFR 273.9 and as follows:
1. Do not break mercury containing fluorescent lamps or high intensity discharge lamps.
2. Contain any lamp in containers or packages that are structurally sound, adequate to
prevent breakage, and compatible with the contents of the lamps. Such containers and
packages must remain closed and must lack evidence of leakage under reasonably
foreseeable conditions.
3. Immediately clean up and place in a container any lamp that is broken and place in a
container any lamp that shows evidence of breakage, leakage, or damage that could cause
the release of mercury or other hazardous constituents to the environment. Containers
must be closed, structurally sound, compatible with the contents of the lamps and must
lack evidence of leakage, spillage of damage that could cause leakage or releases of
LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. PCB Ballast Handling And Disposal: Remove PCB containing ballast in accordance with local
or state regulations and Federal Regulation 40 CFR 761 and as follows:
1. General: High power factor fluorescent light ballasts manufactured before 1978 and some
HID ballasts contain PCB compounds in their capacitors. Inspect ballasts in light fixtures
to be removed and remove from the Project site.
2. If the PCB content is not stated on the ballast label, the ballast shall be handled as a PCB
ballast.
3. Before removal, inspect PCB ballasts for leaks. If ballast appears to be leaking
(evidenced by potting compound leaking out or by an oily film on the ballast surface) the
ballast must be handled per EPA and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Remove the ballast from the fixture and placed in an approved drum. Wear protective
gloves, eye protection, and protective clothing as necessary.
a. If the fixture has also been contaminated, clean to less than 10 micrograms/100
square centimeters contamination before disposal. Utilize an approved PCB
abatement company for cleaning process.
4. Do not expose PCBs to open flames or other high temperature sources since toxic
decomposition by-products may be produced.
5. Place ballasts in US DOT approved type 17C or type 17H drums(barrels).
6. Place barrels in storage with the cover that came with the barrels, in location as
designated by Owner. Do not place barrels where they are exposed to weather.
7. Label and mark the PCB storage drums with EPA approved PCB labels and the storage
area with signs, marks and lines to meet the regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
8. Provide approved PCB absorbent materials to be stored immediately adjacent to the drum
storage area. Do not place loose absorbent material in the drums.
9. Dispose of PCB containing light ballasts off site in accordance with EPA, DOT, and local
regulations at a permitted site.
A. Install parabolic fixtures w/ protective film. Remove protective film when building is dust free.
LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. At time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which are observed to be
noticeably dimmed or with black ends on tubes after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by
The Owner’s Representative.
END OF SECTION 26 50 00
LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 6
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's
premises where indicated.
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
site clearing.
D. Do not commence site-clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures are in place. See Division 31 Section "Erosion and Sedimentation Control (Includes
SWPPP)."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in
Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not
available on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing.
Remove fence when construction is complete.
C. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction
operations, in a manner approved by the Owner’s Representative.
3.4 UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without written permission of Owner’s
Representative.
A. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm),
and compact each layer to a density of 98 percent standard proctor.
B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.
Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Temporarily stabilize per the SWPPP and
Division 31 Section "Erosion and Sedimentation Control."
3.8 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,
and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property.
1. Submit schedule for recycling operations (if any) and obtain approval in writing from
Owner’s Representative. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing
from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other
materials and transport them to recycling facilities.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing
agency to witness filling operations of depressions caused by clearing and grubbing.
Coordinate scheduled filling operations with the Owner’s testing agency.
END OF SECTION 31 10 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses, and
exterior plants.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving.
6. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site or on site borrow pit for use as fill or
backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary
flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below
the ground surface.
I. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement
concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
A. Imported (borrow) soil must be tested and certified, by the Owner's testing agency, as suitable
material, free of any environmental contaminates. Coordinate imported materials and their
source with Division 31 Section "Erosion and Sedimentation Control" and the Storm Water
Pollution Prevention Plan. The Contractor will be liable for any and all clean-up costs
associated with unapproved, imported materials.
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by the Owner’s Representative and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Provide ASTM D 2487 or AASHTO M 145 classified soil materials according to geotechnical
engineer's written recommendations in Division 00 Section "Geotechnical Data."
C. Satisfactory Soils: Recommended materials free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm)
in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
1. Satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of
compaction will be considered unsatisfactory soil materials.
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm)
thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
D. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31
Section "Erosion and Sedimentation Control (Includes SWPPP)" during earthwork operations.
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
3.2 EXCAVATION
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
2. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to
Contract provisions as specified in Division 00 Section "General Conditions."
B. Excavation for Structures: Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance
of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from
structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other
construction, and for inspections
C. Excavation for Walks and Pavements: Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to
indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.
D. Excavation for Utility Trenches: Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and
elevations or as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Trench Width: Provide a clearance of 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm)
higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Trench Bottoms: Provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape
subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for
joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along
trench subgrade.
a. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or
other unyielding bearing material, 4 inches (100 mm) deeper elsewhere, to allow
for bedding course as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or
saturated subgrades. Proof-roll in presence of Owner’s testing agency.
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations, wall footings, utility pipe, or other construction
as approved by the Owner’s testing agency.
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover or temporarily stabilize as
specified in Division 31 Section "Erosion and Sedimentation Control (Includes SWPPP)."
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
C. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits.
D. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of
footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is
specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Structural Concrete."
E. Provide concrete encasement for piping or conduit less than 24 inches (610 mm) below surface
of roadways only when indicated on the Drawings or as required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing and
Owner’s testing agency.
G. Place and compact final backfill as indicated on Drawings to final subgrade elevation.
H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6
inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations. Comply geotechnical engineer's
written recommendations in Division 00 Section "Geotechnical Data."
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content or as directed by Owner’s Testing
Agency.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, at no additional cost to the Owner, otherwise
satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too
wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. See Division 31 Section "Dewatering"
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth
for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm)
in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698, Standard Proctor:
1. Under structures, building slabs, future expansion areas, steps, walkways, and pavements,
scarify and recompact top 8 inches (203 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of
backfill or fill soil material at 98 percent.
2. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below
subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
3.10 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawns, Unpaved Areas, and Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested
with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.
A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows:
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 6
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
2. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 98 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698, Standard Proctor.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-
on-grade as follows:
1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of
equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than
3 inches (75 mm) thick.
2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not
less than 98 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing
agency to perform field quality-control testing. Coordinate scheduled earth moving work with
the Owner’s testing agency.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by the Owner’s testing agency.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable.
E. Provide other field tests, such as bearing ratio of subgrades, subbases, and bases for paving, as
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest, at the Contractor’s cost, until specified compaction is obtained.
A. Submit two signed copies of the Building Pad Certification Form at the end of this Section once
the building pad is complete and ready for turnover to the building contractor. Form must be
completed by the Owner's testing agency, professional surveyor, and both the Site Contractor
and the Building Contractor.
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 7
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
3.15 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
C. Where settling occurs before Project warranty period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 8
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
This form is to certify the building pad is constructed per the contract drawings and is the official instrument for turn
over of responsibility from the Contractor and/or Developer to the building contractor and/or Building Owner.
_________________________________________________
Geotechnical Professional Registration Number
_________________________________________________
Survey Professional Registration Number
END OF SECTION 31 20 00
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 9
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix
proposed for the Work.
B. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with state or local DOT for asphalt paving work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Coarse Aggregate: <Insert DOT #>. Sound; angular crushed stone, or crushed gravel.
B. Fine Aggregate: <Insert DOT #>. Sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone,
gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.
ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
C. Mineral Filler: <Insert DOT #>. Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.
F. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular,
liquid, or wettable powder form.
2.2 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having
jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt
Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types"; and complying with the following requirements:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold
milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections
indicated.
3.2 PATCHING
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement
section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300
mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically.
Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new
subgrade.
B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix
asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).
C. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact
flush with adjacent surface.
ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
B. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material
from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
D. Tack Coat: Apply when overlaying existing pavement, on adjacent horizontal surfaces such as
curbs, and between base and surface courses when the two courses are not installed in a
continuous installation.
1. Apply at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place
asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of
mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.
B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a
lesser width are required.
C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools
to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent
segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
3.5 JOINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct
joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix
asphalt course.
3.6 COMPACTION
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-
plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).
ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and
outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,
and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while
hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix
asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still
warm.
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to
proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled
and hardened.
G. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become
marked.
A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the
following tolerances:
B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within
the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied
transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
Coordinate Work with the Owner’s testing agency.
B. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.
C. Additional testing and inspection work to correct or repair unsatisfactory work will be at the
expense of the Contractor.
ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
D. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt, at the Contractor’s expense, where
test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
3.9 DISPOSAL
A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and
legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
END OF SECTION 32 12 16
ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
a. Parking lots.
b. Curbs and gutters.
c. Walkways.
d. Concrete pads
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless
modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire
into flat sheets.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports
according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source throughout the Project:
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class [4S] [4M] [1N] <Insert class> coarse
aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, with the following properties:
B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.
C. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Place aggregate base course material on prepared subgrade as specified in Division 31 Section
“Earth Moving.”
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and
so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete
without damage.
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at
locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement
terminates at isolation joints.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
D. Contraction Joints: Sawcut joints, 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Sawcut contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete
thickness.
E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with
an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface
finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push
or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
E. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform
surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further
disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven
floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true
planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform
granular texture.
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not
comply with requirements in this Section.
B. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after
placement.
C. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.
Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial
Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION 32 13 13
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
A. Sealant for Expansion and Contraction Joints within Cement Concrete Pavement and Between
Concrete Walks, Pads, Paving, and Building Walls, Columns, and Structures: Cold applied
two-part pourable urethane joint sealant, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T
1. Products:
B. Sealant for Joints Larger Than 1/4 inch (6 mm) Between Cement Concrete and Asphalt
Pavement or Within Asphalt Pavement (Including Longitudinal Joints, Cracks or Butt Joints.):
Polymeric hot applied single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3405.
1. Products:
2. Color: Black
A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials as required that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
1. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of
diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion
of sealant.
2. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness
and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and
fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.
3. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and
density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by
joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience.
C. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
D. Install backer materials to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce optimum sealant movement capability. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer
materials. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. Remove absorbent backer
materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
E. Install sealants at the same time backings are installed to completely fill recesses provided for
each joint configuration and to produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to
joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
G. Protect applied sealant from traffic and other damage until sealants cured enough not to track.
Provide temporary barricades or other protective measures recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 32 13 73
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or setting
beds.
B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Install bituminous setting bed only when
ambient temperature is above 40 deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Brick Pavers: Light-traffic paving brick. Provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces
exposed to view in the completed Work.
A. Concrete Pavers: Solid interlocking paving units complying with ASTM C 936 and resistant to
freezing and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, made from normal-weight
aggregates.
UNIT PAVING 32 14 00 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with
gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
B. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
A. Primer for Base: ASTM D 2028, cutback asphalt, grade as recommended by unit paver
manufacturer.
E. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
A. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with [ASTM D 448 for
Size No. 8] [ASTM D 2940, base material].
B. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with
gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
C. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
UNIT PAVING 32 14 00 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors
and textures.
B. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to
fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible.
C. Joint Pattern: [As indicated][Match and continue existing unit paver joint pattern].
D. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8
inch in 24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or
indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
E. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
A. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness as required to match finish elevations taking care
that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and
compacted.
B. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3
mm), or as recommended by manufacturer of unit pavers being careful not to disturb leveling
base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars.
C. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to
5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.
D. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate
pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight
surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.
A. Apply primer to concrete slab or binder course immediately before placing setting bed.
B. Prepare for setting-bed placement by locating 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) deep control bars
approximately 11 feet (3.3 m) apart, to serve as guides for striking board. Adjust bars for
accurate setting of paving units to finished grades indicated.
C. Place bituminous setting bed between control bars. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of
250 deg F (121 deg C). Strike setting bed smooth, firm, even, and not less than 3/4 inch (19
mm) thick. Add fresh bituminous material to low, porous spots after each pass of striking
board. Carefully fill depressions that remain after removing depth-control bars.
UNIT PAVING 32 14 00 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
D. Place pavers carefully by hand, maintaining accurate alignment and uniform top surface.
Protect newly laid pavers with plywood panels on which workers can stand. If additional
leveling of paving is required, and before treating joints, roll paving with power roller.
E. Joint Treatment: Place unit pavers with hand-tight joints. Fill joints by sweeping sand over
paved surface until joints are filled. Remove excess sand after joints are filled.
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 98 percent of ASTM D 698, Standard Proctor.
B. Place aggregate base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator, and screed to depth indicated.
C. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking care
that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and
compacted.
D. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3
mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand
tight against spacer bars.
E. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to
5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.
F. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate
pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight
surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.
END OF SECTION 32 14 00
UNIT PAVING 32 14 00 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pavement markings
2. Precast concrete parking bumpers
3. Precast concrete bollards
4. Metal bollards
5. Tactile warning surfacing
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product data for each product specified.
B. Samples: For each product specified to match color as specified in Division 01 Sections.
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): Title III Regulations, 28 CFR Part 36 ADA Standards
For Accessible Design, Appendix A, Section 4.29.2 Detectable Warnings On Walking Surfaces.
B. California Code of Regulations (CCR): Provide only approved DSAAC detectable warning
products as provided in the California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, Section 205
definition of ”Detectable Warning”. Section 1117A.4 and 1127B.5 for ”Curb Ramps” and
Section 1133B.8.5 for "Detectable Warnings at Hazardous Vehicular Areas”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Marking paint: High solids, water based acrylic paint containing ultraviolet resistant pigments.
1. Products:
PAVING SPECIALTIES 32 17 00 - 1
463463321700_PavingSpecialties_05-08-08-09-09-08.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
2. Colors:
a. Parking: Yellow.
b. Traffic Lanes, Directions, Lettering, etc.: Yellow.
c. Handicapped Emblems: Blue.
d. Fire Lane: Yellow.
B. Materials:
1. Portland gray cement conforming to ASTM C-150 Type 1. Air content 5-7 percent.
Minimum 4000 psi compression strength at 28 days.
PAVING SPECIALTIES 32 17 00 - 2
463463321700_PavingSpecialties_05-08-08-09-09-08.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
B. Configuration: Cast-in Place for permanent ramps and Surface Applied for temporary ramps.
C. Material: Fiberglass polymer composite sheet molded compound (SMC) epoxy polymer
composition with an ultra violet stabilized coating employing aluminum oxide particles in the
truncated domes.
D. Slip Resistance: ASTM C 1028-96, not to be less than 0.80 on top of domes and field area.
F. Pattern: In-line pattern of truncated domes measuring nominal 0.2 inch (5 mm) height, 0.9 inch
(23 mm) base diameter, and 0.45 inch (11 mm) top diameter, spaced center-to-center 2.35
inches (60 mm) as measured side by side.
G. Field Area: Non-slip surface with a minimum of 40 - 90 degree raised points 0.045 inches (11
mm) high, per square inch;
H. Dimensions: 2 feet (610 mm) by 3 feet (915 mm) unless indicated otherwise.
I. Color: ADA Solutions Inc.; color to be coordinated with fire lane striping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Verify that new asphalt is complete and has been accepted by Owner's Representative.
B. Thoroughly clean surfaces free of dirt, sand, gravel, oil, and other foreign matter. Protect
adjacent curbs, walks, and other items from paint application.
F. Remove overspray, spills, or drips from surfaces other than those requiring marking paint.
G. Barricade marked areas until paint is dried and ready for traffic.
A. Securely attach precast concrete parking bumpers into pavement with not less than two
galvanized steel dowels embedded in holes drilled or cast into parking bumpers at one-quarter
to one-third points. Firmly bond each dowel to parking bumper and to pavement. Securely
install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of
parking bumper.
PAVING SPECIALTIES 32 17 00 - 3
463463321700_PavingSpecialties_05-08-08-09-09-08.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
1. Pour concrete true and smooth to the required dimensions and slope prior to the tactile
warning surface placement. Immediately after finishing concrete, the electronic level
should be used to check that the required slope is achieved.
2. Place tile true and square to the curb edge in accordance with the Drawings.
3. Tamp or vibrate tactile warning surface tile into the fresh concrete so that the field level
of the tactile warning surface is flush to the adjacent concrete surface. Do not embed by
stepping on tactile warning surface tile.
4. Immediately after placement, check the tactile warning surface tile elevation to adjacent
concrete. Ensure that the field surface of the tile is flush with the surrounding concrete
and back of curb so that no ponding is possible on the tile at the back side of curb.
5. Keep traffic from tactile warning surface tile until concrete has set.
A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings as indicated on Drawings. Place concrete and
vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has
cured.
B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
END OF SECTION 32 17 00
PAVING SPECIALTIES 32 17 00 - 4
463463321700_PavingSpecialties_05-08-08-09-09-08.doc
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. PolytarTM Heavy Duty Pavement Sealer by Gem Seal, Inc. detailed application
specifications.
1.2 Scope:
A. This recommended practice covers the application of PolyTar , a high performance, polymer
modified, emulsified coal tar pavement sealer. This application serves as weather protection,
beautification of surface, and aliphatic-solvent (petroleum distillates such as gas, oil and diesel)
resistant seal for asphaltic concrete pavements of airport ramps and taxiways, parking lots, and
driveways.
1.3 References:
A. ASTM Specification D-3320; Standard Specification for Emulsified Coal Tar Pitch (Mineral
Colloid Type).
C. ASTM Specification D-3423; Standard Practice for Application of Emulsified Coal Tar Pitch.
E. ASTM Specification D-4866; Performance Standard for Coal Tar Pitch Emulsion Pavement
Sealer Foundations Containing Mineral Aggregates and Optional Polymeric Admixtures.
F. AASHTO Specification TP5-97; Provisional Standard Test Method for Determining the
Rheological Properties of Asphalt Binder Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials:
B. The contractor shall use PolyTar polymer modified coal tar emulsion. No alternative will be
accepted. PolyTar will conform to the following requirements:
PAVEMENT SEALER 32 17 01 - 1
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
C. Dilution water shall be potable and free of excessive minerals and contaminants. Water will be
provided by Project Administrator and available within a reasonable distance from the job site.
D. Sand will be washed and graded silica sand, or crushed, washed, and graded slag, free of all
contaminants, and conforming to the following gradation: Note: Gradations outside these ranges
may be used provided past history shows evidence of a durable surface.
#8 100
#16 95-100
#30 60-93
#50 10-40
#100 0-10
#200 0-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Equipment
A. All tools and equipment necessary to perform the contract in accordance with the specified
terms and conditions, such as brushes, hand squeegees, pumps and hose equipment, storage
PAVEMENT SEALER 32 17 01 - 2
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
tanks, mixing tanks, water distributors, power sweepers, blowers, barricades and applicator
equipment shall be provided as required by the contractor. All methods employed in performing
the work and all equipment necessary for executing any part of the work shall be subject to
approval by Project Administrator before work is started, and when found unsatisfactory will be
corrected. All equipment will be in good working condition.
B. Spray equipment used on the job shall have mechanical mixing devices incorporated in their
construction to assure homogeneous mixing of the emulsion and required additives. The
pumping system must be adequate to apply a uniform coating at the specified rates of
application. Equipment requiring pressurization of the mixing tank for distribution will not be
used.
C. Motorized squeegee application equipment used on the job will have two or more devices such
as squeegees and/or drag broom assemblies to assure even distribution of the tar emulsion
system. Mechanical mixing devices will be incorporated into the construction of the applicator
to assure homogeneous mixing of the emulsion and required additives.
D. Mixing or agitating equipment may be either portable powered or a tank-type power mixer. In
any case, mixers shall be of sufficient capacity to assure homogeneous mixing of the emulsion
and required additives and to maintain complete suspension of mineral aggregate until the
emulsion system is applied to the pavement. All storage tanks or drop tankers shall be equipped
with mechanical agitators sufficient to keep the coal tar emulsion homogenous during storage.
A. Allow new asphalt to cure. Cure time varies with type of asphalt, aggregate, weather conditions,
and construction procedures. Hot mix asphalt will usually cure in 30 - 90 days. Cold mix
pavements should have at least 90 days to cure. Required cure time should be determined by
Project Administrator, and a written order to proceed will be furnished to the contractor.
B. Wide cracks, extensive alligator cracking patterns, soft or sunken spots indicate that the
pavement and/or base should be repaired or replaced. Extensive patching shall be allowed to
cure prior to sealcoating in accordance with above.
C. Thoroughly inspect the pavement for minor cracks and other imperfections. Ignore hairline
cracks. Cracks of approximately 1/4 - 3/4 inch wide should be cleared of debris and filled with a
Gem Seal approved crack sealant in accordance with manufacturer's specification.
(OPTIONAL)
D. Remove oil and grease spots that have not permanently damaged or softened the pavement by
scrubbing with a detergent and flushing with water until a water-break-free surface is obtained.
Oil and grease spots with deeper penetration will be treated by burning with hand held propane
torch, and then coating the spot with an approved oil spot primer such as Tar-Prime. If the oil
spot is so severe as to cause permanent deterioration of the pavement, or if the pavement has
failed due to other causes, the pavement shall be removed to the full depth of the damage and
replaced with new asphalt pavement in accordance with paragraph A.
E. Old traffic control lines may be blackened with black epoxy or black acrylic coatings. Excessive
build up of lines should be abraded before any prime coats of asphalt or tar emulsion are
applied. (OPTIONAL)
PAVEMENT SEALER 32 17 01 - 3
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
F. Highly oxidized or weathered asphalt surfaces shall be primed with a coat of PolyTar diluted 1
to 1 with water. The prime coat shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before proceeding with
additional applications. Application rate shall be 0.08 - 0.10 gallon per square yard of diluted
PolyTar . (OPTIONAL)
G. Immediately before application of sealer, clean the surface of all loose dust, dirt, leaves, and any
other foreign materials by sweeping, blowing, flushing with water, or any combination of the
three.
A.
*1st Coat is applied to entrances, exits, high traffic lanes and turning radii.
**Additional water need only be added when using sand in the mix design.
***Sand should be added to the final coat when skid resistance is needed.
WARNING: Addition of latex polymers or fast drying additives of any type to PolyTar is not
necessary and will be harmful to the emulsion.
NOTE:
1. These water dilution ratios are volumetric and are based on receiving PolyTar with a solids
content of 40 +/- 1 percent.
2. Approximately 20 pounds of sand displaces 1 gallon of liquid.
3. Project Administrator may require the contractor to submit one or more samples, at random,
throughout the course of the job for mix design verification.
WARNING: Sealcoats, when improperly applied and/or under certain environmental conditions,
may become slippery. As with any paint-like coating, repeated applications reduce texture. Skid
resistance can be improved with additions of 3 to 4 pounds of sand per gallon. CAUTION MUST
BE EXERCISED, particularly when skid resistance is a major safety factor.
B. Latex additives: PolyTar contains a high molecular weight polymer that is cross-linked with
refined tar (RT-12). It is not intended to be used with any additives, latex or otherwise. Any
additive other than silica sand can be detrimental to the emulsion and is not recommended by
Gem Seal Corporation.
PAVEMENT SEALER 32 17 01 - 4
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
C. Sand will be slowly added into the PolyTar with the mixer engaged during the addition of the
sand to assure uniform dispersion and to prevent overloading of the mixing device. Water may
be added, if necessary, should the tar emulsion system become too thick to be uniformly
applied. Additional water will be added only after approval by the Project Administrator, and
additions will not exceed 5% by volume of undiluted PolyTar or those amounts expressly
stipulated by the Project Administrator.
D. Slow mixing shall be continuous from the time all materials are placed into the mixer until the
pavement sealer mix is applied by the application equipment. During the entire mixing process,
no breaking, segregating, or hardening of the emulsion, and no balling or lumping of the
aggregate shall be permitted.
E. The coating shall be applied uniformly over the entire pavement surface and free of voids and
pinholes. When pavement temperatures are in excess of 120 F, fog spraying of pavement with
clean water is recommended to achieve better bond and even spreading of material. Fog spray
shall dampen pavement without leaving puddles. (OPTIONAL)
F. Subsequent coats will be applied only after the previous coat is dried, preferably 24 hours later,
but no less than 4 hours under ideal conditions. Ideal conditions are temperatures in excess of
70 F, sunshine, and less than 60% relative humidity. Marginal conditions can require curing
times greater than 24 hours. Subsequent coats should be applied at right angles to the previous
coat, if possible.
G. Sealer will not be applied unless the temperature is a minimum 50 F and rising and pavement
temperature is 60 F and rising. Work will be completed so that there is a minimum of two hours
of sunlight remaining after completing the day's work. Sealer will not be applied under rainy or
wet conditions such as an overcast sky with high humidity. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES
will work be performed under cold and/or wet conditions, nor will tar emulsion be used that has
been subjected to freezing weather.
3.4 Incidentals
A. The contractor and Project Administrator will coordinate their activities with each other to
insure the availability of the work area so as not to delay the execution of the project, to
maintain traffic flow, and to minimize activities that might be detrimental to the work in
progress such as automatic sprinkler systems, other customer or construction traffic, etc.
B. The contractor will notify the Project Administrator of pavement areas that he feels have so
deteriorated or have other outside factors such as poor drainage, improper construction, etc.,
that will render the application of a seal coat ineffective.
C. Striping will be done with a latex or acrylic paint approved by the manufacturer. No striping
will commence until the seal coat to be striped has cured for at least 24 hours.
D. The contractor shall submit with his proposal at least three references of previously completed
projects, proof of workers compensation and liability insurance coverage, and all local business
licenses and permits as required by local authorities.
E. The contractor will provide a performance and payment bond to the Project Administrator – OR
– waivers of lien from suppliers will be provided with each invoice of payment. (Optional).
PAVEMENT SEALER 32 17 01 - 5
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
A. These prices shall be full compensation for furnishing materials, preparation, mixing, and
applying materials in compliance with this specification, and for all the tools, equipment, labor,
and incidentals necessary to complete this project.
1. The proposal shall indicate by line item:
a. The approximate square yards and cost of patching to be performed.
b. The approximate lineal feet and cost of crack sealing to be performed.
c. The approximate square yards and cost of the sealcoating to be performed.
d. The approximate lineal feet and cost of the traffic striping to be performed. -OR- A
lump sum cost when performed in accordance with painting diagrams provided by
the Project Administrator.
e. Total cost of project. (Applicable taxes, permitting fees and/or miscellaneous
charges shall be identified by type and amount.)
A. Skid Resistance: Sealcoats, when improperly applied and/or under certain environmental
conditions, may become slippery. As with any paint-like coating, repeated applications reduce
texture. Skid resistance can be improved with additions of 3 to 4 pounds of sand per gallon.
CAUTION MUST BE EXERCISED, particularly when skid resistance is a major safety factor.
Gem Seal Corporation does not recommend sealcoating asphalt pavements with the following
characteristics; main thoroughfares, runways, steep inclines, poor drainage, and vehicles
traveling at speeds in excess of 25 mph that are subject to rapid stops or hydroplaning. Gem
Seal Corporation recommends applying coal tar emulsion to asphalt pavement surfaces only.
B. Container warning: Containers, regardless of being empty, half full, or full of product, may
retain a residue of liquid and/or vapor and can be dangerous. DO NOT PRESSURIZE, CUT,
WELD, BRAZE, SOLDER, DRILL, GRIND, OR EXPOSE SUCH CONTAINERS TO HEAT,
FLAME, SPARKS, OR OTHER SOURCES OF IGNITION; THEY MAY EXPLODE AND
CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH. Do not attempt to clean since residue is difficult to remove.
“Empty” drums should be completely drained, properly bunged, and promptly returned to a
drum reconditioner. Empty pails should have a hole punched in the pail bottom to prevent
drowning of small children. All containers should be disposed in an environmentally safe
manner and in accordance with governmental regulations. For work on tanks, refer to OSHA
regulations, ANSI 49.1, and other governmental and industrial references pertaining to cleaning,
repairing, welding, or other contemplated operations.
**Container refers to any vessel, can, drum, tanker, distributor tank, etc., that may be used for
handling and/or storing any of the products covered by this guideline specification or any product
of unknown origin.
C. Health and Environmental: PolyTar is not considered a hazardous waste and meets all current
Federal requirements for industrial waste. AS AN APPLICATOR you should be familiar with
all potential hazards prior to entering the workplace. Toxicity Characterization Leaching
Procedure information and Material Safety Data Sheets will be provided upon request. In case
of accidental spill, contain with absorbent material, allow to dry, and dispose of according to
local, state and federal regulations. Precautions should be taken to prevent surface runoff and
PolyTar from entering storm drainage system or ponds.
PAVEMENT SEALER 32 17 01 - 6
Integrated Designs International, Inc. - ©2010 All rights reserved. Kroger GA 463
IDI #10136 Woodstock, GA
D. Maintenance of coating can prolong its life and attractive appearance. Sand, gravel and other
debris should be removed as they accumulate. Oil drippings, antifreeze, etc. can be scrubbed
with mild detergents and flushed with clean water.
A. PolyTar polymer modified coal tar emulsion is warranted to meet or exceed all requirements of
ASTM D 3320 and conform to all material requirements in Section 3.1 of this specification.
Gem Seal Corporation will provide detailed specifications and certifications upon request.
B. The manufacturer warrants these materials to be merchantable quality, when stored, used, and
applied in accordance with these specifications. While the manufacturer recommends uses for
these materials based on tests believed reliable, the manufacturer in no way guarantees
particular methods of use, applications, or performance under certain conditions. The
manufacturer does not warrant these products to be suitable for any use or method of
application other than the general purpose and method of application as indicated in these
specifications. Liability under this warranty is limited to the replacement of the product proven
defective or to the purchase price, at the manufacturer's option, upon return of the unused
portion. This warranty is made in lieu of all other expressed or implied warranties and excludes
liability for consequential damages. In the event of a claim under this warranty, written notice
of the complaint must be given to the manufacturer.
END OF SPECIFICATION
PAVEMENT SEALER 32 17 01 - 7